M-Class Operator's Manual · Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz Before you first drive off, read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with your vehicle

M-ClassOperator's Manual

Nur für internen Gebrauch / For internal use only

SymbolsRegistered trademarks:RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG Inc.RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks

of DOLBY Laboratories.RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are

registered trademarks of Daimler AG.RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of

Prince.RiPod® and iTunes® are registered

trademarks of Apple Inc.RLogic7® is a registered trademark of

Harman International Industries.RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are

registered trademarks of MicrosoftCorporation.RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius

XM radio Inc.RHD Radio is a registered trademark of

iBiquity Digital Corporation.RGracenote® is a registered trademark of

Gracenote, Inc.RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are

registered trademarks of ZagatSurvey,LLC.

In this Operator's Manual, you will find thefollowing symbols:

G WARNINGWarning notes draw your attention to hazardsthat endanger your health or life, or the healthor life of others.

H Environmental noteEnvironmental notes provide you withinformation on environmentally aware actionsor disposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you todangers that could lead to damage to yourvehicle.

i Practical tips or further information thatcould be helpful to you.

X This symbol indicates aninstruction that must be followed.

X Several of these symbols insuccession indicate an instructionwith several steps.

(Y page) This symbol tells you where youcan find more information about atopic.

YY This symbol indicates a warning oran instruction that is continued onthe next page.

Display This font indicates a display in themultifunction display/COMANDdisplay.

Parts of the software in the vehicle areprotected by copyright © 2005The FreeType Projecthttp://www.freetype.org. All rightsreserved.

http://www.freetype.org

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-BenzBefore you first drive off, read this Operator'sManual carefully and familiarize yourself withyour vehicle. For your own safety and a longervehicle life, follow the instructions andwarning notices in this manual. Disregardingthem may lead to damage to the vehicle orpersonal injury.Vehicle damage resulting from the disregardof the instructions is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.The equipment or model designation of yourvehicle may differ according to:RmodelRorderRcountry variantRavailabilityMercedes-Benz therefore reserves the rightto introduce changes in the following areas:RdesignRequipmentRtechnical featuresTherefore, descriptions may vary from thoseof your own vehicle.The following are integral components of thevehicle:ROperator's ManualRMaintenance BookletREquipment-dependent supplementsKeep printed copies of the documents in thevehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle,always pass the documents on to the newowner.The technical documentation team atDaimler AG wishes you safe and pleasantmotoring.Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.A Daimler Company

1665848681 É1665848681QËÍ

Index ....................................................... 4

Introduction ......................................... 23

At a glance ........................................... 31

Safety ................................................... 41

Opening and closing ........................... 77

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors . . 101

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 119

Climate control ................................. 137

Driving and parking .......................... 155

On-board computer and displays .... 261

Stowage and features ...................... 331

Maintenance and care ...................... 363

Breakdown assistance ..................... 379

Wheels and tires ............................... 397

Technical data ................................... 441

Contents 3

1, 2, 3 ...115 V socket ...................................... 34812 V socket

see Sockets 360° camera

Function/notes ............................. 2254ETS

see ETS/4ETS (ElectronicTraction System)

4MATIC (permanent four-wheeldrive) .................................................. 246

AABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 283Function/notes ................................ 66Important safety notes .................... 66Warning lamp ................................. 319

Activating/deactivating coolingwith air dehumidification ................. 145Active Blind Spot Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 273Display message ............................ 306Function/information .................... 237Trailer towing ................................. 240

Active Curve SystemDisplay message ............................ 303Function/notes ............................. 209

Active Driving Assistance package . 237Active Lane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 273Display message ............................ 306Function/information .................... 241Trailer towing ................................. 243

Active light function ......................... 125Active Parking Assist

Display message ............................ 307Function/notes ............................. 218Important safety notes .................. 217Towing a trailer .............................. 221

ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 73Adaptive Brake Assist

Display message ............................ 290Function/notes ................................ 69

Adaptive Damping Systemsee ADS (Adaptive Damping System)

Adaptive Highbeam AssistDisplay message ............................ 298Function/notes ............................. 125Switching on/off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 275

Additives (engine oil) ........................ 450ADS (Adaptive Damping System)

Function/notes ............................. 209Air bags

Display message ............................ 294Front air bag (driver, frontpassenger) ....................................... 46Important safety notes .................... 44Knee bag .......................................... 47PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp .................................. 48Safety guidelines ............................. 43Side impact air bag .......................... 47Window curtain air bag .................... 48

Air-conditioning systemsee Climate control

Air filter (display message) .............. 301AIR FLOW ........................................... 146AIRMATIC package

ADS (Adaptive Damping System) ... 209Function/notes ............................. 209Level control .................................. 210

Air ventsGlove box ....................................... 152Important safety notes .................. 151Rear ............................................... 152Setting ........................................... 151Setting the center air vents ........... 151Setting the side air vents ............... 152see Climate control

Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Ambient lightingSetting the brightness (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 275Setting the color (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 275

AMG adaptive sport suspensionsystem ................................................ 212AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 278

4 Index

Anti-lock braking systemsee ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Anti-theft alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Approach/departure angle .............. 190Ashtray ............................................... 346Assistance menu (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 272ASSYST PLUS

Displaying a service message ........ 369Hiding a service message .............. 369Notes ............................................. 368Resetting the service intervaldisplay ........................................... 369Service message ............................ 368Special service requirements ......... 369

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Activating/deactivating ................... 75Function ........................................... 75Switching off the alarm .................... 75

ATTENTION ASSISTActivating/deactivating ................. 273Display message ............................ 302Function/notes ............................. 230

Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 269Audio system

see separate operating instructions Authorized Centers

see Qualified specialist workshop Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center

see Qualified specialist workshop Authorized workshops

see Qualified specialist workshop AUTO lights

Display message ............................ 298see Lights

Automatic engine start (ECO start/stop function) .................................... 162Automatic engine switch-off (ECOstart/stop function) .......................... 162Automatic headlamp mode .............. 120Automatic transmission

Automatic drive program ............... 169Changing gear ............................... 168DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 165Display message ............................ 312Drive program display .................... 165

Driving tips .................................... 168Emergency running mode .............. 173Engaging drive position .................. 167Engaging neutral ............................ 166Engaging park positionautomatically ................................. 166Engaging reverse gear ................... 166Engaging the park position ............ 165Kickdown ....................................... 168Manual drive program .................... 171Overview ........................................ 165Problem (malfunction) ................... 173Program selector button ................ 169Pulling away ................................... 160Shift ranges ................................... 170Starting the engine ........................ 159Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 169Trailer towing ................................. 168Transmission position display ........ 165Transmission positions .................. 167

Automatic transmissionemergency mode ............................... 173Axle load, permissible (trailertowing) ............................................... 455

BBag hook ............................................ 337Ball coupling

Installing ........................................ 255Removing ....................................... 259Storing ........................................... 260

BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 67BAS PLUS (Brake Assist SystemPLUS) .................................................... 67Battery (SmartKey)

Checking .......................................... 81Important safety notes .................... 81Replacing ......................................... 81

Battery (vehicle)Charging ........................................ 387Display message ............................ 300Important safety notes .................. 385Jump starting ................................. 389Overview ........................................ 385

Blind Spot AssistActivating/deactivating ................. 273Display message ............................ 306

Index 5

Notes/function .............................. 233Trailer towing ................................. 235see Active Blind Spot Assist

BlueTECAdding DEF .................................... 177

BlueTEC (DEF) .................................... 448Brake Assist

see BAS (Brake Assist System) Brake fluid

Display message ............................ 289Notes ............................................. 450

Brake lampsChanging bulbs .............................. 132Display message ............................ 296

BrakesABS .................................................. 66Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 69BAS .................................................. 67BAS PLUS ........................................ 67Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 450Display message ............................ 283Driving tips .................................... 183High-performance brake system .... 184Important safety notes .................. 183Maintenance .................................. 184Parking brake ................................ 180Warning lamp ................................. 318

Breakdownsee Flat tire see Towing away

Bulbssee Changing bulbs

CCalifornia

Important notice for retailcustomers and lessees .................... 24

Calling up a malfunctionsee Display messages

Carsee Vehicle

CareCarpets .......................................... 377Car wash ........................................ 370Display ........................................... 374Exhaust pipe .................................. 374Exterior lights ................................ 373

Gear or selector lever .................... 376Interior ........................................... 374Matte finish ................................... 372Night View Assist Plus ................... 375Notes ............................................. 369Paint .............................................. 371Plastic trim .................................... 375Power washer ................................ 371Rear view camera .......................... 373Roof lining ...................................... 377Seat belt ........................................ 377Seat cover ..................................... 376Sensors ......................................... 373Steering wheel ............................... 376Trim pieces .................................... 376Washing by hand ........................... 371Wheels ........................................... 372Windows ........................................ 372Wiper blades .................................. 373Wooden trim .................................. 376

Cargo compartment coverNotes/how to use ......................... 338

Cargo compartment enlargementImportant safety notes .................. 335

Cargo compartment floorOpening/closing ............................ 342Stowage well (under) ..................... 342

Cargo netAttaching ....................................... 340Important safety information ......... 340

Cargo tie down rings ......................... 337Car keys

see SmartKey Car wash (care) ................................. 370CD player/CD changer (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 270Center console

Lower section .................................. 37Upper section .................................. 36

Central lockingAutomatic locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 276Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 79

Changing bulbsBrake lamps ................................... 132High-beam headlamps ................... 130Important safety notes .................. 128Low-beam headlamps .................... 130

6 Index

Overview of bulb types .................. 129Parking lamps ................................ 131Removing/replacing the cover(front wheel arch) .......................... 129Side marker lamps ......................... 131Standing lamps (front) ................... 131

Child-proof locksImportant safety notes .................... 64Rear doors ....................................... 65

ChildrenIn the vehicle ................................... 60Restraint systems ............................ 60Special seat belt retractor ............... 62

Child seatLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ............................................ 63Top Tether ....................................... 63

Cigarette lighter ................................ 346Cleaning

Mirror turn signal ........................... 373Trailer tow hitch ............................. 374

Climate controlAutomatic climate control (3-zone) .............................................. 142Controlling automatically ............... 145Cooling with air dehumidification . . 145Defrosting the windows ................. 149Defrosting the windshield .............. 148Dual-zone automatic climatecontrol ........................................... 139Important safety notes .................. 138Indicator lamp ................................ 145Information on using 3-zoneautomatic climate control .............. 144Maximum cooling .......................... 148Notes on using automatic climatecontrol ........................................... 141Overview of systems ...................... 138Problems with cooling with airdehumidification ............................ 145Problem with the rear windowdefroster ........................................ 150Rear control panel ......................... 142Setting the air distribution ............. 147Setting the airflow ......................... 147Setting the air vents ...................... 151Setting the climate mode (AIRFLOW) ............................................ 146

Setting the temperature ................ 146Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ............................................ 150Switching on/off ........................... 144Switching residual heat on/off ...... 150Switching the rear windowdefroster on/off ............................ 149Switching the ZONE function on/off .................................................. 148

Coat hooks ......................................... 340Cockpit

Overview .......................................... 32see Instrument cluster

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST ....... 68COMAND

ON&OFFROAD menu ..................... 252see separate operating instructions

COMAND displayCleaning ......................................... 374

Combination switch .......................... 123Combined cargo cover and net ........ 339Compass

Calling up ....................................... 362Consumption statistics (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 267Convenience closing feature .............. 93Convenience opening feature ............ 93Coolant (engine)

Checking the level ......................... 367Display message ............................ 299Filling capacity ............................... 451Important safety notes .................. 451Temperature (on-board computer) . 278Temperature gauge ........................ 263Warning lamp ................................. 326

Coolingsee Climate control

Cornering light functionDisplay message ............................ 295Function/notes ............................. 125

Crash-responsive emergencylighting ............................................... 128Cruise control

Activating ....................................... 193Activation conditions ..................... 192Cruise control lever ....................... 192Deactivating ................................... 194

Index 7

Display message ............................ 309Driving system ............................... 192Function/notes ............................. 192Important safety notes .................. 192Storing and maintaining currentspeed ............................................. 193

Cup holderCenter console .............................. 344Important safety notes .................. 343Rear compartment ......................... 344Temperature controlled ................. 344

Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 28Customer Relations Department ....... 28

DDashboard

see Instrument cluster Dashboard lighting

see Instrument cluster lighting Data

see Technical data Daytime running lamps

Display message ............................ 297Function/notes ............................. 120Switching on/off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 274

Dealershipssee Qualified specialist workshop

Declarations of conformity ................. 27DEF

Adding ........................................... 177Display message ............................ 302Filling capacity ............................... 449Important safety notes .................. 448

Delayed switch-offExterior lighting (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 275Interior lighting .............................. 276

Diagnostics connection ...................... 27Diesel .................................................. 447Differential locks (displaymessage) ............................................ 304Digital speedometer ......................... 267DIRECT SELECT lever

see Automatic transmission

Display messagesASSYST PLUS ................................ 368Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 282Driving systems ............................. 302Engine ............................................ 299General notes ................................ 282Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 282KEYLESS-GO .................................. 315Lights ............................................. 295Safety systems .............................. 283SmartKey ....................................... 314Tires ............................................... 310Vehicle ........................................... 312

Distance display (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 272Distance recorder

see Trip odometer Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 328Distance warning function

Activating/deactivating ................. 272Function/notes ................................ 68Warning lamp ................................. 328

DISTRONIC PLUSActivating ....................................... 196Activation conditions ..................... 196Cruise control lever ....................... 196Deactivating ................................... 201Display message ............................ 308Displays in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 202Driving tips .................................... 202Function/notes ............................. 194Important safety notes .................. 194Setting the specified minimumdistance ......................................... 200Warning lamp ................................. 328

DoorsAutomatic locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 276Automatic locking (switch) ............... 86Central locking/unlocking(SmartKey) ....................................... 79Control panel ................................... 40Display message ............................ 313Emergency locking ........................... 87Emergency unlocking ....................... 86Important safety notes .................... 84Opening (from inside) ...................... 85

8 Index

Overview .......................................... 84Power closing feature ...................... 86

Downhill Speed Regulationsee DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)

Drinking and driving ......................... 182Drinks holder

see Cup holder Drive program

Automatic ...................................... 169Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 165Manual ........................................... 171Off-road program (vehicleswithout the ON&OFFROADpackage) ........................................ 248Off-road program (vehicles withthe ON&OFFROAD package) .......... 248SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 279see On-road programs

Driver's doorsee Doors

Driving abroadMercedes-Benz Service ................. 369Symmetrical low beam .................. 120

Driving in mountainous terrainApproach/departure angle ............ 190

Driving lampssee Daytime running lamps

Driving off-roadsee Off-road driving

Driving safety systemsABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 66ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 73Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 69BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 67BAS PLUS (Brake Assist SystemPLUS) ............................................... 67COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST .. . . 68Distance warning function ............... 68Electronic brake force distribution ... 73ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram) .......................................... 70ETS/4ETS (Electronic TractionSystem) ........................................... 70Important safety information ........... 66Overview .......................................... 65PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 73STEER CONTROL ............................. 75

Driving systems360°camera .................................. 225Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 237Active Curve System ...................... 209Active Driving Assistancepackage ......................................... 237Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 241Active Parking Assist ..................... 217ADS ............................................... 209AIRMATIC package ........................ 209AMG adaptive sport suspensionsystem ........................................... 212ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 230Blind Spot Assist ............................ 233Cruise control ................................ 192Display message ............................ 302DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 194HOLD function ............................... 207Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 235Level control (vehicles withAIRMATIC package) ....................... 210Level control (vehicles with theON&OFFROAD package) ................ 204On-road programs .......................... 243PARKTRONIC ................................. 213Rear view camera .......................... 221

Driving tipsAutomatic transmission ................. 168Brakes ........................................... 183Break-in period .............................. 156DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 202Downhill gradient ........................... 183Drinking and driving ....................... 182Driving abroad ............................... 120Driving in winter ............................. 186Driving on flooded roads ................ 185Driving on sand .............................. 189Driving on wet roads ...................... 185Driving over obstacles ................... 189Exhaust check ............................... 182Fuel ................................................ 182General .......................................... 182Hydroplaning ................................. 185Icy road surfaces ........................... 186Limited braking efficiency onsalted roads ................................... 184Off-road driving .............................. 187Off-road fording ............................. 185

Index 9

Snow chains .................................. 401Symmetrical low beam .................. 120Tire ruts ......................................... 189Towing a trailer .............................. 253Traveling uphill ............................... 190Wet road surface ........................... 183

DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)Display message ............................ 305Function/notes ............................. 246

DVD audioOperating (on-board computer) ..... 270

DVD videoOperating (on-board computer) ..... 270

EEASY-ENTRY feature

Activating/deactivating ................. 277Function/notes ............................. 112

EASY-EXIT featureCrash-responsive ........................... 113Function/notes ............................. 112Switching on/off ........................... 277

EASY-PACK load-securing kit ........... 340EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

Display message ............................ 285Function/notes ................................ 73

ECO start/stop functionAutomatic engine start .................. 162Automatic engine switch-off .......... 162Deactivating/activating ................. 163General information ....................... 161Important safety notes .................. 161

Electronic Stability Programsee ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

Emergency releaseDriver's door .................................... 86Vehicle ............................................. 86

Emergency spare wheelImportant safety notes .................. 436Points to remember ....................... 437Removing ....................................... 437Storage location ............................ 437Technical data ............................... 439

Emergency Tensioning DevicesFunction ........................................... 59Safety guidelines ............................. 43

Emergency unlockingTailgate ............................................ 91

Emissions controlService and warranty information .... 24

EngineCheck Engine warning lamp ........... 325Display message ............................ 299ECO start/stop function ................ 161Engine number ............................... 444Irregular running ............................ 164Jump-starting ................................. 389Starting problems .......................... 164Starting the engine with theSmartKey ....................................... 159Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 160Switching off .................................. 180Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 394

Engine electronicsProblem (malfunction) ................... 164

Engine oilAdding ........................................... 366Additives ........................................ 450Checking the oil level ..................... 365Checking the oil level using thedipstick .......................................... 366Display message ............................ 300Filling capacity ............................... 450Notes about oil grades ................... 449Notes on oil level/consumption .... 365Temperature (on-board computer) . 278Viscosity ........................................ 450

ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram)

AMG menu (on-board computer) . . . 279Deactivating/activating ................... 71Display message ............................ 283ETS/4ETS ........................................ 70Function/notes ................................ 70Important safety information ........... 71Trailer stabilization ........................... 72Warning lamp ................................. 321

ETS/4ETS (Electronic TractionSystem) ................................................ 70Exhaust check ................................... 182Exhaust pipe (cleaninginstructions) ...................................... 374

10 Index

Exterior lightingsee Lights

Exterior mirrorsAdjusting ....................................... 113Dipping (automatic) ....................... 114Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 114Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 114Folding in when locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 277Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 114Setting ........................................... 114Storing settings (memoryfunction) ........................................ 116Storing the parking position .......... 115

Eyeglasses compartment ................. 334

FFiller cap

see Fuel filler flap First-aid kit ......................................... 380Flat tire

MOExtended tires .......................... 382Preparing the vehicle ..................... 381TIREFIT kit ...................................... 383

Floormat ............................................. 362Folding the rear bench seatforwards/back .................................. 335Fording

Off-road ......................................... 185On flooded roads ........................... 185

FuelAdditives ........................................ 446Consumption statistics .................. 267Displaying the currentconsumption .................................. 267Displaying the range ...................... 267Driving tips .................................... 182Flexible fuel vehicles ...................... 448Fuel gauge ............................... 33, 263Grade (gasoline) ............................ 445Important safety notes .................. 445Premium-grade unleaded gasoline . 445Problem (malfunction) ................... 176Quality (diesel) ............................... 447Refueling ........................................ 173Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 445

Fuel filler flapOpening/closing ............................ 174

Fuel filter (display message) ............ 301Fuel level

Calling up the range (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 267

Fuel tankCapacity ........................................ 445Problem (malfunction) ................... 176see Fuel tank

FusesAllocation chart ............................. 395Before changing ............................. 395Dashboard fuse box ....................... 395Fuse box in the enginecompartment ................................. 395Fuse box under rear bench seat .... 395Important safety notes .................. 394see Fuses

GGarage door opener

Clearing the memory ..................... 361Important safety notes .................. 359Opening/closing the garage door .. 361Programming (button in the rear-view mirror) ................................... 359

Gear indicator (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 278Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... 442Glove box ........................................... 333GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)(definition) ......................................... 419

HHandbrake

see Parking brake Hazard warning lamps ...................... 124Headlamps

Adding fluid to cleaning system ..... 368Cleaning system (capacity) ............ 452Cleaning system (function) ............ 125Cleaning system (notes) ................ 452Fogging up ..................................... 127see Automatic headlamp mode

Index 11

Head restraintsAdjusting ....................................... 104Adjusting (electrically) ................... 105Adjusting (manually) ...................... 105Adjusting (rear) .............................. 106Installing/removing (rear) .............. 106Luxury ............................................ 105

Heatingsee Climate control

High-beam headlampsChanging bulbs .............................. 130Display message ............................ 296Switching Adaptive HighbeamAssist on/off ................................. 126Switching on/off ........................... 124

Hill start assist .................................. 161HOLD function

Deactivating ................................... 208Display message ............................ 305Function/notes ............................. 207

HoodClosing ........................................... 365Display message ............................ 313Important safety notes .................. 364Opening ......................................... 364

Hydroplaning ..................................... 185

IIgnition lock

see Key positions Immobilizer .......................................... 75Indicator lamps

see Warning and indicator lamps Insect protection on the radiator .... 365Instrument cluster

Overview .................................. 33, 263Warning and indicatorlamps ....................................... 34, 316

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 263Interior lighting ................................. 127

Automatic control .......................... 127Delayed switch-off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 276Emergency lighting ........................ 128Manual control ............................... 128Overview ........................................ 127Reading lamp ................................. 127

Setting the brightness of theambient lighting (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 275Setting the color of the ambientlighting (on-board computer) ......... 275

JJack

Storage location ............................ 380Using ............................................. 423

Jump-start (engine)see Jump starting (engine)

Jump starting (engine) ...................... 389

KKEYLESS-GO

Convenience closing feature ............ 94Display message ............................ 315Locking ............................................ 79Start/Stop button .......................... 158Starting the engine ........................ 160Unlocking ......................................... 79

Key positionsKEYLESS-GO .................................. 158SmartKey ....................................... 157

KickdownDriving tips .................................... 168Manual drive program .................... 172

Knee bag .............................................. 47

LLamps

see Warning and indicator lamps Lane detection (automatic)

see Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating ................. 273Display message ............................ 306Function/information .................... 235see Active Lane Keeping Assist

Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 279LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ................................................ 63Level control (display message) ...... 303

12 Index

Level control (vehicles withAIRMATIC package)

Basic settings ................................ 211Function/notes ............................. 210Important safety notes .................. 210

Level control (vehicles with theON&OFFROAD package)

Basic settings ................................ 205Function/notes ............................. 204Important safety notes .................. 204

License plate lamp (displaymessage) ............................................ 297Light function, active

Display message ............................ 298Lights

Activating/deactivating theinterior lighting delayed switch-off . 276Active light function ....................... 125Automatic headlamp mode ............ 120Cornering light function ................. 125Driving abroad ............................... 120Hazard warning lamps ................... 124High beam flasher .......................... 124High-beam headlamps ................... 124Light switch ................................... 120Low-beam headlamps .................... 121Parking lamps ................................ 122Rear fog lamp ................................ 122Setting the brightness of theambient lighting (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 275Setting the color of the ambientlighting (on-board computer) ......... 275Standing lamps .............................. 123Switching Adaptive HighbeamAssist on/off ................................. 275Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 274Switching the exterior lightingdelayed switch-off on/off (on-board computer) ............................ 275Switching the surround lightingon/off (on-board computer) .......... 275Turn signals ................................... 123see Changing bulbs see Interior lighting see Lights

Light sensor (display message) ....... 298Loading guidelines ............................ 332Locking

see Central locking Locking (doors)

Automatic ........................................ 86Emergency locking ........................... 87From inside (central lockingbutton) ............................................. 85

Locking centrallysee Central locking

Locking verification signal (on-board computer) ............................... 276Low-beam headlamps

Changing bulbs .............................. 130Display message ............................ 295Setting for driving abroad(symmetrical) ................................. 120Switching on/off ........................... 121

LOW RANGEDisplay message ............................ 304Off-road gear ................................. 250

LOW RANGE off-road gear ................ 250Luggage holder (EASY-PACK load-securing kit) ....................................... 341Lumbar support

Adjusting (on the seat) .................. 107Luxury head restraints ..................... 105

MM+S tires ............................................ 400Maintenance

see ASSYST PLUS Malfunction message

see Display messages Matte finish (cleaninginstructions) ...................................... 372mbrace

Call priority .................................... 354Display message ............................ 289Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 354Downloading routes ....................... 358Emergency call .............................. 351Geo fencing ................................... 358Important safety notes .................. 350Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 357

Index 13

MB info call button ........................ 353Remote vehicle locking .................. 356Roadside Assistance button .......... 353Search & Send ............................... 355Self-test ......................................... 351Speed alert .................................... 358System .......................................... 351Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 359Vehicle remote malfunctiondiagnosis ....................................... 357Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 356

Mechanical keyFunction/notes ................................ 80Locking vehicle ................................ 87Unlocking the driver's door .............. 86

Memory card (audio) ......................... 270Memory function ............................... 116Message memory (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 282Messages

see Display messages Mirrors

see Exterior mirrors see Rear-view mirror see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)

Mobile phoneMenu (on-board computer) ............ 270

Modifying the programming(SmartKey) ........................................... 80MOExtended tires .............................. 382Mounting wheels

Lowering the vehicle ...................... 426Mounting a new wheel ................... 425Raising the vehicle ......................... 423Removing a wheel .......................... 425Securing the vehicle againstrolling away ................................... 422

MP3Operation ....................................... 270see separate operating instructions

Multifunction displayFunction/notes ............................. 265Permanent display ......................... 274

Multifunction steering wheelOperating the on-board computer . 264Overview .......................................... 35

NNavigation

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 268see separate operating instructions

Night View Assist PlusActivating/deactivating ................. 231Cleaning ......................................... 375Problem (malfunction) ................... 233

Notes on breaking-in a newvehicle ................................................ 156

OOccupant Classification System(OCS)

Faults ............................................... 53Operation ......................................... 48System self-test ............................... 51

Occupant safetyChildren in the vehicle ..................... 60Important safety notes .................... 42

OCSFaults ............................................... 53Operation ......................................... 48System self-test ............................... 51

Odometersee Trip odometer

Off-road drivingChecklist after driving off-road ...... 188Checklist before driving off-road .... 188General information ....................... 187Important safety notes .................. 187Traveling uphill ............................... 190

Off-road program (vehicleswithout the ON&OFFROADpackage)

Function/notes ............................. 248Off-road programs (vehicles withthe ON&OFFROAD package)

Displays in the COMAND display ... 252Function/notes ............................. 248Off-road program 1 ........................ 249Off-road program 2 ........................ 249

Off-road system4MATIC .......................................... 246DSR ............................................... 246LOW RANGE off-road gear ............. 250

14 Index

Off-road 4ETS .................................. 71Off-road ABS .................................... 66Off-road ESP® .................................. 72Off-road program (vehicleswithout the ON&OFFROADpackage) ........................................ 248Off-road programs (vehicles withthe ON&OFFROAD package) .......... 248

Oilsee Engine oil

On and Offroad menu (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 278On-board computer

AMG menu ..................................... 278Assistance menu ........................... 272Audio menu ................................... 269Convenience submenu .................. 277Displaying a service message ........ 369Display messages .......................... 282DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 202Factory settings submenu ............. 278Important safety notes .................. 262Instrument cluster submenu .......... 274Lighting submenu .......................... 274Menu overview .............................. 266Message memory .......................... 282Navigation menu ............................ 268On and Offroad menu .................... 278Operation ....................................... 264RACETIMER ................................... 279Service menu ................................. 273Settings menu ............................... 274Standard display ............................ 266Telephone menu ............................ 270Trip menu ...................................... 266Vehicle submenu ........................... 276Video DVD operation ..................... 270

On-road programsAUTO program ............................... 244Function/notes ............................. 243Snow program ............................... 245SPORT program ............................. 244Trailer program .............................. 245

Opening and closing the side trimpanels ................................................. 132Operating system

see On-board computer Outside temperature display ........... 264

Overhead control panel ...................... 39Override feature

Rear side windows ........................... 65

PPaint code number ............................ 443Paintwork (cleaning instructions) . . . 371Panic alarm .......................................... 42Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

Opening/closing .............................. 98Opening/closing the rollersunblind ........................................... 99Problem (malfunction) ................... 100Resetting ......................................... 99

Panorama sliding sunroofImportant safety notes .................... 96

Parking ............................................... 179Important safety notes .................. 179Parking brake ................................ 180Position of exterior mirror, front-passenger side ............................... 115Rear view camera .......................... 221see PARKTRONIC

Parking aidActive Parking Assist ..................... 217see Exterior mirrors see PARKTRONIC

Parking brakeDisplay message ............................ 286Electric parking brake .................... 180Warning lamp ................................. 324see Parking brake

Parking lampsSwitching on/off ........................... 122

Parking lamps (changing bulbs) ...... 131PARKTRONIC

Deactivating/activating ................. 215Driving system ............................... 213Function/notes ............................. 213Important safety notes .................. 213Problem (malfunction) ................... 217Range of the sensors ..................... 214Trailer towing ................................. 216Warning display ............................. 215

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp ...................................................... 48

Index 15

Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 375Power closing feature ......................... 86Power washers .................................. 371Power windows

see Side windows PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection)

Display message ............................ 289Operation ......................................... 54

PRE-SAFE® BrakeActivating/deactivating ................. 272Display message ............................ 291Function/notes ................................ 73Warning lamp ................................. 328

Product information ............................ 23Program selector button .................. 169Protection of the environment

General notes .................................. 23Pulling away

Trailer ............................................ 160Pulling away (automatictransmission) ..................................... 160

QQualified specialist workshop ........... 27

RRACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 279Radar sensor system

Activating/deactivating ................. 277Display message ............................ 305

Radiator cover ................................... 365Radio

Selecting a station ......................... 269see separate operating instructions

Radio-controlled devices(installing) .......................................... 362Reading lamp ..................................... 127Rear axle level control (AMGadaptive sport suspensionsystem) .............................................. 212Rear compartment

Setting the air vents ...................... 152Rear fog lamp

Switching on/off ........................... 122

Rear seatsAdjusting ....................................... 106

Rear view cameraCleaning instructions ..................... 373Function/notes ............................. 221Switching on/off ........................... 222

Rear-view mirrorAnti-glare (manual) ........................ 113Dipping (automatic) ....................... 114

Rear window defrosterProblem (malfunction) ................... 150Switching on/off ........................... 149

Rear window wiperReplacing the wiper blade .............. 134Switching on/off ........................... 133

RefuelingFuel gauge ............................... 33, 263Important safety notes .................. 173Refueling process .......................... 174see Fuel

Remote controlProgramming (garage dooropener) .......................................... 359

Reporting safety defects .................... 28Reserve (fuel tank)

see Fuel Reserve fuel

Display message ............................ 301Warning lamp ................................. 325see Fuel

Residual heat (climate control) ........ 150Restraint system

see SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem)

Reversing lamps (displaymessage) ............................................ 297Roadside Assistance (breakdown) . . . . 25Roller sunblind

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel ..................................... 98Rear side windows ......................... 345

Roof carrier ........................................ 343Roof lining and carpets (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 377Roof load (maximum) ........................ 452Route (navigation)

see Route guidance (navigation)

16 Index

Route guidance (navigation) ............ 268

SSafety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 60Child restraint systems .................... 60Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 48

Safety systemsee Driving safety systems

Seat beltsAdjusting the driver's and front-passenger seat belt ......................... 57Adjusting the height ......................... 57Belt force limiters ............................ 59Cleaning ......................................... 377Correct usage .................................. 55Emergency Tensioning Devices ........ 59Fastening ......................................... 56Important safety guidelines ............. 54Releasing ......................................... 58Safety guidelines ............................. 43Switching belt adjustment on/off(on-board computer) ...................... 277Warning lamp ................................. 317Warning lamp (function) ................... 58see Seat belts

SeatsAdjusting (electrically) ................... 104Adjusting the head restraint .......... 104Cleaning the cover ......................... 376Correct driver's seat position ........ 102Folding the rear bench seatforwards/back ............................... 335Important safety notes .................. 103Overview ........................................ 103Seat heating problem .................... 109Seat ventilation problem ................ 110Storing settings (memoryfunction) ........................................ 116Switching seat heating on/off ....... 107Switching seat ventilation on/off . . 109

Securing hooks .................................. 338Selector lever

Cleaning ......................................... 376Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 373Service menu (on-board computer) . 273

Service productsBrake fluid ..................................... 450Coolant (engine) ............................ 451DEF special additives ..................... 448Engine oil ....................................... 449Fuel ................................................ 445Important safety notes .................. 444Washer fluid ................................... 452

SettingsFactory (on-board computer) ......... 278On-board computer ....................... 274

Setting the air distribution ............... 147Setting the airflow ............................ 147SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 279Side impact air bag ............................. 47Side marker lamp (displaymessage) ............................................ 297Side marker lamps (changingbulbs) ................................................. 131Side windows

Cleaning ......................................... 372Convenience closing feature ............ 93Convenience opening feature .......... 93Important safety information ........... 92Opening/closing .............................. 92Overview .......................................... 92Problem (malfunction) ..................... 96Resetting ......................................... 94

Sliding sunroofImportant safety notes .................... 96Opening/closing .............................. 97Problem (malfunction) ................... 100Resetting ......................................... 98see Panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel

SmartKeyChanging the battery ....................... 81Changing the programming ............. 80Checking the battery ....................... 81Convenience closing feature ............ 94Convenience opening feature .......... 93Display message ............................ 314Door central locking/unlocking ....... 79Important safety notes .................... 78Loss ................................................. 83Mechanical key ................................ 80Overview .......................................... 78Positions (ignition lock) ................. 157

Index 17

Problem (malfunction) ..................... 83Starting the engine ........................ 159

Snow chainsInformation .................................... 401Snow drive program ....................... 245

SocketsCenter console .............................. 347General notes ................................ 347Luggage compartment ................... 348Rear compartment ......................... 348

Spare wheelsee Emergency spare wheel

Specialist workshop ............................ 27Special seat belt retractor .................. 62Speed, controlling

see Cruise control Speedometer

Digital ............................................ 267In the Instrument cluster ......... 33, 263Segments ...................................... 264Selecting the unit ofmeasurement ................................ 274see Instrument cluster

SRSsee SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem)

SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem)

Display message ............................ 291Introduction ..................................... 43Warning lamp ................................. 324Warning lamp (function) ................... 43

Standing lampsChanging bulbs .............................. 131Display message ............................ 297Switching on/off ........................... 123

Start/stop functionsee ECO start/stop function

Starting (engine) ................................ 159STEER CONTROL .................................. 75Steering (display message) .............. 314Steering wheel

Adjusting (electrically) ................... 111Adjusting (manually) ...................... 110Button overview ............................... 35Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 264Cleaning ......................................... 376

Important safety notes .................. 110Paddle shifters ............................... 169Steering wheel heating .................. 111Storing settings (memoryfunction) ........................................ 116

Steering wheel heatingProblem (malfunction) ................... 112Switching on/off ........................... 111

Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 169Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 279Stowage areas ................................... 332Stowage compartments

Armrest (under) ............................. 334Center console .............................. 334Cup holders ................................... 343Eyeglasses compartment ............... 334Glove box ....................................... 333Important safety information ......... 333Stowage net ................................... 335

Stowage net ....................................... 335Stowage space

Center console (rear) ..................... 334Summer tires ..................................... 400Sun visor ............................................ 345Surround lighting (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 275Suspension tuning

AMG adaptive sport suspensionsystem ........................................... 212SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 279

SUV(Sport Utility Vehicle) ....................... 26

Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ................................................. 150Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 75

TTachometer ........................................ 264Tailgate

Display message ............................ 313Emergency unlocking ....................... 91Important safety notes .................... 87Limiting the opening angle ............... 91Opening/closing (automaticallyfrom inside) ...................................... 90Opening/closing (automaticallyfrom outside) ................................... 89

18 Index

Opening/closing (from outside) ....... 88Opening dimensions ...................... 452Power closing .................................. 86

Tail lampsDisplay message ............................ 296

Tank contentFuel gauge ............................... 33, 263

Technical dataCapacities ...................................... 444Emergency spare wheel ................. 439Information .................................... 442Tires/wheels ................................. 426Trailer loads ................................... 455Vehicle data ................................... 452

TELEAIDCall priority .................................... 354Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 354Downloading routes ....................... 358Emergency call .............................. 351Geo fencing ................................... 358Important safety notes .................. 350Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 357MB info call button ........................ 353Remote vehicle locking .................. 356Roadside Assistance button .......... 353Search & Send ............................... 355Self-test ......................................... 351Speed alert .................................... 358System .......................................... 351Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 359Vehicle remote malfunctiondiagnosis ....................................... 357Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 356

TelephoneAccepting a call ............................. 271Display message ............................ 314Menu (on-board computer) ............ 270Number from the phone book ........ 271Redialing ........................................ 271Rejecting/ending a call ................. 271

Telescopic rod (EASY-PACK load-securing kit) ....................................... 341Temperature

Coolant .......................................... 263Coolant (on-board computer) ......... 278Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 278

Outside temperature ...................... 264Setting (climate control) ................ 146

Theft deterrent systemsATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 75Immobilizer ...................................... 75

Through-loading ................................ 335Time

see Separate Operator's Manual Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 279TIREFIT kit .......................................... 383Tire pressure

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 406Checking manually ........................ 405Display message ............................ 310Maximum ....................................... 404Notes ............................................. 403Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 384Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 384Recommended ............................... 402see Tire pressure

Tire pressure loss warning systemImportant safety notes .................. 405Restarting ...................................... 406

Tire pressure monitoring systemChecking the tire pressureelectronically ................................. 408Function/notes ............................. 406Restarting ...................................... 409Warning lamp ................................. 329Warning message .......................... 409

TiresAspect ratio (definition) ................. 420Average weight of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 419Bar (definition) ............................... 418Changing a wheel .......................... 421Characteristics .............................. 418Checking ........................................ 399Definition of terms ......................... 418Direction of rotation ...................... 422Display message ............................ 310Distribution of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 421DOT, Tire Identification Number(TIN) ............................................... 418DOT (Department ofTransportation) (definition) ............ 419

Index 19

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)(definition) ..................................... 419GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)(definition) ..................................... 419GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)(definition) ..................................... 419GVWR (Gross Vehicle WeightRating) (definition) ......................... 419Important safety notes .................. 398Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipment (definition) ...... 419Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 419Labeling (overview) ........................ 415Load bearing index (definition) ...... 420Load index ..................................... 417Load index (definition) ................... 420M+S tires ....................................... 400Maximum loaded vehicle weight(definition) ..................................... 419Maximum load on a tire(definition) ..................................... 420Maximum permissible tirepressure (definition) ....................... 420Maximum tire load ......................... 417Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 420MOExtended tires .......................... 400Optional equipment weight(definition) ..................................... 420PSI (pounds per square inch)(definition) ..................................... 420Replacing ....................................... 421Service life ..................................... 400Sidewall (definition) ....................... 420Speed rating (definition) ................ 419Storing ........................................... 422Structure and characteristics(definition) ..................................... 418Temperature .................................. 414TIN (Tire Identification Number)(definition) ..................................... 420Tire bead (definition) ...................... 420Tire pressure (definition) ................ 420Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 419Tire size (data) ............................... 426Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity, speed rating .................... 415Tire tread ....................................... 399Tire tread (definition) ..................... 420

Total load limit (definition) ............. 421Traction ......................................... 414Traction (definition) ....................... 421Tread wear ..................................... 414TWR (permissible trailer drawbarnoseweight) (definition) ................. 421Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards ...................................... 413Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards (definition) .................... 419Unladen weight (definition) ............ 420Wear indicator (definition) ............. 421Wheel rim (definition) .................... 419see Flat tire

Top Tether ............................................ 63Towing

Important safety guidelines ........... 391Installing the towing eye ................ 392Removing the towing eye ............... 393With the rear axle raised ................ 393

Towing a trailerActive Parking Assist ..................... 221Axle load, permissible .................... 455Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ......... 374Coupling up a trailer ...................... 257Decoupling a trailer ....................... 258Driving tips .................................... 253ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram) .......................................... 72Important safety notes .................. 253Installing the ball coupling ............. 255Mounting dimensions .................... 454Power supply ................................. 260Pulling away with a trailer .............. 160Removing the ball coupling ............ 259Shift range ..................................... 168Storing the ball coupling ................ 260Trailer drive program ..................... 245Trailer loads ................................... 455

Towing awayWith both axles on the ground ....... 393

Tow-startingEmergency engine starting ............ 394Important safety notes .................. 391

Trailer couplingsee Towing a trailer

Trailer loads and drawbarnoseweights ...................................... 259

20 Index

Trailer towingActive Blind Spot Assist ................. 240Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 243Blind Spot Assist ............................ 235PARKTRONIC ................................. 216Permissible trailer loads anddrawbar noseweights ..................... 259

Transfer case ..................................... 173Transmission

see Automatic transmission Transmission position display ......... 165Transmission position display(DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 165Transporting the vehicle .................. 393Traveling uphill

Brow of hill ..................................... 191Driving downhill ............................. 191Maximum gradient-climbingcapability ....................................... 191

Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) . 376Trip computer (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 267Trip odometer

Calling up ....................................... 266Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 268see Trip odometer

Trunksee Tailgate

Turn signalsDisplay message ............................ 295Switching on/off ........................... 123see Turn signals

TWR (Tongue Weight Rating)(definition) ......................................... 421Type identification plate

see Vehicle identification plate

UUnlocking

Emergency unlocking ....................... 86From inside the vehicle (centralunlocking button) ............................. 85

VVanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 345Vehicle

Correct use ...................................... 27Data acquisition ............................... 28Display message ............................ 312Equipment ....................................... 24Individual settings .......................... 274Limited Warranty ............................. 28Loading .......................................... 410Locking (in an emergency) ............... 87Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 79Lowering ........................................ 426Maintenance .................................... 25Parking for a long period ................ 182Pulling away ................................... 160Raising ........................................... 423Reporting problems ......................... 28Securing from rolling away ............ 422Towing away .................................. 391Transporting .................................. 393Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 86Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 79Vehicle data ................................... 452

Vehicle batterysee Battery (vehicle)

Vehicle data ....................................... 452Vehicle dimensions ........................... 452Vehicle emergency locking ................ 87Vehicle identification number

see VIN Vehicle identification plate .............. 443Vehicle level (display message) ....... 302Vehicle tool kit .................................. 380Video

Operating the DVD ......................... 270VIN ...................................................... 443

WWarning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 319Brakes ........................................... 318Check Engine ................................. 325Coolant .......................................... 326Distance warning ........................... 328DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 328

Index 21

ESP® .............................................. 321ESP® OFF ....................................... 322Fuel tank ........................................ 325Overview .................................. 34, 316PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp .................................. 48Reserve fuel ................................... 325Seat belt ........................................ 317SRS ................................................ 324Tire pressure monitor .................... 329

Warranty ............................................ 442Washer fluid

Display message ............................ 314Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 426Wheel chock ...................................... 422Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 421Checking ........................................ 399Cleaning ......................................... 372Cleaning (warning) ......................... 422Emergency spare wheel ................. 436Important safety notes .................. 398Interchanging/changing ................ 421Mounting a new wheel ................... 425Mounting a wheel .......................... 422Overview ........................................ 398Removing a wheel .......................... 425Storing ........................................... 422Tightening torque ........................... 426Wheel size/tire size ....................... 426

Window curtain air bagDisplay message ............................ 292Operation ......................................... 48

Windowssee Side windows

WindshieldDefrosting ...................................... 148Infrared reflective .......................... 362see Windshield

Windshield washer fluidsee Windshield washer system

Windshield washer systemAdding washer fluid ....................... 368Filling capacity ............................... 452Notes ............................................. 452

Windshield wipersProblem (malfunction) ................... 136Rear window wiper ........................ 133Replacing the wiper blades ............ 133Switching on/off ........................... 132

Winter drivingSlippery road surfaces ................... 186Snow chains .................................. 401

Winter operationGeneral notes ................................ 400Overview ........................................ 400Radiator cover ............................... 365Snow drive program ....................... 245

Winter tiresM+S tires ....................................... 400

Wiper bladesCleaning ......................................... 373Important safety notes .................. 133Replacing ....................................... 133Replacing (rear window) ................ 134Replacing (windshield) ................... 134

Wooden trim (cleaninginstructions) ...................................... 376Workshops

see Qualified specialist workshop

22 Index

Protection of the environment

General notes

H Environmental noteDaimler's declared policy is one of integratedenvironmental protection.The objectives are for the natural resourcesthat form the basis of our existence on thisplanet to be used sparingly and in a mannerthat takes the requirements of both natureand humanity into account.You too can help to protect the environmentby operating your vehicle in anenvironmentally responsible manner.Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,transmission, brake and tire wear depend onthe following factors:Roperating conditions of your vehicleRyour personal driving styleYou can influence both factors. You shouldbear the following in mind:Operating conditions:Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel

consumption.Ralways make sure that the tire pressures

are correct.Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel

consumption.Rremove roof racks once you no longer need

them.Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute

to environmental protection. You shouldtherefore adhere to the service intervals.Ralways have service work carried out at a

qualified specialist workshop.Personal driving style:Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when

starting the engine.Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle

is stationary.Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance

from the vehicle in front.

Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration.Rchange gear in good time and use each gear

only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.

Environmental concerns andrecommendations

Wherever the operating instructions requireyou to dispose of materials, first try toregenerate or re-use them. Observe therelevant environmental rules and regulationswhen disposing of materials. In this way youwill help to protect the environment.

Product information

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you usegenuine Mercedes-Benz parts, conversionparts and accessories that have beenapproved for your vehicle.Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts as well asconversion parts and accessories that havebeen specifically approved for your vehicle fortheir reliability, safety and suitability. Despiteongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz isunable to assess other parts. Therefore,Mercedes-Benz accepts no responsibility forthe use of such parts in Mercedes-Benzvehicles. This is also the case, even if theyhave been independently or officiallyapproved. The use of non-approved partscould affect your vehicle's operating safety.Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts, approvedconversion parts and accessories areavailable from any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter. Here, you will receive advice aboutpermissible technical modifications, and theparts will be professionally installed.

Introduction 23

Z

Operator's Manual

General notesBefore you first drive off, read this Operator'sManual carefully and familiarize yourself withyour vehicle.For your own safety and a longer vehicle life,follow the instructions and warning notices inthis manual. Disregarding them may lead todamage to the vehicle or personal injury.Vehicle damage resulting from the disregardof the instructions is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Vehicle equipmentThis Operator's Manual describes all modelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of going toprint. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all features described.This also applies to safety-related systemsand functions. The equipment in your vehiclemay therefore differ from some of thedescriptions or illustrations.The original purchase agreement lists allsystems installed in your vehicle.Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerif you have any questions about equipment oroperation.The Operator's Manual and MaintenanceBooklet are important documents and shouldbe kept in the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation

Service and literatureYour vehicle is covered under the terms of thewarranties printed in the Service andWarranty Information booklet. Yourauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center willexchange or repair any defective partsoriginally installed in the vehicle inaccordance with the terms of the followingwarranties:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission Systems WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,

Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,Rhode Island and Vermont EmissionControl Systems WarrantyRState warranty enforcement laws (lemon

laws)

Information for customers inCalifornia

Under California law you may be entitled to areplacement of your vehicle or a refund of thepurchase price or lease price, if after areasonable number of repair attemptsMercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or itsauthorized repair or service facilities fail to fixone or more substantial defects ormalfunctions in the vehicle that are coveredby its express warranty. During the period of18 months from original delivery of thevehicle or the accumulation of 18,000 miles(approximately 29,000 km) on the odometerof the vehicle, whichever occurs first, areasonable number of repair attempts ispresumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one ormore of the following occurs:(1) the same substantial defect or

malfunction results in a condition that islikely to cause death or serious bodilyinjury if the vehicle is driven, that defector malfunction has been subject to repairtwo or more times, and you have directly

24 Introduction

notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC inwriting of the need for its repair,

(2) the same substantial defect ormalfunction of a less serious nature thancategory (1) has been subject to repairfour or more times and you have directlynotified us in writing of the need for itsrepair, or

(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason ofrepair of the same or different substantialdefects or malfunctions for a cumulativetotal of more than 30 calendar days.

Please send your written notice to:Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCCustomer Assistance CenterOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350

MaintenanceThe Service and Warranty Booklet describesall the necessary maintenance work whichshould be done at regular intervals.Always have the Service and WarrantyBooklet with you when you bring the vehicleto an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Theservice advisor will record every service foryou in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Roadside AssistanceThe Mercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceProgram offers technical help in the event ofa breakdown. Calls to the toll-free RoadsideAssistance Hotline are answered by ouragents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) (USA)1-800-387-0100 (Canada)For additional information, refer to theMercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceProgram brochure (USA) or the "RoadsideAssistance" section in the Service andWarranty booklet (Canada). You will find bothin your vehicle literature portfolio.

Change of address or change ofownership

In the event of a change of address, pleasesend us the "Notification of Address Change"in the Service and Guarantee booklet orsimply call the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center (USA) at the hotlinenumber1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service Center (Canada) at1-800-387-0100. This will assist us incontacting you in a timely manner should theneed arise.If you sell your Mercedes, please leave theentire literature in the vehicle so that it isavailable to the next owner.If you have purchased a used car, please sendus the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" inthe Service and Guarantee booklet or simplycall the Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter (USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service (Canada) at1-800-387-0100.

Vehicle operation outside the USAand Canada

If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreigncountries, please be aware that:Rservice facilities or replacement parts may

not be readily available.Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic

converter may not be available. Leaded fuelmay cause damage to the catalyticconverter.Rthe fuel may have a considerably lower

octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can causeengine damage.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are availablefor delivery in Europe through our EuropeanDelivery Program. For details, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write toone of the following addresses.In the USA

Introduction 25

Z

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCEuropean Delivery DepartmentOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.European Delivery Department98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Sports Utility Vehicle

G WARNINGThis Sport Utility Vehicle is designed for bothon-road and off-road use. It can go places andperform tasks for which conventional 2-wheeldrive passenger cars are not intended. Thisvehicle will handle and maneuver differentlyfrom conventional passenger cars in drivingconditions which may occur on streets,highways and off-road use.This vehicle has a higher ground clearanceand a higher center of gravity than manypassenger cars. As with other vehicles of thistype, if you make sharp turns at excessivespeeds or abrupt maneuvers, the vehicle mayroll over or may go out of control and crash.Utility vehicles have a significantly higherrollover rate than other types of vehicles.Failure to operate this vehicle safely mayresult in an accident, rollover of the vehicle,and severe or fatal injury.Before you start to drive this vehicle, read theOperator's Manual. Take time to becomefamiliar with the driving characteristics of thisvehicle. Be sure you are familiar with allvehicle controls. Learn how your vehiclehandles on different road surfaces. Do notattempt sharp turns at excessive speeds orabrupt maneuvers or other unsafe drivingactions that can cause loss of vehicle control.When driving off-road or working the vehiclehard, do not overload it. And, always wearyour seat belts at all times. In a rollover crash,

an unbelted person is significantly more likelyto die than a person wearing a seat belt.

Operating safety

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWork improperly carried out on electroniccomponents and associated software couldcause them to cease functioning. Because thevehicle's electronic components areinterconnected, any modifications made mayproduce an undesired effect on othersystems. Electronic malfunctions couldseriously impair the operating safety of yourvehicle.Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerfor repairs or modifications to electroniccomponents.Other improper work or modifications on thevehicle could also have a negative impact onthe operating safety of the vehicle.Some safety systems only function when theengine is running. You should therefore neverturn off the engine while driving.

G WARNINGHeavy blows against the vehicle underbody ortires/wheels may cause serious damage andimpair the operating safety of your vehicle.Such blows can be caused, for example, byrunning over an obstacle, road debris or apothole.If you feel a sudden significant vibration orride disturbance, or you suspect that damageto your vehicle has occurred:Rturn on your hazard warning flashers.Rslow down carefully.Rdrive with caution to an area which is a safe

distance from the road.Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/wheels for possible damage. If the vehicleappears unsafe, have it towed to the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or other

26 Introduction

qualified maintenance or repair facility forfurther inspection or repairs.

Declarations of conformity

Vehicle components which receiveand/or transmit radio wavesUSA: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: 1) These devices may not causeharmful interference, and 2) These devicesmust accept any interference received,including interference that may causeundesired operation. Changes ormodifications not expressly approved by theparty responsible for compliance could voidthe user’s authority to operate theequipment."Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Industry Canada license-exemptRSS standard(s). Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) These devicesmay not cause interference, and (2) Thesedevices must accept any interference,including interference that may causeundesired operation of the device."

Diagnostics connection

G WARNINGIf you connect equipment to the on-boarddiagnostics connection, it can affect theoperation of the vehicle systems. This canimpair the operating safety of your vehiclewhile driving. There is a risk of an accident.Do not connect any equipment to the on-board diagnostics connection.

G WARNINGLoose equipment or equipment cables whichare connected to the on-board diagnosticsconnection can obstruct the area around thepedals. The equipment or the cables couldcome between the pedals in the event of

sudden braking or acceleration. This mayaffect the function of the pedals. There is arisk of an accident.Do not attach any equipment or cables in thedriver's footwell.

! If the engine is switched off andequipment on the diagnostics connectionis used, the starter battery may discharge.

The diagnostics connection is only intendedfor the connection of diagnostic equipment ata qualified specialist workshop.Connecting equipment to the diagnosticsconnection can, for example, lead toemissions monitoring information beingreset. This may lead to the vehicle failing tomeet the requirements of the next emissionstest during the main inspection.

Qualified specialist workshopAn authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is aqualified specialist workshop. It has thenecessary specialist knowledge, tools andqualifications to correctly carry out the workrequired on your vehicle. This is especially thecase for work relevant to safety.Observe the notes in the MaintenanceBooklet.Always have the following work carried out atan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:Rwork relevant to safetyRservice and maintenance workRrepair workRalterations, installation work and

modificationsRwork on electronic components

Correct use

G WARNINGThere are various warning stickers affixed toyour vehicle. Their purpose is to alert you andothers to various dangers. Therefore, do not

Introduction 27

Z

remove any warning stickers unless thesticker clearly states that you may do so.If you remove any warning stickers, you orothers could fail to recognize certain dangersand be injured.

When driving your vehicle observe thefollowing information:Rthe safety notes in this manualRthe Technical Data section in this manualRtraffic rules and regulationsRlaws and safety standards pertaining to

motor vehicles

Problems with your vehicleIf you should experience a problem with yourvehicle, particularly one that you believe mayaffect its safe operation, we urge you tocontact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerimmediately to have the problem diagnosedand rectified. If the problem is not resolved toyour satisfaction, please discuss the problemagain with a Mercedes-Benz Center orcontact us at one of the following addresses.In the USACustomer Assistance CenterMercedes-Benz USA, LLCOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaCustomer Relations DepartmentMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defectsUSA only:The following text is published as required ofmanufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the"National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Actof 1966".

If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should immediatelyinform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition tonotifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles, itmay order a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, yourdealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); goto http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,SW., Washington, DC 20590.You can also obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov

Limited Warranty! Follow the instructions in this manual

about the proper operation of your vehicleas well as about possible vehicle damage.Damage to your vehicle that arises fromculpable contraventions against theseinstructions is not covered either by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by theNew or Used-Vehicle Warranty.

Data stored in the vehicle

Information about electronic dataacquisition in the vehicle

(Including notice pursuant to California Code§ 9951)Your vehicle records electronic data. If yourvehicle is equipped with mbrace (Canada:TELE AID), data is transmitted in the event ofan accident.

28 Introduction

http://www.safercar.gov

http://www.safercar.gov

This information helps, for example, to testvehicle systems after an accident and tocontinually improve vehicle safety.Daimler AG can access this data and submitit:Rfor safety research or vehicle diagnosis

purposesRwith the consent of the vehicle ownerRon the instruction of prosecuting

authoritiesRfor use in arbitration of disputes that

involve Daimler AG, its affiliates or its salesand service organizationsRas otherwise required or permitted by law.Please check your mbrace (Canada: TELEAID) purchase agreement to find out moreabout data that can be recorded andtransmitted by this system.

Information on copyright

General informationYou can find information on licenses for freeand open-source software used in yourvehicle and its electronic components on thefollowing website:http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

Introduction 29

Z

http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

30

Dashboard ........................................... 32Instrument cluster .............................. 33Multifunction steering wheel ............. 35Center console .................................... 36Overhead control panel ...................... 39Door control panel .............................. 40

31

At a

gla

nce

Dashboard

Function Page: Steering wheel paddle

shifters 169

; Combination switch 123

= Instrument cluster 33

? Horn

A DIRECT SELECT lever 165

B PARKTRONIC warningdisplay 213

C Overhead control panel 39

D Climate control systems 138

E Ignition lock 157Start/Stop button 158

Function PageF Adjusting the steering

wheel manually 110

G Adjusting the steeringwheel electrically 110Steering wheel heating 111

H Cruise control lever 192

I Opening the hood 364

J Diagnostics connection 27

K Electric parking brake 180

L Light switch 120

M Night View Assist Plus 231

32 DashboardAt

a g

lanc

e

Instrument cluster

Displays and controls

Function Page: Speedometer with

segments 264

; Fuel gauge

= Tachometer 264

Function Page? Coolant temperature 263

A Multifunction display 265

B Instrument lighting 263

Instrument cluster 33

At a

gla

nce

Warning and indicator lamps

Function Page: L Low-beam

headlamps 121

; T Parking lamps 122

= ÷ ESP® 321

? K High-beamheadlamps 124

A Electric parking brake (red) 324F (USA only)! (Canada only)

B ! Electric parking brake(yellow) 324

C · Distance warning 328

D #! Turn signals 123

E h Tire pressure monitor 329

Function PageF 6 SRS 324

G ü Seat belt 317

H % Diesel engine:preglow 159

I ? Coolant 326

J R Rear fog lamp 122

K ; Check Engine 325

L 8 Reserve fuel 325

M å ESP® OFF 321

N ! ABS 319

O Braking 318$ (USA only)J (Canada only)

34 Instrument clusterAt

a g

lanc

e

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page: Multifunction display 265

; COMAND display; see theseparate OperatingInstructions

= ?

Switches on the VoiceControl System; see theseparate operatinginstructions

? ~

Rejects or ends a call 270Exits phone book/redialmemory6

Makes or accepts a callSwitches to the redialmemoryWX

Adjusts the volume8

Mute

Function PageA =;

Selects a menu 2649:

Selects a submenu orscrolls through lists 264a

Confirms your selection 264Hides display messages 282

B %

Back 264Switches off the VoiceControl System; see theseparate operatinginstructions

Multifunction steering wheel 35

At a

gla

nce

Center console

Center console, upper section

Function Page: COMAND; see the separate

operating instructions

; c Seat heating 107

= s Seat ventilation 109

? c PARKTRONIC 213

A ¤ ECO start/stopfunction 161

Function PageB £ Hazard warning

lamps 124

C 45 Indicator lamp 48

D å ESP® 71

36 Center consoleAt

a g

lanc

e

Center console, lower section

i Vehicles with ON&OFFROAD menu

Function PageF Cup holders 343

Ashtray 346Cigarette lighter 346Power socket 347

G COMAND controller; seethe separate operatinginstructions

H d ON&OFFROAD menubutton 252

I + LOW RANGE off-roadgear 250

Function PageJ Á Level control 204

K Ã DSR (Downhill SpeedRegulation) 246

L p Manual drive program 171

M Selector wheel for on-roadprograms 243Selector wheel for off-roadprograms 248

N Stowage compartment 334

Center console 37

At a

gla

nce

i Vehicles without ON&OFFROAD menuand AMG vehicles

Function PageF Cup holders 343

Ashtray 346Cigarette lighter 346Power socket 347

G COMAND controller; seethe separate operatinginstructions

H Ç Selects off-roadprogram (vehicles withAIRMATIC package) 248Ú Selects the driveprogram 169Selects the drive program(AMG vehicles) 169

Function PageI Ã DSR (Downhill Speed

Regulation) 246

J Á Level control(vehicles with AIRMATICpackage) 210

K e Adaptive DampingSystem (vehicles withAIRMATIC package) 209à Adjusts AMGadaptive damping system(AMG vehicles) 212

L Stowage compartment 334

38 Center consoleAt

a g

lanc

e

Overhead control panel

Function Page: p Switches the left-

hand reading lamp on/off 127

; c Switches the frontinterior lighting on 128

= u Switches the rearinterior lighting on/off 128

? | Switches the frontinterior lighting/automaticinterior lighting control off 127

A p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off 127

B 2 Opens/closes thesliding sunroof 973 Opens/closes thepanorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel with rollersunblinds 98

Function PageC Eyeglasses compartment 334

D F Roadside Assistancecall button (mbracesystem) 353

E G SOS button (mbracesystem) 351

F ï MB Info call button(mbrace system) 353

G Rear-view mirror 113

H Buttons for the garage dooropener 361

I Microphone for mbrace(emergency call system)telephone and the VoiceControl System1

1 Voice Control System only available together with COMAND. Observe the additional operating instructions.

Overhead control panel 39

At a

gla

nce

Door control panel

Function Page: Opens the door 85

; %& Unlocks/locksthe vehicle 85

= r45=Stores settings for the seat,exterior mirrors andsteering wheel (memoryfunction) 116

? Adjusts the seats 103

A 7Zö\Adjusts and folds theexterior mirrors in/outelectrically 113

Function PageB W Opens/closes the

side windows 92

C q Opens/closes thetailgate 90

D n Activates/deactivates the overridefeature for the sidewindows in the rearcompartment 65

40 Door control panelAt

a g

lanc

e

Useful information .............................. 42Panic alarm .......................................... 42Occupant safety .................................. 42Children in the vehicle ........................ 60Driving safety systems ....................... 65Theft deterrent locking system ......... 75

41

Safe

ty

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 27).

Panic alarm

X To activate: press ! button : for atleast one second.An alarm sounds and the exterior lightingflashes.

X To deactivate: press ! button :again.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.orX Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button.

The KEYLESS-GO key must be in thevehicle.

Occupant safety


G WARNINGModifications to or work improperlyconducted on restraint system componentsor their wiring, as well as tampering withinterconnected electronic systems, can leadto the restraint systems no longer functioningas intended.Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices(ETDs), for example, could deployinadvertently or fail to deploy in accidentsalthough the deceleration threshold for airbag deployment is exceeded. Therefore,never modify the restraint systems. Do nottamper with electronic components or theirsoftware.

In this section, you will learn the mostimportant facts about the restraint systemcomponents of the vehicle.The restraint system consists of:Rseat beltsRchild restraint systemsRLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchorsAdditional protection is provided by:RSRS (Supplemental Restraint System)RPRE-SAFE®

Rair bag system components with:- PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp- front-passenger seat with Occupant

Classification System (OCS)The different air bag systems workindependently of each other. The protectivefunctions of the system work in conjunctionwith each other. Not all air bags are alwaysdeployed in an accident.

i See "Children in the vehicle" forinformation on infants and childrentraveling with you in the vehicle restraintsystems for infants and children(Y page 60).

42 Occupant safetySa

fety

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)

IntroductionSRS consists of:R6 SRS warning lampRAir bagsRThe air bag control unit with crash sensorsREmergency Tensioning Devices for the

front seat belts and the outer seat belts inthe rearRBelt force limitersSRS reduces the risk of occupants cominginto contact with the vehicle's interior in theevent of an accident. It can also reduce theeffect of the forces to which occupants aresubjected during an accident.

SRS warning lamp

G WARNINGThe SRS self-check has detected amalfunction if the 6 SRS indicator lamp:Rdoes not light up at allRdoes not go out after approximately four

seconds after the engine is startedRlights up after the engine is started or while

the vehicle is in motionFor your safety, Mercedes-Benz stronglyrecommends that you have the systemchecked as soon as possible at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. SRS may otherwise failto activate when it is needed in the event ofan accident, which could lead to serious orfatal injuries. SRS might also be activatedunexpectedly and unnecessarily, which couldalso result in injury.In addition, work carried out improperly onSRS may render SRS inoperative or causeunintended air bag deployment. Work on theSRS system should only be carried out byqualified specialist personnel. Consult aqualified specialist workshop.If it is necessary to modify an air bag systemto accommodate a person with disabilities,contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center

for details. USA only: for further information,contact our Customer Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).

SRS functions are checked regularly whenyou switch on the ignition and when theengine is running. Therefore, malfunctionscan be detected in good time.The 6 SRS warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the ignition is switchedon. It goes out no later than a few secondsafter the engine is started.The SRS components are in operationalreadiness when the 6 SRS warning lampgoes out while the engine is running.

Safety guidelines for seat belts,Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs)and air bags

G WARNINGRDamaged seat belts or seat belts that have

been subjected to stress in an accidentmust be replaced. Their anchoring pointsmust also be checked. Only use seat beltsinstalled or supplied by an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency

Tensioning Devices (ETDs) containperchlorate material, which may requirespecial handling and regard for theenvironment. Check your national disposalguidelines. California residents, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.RAir bags and ETDs are designed to function

on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETDthat has deployed must be replaced. PRE-SAFE® has electrically operated reversiblebelt tensioners in addition to thepyrotechnic ETDs.RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges.

They could tear.RDo not make any modification that could

change the effectiveness of the seat belts.

Occupant safety 43

Safe

ty

Z

http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm

http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm

RDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this mayseverely weaken them. In a crash they maynot be able to provide adequate protection.RNo modifications of any kind may be made

to any components or wiring of the SRS.RDo not change or remove any component

or part of the SRS.RDo not install additional trim material, seat

covers, badges, etc. to the:- padded steering wheel boss- knee bag covers- front-passenger air bag cover- outer side of front seat bolsters- outer side of rear bench seat backrest

seat bolsters- roof lining trimRDo not install additional electrical/

electronic equipment on or near SRScomponents and wiring.RKeep area between air bags and occupants

free of objects (e.g. packages, purses,umbrellas, etc.).RDo not hang items such as coat hangers

from the coat hooks or handles over thedoor. These items may be thrown around inthe vehicle and cause head and otherinjuries when the window curtain air bag isdeployed.RAir bag system components will be hot after

an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them.RNever place your feet on the instrument

panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Alwayskeep both feet on the floor in front of theseat.RImproper repair work on the SRS creates a

risk of rendering the SRS inoperative orcausing unintended air bag deployment.Work on the SRS must therefore only beperformed by qualified technicians.Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.RFor your protection and the protection of

others, when scrapping the air bag unit orETD, our safety instructions must be

followed. These instructions are availablefrom any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.RGiven the considerable deployment speed,

required inflation volume, and the materialof the air bags, there is the possibility ofabrasions or other, potentially more seriousinjuries resulting from air bag deployment.

If you sell your vehicle, Mercedes-Benzstrongly recommends that you inform thesubsequent owner that the vehicle isequipped with SRS. Also, refer them to theapplicable section in the Operator's Manual.

Air bags


G WARNINGAir bags are designed to reduce the incidenceof injuries and fatalities in certain situations:Rfrontal impacts (driver's and front-

passenger front air bags and driver's kneebag)Rside impacts (side impact air bags and

window curtain air bags)Rrollover (window curtain air bags)However, no system available today cancompletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.When the air bags are deployed, a smallamount of powder is released. The powdergenerally does not constitute a health hazardand does not indicate that there is a fire in thevehicle. In order to prevent potentialbreathing difficulties, you should leave thevehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If youhave any breathing difficulty but cannot getout of the vehicle after the air bag inflates,then get fresh air by opening a window ordoor.

G WARNINGIn order to reduce the potential danger ofinjuries caused during the deployment of thefront air bags, the driver and front passenger


fety

must always be correctly seated and weartheir seat belts.For maximum protection in the event of acollision, you must always be in the normalseat position with your back against thebackrest. Fasten your seat belt and make surethat it is correctly positioned on your body.As the air bag inflates with considerablespeed and force, a proper seating positionand correct positioning of the hands on thesteering wheel will help to keep you at a safedistance from the air bag. Occupants who arenot wearing their seat belt, are not seatedproperly or are too close to the air bag can beseriously injured or killed by an air bag, as itinflates with great force instantaneously:Rsit with the seat belt fastened correctly and

in a position that is as upright as possiblewith your back against the backrest.Rmove the driver's seat as far back as

possible, still permitting proper operationof vehicle controls. The distance from thecenter of the driver's chest to the center ofthe air bag cover on the steering wheelmust be at least 10 inches (25 cm). Youshould be able to accomplish this byadjusting the seat and steering wheel. Ifyou have any difficulties, please contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Rdo not lean your head or chest close to the

steering wheel or dashboard.Ronly hold the steering wheel on the outside.

Placing hands and arms inside the rim canincrease the risk and potential severity ofhand/arm injury if the driver front air baginflates.Radjust the front-passenger seat as far back

as possible from the dashboard when theseat is occupied.Roccupants, especially children, should

never place their bodies or lean their headsin the area of the door where the sideimpact air bag inflates. This could result inserious or fatal injuries should the sideimpact air bag be deployed. Always sit asupright as possible, wear the seat belt

properly and use an appropriately sizedinfant restraint, toddler restraint or boosterseat recommended for the size and weightof the child.

Failure to follow these instructions can resultin severe injuries to you or other occupants.If you sell your vehicle, it is important that youmake the buyer aware of this safetyinformation. Be sure to give the buyer thisOperator's Manual.

G WARNINGAccident research shows that the safest placefor children in an automobile is in a rear seat.A side impact air bag related injury may occurif occupants, especially children, are notproperly seated or restrained when next to aside impact air bag which needs to deployrapidly in a side impact in order to do its job.To help avoid the possibility of injury, pleasefollow these guidelines:

(1) Always sit as upright as possibleand use the seat belts properly.Make sure that children 12 yearsold and under use an appropriatelysized child restraint, infantrestraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size andweight of the child.

(2) Always wear seat belts properly.

If the air bags are deployed, you will hear abang, and a small amount of powder may alsobe released. Only in rare cases will the bangaffect your hearing. The powder that isreleased generally does not constitute ahealth hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamplights up.The air bags are deployed if the air bag controlunit detects the need for deployment. Only inthe event of such a situation will the air bagsprovide their supplemental protection.If the driver and front passenger do not weartheir seat belts, it is not possible for the airbags to provide their supplementalprotection.

Occupant safety 45

Safe

ty

Z

In the event of other types of impacts andimpacts below air bag deploymentthresholds, the air bags will not deploy. Thedriver and passengers will then be protectedto the extent possible by a properly fastenedseat belt. A properly fastened seat belt is alsoneeded to provide the best possibleprotection in a rollover.Air bags provide additional protection; theyare not, however, a substitute for seat belts.All vehicle occupants must fasten their seatbelts regardless of whether your vehicle isequipped with air bags or not.It is important for your safety and that of yourpassengers to have deployed air bagsreplaced and to have any malfunctioning airbags repaired. This will help to make sure theair bags continue to perform their protectivefunction for the vehicle occupants in theevent of a crash.

Front air bags

Driver's air bag : deploys in front of thesteering wheel; front-passenger front airbag ; deploys in front of and above the glovebox.The front air bags increase protection for thedriver's and front-passenger's head andchest.They are deployed:Rin the event of certain frontal impactsRif the system determines that air bag

deployment can offer additional protectionto that provided by the seat belt

Rdepending on whether the seat belt is beingusedRindependently of other air bags in the

vehicleIf the vehicle overturns, the front air bags aregenerally not deployed. If the system detectshigh vehicle deceleration in a longitudinaldirection, the front air bags are deployed.When a child restraint system is installed onthe front-passenger seat and the 4PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp inthe center console does not light up:Ra child restraint system without a

transponder for the air bag deactivationsystem is installed orRa child restraint system with a transponder

has not been installed properly.Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front airbags. In the event of a collision, the air bagcontrol unit evaluates the vehicledeceleration. In the first deployment stage,the front air bag is filled with enoughpropellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries.The front air bag is fully deployed if a seconddeployment threshold is exceeded within afew milliseconds.The deployment of front-passenger front airbag ; is also influenced by the weightcategory of the front passenger, which isdetermined by the Occupant ClassificationSystem (OCS) (Y page 48).The lighter the passenger side occupant, thehigher the vehicle deceleration rate required(predicted at the start of the impact) forsecond-stage inflation of the front-passengerfront air bag. In the second stage, the frontair bags are inflated with the maximumamount of propellant gas available.The front air bags are not deployed insituations where a low impact severity ispredicted. You will then be protected by thefastened seat belt.


fety

Front-passenger front air bag ; will onlydeploy if:Rthe system, based on the OCS weight

sensor readings, has detected that thefront-passenger seat is occupied.Rthe 45 indicator lamp on the center

console is not lit (Y page 48).Rthe air bag control unit predicts a high

impact severity.

Driver's knee bag

Driver's knee bag : deploys under thesteering column. The driver's knee bag isalways deployed along with the driver's frontair bag. The driver's knee bag is designed tooperate together with the front air bags infrontal impacts if certain thresholds areexceeded. The driver's knee bag operatesbest in conjunction with correctly positionedand fastened seat belts.The driver's knee bag increases protection ofthe driver against:Rknee injuriesRthigh injuriesRlower leg injuries

Side impact air bags

G WARNINGOnly use seat covers which have been testedand approved by Mercedes-Benz for yourvehicle model. Using other seat covers mayinterfere with or prevent the deployment ofthe side impact air bags. Contact an

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center foravailability.

G WARNINGThe pressure sensors for side impact air bagcontrol are located in the doors. Do notmodify any components of the doors or doortrim panels including, for example, theaddition of door speakers.Improper repair work on the doors or themodification or addition of components to thedoors create a risk of rendering the sideimpact air bags inoperative or causingunintended air bag deployment. Work on thedoors must therefore only be performed byqualified technicians. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Front side impact air bags : and side impactair bags in the 2nd row of seats ; inflate nextto the outer seat cushion.When deployed, the side impact air bags offeradditional protection for the thorax and, onthe front seats, the pelvis of the vehicleoccupants on the side of the vehicle on whichthe impact occurs. However, they do notprotect the:RheadRneckRarmsThe side impact air bags are deployed:Ron the side on which an impact occursRat the start of an accident with a high rate

of lateral vehicle deceleration oracceleration, e.g. in a side impact

Occupant safety 47

Safe

ty

Z

Rregardless of whether the seat belt on thedriver's seat and the outer seats of the 2ndrow of seats is usedRindependently of the front air bagsRindependently of the ETDsIf the vehicle rolls over, the side impact airbags are generally not deployed. side impactair bags are deployed if the system detectshigh vehicle deceleration or acceleration in alateral direction, or also if the vehicle rollsover, and the system determines that sideimpact air bag deployment can offeradditional protection to that provided by theseat belt.Side impact air bags will not deploy in sideimpacts which do not exceed the system'spreset deployment thresholds for lateralacceleration/deceleration. You will then beprotected by the fastened seat belt.The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side is not deployed in thefollowing situations:Rthe OCS system detects that the front-

passenger seat is not occupied, andRthe front-passenger seat belt is not

fastened.The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side will deploy if the front-passenger seat belt is fastened, regardless ofwhether the front-passenger seat is occupiedor not.

Window curtain air bags

Window curtain air bags : enhance the levelof protection for the head, but not chest orarms, of the vehicle occupants on the side ofthe vehicle on which the impact occurs.The window curtain air bags are integratedinto the side of the roof frame and deploy inthe area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.Window curtain air bags are deployed:Rat the start of an accident with a high rate

of lateral vehicle deceleration oracceleration, e.g. in a side impactRon the side on which an impact occursRon the driver's side and passenger side, in

the event of a vehicle rollover and if thesystem determines that air bag deploymentcan offer the vehicle occupants additionalprotection to that provided by the seat beltRindependently of the use of the seat beltRregardless of whether the front-passenger

seat is occupiedRindependently of the front air bagsWindow curtain air bags will not deploy inimpacts which do not exceed the system'spreset deployment thresholds for lateralacceleration/deceleration. You will then beprotected by the fastened seat belt.

Occupant Classification System(OCS)

Method of operation

G WARNINGIf the 45 indicator lamp illuminateswhen an adult or someone larger than a smallindividual is in the front passenger seat, havethe front passenger reposition himself orherself in the seat until the 45indicator lamp goes out.In the event of a collision, the air bag controlunit will not allow front passenger front air bagdeployment when the OCS has classified thefront passenger seat occupant as weighing asmuch as or less than a typical 12-month-old


fety

child in a standard child restraint or if the frontpassenger seat is classified as being empty.When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat occupant is classified asbeing up to or less than the weight of a typical12-month-old child in a standard childrestraint, the 45 indicator lamp willilluminate when the engine is started andremain illuminated. This indicates that thefront passenger front air bag is deactivated.When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat is classified as being empty,the 45 indicator lamp will illuminatewhen the engine is started and remainilluminated. This indicates that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated.When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat occupant is classified asbeing heavier than the weight of a typical 12-month-old child seated in a standard childrestraint or as being a small individual (suchas a young teenager or a small adult), the45 indicator lamp will illuminate forapproximately 6 seconds when the engine isstarted. Depending on occupant weightsensor readings from the seat, it will thenremain illuminated or go out. With the45 indicator lamp illuminated, thefront passenger front air bag is deactivated.With the 45 indicator lamp out, thefront passenger front air bag is activated.When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat occupant is classified as anadult or someone larger than a smallindividual, the 45 indicator lamp willilluminate for approximately six secondswhen the engine is started and then go out.This indicates that the front passenger frontair bag is activated.If the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated,the front passenger front air bag isdeactivated and will not be deployed.

If the 45 indicator lamp is notilluminated, the front passenger front air bagis activated and will be deployedRin the event of certain frontal impactsRif the impact exceeds a predetermined

triggering thresholdRindependent of the side impact air bag or

pelvis air bagIf the front passenger front air bag isdeployed, the rate of inflation will beinfluenced byRthe rate of vehicle deceleration as assessed

by the air bag control unitRthe front passenger's weight category as

identified by the OCS

G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained on the rearseats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,we strongly recommend that children beplaced in the rear seats whenever possible.Regardless of seating position, children 12years old and under must be seated andproperly secured in an appropriate infantrestraint, toddler restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild.The infant or child restraint must be properlysecured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seatbelt and Top Tether strap, or lower anchorsand Top Tether strap, fully in accordance withthe child seat manufacturer's instructions.Occupants, especially children, should alwayssit as upright as possible, wear the seat beltproperly and use an appropriately sized infantrestraint, toddler restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild.

Occupant safety 49

Safe

ty

Z

Children can be killed or seriously injured byan inflating air bag. Note the followingimportant information when circumstancesrequire you to place a child in the front-passenger seat:RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag

technology designed to deactivate thefront-passenger front air bag in your vehiclewhen the system senses the weight of atypical 12-month-old child or less alongwith the weight of a standard appropriatechild restraint on the front-passenger seat.RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the

front-passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front-passengerfront air bag inflates in a collision whichcould occur under some circumstances,even with the air bag technology installedin your vehicle. The only means to eliminatethis risk completely is never to place a childin a rear-facing child restraint in the front-passenger seat. We therefore stronglyrecommend that you always place a childin a rear-facing child restraint on the rearseat.RIf you install a rear-facing child restraint on

the front-passenger seat, make sure the45 indicator lamp is illuminated,indicating that the front-passenger front airbag is deactivated. Should the 45indicator lamp not illuminate or go out whilethe restraint is installed, please checkinstallation. Periodically check the45 indicator lamp while driving tomake sure that the 45 indicatorlamp is illuminated. If the 45indicator lamp goes out or remains out, donot transport a child on the front-passengerseat until the system has been repaired.A child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront-passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front-passengerfront air bag inflates.

RIf you place a child in a forward-facing childrestraint on the front-passenger seat:- move the seat as far back as possible- use the proper child restraint

recommended for the age, size andweight of the child

- secure child restraint with the vehicle'sseat belt according to the child seatmanufacturer's instructions

RFor children larger than the typical 12-month-old child, the front-passenger frontair bag may or may not be activated.

G WARNINGIf the red 6 SRS warning lamp in theinstrument cluster and the 45indicator lamp light up simultaneously, theOCS is malfunctioning. The front passengerfront air bag will be deactivated in this case.Have the system checked by qualifiedtechnicians as soon as possible. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Only have the seat repaired or replaced at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.In order to ensure proper operation of the airbag system and OCS:RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a

position that is as upright as possible withyour back against the seat backrest.RWhen seated, a passenger should not

position him/herself in such a way as tocause the passenger's weight to be liftedfrom the seat cushion as this may result inthe OCS being unable to correctlyapproximate the passenger's weightcategory.RRead and observe all warnings in this

chapter.


fety

If the SmartKey has been removed from theignition lock or is in position 0,45 indicator lamp : does not lightup.The Occupant Classification System (OCS)categorizes the occupant on the front-passenger seat using a weight sensor. Thefront-passenger front air bag is deactivatedautomatically for certain weight categories.45 indicator lamp : shows you thecurrent status. If45 indicator lamp : lights up, thefront-passenger air bag is disabled.The system does not deactivate:Rthe side impact air bagRthe window curtain air bagRthe Emergency Tensioning DevicesTo be classified correctly, the front passengermust sit:Rwith the seat belt fastened correctlyRin a position that is as upright as possible

with their back against the seat backrestRwith their feet on the floorThe OCS weight sensor reading is affected ifthe occupant's weight is transferred, e.g. byleaning on the armrest.If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover orthe seat cushion are damaged, have thenecessary repair work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you only use seataccessories that have been approved byMercedes-Benz.

Both the driver and the front passengershould always observe the 45indicator lamp to determine whether or notthe front passenger is positioned correctly.Also observe the air bag display messages,which appear in the instrument cluster(Y page 294).If the driver's air bag deploys, this does notmean that the front-passenger front air bagwill also deploy.The OCS may have detected that the seat:Ris empty or occupied by the weight of a

typical child up to twelve months old,seated in a child restraint systemRis occupied by a small individual, such as a

young teenager or a small adultRis occupied by a child in a child restraint

system whose weight is greater than thatof a typical twelve month old child.

These are examples of when the OCSdeactivates the front-passenger front air bag.Deactivation takes place although thecollision fulfills the criteria for deploying thedriver's air bag.

System self-test

G WARNINGIf the 4 5 indicator lamp does notilluminate, the system is not functioning. Youmust contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter before seating any child on the frontpassenger seat.

G WARNINGNever place anything between seat cushionand child seat (e.g. a pillow), since it reducesthe effectiveness of the OCS. The undersideand rear side child restraint system must beplaced entirely on the seat cushion and thebackrest of the front-passenger seatbackrest.If necessary, adjust the tilt of the passengerseat backrest.

Occupant safety 51

Safe

ty

Z

An incorrectly mounted child seat could causeinjuries to the child in case of an accident,instead of increasing protection for the child.Follow the manufacturer's instructions forinstallation of child restraint systems.

The 45 indicator lamp lights up:Rif you turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock

to position 1 or 2Rif you press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop

button once or twice on vehicles withKEYLESS-GORif an adult is seated properly on the front-

passenger seat and the OCS classifies theoccupant as an adultThe 45 indicator lamp goes outafter approximately six seconds.If the seat is not occupied and the OCSdetects that the front-passenger seat isempty, the 45 indicator lamp willcontinue to light up. The 45indicator lamp will not go out.

For more information about the OCS, see"Problems with the Occupant ClassificationSystem" (Y page 53).


fety

Problems with the occupant classification system

G WARNINGIf the 45 indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated when the weight of a typicaladult or someone larger than a small individual has been detected on the passenger seat, do notallow any occupant to use the passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

G WARNINGIf the 45 indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with the weight of a typical12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or less, or is unoccupied, on the front-passengerseat, do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The 45indicator lamp lights upand stays on.The person on thefront-passenger seat:Rhas the weight of a

typical adultRhas been determined

by the system not tobe a child

The OCS is malfunctioning.X Have the OCS checked as soon as possible at a qualified

specialist workshop.X Observe the additional messages in the multifunction display

(Y page 294).


The 45indicator lamp does notlight up and/or doesnot stay on.The front-passengerseat is:RunoccupiedRoccupied with a

weight up to that of atypical twelve-month-old child in astandard childrestraint system

The OCS is malfunctioning.X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the

child seat.X Check the installation of the child restraint system.X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto

the seat.X If the 45 indicator lamp remains off, have the OCS

checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.Do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat as long asthe OCS is not functioning.

X Observe the additional messages in the multifunction display(Y page 294).

Occupant safety 53

Safe

ty

Z

PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection system)

G WARNINGThe PRE-SAFE® system reduces the impact ofan accident on vehicle occupants, as long astheir seat belts have been fastened correctly.Although your vehicle is equipped with a PRE-SAFE® system, the possibility of injury in theevent of an accident cannot be ruled out. Youshould therefore always drive carefully andadapt your driving style to the prevailing road,weather and traffic conditions.

G WARNINGMake sure that nobody can become trappedas you adjust the seat.

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell or behind the seats when resettingthe seats. There is a risk that the seatsand/or the objects could be damaged.

PRE-SAFE® takes preemptive measures toprotect occupants in certain hazardoussituations.PRE-SAFE® intervenes:Rif BAS intervenes, e.g. in emergency

braking situationsRif BAS PLUS intervenes powerfully — on

vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUSRif, on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS, the

radar sensor system detects an imminentdanger of collision in certain situationsRin critical driving situations, e.g. when

physical limits are exceeded and thevehicle understeers or oversteers severely

PRE-SAFE® takes the following measuresdepending on the hazardous situationdetected:Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned.Rvehicles with the memory function: the

front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in anunfavorable position.

Rvehicles with a multicontour seat: the airpressure in the side bolsters of the seatbackrest is increased.Rif the vehicle skids, the sliding sunroof/

panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel and the side windows are closed sothat only a small gap remains.

If the hazardous situation passes withoutresulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackensthe belt pretensioning. In vehicles withmulticontour seats, the air pressure in theside bolsters is reduced again. All settingsmade by PRE-SAFE® can then be reversed.If the seat belts are not released:X Move the backrest or seat back slightly, but

only when the vehicle is stationary.The belt pretensioning is reduced and thelocking mechanism is released.

More information about seat belt adjustment,a convenience function integrated into PRE-SAFE®, can be found in the "Seat beltadjustment" section (Y page 57).

Seat belts


G WARNINGAlways fasten your seat belt before driving off.Always make sure all of your passengers areproperly restrained. You and your passengersshould always wear seat belts.Failure to wear and properly fasten andposition your seat belt greatly increases yourrisk of injuries and their likely severity in anaccident.If you are ever in an accident, your injuries canbe considerably more severe without yourseat belt properly buckled. Without your seatbelt buckled, you are much more likely to hitthe interior of the vehicle or be ejected fromit. You can be seriously injured or killed.In the same crash, the possibility of injury ordeath is lessened if you are properly wearingyour seat belt. The air bags can only protect


fety

as intended if the occupants are properlywearing their seat belts.

G WARNINGNever ride in a moving vehicle with the seatbackrest in an excessively reclined position asthis can be dangerous. You could slide underthe seat belt in a collision. If you slide underit, the seat belt would apply force at theabdomen or neck. That could cause seriousor even fatal injuries. The seat backrest andseat belt provide the best restraint when thewearer is in a position that is as upright aspossible and the seat belt is properlypositioned on the body.

G WARNINGNever let more people ride in the vehicle thanthere are seat belts available. Make sureeveryone riding in the vehicle is correctlyrestrained with a separate seat belt. Neveruse a seat belt for more than one person at atime.

G WARNINGAlways have damaged seat belts or seat beltsthat have been subjected to a load in anaccident replaced and the anchorageschecked.Only use seat belts that have been approvedby Mercedes-Benz.Never tamper with seat belts. This can resultin the unintended deployment of theEmergency Tensioning Devices or the failureto deploy when necessary.Do not bleach or dye seat belts, as this mayseverely weaken them. In the event of acollision, they may be unable to provideadequate protection.Have all work carried out only by qualifiedtechnicians. Consult a qualified specialistworkshop.

The use of seat belts and infant and childrestraint systems is required by law in:Rall 50 statesRU.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesEven where this is not required by law, allvehicle occupants should correctly fastentheir seat belts before starting the journey.

i See "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 60) for further information oninfants and children traveling in the vehicleas well as on child restraint systems.

Correct use of the seat belts

G WARNINGUSE SEAT BELTS PROPERLYRSeat belts can only work when used

properly. Never wear seat belts in any otherway than as described in this section, asthat could result in serious injuries in theevent of an accident.REach occupant should wear their seat belt

at all times, because seat belts help reducethe likelihood of and potential severity ofinjuries in accidents, including rollovers.The integrated restraint system includesSRS (driver front air bag, driver's side kneebag, front-passenger front air bag, sideimpact air bags, window curtain air bags forthe side windows), Emergency TensioningDevices, seat belt force limiters, and frontseat knee bolsters.The system is designed to enhance theprotection offered to properly beltedoccupants in certain frontal (front air bags,driver's side knee bag and ETDs) and side(side impact air bags, window curtain airbags, and ETDs) impacts which exceedpreset deployment thresholds and incertain rollovers (window curtain air bagsand ETDs).RNever wear the shoulder belt under your

arm, across your neck or off your shoulder.

Occupant safety 55

Safe

ty

Z

In a frontal crash, your body would movetoo far forward. That would increase thechance of head and neck injuries. The seatbelt would also apply too much force to theribs or abdomen, which could severelyinjure internal organs such as your liver orspleen.Adjust the seat belt so that the shouldersection is located as close as possible tothe middle of the shoulder. It should nottouch the neck. Never pass the shoulderportion of the seat belt under your arm. Forthis purpose, you can adjust the height ofthe seat belt outlet.RPosition the lap belt as low as possible on

your hips and not across the abdomen. Ifthe lap belt is positioned across yourabdomen, it could cause serious injuries ina crash.RNever wear seat belts over rigid or

breakable objects in or on your clothing,such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., asthese might cause injuries.RMake sure the seat belt is always fitted

snugly. Take special care of this whenwearing loose clothing.RNever use a seat belt for more than one

person at a time. Do not fasten a seat beltaround a person and another person orother objects at the same time.RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In a

crash, you would not have the full width ofthe seat belt to distribute impact forces.The twisted seat belt against your bodycould cause injuries.RPregnant women should also always use a

lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portionshould be positioned as low as possible onthe hips to avoid any possible pressure onthe abdomen.RPlace the seat backrest in a position that is

as upright as possible.RCheck your seat belt during travel to make

sure it is properly positioned.

RNever place your feet on the instrumentpanel, dashboard, or on the seat. Alwayskeep both feet on the floor in front of theseat.RWhen using a seat belt to secure infant

restraints, toddler restraints, or children inbooster seats, always follow the child seatmanufacturer's instructions.

G WARNINGDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges. Theycould tear.Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in thedoor or in the seat adjustment mechanism.This could damage the seat belt.Never attempt to make modifications to seatbelts. This could impair the effectiveness ofthe seat belts.

Fastening seat belts

G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained on the rearseats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,we strongly recommend that children beplaced in the rear seat whenever possible.Regardless of seating position, children 12years old and under must be seated andproperly secured in an appropriately sizedchild restraint system or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild. For additional information, see the"Children in the vehicle" section.A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries issignificantly increased if the child restraintsare not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.


fety

X Adjust the seat and move the backrest toan almost vertical position (Y page 102).

X Pull the seat belt smoothly through beltsash guide :.

X Without twisting it, guide the shouldersection of the seat belt across the middleof your shoulder and the lap section acrossyour pelvis.

X Engage belt tongue ; in buckle =.Seat-belt adjustment: if necessary, thedriver's and front-passenger seat beltsautomatically adjust to the upper body(Y page 57).

X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to theappropriate height (Y page 57).

X If necessary, pull upwards on the shouldersection of the seat belt to tighten the beltacross your body.

All seat belts except the driver's seat belt areequipped with a special seat belt retractor tosecurely fasten child restraint systems in thevehicle. Further information can be foundunder "Special seat belt retractor"(Y page 62).For more information about releasing the seatbelt with release button ?, see "Releasingseat belts" (Y page 58).

Seat belt adjustmentThe seat-belt adjustment function adjusts thedriver's and front-passenger seat belt to theupper body of the occupants.The belt strap is tightened slightly when:Ryou engage the belt tongue in the belt

buckle and you then turn the SmartKey toposition 2 in the ignition lock.Rthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition

lock and you then engage the belt tonguein the buckle.

The seat-belt adjustment will apply aretraction force if any slack is detectedbetween the occupant and the seat belt. Donot hold on to the seat belt tightly while it isadjusting. You can switch the seat-beltadjustment on and off in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 277).The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part ofthe PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Moreinformation about PRE-SAFE® can be foundunder "PRE-SAFE® (preventative occupantprotection)" (Y page 54).

Belt height adjustment

You can adjust the seat belt height on thefront seats. Adjust the belt to a height thatallows the upper part of the seat belt to berouted across the center of your shoulder.X To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards.

The belt sash guide engages in variouspositions.

X To lower: press and hold belt sash guiderelease :.

Occupant safety 57

Safe

ty

Z

X Slide the belt sash guide downwards.X Release belt sash guide release : and

make sure that the belt sash guide hasengaged.

Releasing seat belts! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled

up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tonguewill be trapped in the door or in the seatmechanism. This could damage the door,the door trim panel and the seat belt.Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfilltheir protective function and must bereplaced. Visit a qualified specialistworkshop.

: Belt sash guide; Seat belt tongue= Buckle? Release buttonX Press release button ? and guide belt

tongue ; back towards belt sashguide : .

Belt warning for the driver and frontpassengerRegardless of whether the driver's and front-passenger seat belts have already beenfastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp

lights up for six seconds each time the engineis started. It then goes out if the driver andthe front passenger have fastened their seatbelts.If the driver's seat belt is not fastened whenthe engine is started, an additional warningtone will sound. The warning tone goes outafter approximately six seconds or once thedriver's seat belt is fastened.If after six seconds the driver or frontpassenger have not fastened their seat beltsand the doors are closed, the 7 seat beltwarning lamp lights up:Runtil the driver's or front passenger's seat

belt is fastenedRif a vehicle speed of 15 mph (25 km/h) is

exceeded, a warning tone also sounds withincreasing intensity for a maximum of60 seconds or until the driver or frontpassenger have fastened their seat belts.

If the driver/front passenger unfasten theirseat belt while the vehicle is in motion, the7 seat belt warning lamp lights up and awarning tone sounds again.The warning tone ceases even if the driver orfront passenger have still not fastened theirseat belt after 60 seconds. The 7 seat beltwarning lamp stops flashing but remainsilluminated.After the vehicle comes to a standstill, thewarning tone is reactivated and the 7 seatbelt warning lamp flashes again if the vehiclespeed again exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h).The 7 seat belt warning lamp only goesout if:Rboth the driver and the front passenger

have fastened their seat belts.orRthe vehicle is stationary and a door is open.

i For more information on the 7 seatbelt warning lamp, see "Warning andindicator lamps in the instrument cluster,seat belts" (Y page 317).


fety

Emergency Tensioning Devices, seatbelt force limiter

G WARNINGPyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devicesthat have been deployed must be renewed.For your safety, when disposing of EmergencyTensioning Devices, always observe thesafety instructions. These are available fromany authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The PRE-SAFE® system has electricallyoperated reversible pre-tensioners that donot require replacement after activation.

! If the front-passenger seat is notoccupied, do not engage the seat belttongue in the buckle on the front-passenger seat. Otherwise, the EmergencyTensioning Device could be triggered in theevent of an accident.

X In order to ensure that the pyrotechnicEmergency Tensioning Devices have notbeen triggered, always have the seat beltschecked after an accident.If the Emergency Tensioning Devices havebeen triggered, they must be replaced.

The front seat belts and the outer seat beltsin the rear are equipped with EmergencyTensioning Devices and belt force limiters.The ETDs on the driver's and front-passengerseat consist of pyrotechnic belt buckletensioners and belt anchor tensioners thatare triggered together. The belt buckletensioner is mounted on the B-pillar and thebelt anchor installing is mounted on the sideof the seat. After deploying, both tensionersmust always be replaced.The ETDs tighten the seat belts in an accident,pulling them close against the body.The ETDs do not correct incorrect seatpositions or incorrectly fastened seat belts.The ETDs do not pull vehicle occupants backtowards the backrest.When triggered, seat belt force limiters helpto reduce the peak force exerted by the seatbelt on the vehicle occupant.

The belt force limiters for the front seats aresynchronized with the front air bags, whichtake on a part of the deceleration force. Thisresults in the force exerted on the occupantbeing distributed over a greater area.The ETDs can only be activated when:Rthe ignition is switched on.Rthe restraint systems are operational; see

"SRS warning lamp" (Y page 43).Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on

each of the lap-shoulder belts in the front.Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied and

the belt tongue is engaged in the buckle onthe front-passenger side

The ETDs on the outside seats in the rearcompartment are triggered independently ofthe lock status of the seat belts.The ETDs are triggered depending on the typeand severity of an accident:Rif, in the event of a head-on or rear-end

collision, the vehicle decelerates oraccelerates rapidly in a longitudinaldirection during the initial stages of theimpactRif, in the event of a side impact, on the side

opposite the impact the vehicledecelerates or accelerates rapidly in alateral directionRif, in certain situations where the vehicle

overturns, the system determines that itcan provide additional protection

If the ETDs are deployed, you will hear a bang,and a small amount of powder may also bereleased. Only in rare cases will the bangaffect your hearing. The powder that isreleased generally does not constitute ahealth hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamplights up.

Occupant safety 59

Safe

ty

Z

Children in the vehicle

Child restraint systems


G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained in the rearseating positions than in the front seatingposition. Thus, we strongly recommend thatchildren be placed in the rear seats wheneverpossible. Regardless of seating position,children 12 years old and under must beseated and properly secured in an appropriateinfant restraint, toddler restraint, or boosterseat recommended for the size and weight ofthe child.The infant or child restraint must be properlysecured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seatbelt and top tether strap, or lower anchors andtop tether strap, fully in accordance with thechild seat manufacturer's instructions.Occupants, especially children, should alwayssit as upright as possible, wear the seat beltproperly and use an appropriately sized infantrestraint, toddler restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild.Children can be killed or seriously injured byan inflating air bag. Note the followingimportant information when circumstancesrequire you to place a child in the frontpassenger seat:RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag

technology designed to deactivate the frontpassenger front air bag in your vehiclewhen the system senses the weight of atypical 12-month-old child or less alongwith the weight of a standard appropriatechild restraint on the front passenger seat.RFor children larger than the typical

12-month-old child, the front passengerfront air bag may or may not be activated.Always make sure the 4 5 indicatorlamp is illuminated, indicating that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated.

RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front passengerfront air bag inflates in a collision whichcould occur under some circumstances,even with the air bag technology installedin your vehicle. The only means tocompletely eliminate this risk is to neverplace a child in a rear-facing child restraintin the front seat. We therefore stronglyrecommend that you always place a childin a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat.RIf you must install a rear-facing child

restraint on the front passenger seatbecause circumstances require you to doso, make sure the 4 5 indicatorlamp is illuminated, indicating that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated.Should the 4 5 indicator lamp notilluminate or go out while the restraint isinstalled, please check installation.Periodically check the 4 5 indicatorlamp while driving to make sure the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated. If the4 5 indicator lamp goes out orremains out, do not transport a child on thefront passenger seat until the system hasbeen repaired.A child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front passengerfront air bag inflates.RIf you have to place a child in a forward-

facing child restraint on the front passengerseat, move the seat as far back as possible,use the proper child restraintrecommended for the age, size and weightof the child, and secure child restraint withthe vehicle's seat belt according to thechild seat manufacturer's instructions.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is not fittedcorrectly on a suitable seat, it may not fulfilits protective function. In the event of anaccident, sharp braking or a sudden change

60 Children in the vehicleSa

fety

in direction, the child may not be heldsecurely. The child could thus be seriously oreven fatally injured. For this reason, whenfitting a child restraint system, observe themanufacturer's installation instructions andthe correct use of the child restraint system.Child restraint systems should preferably befitted on the rear seats. The child is generallybetter protected there.The entire base of the child restraint systemmust always rest on the seat cushion.Therefore, never place objects, e.g. a cushion,under the child restraint system.Only use child restraint systems with theoriginal cover designed for them. Only replacedamaged covers with genuine covers.We recommend that you use the childrestraint systems which have beenrecommended for Mercedes-Benz.

G WARNINGInfants and small children should never sharea seat belt with another occupant. In the eventof an accident, they could be crushedbetween the occupant and seat belt.A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries issignificantly increased if the child restraintsare not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.Children that are too large for a child restraintmust travel in seats using normal seat belts.Position the shoulder belt across the chestand shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seatmay be necessary to achieve proper seat beltpositioning for children over 41 lb (18 kg) untilthey reach a height where a lap-shoulder beltfits properly without a booster.When the child restraint is not in use, removeit from the vehicle or secure it with the seatbelt to prevent the child restraint frombecoming a projectile in the event of anaccident.

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock. Always takethe SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.Do not leave children unattended in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system, or with access to anunlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervisedaccess to a vehicle could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury. The childrencould:Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicleRbe seriously or fatally injured through

excessive exposure to extreme heat or coldRinjure themselves or cause an accident with

vehicle equipment that can be operatedeven if the SmartKey is removed from theignition lock or removed from the vehicle,such as seat adjustment, steering wheeladjustment, or the memory function

If children open a door, they could injure otherpersons or get out of the vehicle and injurethemselves or be injured by following traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become veryhot, and the child could be burned on theseparts.

G WARNINGDo not carry heavy or hard objects in thepassenger compartment or cargocompartment unless they are firmly securedin place.Unsecured or improperly positioned cargoincreases a child's risk of injury in the eventofRstrong braking maneuversRsudden changes of directionRan accident

Further information on secure stowage ofloads can be found under "Loadingguidelines".

Children in the vehicle 61

Safe

ty

Z

If an infant or child is traveling in the vehicle:RSecure the child with a child or infant seat

restraint system appropriate to the age andweight of the child.RMake sure that the infant or child is

properly secured at all times while thevehicle is in motion.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you alwaysproperly secure all infants and children witha child or infant seat restraint system for thetrip.The use of seat belts and infant and childrestraint systems is required by law in:Rall 50 statesRU.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesInfants and children must always be seated inan appropriate infant or child restraint systemrecommended for the size and weight of thechild. The infant or child restraint systemmust be properly secured in accordance withthe manufacturer's instructions.All infant or child restraint systems must meetthe following standards:RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards 213 and 225RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

213 and 210.2An information label on the child restraintsystem indicates whether it meets thesestandards. This information is also providedin the installation instructions supplied withthe child restraint system.Always read and follow the manufacturer'sinstructions when using an infant or childrestraint system or booster seat.Observe the warning labels in the vehicleinterior or on the infant or child restraint.

Special seat belt retractor

G WARNINGIf you release the seat belt when driving, thespecial seat belt retractor is deactivated.The released seat belt cannot be engagedagain while driving, because the inertia reelpulls in the seat belt a small distance. Thechild restraint system is no longer properlysecured. There is an increased risk of seriousinjury or even fatal injury.Always keep the seat belt of the activatedspecial seat belt retractor engaged whendriving.

All seat belts except the driver's seat belt areequipped with a special seat belt retractor.When activated, the special seat beltretractor ensures that the seat belt will notslacken once the child restraint system hasbeen secured.Installing a child restraint system:X Always comply with the manufacturer's

installation instructions.X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat

belt retractor.X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt

buckle.

Activating the special seat belt retractor:X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the seat

belt retractor retract it again.While the seat belt is retracting, you shouldhear a ratcheting sound. The special seatbelt retractor is activated.

X Push down on the child restraint system totake up any slack.

Removing a child restraint system/deactivating the special seat belt retractor:X Always comply with the manufacturer's

installation instructions.X Press the seat belt release button and

guide the belt tongue to the belt outlet.The special seat belt retractor isdeactivated.


fety

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchorsin the rear

G WARNINGChildren that are too large for a child restraintmust travel in seats using normal seat belts.Position shoulder belt across the chest andshoulder, not face or neck.A booster seat may be necessary to achieveproper seat belt positioning for children over41 lb (18 kg) until they reach a height wherea lap/shoulder belt fits properly without abooster.Install the child restraint system inaccordance with the manufacturer'sinstructions.Attach the child restraint system to bothsecuring rings.An incorrectly installed child restraint systemcould come loose during an accident andseriously or even fatally injure the child.Child restraint systems or child seat securingrings that are malfunctioning or damaged asthe result of a collision must be replaced.

! When installing the child restraint system,make sure that the seat belt for the middleseat does not get trapped. The seat beltcould otherwise be damaged.

X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatsecuring system. Comply with themanufacturer's instructions wheninstalling.

ISOFIX is a standardized securing system forspecially designed child restraint systems on

the rear seats. Securing rings : for twoLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systemsare installed on the left and right of the rearseats.Secure child restraint systems without aLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securingsystem using the seat belts in the vehicle.When installing child restraint systems, youmust observe the manufacturer's installationinstructions.

Top Tether

Top Tether anchoragesG WARNINGAlways lock the rear seat backrests in theirupright position when the rear seats areoccupied by passengers. Lock the rear seatbackrests in their upright position beforeinstalling the Top Tether straps or when thecargo compartment is not in use. Make surethat rear seat backrests are secured properlyby pushing and pulling on the seat backrests.If the seat backrest is not locked properly, theseat backrest could fold forward. The childrestraint system is no longer supportedproperly or held in position and can no longerfulfill its function. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries.

Children in the vehicle 63

Safe

ty

Z

Top Tether provides an additional connectionbetween a child restraint system, securedwith a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mount,and the rear seat. This helps reduce the riskof injury even further.The Top Tether anchorages are located on therear side of the rear seat backrests.X Move head restraint = upwards.X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child

restraint system with Top Tether. Complywith the manufacturer's installationinstructions when doing so.

X Route Top Tether belt B under headrestraint = between the two head restraintbars.

X Guide Top Tether belt B downwardsbetween cargo compartment cover : andrear seat backrest ;.

X Hook Top Tether hook A of Top Tether beltB into Top Tether anchorage ?.

Ensure that:RTop Tether hook A is hooked into Top

Tether anchorage ? as shown.RTop Tether belt B is not twisted.RTop Tether belt B is routed between rear

seat backrest ; and cargocompartment cover : if cargocompartment cover : is installed.RTop Tether belt B is routed between the

rear seat backrest ; and the cargo netif the cargo net is installed.

X Tension Top Tether belt B. Comply withthe manufacturer's installationinstructions when doing so.

X Move head restraint = back down againslightly if necessary (Y page 106). Makesure that you do not interfere with thecorrect routing of Top Tether belt B.

Child-proof locks


G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock. Always takethe SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.Do not leave children unattended in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system, or with access to anunlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervisedaccess to a vehicle could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury. The childrencould:Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicleRbe seriously or fatally injured through

excessive exposure to extreme heat or coldRinjure themselves or cause an accident with

vehicle equipment that can be operatedeven if the SmartKey is removed from theignition lock or removed from the vehicle,such as seat adjustment, steering wheeladjustment, or the memory function


fety

If children open a door, they could injure otherpersons or get out of the vehicle and injurethemselves or be injured by following traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become veryhot, and the child could be burned on theseparts.

Child-proof locks for the rear doors

G WARNINGChildren could open a rear door from insidethe vehicle. This could result in seriousinjuries or an accident. Therefore, whenchildren ride in the rear always secure the reardoors with the child-proof locks.

You secure each door individually with thechild-proof locks on the rear doors. A doorsecured with a child-proof lock cannot beopened from inside the vehicle. When thevehicle is unlocked, the door can be openedfrom the outside.X To activate: press the child-proof lock

lever up in the direction of arrow :.X Make sure that the child-proof locks are

working properly.X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock

lever down in the direction of arrow ;.

Override feature for the rear sidewindows

G WARNINGWhen children ride on the vehicle's rear seats,activate the override switch. Otherwise, thechildren could be injured, e.g. by trappingthemselves in the rear side window.

X To activate/deactivate: press button :.If indicator lamp ; is lit, operation of therear side windows is disabled. Operation isonly possible using the switches in thedriver's door. If indicator lamp ; is off,operation is possible using the switches inthe rear compartment.

Driving safety systems

Overview of driving safety systemsIn this section, you will find information aboutthe following driving safety systems:RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

(Y page 66)RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 67)RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS)

(Y page 67)RCOLLISION PREVENTION

ASSIST(Y page 68)RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

(Y page 71)REBD (electronic brake force distribution)

(Y page 73)RADAPTIVE BRAKE(Y page 73)

Driving safety systems 65

Safe

ty

Z

RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 73)RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 75)

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style orbecome distracted, the driving safetysystems can neither reduce the risk ofaccident nor override the laws of physics.Driving safety systems are merely aidsdesigned to assist driving. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed and for braking ingood time. Always adapt your driving style tosuit the prevailing road and weatherconditions and maintain a safe distance fromthe vehicle in front. Drive carefully.

i The driving safety systems described onlywork as effectively as possible when thereis adequate contact between the tires andthe road surface. Please pay specialattention to the notes on tires,recommended minimum tire tread depths,etc. (Y page 398).In wintry driving conditions, always usewinter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary,snow chains. Only in this way will thedriving safety systems described in thissection work as effectively as possible.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"

section (Y page 66).

G WARNINGIf ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock whenbraking. The steerability and brakingcharacteristics may be severely impaired.Additionally, further driving safety systemsare deactivated. There is an increased dangerof skidding and accidents.

Drive on carefully. Have ABS checkedimmediately at a qualified specialistworkshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,including driving safety systems, will alsobecome inoperative. Observe the informationon the ABS warning lamp (Y page 318) anddisplay messages which may be shown in theinstrument cluster (Y page 283).ABS regulates brake pressure in such a waythat the wheels do not lock when you brake.This allows you to continue steering thevehicle when braking.ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph(8 km/h) upwards, regardless of road-surfaceconditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces,even if you only brake gently.The yellow ! ABS warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up when the ignitionis switched on. It goes out when the engine isrunning.

BrakingX If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the

brake pedal vigorously until the brakingsituation is over.

X To make a full brake application:depress the brake pedal with full force.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feela pulsing in the brake pedal.The pulsating brake pedal can be anindication of hazardous road conditions, andfunctions as a reminder to take extra carewhile driving.

Off-road ABSAn ABS system specifically suited to off-roadterrain is activated automatically once the off-road program is activated on:Rvehicles without the ON&OFFROAD

package (Y page 248)Rvehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package

(Y page 248)

66 Driving safety systemsSa

fety

At speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h), the frontwheels lock cyclically during braking. Thedigging-in effect achieved in the processreduces the stopping distance on off-roadterrain. This limits steering capability.

BAS (Brake Assist System)i Observe the "Important safety notes"


G WARNINGIf BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distancein an emergency braking situation isincreased. There is a risk of an accident.In an emergency braking situation, depressthe brake pedal with full force. ABS preventsthe wheels from locking.

BAS operates in emergency brakingsituations. If you depress the brake pedalquickly, BAS automatically boosts the brakingforce, thus shortening the stopping distance.The brakes will function as usual once yourelease the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

BAS PLUS (Brake Assist SystemPLUS)

i Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 66).

BAS PLUS is only available in vehiclesequipped with DISTRONIC PLUS.For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, theradar sensor system must be:Ractivated (Y page 277)RoperationalWith the help of the radar sensor system, BASPLUS can detect obstacles that are in thepath of your vehicle for an extended period oftime.If the radar sensor system is malfunctioning,BAS PLUS will not be available. The brakesystem is still available with complete brakeboosting effect and BAS.

BAS PLUS provides braking assistance inhazardous situations at speeds greater than4 mph (7 km/h).At speeds of up to approximately 40 mph(70 km/h), BAS PLUS can also detectstationary objects. Examples of stationaryobjects are stopped or parked vehicles.To prevent a front-end collision, BAS PLUScalculates the brake force necessary if:Ryou approach an obstacle, andRBAS PLUS has detected a risk of collisionAt a speed less than 20 mph (30 km/h): ifyou depress the brake pedal, BAS PLUS isactivated. The increase in brake pressure willbe carried out at the last possible moment.At a speed greater than 20 mph (30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedalsharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises thebrake pressure to a value adapted to thetraffic situation.If BAS PLUS demands particularly highbraking force, preventative passengerprotection measures (PRE-SAFE®) areactivated simultaneously.X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the

emergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakesfunction as usual, if:Ryou release the brake pedal.Rthere is no longer any danger of a rear-end

collision.Rno obstacle is detected in front of your

vehicle.If you have activated DSR (Y page 246), BASPLUS is likewise deactivated.

G WARNINGBAS PLUS cannot always clearly identifyobjects and complex traffic situations. BASPLUS cannot intervene in these cases. Thereis a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake.


Safe

ty

Z

In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else

covering the sensors.Rsnow or heavy rainRinterference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for

example in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a

motorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different line

relative to the center of your vehicle

G WARNINGBAS PLUS does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringAs a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in allcritical situations. There is a risk of anaccident.Always pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake.

Following damage to the front end of thevehicle, have the configuration and operationof the radar sensors checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. This also applies tocollisions at low speeds where there is novisible damage to the front of the vehicle.

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST

General notesCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST consists ofAdaptive Brake Assist and the distancewarning function, which are described in thefollowing.

Distance warning function

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"


G WARNINGThe distance warning function does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringThus, the distance warning function cannotprovide a warning in all critical situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake.

The distance warning function cannot alwaysclearly identify objects and complex trafficsituations.In such cases, the distance warning functionmay:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningAlways pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and do not rely solely on thedistance warning function.

FunctionX To activate/deactivate: activate or

deactivate the distance warning function inthe on-board computer (Y page 272).

When the distance warning function isactivated, the multifunction display showsthe Ä symbol, as long as the HOLDfunction is not switched on (Y page 207). Onvehicles with Active Parking Assist, theÄ symbol is displayed when P is engagedor you are driving faster than 22 mph(35 km/h).The distance warning function can help youto minimize the risk of a front-end collisionwith a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects ofsuch a collision. If the distance warning


fety

function detects that there is a risk of acollision, you will be warned visually andacoustically. The distance warning functioncannot prevent a collision without yourintervention.Starting at a speed of around 20 mph(30 km/h), this function warns you if yourapidly approach a vehicle in front. Anintermittent warning tone will then sound andthe · distance warning lamp will light upin the instrument cluster.X Brake immediately in order to increase the

distance from the vehicle in front.orX Take evasive action, provided it is safe to

do so.For the distance warning function to assistyou when driving, the function must beactivated in the on-board computer and beoperational (Y page 272).Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated driving conditions may cause thesystem to display unnecessary warnings.With the help of the radar sensor system, thedistance warning function can detectobstacles that are in the path of your vehiclefor an extended period of time.At speeds up to 40 mph (70 km/h), thedistance warning function may also detectstationary obstacles, for example stopped orparked vehicles.If you approach an obstacle and the distancewarning function detects a risk of a collision,the system will initially alert you both visuallyand acoustically.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else

covering the sensorsRsnow or heavy rainRinterference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for

example in parking garages

Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different line

relative to the center of your vehicleFollowing damage to the front end of thevehicle, have the configuration and operationof the radar sensor checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. This also applies tocollisions at low speeds where there is novisible damage to the front of the vehicle.

Adaptive Brake Assisti Observe the "Important safety notes"


G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearlyidentify objects and complex trafficsituations. In these cases, Adaptive BrakeAssist may not intervene. There is a risk of anaccident.Always pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRto stationary obstaclesRwhen corneringAs a result, Adaptive Brake Assist may notintervene in all critical conditions. There is arisk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake.

Adaptive Brake Assist provides brakingassistance in hazardous situations at speedsgreater than 20 mph (30 km/h) and usesradar sensor technology to assess the trafficsituation.With the help of Adaptive Brake Assist, thedistance warning signal can detect obstacles


Safe

ty

Z

that are in the path of your vehicle for anextended period of time.Should you approach an obstacle andAdaptive Brake Assist has detected a risk ofcollision, Adaptive Brake Assist calculates thebraking force necessary to avoid a rear-endcollision. Should you apply the brakesvigorously, Adaptive Brake Assist willautomatically increase the braking force to alevel suitable for the traffic conditions.X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the

emergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will work normally again if:Ryou release the brake pedal.Rthere is no longer any danger of a rear-end

collision.Rno obstacle is detected in front of your

vehicle.Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.If Adaptive Brake Assist requires particularlyhigh brake pressure, preventive passengerprotection measures (PRE-SAFE®) aredeployed simultaneously.Up to vehicle speeds of around 155 mph(250 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist is capableof reacting to moving objects that havealready been recognized as such at least onceover the period of observation. AdaptiveBrake Assist does not react to stationaryobstacles.If Adaptive Brake Assist is not available dueto a malfunction in the radar sensor system,the brake system remains available with fullbrake boosting effect and BAS.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if there is:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else


example in parking garages

Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different line

relative to the center of your vehicleFollowing damage to the front end of thevehicle, have the configuration and operationof the radar sensor checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. This also applies tocollisions at low speeds where there is novisible damage to the front of the vehicle.

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

General notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"


ESP® monitors driving stability and traction,i.e. power transmission between the tires andthe road surface.If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviatingfrom the direction desired by the driver, oneor more wheels are braked to stabilize thevehicle. The engine output is also modified tokeep the vehicle on the desired course withinphysical limits. ESP® assists the driver whenpulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP®

can also stabilize the vehicle during braking.

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP®.Traction control brakes the drive wheelsindividually if they spin. This enables you topull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces,for example if the road surface is slippery onone side. In addition, more drive torque istransferred to the wheel or wheels withtraction.Traction control remains active, even if youdeactivate ESP®.


fety

In appropriate driving situations, activate theoff-road program:X Vehicles without the ON&OFFROAD

package (Y page 248)X Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package

(Y page 248)

Off-road 4ETS (Electronic TractionSystem)A 4ETS system specifically suited to off-roadterrain is activated automatically once the off-road program is activated on:Rvehicles without the ON&OFFROAD


(Y page 248)


G WARNINGIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable tostabilize the vehicle. Additionally, furtherdriving safety systems are deactivated. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an accident.Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: only operate thevehicle for a maximum of ten seconds on abrake test dynamometer. Switch off theignition.Application of the brakes by ESP® mayotherwise destroy the brake system.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function orperformance tests may only be carried outon a 2-axle dynamometer. Before youoperate the vehicle on such adynamometer, please consult a qualifiedworkshop. You could otherwise damagethe drive train or the brake system.

ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lampin the instrument cluster lights upcontinuously when the engine is running.

If the ÷ warning lamp and the åwarning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is notavailable due to a malfunction.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 321) and display messages whichmay be shown in the instrument cluster(Y page 283).

i Only use wheels with the recommendedtire sizes. Only then will ESP® functionproperly.

Characteristics of ESP®

General informationESP® is activated automatically when theengine is started.If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warninglamp flashes in the instrument cluster.If ESP® intervenes:X Do not deactivate ESP® under any

circumstances.X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far

as necessary when pulling away.X Adapt your driving style to suit the

prevailing road and weather conditions.

ECO start/stop functionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically when the vehiclestops moving. The engine startsautomatically when the driver wants to pullaway again. ESP® remains in its previouslyselected status. Example: if ESP® wasdeactivated before the engine was switchedoff, ESP® remains deactivated when theengine is switched on again.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

Important safety notesYou can select between the following statesof ESP®:RESP® is activated.RESP® is deactivated.


Safe

ty

Z

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longerstabilizes the vehicle. There is an increasedrisk of skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situationsdescribed in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in thefollowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravel

i Activate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® willotherwise not be able to stabilize thevehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or awheel starts to spin.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated.You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

X To switch off: press button :.The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X To switch on: press button :.The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in

the instrument cluster flashes. In suchsituations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.Rthe engine's torque is no longer limited and

the drive wheels can spin. The spinning ofthe wheels results in a cutting action, whichprovides better grip.RETS/4ETS is still active.RESP® still provides support when you

brake.

Off-road ESP®

An ESP® system specifically suited to off-roadterrain is activated automatically once the off-road program is activated on:Rvehicles without the ON&OFFROAD


(Y page 248)Off-road ESP® intervenes with a delay if thereis oversteering or understeering, thusimproving traction.

ESP® trailer stabilization

G WARNINGIf road and weather conditions are poor,trailer stabilization will not be able to preventthe vehicle/trailer combination fromswerving. Trailers with a high center of gravitycan tip over before ESP® can detect this.There is a risk of an accident.Always adapt your driving style to theprevailing road and weather conditions.

If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailercombination) begins to lurch, you can onlystabilize the vehicle/trailer combination bydepressing the brake firmly.In this situation, ESP® assists you and candetect if the vehicle/trailer combinationbegins to lurch. ESP® slows the vehicle downby braking and limiting the engine output until


fety

the vehicle/trailer combination hasstabilized.Trailer stabilization is active above speeds ofabout 37 mph (60 km/h).Trailer stabilization does not work if ESP® isdeactivated because of a malfunction.

EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

i Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 66).

G WARNINGIf EBD has malfunctioned, the rear wheels canstill lock, e.g. under full braking. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an accident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleto the different handling characteristics. Havethe brake system checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Observe information regarding indicator andwarning lamps (Y page 319) as well asdisplay messages (Y page 285).EBD monitors and controls the brakepressure on the rear wheels to improvedriving stability while braking.

ADAPTIVE BRAKEADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safetyand offers increased braking comfort. Inaddition to the braking function, ADAPTIVEBRAKE also has the HOLD function(Y page 207) and hill start assist(Y page 161).

PRE-SAFE® Brakei Observe the "Important safety notes"


PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicleswith DISTRONIC PLUS.

If PRE-SAFE® Brake is to aid you, the radarsensor system must be:Ractivated (Y page 277)RoperationalWith the help of the radar sensor system,PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles thatare in front of your vehicle for an extendedperiod of time.PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimizethe risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead orreduce the effects of such a collision. If PRE-SAFE® Brake has detected a risk of collision,you will be warned visually and acousticallyas well as by automatic braking. PRE-SAFE®

Brake cannot prevent a collision without yourintervention.Starting at a speed of around4 mph (7 km/h), this function warns you ifyou very quickly approach a vehicle in front.An intermittent warning tone will then soundand the · distance warning lamp will lightup in the instrument cluster.X Brake immediately in order to increase the

distance from the vehicle in front.orX Take evasive action provided it is safe to do

so.From a speed of approximately4 mph (7 km/h), if the driver and frontpassenger have fastened their seat belts,PRE-SAFE® Brake can brake the vehicleautomatically at speeds up to approximately124 mph (200 km/h).Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated driving conditions may causeunnecessary warnings or the unnecessaryintervention of PRE-SAFE® Brake.You can prevent the intervention of the PRE-SAFE® Brake at any time by:Rdepressing the accelerator pedal furtherRactivating kickdownRreleasing the brake pedal


Safe

ty

Z

The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake isended automatically if:Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle.Rthere is no longer any danger of a rear-end

collision.Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in

front of your vehicle.If you have activated DSR (Y page 246), PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated.At speeds of up to approximately 40 mph(70 km/h), PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detectstationary objects. Examples of stationaryobjects are stopped or parked vehicles.If you approach an obstacle and PRE-SAFE®

Brake detects a risk of a collision, the systemwill alert you both visually and acoustically. Ifyou do not brake or take evasive action, thesystem will warn you by automatically brakingthe vehicle gently. If there is an increased riskof collision, preventative passengerprotection measures (PRE-SAFE®) areactivated (Y page 54). If, at speeds over20 mph (30 km/h), a risk of collision remainsand you do not brake, take evasive action orsignificantly accelerate, automatic brakingmay be performed up to a level of automaticemergency braking. Automatic emergencybraking is not performed until immediatelyprior to an accident that can no longer beavoided.

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake yourvehicle by a partial application of the brakesif a danger of collision is detected. There maybe a collision unless you also brake.Automatic emergency braking cannot preventa collision. There is a risk of an accident.Always apply the brakes yourself and try totake evasive action.

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearlyidentify objects and complex trafficconditions.

In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and then

brake the vehicleRnot give a warning or interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake, especially ifPRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else


example in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a

motorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different line

relative to the center of your vehicle

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringAs a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neithergive warnings nor intervene in all criticalsituations. There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake.

In order to maintain an appropriate distancefrom the vehicle in front and thus prevent acollision, you must apply the brakes yourself.X To activate/deactivate: activate or

deactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-board computer (Y page 272).When PRE-SAFE® Brake is activated, theÄ symbol appears in the multifunctiondisplay as long as the HOLD function is


fety

deactivated (Y page 207). On vehicles withActive Parking Assist, the Ä symbol isdisplayed when P is engaged or you aredriving faster than 22 mph (35 km/h).

Following damage to the front end of thevehicle, have the configuration and operationof the radar sensors checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. This also applies tocollisions at low speeds where there is novisible damage to the front of the vehicle.

STEER CONTROLi Observe the "Important safety notes"

section (Y page 66).STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting anoticeable steering force to the steeringwheel in the direction required for vehiclestabilization.This steering assistance is provided inparticular if:Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on

a wet or slippery road surface when youbrakeRthe vehicle starts to skidIf ESP® is malfunctioning, you will not receivesteering support from STEER CONTROL.Power steering will, however, continue tofunction.

Theft deterrent locking system

ImmobilizerX To activate with the SmartKey: remove

the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the

ignition off and open the driver's door.X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.The immobilizer prevents your vehicle frombeing started without the correct SmartKey.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

Anyone can start the engine if a validSmartKey has been left inside the vehicle.

i The immobilizer is always deactivatedwhen you start the engine.In the event that the engine cannot bestarted when the starter battery is fullycharged, the immobilizer may be faulty.Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in theUSA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKeyor KEYLESS-GO.Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarmsystem is armed after approximately15 seconds.

X To switch off using the SmartKey:unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.X To switch off using KEYLESS-GO: unlock

the vehicle with KEYLESS-GO.orX Press the Start/Stop button on the

dashboard. The SmartKey must be insidethe vehicle.

A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed and you open:Ra doorRthe vehicle with the mechanical key

Theft deterrent locking system 75

Safe

ty

Z

Rthe tailgateRthe hoodX To turn the alarm off with the

SmartKey: press the % or & buttonon the SmartKey.The alarm is switched off.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

The alarm is switched off.X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:

grasp the outside door handle. TheSmartKey must be outside the vehicle.The alarm is switched off.

orX Press the Start/Stop button on the

dashboard. The SmartKey must be insidethe vehicle.The alarm is switched off.

The alarm is not switched off, even if youclose the open door that has triggered it, forexample.

i If the alarm stays on for more than30 seconds, the mbrace (USA only) or TELEAID (Canada only) emergency call systeminitiates a call to the Customer AssistanceCenter automatically. The emergency callsystem initiates the call provided that:Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace/

TELEAID Service.Rthe mbrace/TELEAID Service has been

activated properly.Rthe required mobile phone, power supply

and GPS are available.

76 Theft deterrent locking systemSa

fety

Useful information .............................. 78SmartKey ............................................. 78Doors .................................................... 84Cargo compartment ............................ 87Side windows ...................................... 92Sliding sunroof .................................... 96

77

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Useful information



SmartKey


G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering other

people or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of

parking position P.Rstarting the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock. Always takethe SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.Do not leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system, and do not give them accessto an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervisedaccess to a vehicle could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury. They could:Rinjure themselves on vehicle partsRbe seriously or fatally injured by extreme

heat or coldRinjure themselves or have an accident with

vehicle equipment that may still be inoperation even after the SmartKey hasbeen removed from the ignition, such as theseat adjustment, steering wheeladjustment or memory function.

If children open a door, they could causesevere or even fatal injury to other persons; ifthey get out of the vehicle, they could injurethemselves when doing so or be seriously oreven fatally injured by any passing traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become veryhot, and a child could be burned on theseparts.

G WARNINGIf you attach heavy or large objects to theSmartKey, the SmartKey could beunintentionally turned in the ignition lock. Thiscould cause the engine to be switched off.There is a risk of an accident.Do not attach any heavy or large objects tothe SmartKey. Remove any bulky keyringsbefore inserting the SmartKey into theignition lock.

! Keep the SmartKey away from strongmagnetic fields. Otherwise, the remotecontrol function could be affected.

78 SmartKeyOp

enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

Strong magnetic fields can occur in thevicinity of powerful electrical installations.RDo not keep the SmartKey:

- with electronic devices, e.g. a mobilephone or another SmartKey

- with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metalfoil

- inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal caseThis can affect the functionality of theSmartKey.

Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key in thetemperature-controlled cup holder.Otherwise, the KEYLESS-GO key will not berecognized.

SmartKey functions

: & To lock the vehicle; F To open/close the tailgate= % To unlock the vehicleX To unlock centrally: press the %

button.If you do not open the vehicle withinapproximately 40 seconds of unlocking:Rthe vehicle is locked again.Rthe theft deterrent locking system is

armed again.X To lock centrally: press the & button.

The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:Rthe doorsRthe tailgateRthe fuel filler flap

When unlocking, the turn signals flash once.When locking, they flash three times.You can also set an audible signal to confirmthat the vehicle has been locked. The audiblesignal can be activated and deactivated usingthe on-board computer (Y page 276).When it is dark, the surround lighting alsocomes on if it is activated in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 275).

KEYLESS-GO

General notesBear in mind that the engine can be startedby any of the vehicle occupants if there is aKEYLESS-GO key in the vehicle.

Locking/unlocking centrallyYou can start, lock or unlock the vehicle usingKEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carrythe SmartKey with you. You can combine thefunctions of KEYLESS-GO with those of aconventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicleby using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lockit using the & button on the SmartKey.When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO,the distance between the SmartKey and thecorresponding door handle must not begreater than 3 ft (1 m).KEYLESS-GO checks whether a validSmartKey is in the vehicle by periodicallyestablishing a radio connection between thevehicle and the SmartKey. This happens:Rwhen the external door handles are

touchedRwhen starting the engineRwhile the vehicle is in motion

SmartKey 79

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z

X To unlock the vehicle: touch the innersurface of the door handle.

X To lock the vehicle: touch sensorsurface :.

X Convenience closing feature: touchrecessed sensor surface ; for anextended period.

Further information on the convenienceclosing feature (Y page 93).If you pull on the handle of the tailgate, onlythe cargo compartment of the vehicle isunlocked.

Changing the settings of the lockingsystem

You can change the settings of the lockingsystem. This means that only the driver's doorand the fuel filler flap are unlocked when thevehicle is unlocked. This is useful if youfrequently travel on your own.X To change the setting: press and hold

down the % and & buttonssimultaneously for approximately sixseconds until the battery check lampflashes twice (Y page 81).

i If the setting of the locking system ischanged within the signal range of thevehicle, pressing the & or % button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

The SmartKey now functions as follows:X To unlock the driver's door: press the% button once.

X To unlock centrally: press the %button twice.

X To lock centrally: press the & button.

The KEYLESS-GO function is changed asfollows:X To unlock the driver's door: touch the

inner surface of the door handle on thedriver's door.

X To unlock centrally: touch the innersurface of the door handle on the front-passenger door or the rear door.

X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensorsurface on one of the door handles(Y page 79).

X To restore the factory settings: pressand hold down the % and & buttonssimultaneously for approximately sixseconds until the battery check lampflashes twice (Y page 81).

Mechanical key

General notesIf the vehicle can no longer be locked orunlocked with the SmartKey, use themechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarmsystem will be triggered (Y page 75).There are several ways to turn off the alarm:X To turn the alarm off with the

SmartKey: press the % or & buttonon the SmartKey.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.orX To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESS-

GO: press the Start/Stop button in the

80 SmartKeyOp

enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

ignition lock. The SmartKey must be in thevehicle.

orX Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-

GO. The SmartKey must be outside thevehicle.

If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanicalkey, the fuel filler flap will not be unlockedautomatically.X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the

SmartKey into the ignition lock.

Removing the mechanical key

: Release catch; Mechanical keyX Push release catch : in the direction of

the arrow and at the same time removemechanical key ; from the SmartKey.

SmartKey battery


G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic and corrosivesubstances. If batteries are swallowed, it canresult in severe health problems. There is arisk of fatal injury.Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Ifa battery is swallowed, seek medical attentionimmediately.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe batteries replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Checking the battery

X Press the & or % button.The battery is working properly if batterycheck lamp : lights up briefly.The battery is discharged if battery checklamp : does not light up briefly.

X Change the battery (Y page 81).i If the SmartKey battery is checked within

the signal reception range of the vehicle,pressing the & or % button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

i You can get a battery at any qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Replacing the batteryYou require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.X Take the mechanical key out of the

SmartKey (Y page 80).

SmartKey 81

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z

: Battery compartment cover; Mechanical keyX Press mechanical key ; into the opening

in the SmartKey in the direction of thearrow until battery compartment cover :opens. Do not hold battery compartmentcover : closed while doing so.

X Remove battery compartment cover :.

= BatteryX Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your

palm until battery = falls out.X Insert the new battery with the positive

terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-freecloth to do so.

X Make sure that the surface of the battery isfree from lint, grease and all other forms ofcontamination.

X Insert the front tabs of batterycompartment cover : into the housingfirst and then press to close it.

X Insert mechanical key ; into theSmartKey.

X Check the function of all SmartKey buttonson the vehicle.

82 SmartKeyOp

enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

Problems with the SmartKey


You cannot lock orunlock the vehicleusing the SmartKey.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control

function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at thedriver's door handle from close range and press the % or& button.

If this does not work:X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 81) and replace it if

necessary (Y page 81).X Lock (Y page 86) or unlock (Y page 87) the vehicle using

the mechanical key.

The SmartKey is faulty.X Lock (Y page 86) or unlock (Y page 87) the vehicle using

the mechanical key.X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can no longer lockor unlock the vehicleusing KEYLESS-GO.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of

the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's doorhandle from close range and press the % or & button.

There is a malfunction with KEYLESS-GO.X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of

the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's doorhandle from close range and press the % or & button.

X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop.If this does not work:X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 81) and replace it if

necessary (Y page 81).X Lock (Y page 86) or unlock (Y page 87) the vehicle using

the mechanical key.

You have lost aSmartKey.

X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialistworkshop.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost themechanical key.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

SmartKey 83

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z


The engine cannot bestarted using theSmartKey.

The on-board voltage is too low.X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior

lighting, and try to start the engine again.If this does not work:X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary

(Y page 387).orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 389).orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot bestarted using KEYLESS-GO. The SmartKey is inthe vehicle.

A door is open. Therefore, the SmartKey cannot be detected aseasily.X Close the door and try to start the vehicle again.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

Doors








If children open a door, they could causesevere or even fatal injury to other persons; ifthey get out of the vehicle, they could injure

84 DoorsOp

enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

themselves when doing so or be seriously oreven fatally injured by any passing traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become veryhot, and a child could be burned on theseparts.


Unlocking and opening doors fromthe inside

You can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked. You can only openthe rear doors from inside the vehicle if theyare not secured by the child-proof locks(Y page 65).If the vehicle has been locked with theSmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening adoor from the inside will trigger the anti-theftalarm system. Switch off the alarm(Y page 75).

X Front door: pull door handle ;.If the door is locked, locking knob : popsup. The door is unlocked and can beopened.

X Rear door: pull up locking knob : on therelevant rear door.The rear door is unlocked and can beopened.

Centrally locking and unlocking thevehicle from the inside

You can centrally lock or unlock the vehiclefrom the inside. The buttons are located onboth front doors.

: To unlock; To lockX To unlock: press button :.X To lock: press button ;.

If the front-passenger door is closed, thevehicle locks.

Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not belocked or unlocked.You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally fromthe inside if the vehicle has been locked withthe SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.You can open a front door from inside thevehicle even if it has been locked.

Doors 85

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z

If the vehicle has been locked using thelocking button for the central locking, or hasbeen locked automatically, and a door isopened from the inside:Rthe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had

previously been fully unlockedRonly the door which has been opened form

the inside is unlocked if only the driver'sdoor had been previously unlocked

Automatic locking feature

: To deactivate; To activateX To deactivate: press and hold button :

for about five seconds until a tone sounds.X To activate: press and hold button ; for

about five seconds until a tone sounds.

i If you press one of the two buttons anddo not hear a tone, the relevant setting hasalready been selected.

The vehicle is locked automatically when theignition is switched on and the wheels areturning.You could therefore be locked out if:Rthe vehicle is being pushed.Rthe vehicle is being towed.Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.You can also switch the automatic lockingfunction on and off using the on-boardcomputer (Y page 276).

Power closing featurePower closing pulls the doors and trunk lidinto their locks automatically even if they areonly partly closed.X To power-close a door: push the door into

the lock up to the first detent position.Power closing will pull the door fully closed.

X To power-close the tailgate: lightly pressthe tailgate downwards.Power closing will pull the tailgate fullyclosed.

Unlocking the driver's door(mechanical key)

If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked withthe SmartKey, use the mechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarmsystem will be triggered (Y page 75).X Take the mechanical key out of the

SmartKey (Y page 80).X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of

the driver's door as far as it will go.

1 To unlockX Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise

to position 1.The door is unlocked.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Insert the mechanical key into theSmartKey.

86 DoorsOp

enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)If the vehicle can no longer be locked with theSmartKey, use the mechanical key.X Open the driver's door.X Close the front-passenger door, the rear

doors and the tailgate.X Press the locking button (Y page 85).X Check whether the locking knobs on the

front-passenger door and the rear doorsare still visible. Press down the lockingknobs manually, if necessary (Y page 85).

X Close the driver's door.X Take the mechanical key out of the

SmartKey (Y page 80).X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of

the driver's door as far as it will go.

1 To lockX Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far

as it will go to position 1.X Turn the mechanical key back and remove

it.X Make sure that the doors and the tailgate

are locked.X Insert the mechanical key into the

SmartKey.

i If you lock the vehicle as described above,the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft alarm system is not armed.

Cargo compartment


G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgateis open when the engine is running,particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaustfumes could enter the passengercompartment. There is a risk of poisoning.Turn off the engine before opening thetailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open.




If children open a door, they could causesevere or even fatal injury to other persons; ifthey get out of the vehicle, they could injurethemselves when doing so or be seriously oreven fatally injured by any passing traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become veryhot, and a child could be burned on theseparts.

Cargo compartment 87

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z


! The tailgate swings upwards and to therear when opened. Therefore, make surethat there is sufficient clearance above andbehind the tailgate.

i Tailgate opening dimensions(Y page 452).

Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargocompartment. You could otherwise lockyourself out.Vehicles without the EASY-PACK tailgate: the tailgate can be:Ropened and closed manually from outsideRunlocked from inside with the emergency

releaseFor vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate you can:Rclose the tailgate manually from outsideRopen and close the tailgate automatically

from outsideRopen and close the tailgate automatically

from insideRunlock the tailgate from inside with the

emergency releaseRlimit the opening angle of the tailgate

Opening/closing from outside

Opening

X Press the % button on the SmartKey.X Pull handle :.X Raise the tailgate.Vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate: ifyou pull handle : and then release it, thetailgate opens automatically.

Closing

G WARNINGTo prevent possible personal injury, alwayskeep hands and fingers away from the cargocompartment opening when closing thetailgate. Be especially careful when smallchildren are around.

X Pull the tailgate down using recess :.X Allow the tailgate to drop into the lock.X Lock the vehicle if necessary with

the & button on the SmartKey or withKEYLESS-GO.

88 Cargo compartmentOp

enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in thecargo compartment, the tailgate will notlock.

Opening/closing automatically fromoutside


G WARNINGParts of the body could become trappedduring automatic closing of the tailgate.Moreover, people, e.g. children, may bestanding in the closing area or may enter theclosing area during the closing process. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of theclosing area during the closing process.Use one of the following options to stop theclosing process:Rpress the F button on the SmartKey.Rpress the remote operating switch on the

driver's door.Rpress the closing or locking button on the

tailgate.Rpull the handle on the tailgate.




i The tailgate is equipped with anautomatic reversing feature. If an object

blocks or restricts the tailgate during theclosing process, the tailgate opens againautomatically.

Opening the tailgate automaticallyYou can open the tailgate automatically withthe SmartKey or the handle in the tailgate.X Press and hold the F button on the

SmartKey until the tailgate opens.orX If the tailgate is unlocked, pull the handle

and let it go again immediately.

Closing the tailgate automatically





Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z

Closing and locking button (example: vehicle withEASY-PACK tailgate and KEYLESS-GO): Closing button; Locking buttonX To close: press closing button : on the

tailgate.orX Press and hold the F button on the

SmartKey until the tailgate closes.

Vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate andKEYLESS-GO: you can simultaneously closeand lock the tailgate.X Press locking button ; on the tailgate.

If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected outsidethe vehicle, the tailgate closes and locks.All the doors must be shut and theSmartKey located in the vicinity of thetailgate.

i The tailgate cannot be opened and closedwith the SmartKey if there is a SmartKey inthe ignition.If the tailgate touches an object whileclosing, the closing procedure isinterrupted and the tailgate reopens.

i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in thecargo compartment, the tailgate will notlock.

Opening/closing automatically frominside








i The tailgate is equipped with anautomatic reversing feature. If an objectblocks or restricts the tailgate during theclosing process, the tailgate opens againautomatically.

90 Cargo compartmentOp

enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

Opening and closing

You can open and close the tailgate from thedriver's seat when the vehicle is stationaryand unlocked.X To open: pull remote operating switch :

for the tailgate until the tailgate opens.X To close: turn the SmartKey to position 1

or 2 in the ignition lock.X Press remote operating switch for

tailgate : until the tailgate is closed.

Limiting the opening angle of thetailgate

Important safety notes! Make sure there is sufficient clearance to

open the tailgate fully when setting theopening angle. The tailgate could otherwisebe damaged. Ideally, set the opening angleoutside.

ActivatingYou can limit the opening angle of thetailgate. This is possible in the top half of itsopening range, up to approximately 4 in(10 cm) before the stop.This could be useful, for example, if there isinsufficient space above the tailgate.X To open the tailgate: pull the handle on

the tailgate.X To stop the opening procedure at the

desired position: press the closing button

(Y page 89) in the tailgate or pull the handleon the outside of the tailgate again.

X To store the position: press and hold theclosing button in the tailgate until you heara short tone.The opening angle limiter is activated. Thetailgate will now stop in the stored positionwhen opening.

DeactivatingX Press and hold the closing button

(Y page 89) in the tailgate until you heartwo short tones.

Tailgate emergency release

Important safety notes! The tailgate swings upwards and to the

rear when opened. Therefore, make surethat there is sufficient clearance above andbehind the tailgate.


If the tailgate can no longer be opened fromoutside the vehicle, use the emergencyrelease on the inside of the tailgate.

Opening

X Take the mechanical key out of theSmartKey (Y page 80).

X Insert mechanical key ; into the openingin paneling :.


Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z

X Turn mechanical key ;90° clockwise.X Push mechanical key ; in the direction of

the arrow and open the tailgate.

Side windows


G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body partscould become trapped between the sidewindow and the door frame as the sidewindow moves. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody touches the sidewindow during the opening procedure. Ifsomebody becomes trapped, release theswitch or pull the switch to close the sidewindow again.

G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body partsin the closing area could become trapped.There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure. Ifsomebody becomes trapped, release theswitch or press the switch to open the sidewindow again.

G WARNINGIf children operate the side windows theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.Activate the override feature for the rear sidewindows. When leaving the vehicle, alwaystake the SmartKey with you and lock thevehicle. Never leave children unsupervised inthe vehicle.

The side windows are equipped with anautomatic reversing feature. If an objectblocks or restricts a side window during theclosing process, the side window opens againautomatically.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small

fingersRover the last 4 mm of the closing movementRduring resettingRwhen closing the side window again

manually immediately after automaticreversing

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in thesesituations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure. Ifsomeone becomes trapped, press the switchto open the side window again.

Opening and closing the sidewindows

The switches for all side windows are locatedon the driver's door. There is also a switch oneach door for the corresponding side window.The switches on the driver's door takeprecedence.

: Front left; Front right= Rear right? Rear left

92 Side windowsOp

enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X To open: press the corresponding switch.X To close: pull the corresponding switch.i If you press the switch beyond the point

of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in thecorresponding direction. You can stopautomatic operation by operating theswitch again.

i You can continue to operate the sidewindows after you switch off the engine orremove the SmartKey. This function isavailable for up to five minutes or until thedriver's or front-passenger door is opened.

i The side windows cannot be operatedfrom the rear when the override feature forthe side windows is activated (Y page 65).

Convenience opening

General notesYou can ventilate the vehicle before you startdriving. To do this, the SmartKey is used tocarry out the following functionssimultaneously:Runlock the vehicleRopen the side windowsRopen the sliding sunroof or the panorama

roof with power tilt/sliding panel and theroller sunblindsRswitch on the seat ventilation for the

driver's seat

i The convenience opening feature canonly be operated using the SmartKey. TheSmartKey must be close to the driver'sdoor handle.

Convenience openingX Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's

door handle.X Press and hold the % button until the

side windows and the sliding sunroof or the

panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel are in the desired position.If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel are closed, theroller sunblinds are opened first.

X Press and hold the % button again untilthe panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel is in the desired position.

X To interrupt convenience opening:release the % button.

Convenience closing feature


G WARNINGWhen the convenience closing feature isoperating, parts of the body could becometrapped in the closing area of the side windowand the sliding sunroof. There is a risk ofinjury.Observe the complete closing procedurewhen the convenience closing feature isoperating. Make sure that no body parts arein close proximity during the closingprocedure.

When you lock the vehicle, you cansimultaneously:Rclose the side windowsRclose the sliding sunroof or the panorama

roof with power tilt/sliding panelOn vehicles with a panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel, you can then close theroller sunblinds.Proceed as follows if someone is trapped:RRelease the & button to interrupt the

closing procedure.RPress and hold the % button to open.

Side windows 93

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:RRelease the sensor surfaces on the exterior

door handle to interrupt the closingprocedure.RTo open, pull the same door handle

immediately and hold it firmly. The doorwindows and the sliding sunroof will openfor as long as the door handle is held butthe door is not opened.

i Notes on the automatic reversing featurefor:Rthe side window (Y page 92)Rthe sliding sunroof (Y page 96)

Using the SmartKeyThe SmartKey must be close to the driver'sdoor handle.X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's

door handle.X Press and hold the & button until the

side windows and the sliding sunroof or thepanorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel are fully closed.

X Make sure that all the side windows and thesliding sunroof or panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel are closed.

On vehicles with a panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel:X Press and hold the & button again until

the roller sunblinds of the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel close.

X To interrupt convenience closing:release the & button.

Using KEYLESS-GOThe KEYLESS-GO key must be outside thevehicle. All the doors must be closed.

X Touch recessed sensor surface : on thedoor handle until the side windows and thesliding sunroof or the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.

i Make sure you only touch recessedsensor surface :.

X Make sure that all the side windows and thesliding sunroof or panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel are closed.

On vehicles with a panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel:X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the

door handle again until the roller sunblindsof the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel close.

X To interrupt convenience closing: release recessed sensor surface : on thedoor handle.

Resetting the side windowsIf a side window can no longer be closed fully,you must reset it.X Close all the doors.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the

ignition lock.X Pull the corresponding switch on the door

control panel until the side window iscompletely closed. (Y page 92)

X Hold the switch for an additional second.

94 Side windowsOp

enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

If the side window opens again slightly:X Immediately pull the corresponding switch

on the door control panel until the sidewindow is completely closed (Y page 92).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.X If the corresponding side window remains

closed after the button has been released,the side window has been reset correctly.If this is not the case, repeat the stepsabove again.

Side windows 95

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z

Problems with the side windows

G WARNINGClosing the side windows with increased force or without the anti-entrapment feature could leadto serious or even fatal injury. Make sure that nobody can become trapped when closing the sidewindows.


A side window cannotbe closed because it isblocked by objects, e.g.leaves in the windowguide.

X Remove the objects.X Close the side window.

A side window cannotbe closed and youcannot see the cause.

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens againslightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding

switch again until the side window has closed.The side window is closed with increased force.

If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopensagain slightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding

switch again until the side window has closed.The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.

Sliding sunroof

Important safety notesYour vehicle may be equipped with a slidingsunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. In this section, the term "slidingsunroof" refers to both types of slidingsunroof.

G WARNINGWhile opening and closing the sliding sunroof,body parts in close proximity could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the opening and closingprocedures.

If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push the

switch briefly in any directionThe opening or closing procedure will bestopped.

G WARNINGIf children operate the sliding sunroof theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The sliding sunroof is equipped with anautomatic reversing feature. If an objectblocks or restricts the sliding sunroof during

96 Sliding sunroofOp

enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

the closing process, the sliding sunroof opensagain automatically.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small

fingersRover the last 4 mm of the closing movementRduring resettingRwhen closing the sliding sunroof again

manually immediately after automaticreversing

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in thesesituations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push the

switch briefly in any directionThe closing process is stopped.

! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is freeof snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctionsmay occur.Do not allow anything to protrude from thesliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals couldbe damaged.

i Resonance noises can occur in additionto the usual airflow noises when the slidingsunroof is open. They are caused by minorpressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.Change the position of the sliding sunroofor open a side window. The noise will bereduced or eliminated.

Operating the sliding sunroof

Opening and closing

Overhead control panel: To raise; To open= To close/lowerX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the

ignition lock.X Press or pull the 2 switch in the

corresponding direction.i If you press the 2 switch beyond the

point of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in thecorresponding direction. You can stopautomatic operation by operating theswitch again.When opening and raising the roof,automatic operation is only available if thesliding sunroof is in the closed position.

The sun protection cover automatically opensalong with the sliding sunroof. You can openor close the sun protection cover manuallywhen the sliding sunroof is raised or closed.

i You can continue to operate the slidingsunroof after switching off the engine orremoving the SmartKey from the ignitionlock. This function is available for up to fiveminutes or until the driver's or front-passenger door is opened.

Sliding sunroof 97

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z

Resetting! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be

opened or closed fully after resetting,contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not movesmoothly.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the

ignition lock.X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear

(Y page 97).X Keep the 2 switch pressed for another

second.X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be

fully opened and closed again (Y page 97).X If this is not the case, repeat the steps

above again.

Operating the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel

Overhead control panel: To raise; To open= To close/lower

The panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel can only be operated when the rollersunblind is open (Y page 99).X To open and close: turn the SmartKey to

position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.X Press or pull the 2 switch in the


point of resistance, an automatic opening/

closing process is started in thecorresponding direction. You can stopautomatic operation by operating theswitch again.The automatic raising feature is availableonly when the sliding sunroof is closed.

Operating the roller sunblinds for thepanorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel


G WARNINGWhen opening or closing the roller sunblind,parts of the body could be trapped betweenthe roller sunblind and the frame or slidingsunroof. There is a risk of injury.When opening or closing make sure that noparts of the body are in the sweep of the rollersunblind.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push the

switch briefly in any directionThe opening or closing procedure will bestopped.

The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interiorfrom sunlight. The two roller sunblinds canonly be opened and closed together when thepanorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelis closed.


enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

Opening and closing the rollersunblinds

Overhead control panel: To open; To open= To closeX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the

ignition lock.X Press or pull the 2 switch in the


point of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in thecorresponding direction. You can stopautomatic operation by operating theswitch again.

Resetting the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel and the rollersunblinds! If the panorama roof with power tilt/

sliding panel and the roller sunblind cannotbe fully opened or closed after resetting,contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Overhead control panel: To open; To open= To close

Reset the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblinds if thepanorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelor the roller sunblinds do not move smoothly.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the

ignition lock.X Pull the 2 switch repeatedly to the point

of resistance in the direction of arrow =until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is fully closed.

X Keep the 2 switch pulled for anadditional second.

X Pull the 2 switch repeatedly to the pointof resistance in the direction of arrow =until the roller sunblinds are fully closed.

X Keep the 2 switch pulled for anadditional second.

X Make sure that the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel (Y page 98) and theroller sunblinds (Y page 99) can be fullyopened again.

X If this is not the case, repeat the stepsabove again.

Sliding sunroof 99

Open

ing

and

clos

ing

Z

Problems with the sliding sunroof

G WARNINGIf you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the slidingsunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Partsof the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any directionThe closing process is stopped.

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contacta qualified specialist workshop.

Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel. In this section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to both types of sliding sunroof.


The sliding sunroofcannot be closed andyou cannot see thecause.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopensagain slightly:X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 2

switch in the overhead control panel down to the point ofresistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed.The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and thenreopens slightly:X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 2

switch in the overhead control panel down to the point ofresistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed.The sliding sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapmentfeature.


enin

g an

d cl

osin

g

Useful information ............................ 102Correct driver's seat position .......... 102Seats .................................................. 103Steering wheel .................................. 110Mirrors ............................................... 113Memory function .............................. 116

101

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Useful information



Correct driver's seat position

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if youdo the following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,

steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel and mirror and fasten yourseat belt before starting the engine.

X Observe the safety guidelines on seatadjustment (Y page 103).

X Make sure that seat = is adjustedproperly.Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 104)

When adjusting the seat, make sure that:Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag

as possible.Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position.Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly.Ryou have moved the backrest to an almost

vertical position.Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so that

your thighs are gently supported.Ryou can depress the pedals properly.X Check whether the head restraint is

adjusted properly.When doing so, make sure that you haveadjusted the head restraint so that the backof your head is supported at eye level bythe center of the head restraint. Also makesure that you have adjusted the headrestraint so that the back of your head is asclose to the head restraint as possible. Thiswill be the case if the head restraint isadjusted correctly (Y page 105).

X Observe the safety guidelines on steeringwheel adjustment (Y page 110).

X Make sure that steering wheel : isadjusted properly.Adjusting the steering wheel manually(Y page 110)Adjusting the steering wheel electrically(Y page 111)

When adjusting the steering wheel, makesure that:Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your

arms slightly bent.Ryou can move your legs freely.Ryou can see all the displays in the

instrument cluster clearly.X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts

(Y page 54).

102 Correct driver's seat positionSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

X Check whether you have fastened seatbelt ; properly (Y page 56).

The seat belt should:Rfit snugly across your bodyRbe routed across the middle of your

shoulderRbe routed in your pelvic area across the hip

jointsX Before starting off, adjust the rear-view

mirror and the exterior mirrors in such away that you have a good view of road andtraffic conditions (Y page 113).

X Vehicles with a memory function: savethe seat, steering wheel and exterior mirrorsettings with the memory function(Y page 116).

Seats


G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they adjustthe seats, particularly when unattended.There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.



G WARNINGIf you adjust the seat height carelessly, you orother vehicle occupants could be trapped andthereby injured. Children in particular could

accidentally press the electrical seatadjustment buttons and become trapped.There is a risk of injury.While moving the seats, make sure that yourhands or other body parts do not get underthe lever assembly of the seat adjustmentsystem.

G WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

G WARNINGIf head restraints are not installed andadjusted correctly, they cannot provideprotection as intended. There is an increasedrisk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g.in the event of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraintsinstalled. Before driving off, make sure forevery vehicle occupant that the center of thehead restraint supports the back of the headat about eye level.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if the backrest is not in theupright position. When braking or in the eventof an accident, you could slide underneath theseat belt and sustain abdomen or neckinjuries, for example. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always make sure that the seatis in the upright position.

G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained on the rearseats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,we strongly recommend that children beplaced in the rear seat whenever possible.Regardless of seating position, children 12

Seats 103

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

years old and under must be seated andproperly secured in an appropriately sizedchild restraint system or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild. For additional information, see the"Children in the vehicle" section.A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries issignificantly increased if the child restraintsare not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seatheating, observe the following information:Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If

liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them assoon as possible.Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not

switch on the seat heating. The seatheating should also not be used to drythe seats.Rclean the seat covers as recommended;

see "Interior care".Rdo not transport heavy loads on the

seats. Do not place sharp objects on theseat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.The seats should only be occupied bypassengers, if possible.Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do

not cover the seats with insulatingmaterials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags,seat covers, child seats or booster seats.

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell or behind the seats when resettingthe seats. There is a risk that the seatsand/or the objects could be damaged.

i It is not possible to remove the headrestraints from the front seats. The rear-compartment head restraints, however,can be removed (Y page 106).For more information, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i Further related subjects:RImportant safety notes on air bags

(Y page 44)RCargo compartment enlargement

(folding down the rear bench seat)(Y page 335)RSecuring children in the vehicle

(Y page 60)

Adjusting the seats electrically

: Head restraint height; Seat cushion angle= Seat height? Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentA Backrest angle

i Vehicles with memory function: if PRE-SAFE® has been triggered, the front-passenger seat will be moved to a betterposition if it was previously in anunfavorable position.

i You can store the seat settings using thememory function (Y page 116).

Adjusting the head restraints

General notesPay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 103).Do not rotate the head restraints of the frontand rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust

104 SeatsSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

the height and angle of the head restraints tothe correct position.

Adjusting the head restraints manually

Adjusting the head restraint height

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to thedesired position.

X To lower: press release catch : in thedirection of the arrow and push the headrestraint down to the desired position.

Adjusting the fore/aft position of thehead restraint

With this function you can adjust the distancebetween the head restraint and the back ofthe seat occupant's head.X To adjust forwards: pull the head restraint

forwards in the direction of the arrow untilit engages.

There are several notches.X To move backwards: press and hold

release button : and push the headrestraint backwards.

X When the head restraint is in the desiredposition, release the button and make surethat the head restraint is engaged inposition.

i Adjust the head restraint so that the backof your head is as close to the headrestraint as possible.

Adjusting the head restraintselectricallyX To adjust the head restraint height: slide

the switch for head restraint adjustment(Y page 104) up or down in the direction ofthe arrow.

Adjusting the luxury head restraints

X To adjust the side bolsters of the head restraint: push or pull right and/or left-hand side bolster : into the desiredposition.

X To adjust the fore/aft position of the head restraint: push or pull the headrestraint in the direction of arrow ;.

i Adjust the head restraint so that the backof your head is as close to the headrestraint as possible.

Seats 105

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

Rear seat head restraints

Adjusting the rear seat head restraintheight

X Once the head restraint is fully lowered,press release catch :.

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to thedesired position.

X To lower: press release catch : and pushthe head restraint down until it is in thedesired position.

Removing and installing the rear seathead restraints

X To remove: pull the head restraint up tothe stop.

X Press release catch : and pull the headrestraint out of the guides.

X To re-install: insert the head restraint sothat the notches on the bar are on the leftwhen viewed in the direction of travel.

X Push the head restraint down until you hearit engage in position.

Adjusting the angle of the rear seatbackrests

You can adjust the angle of the backrests inthe second row of seats. There are ten detentpositions to choose from.X Pull the left or right release lever ;

upwards in the direction of the arrow untilthe relevant backrest : is fully released.

X Pull the backrest : forwards in thedirection of the arrow and allow it toengage.

X To ensure that the backrest has engaged,lean firmly against backrest :.

Adjusting the multicontour seatYou can set the multicontour seat usingCOMAND. See the separate COMANDOperating Instructions.

106 SeatsSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

: To raise the backrest contour; To soften the backrest contour= To lower the backrest contour? To harden the backrest contour

You can adjust the contour of the front seatbackrests individually to provide optimumsupport for your back.

Switching the seat heating on/off

Activating/deactivating

G WARNINGRepeatedly switching on the seat heating cancause the seat cushion and backrest pads tobecome very hot. The health of persons withlimited temperature sensitivity or a limitedability to react to excessively hightemperatures may be affected or they mayeven suffer burn-like injuries. There is a riskof injury.Therefore, do not switch the seat heating onrepeatedly.

Driver's and front-passenger seat

Rear seats

The three red indicator lamps in the buttonindicate the heating level you have selected.The system automatically switches downfrom level 3 to level 2 after approximatelyeight minutes.The system automatically switches downfrom level 2 to level 1 after approximately tenminutes.The system automatically switches offapproximately 35 minutes after it is set tolevel 1.You can set the distribution of the heatedsections of the seat cushion and backrest.You can find information about this in theseparate operating instructions.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position

1 or 2 in the ignition lock.X To switch on: press button : repeatedly

until the desired heating level is set.X To switch off: press button : repeatedly

until all the indicator lamps go out.

Seats 107

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatheating may switch off.

108 SeatsSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

Problems with the seat heating


The seat heating hasswitched offprematurely or cannotbe switched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electricalconsumers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as

the rear window defroster or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating willswitch back on automatically.

Switching the seat ventilation on/off


The three blue indicator lamps in the buttonsindicate the ventilation level you haveselected.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position

2 in the ignition lock.X To switch on: press button : repeatedly

until the desired ventilation level is set.X To switch off: press button : repeatedly

until all the indicator lamps go out.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatventilation may switch off.

i You can open the side windows and thesliding sunroof using the "Convenienceopening" feature (Y page 93). The seatventilation of the driver's seatautomatically switches to the highest level.

Seats 109

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

Problems with the seat ventilation


The seat ventilation hasswitched offprematurely or cannotbe switched on.


the rear window defroster or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat ventilation willswitch back on automatically.

Steering wheel




G WARNINGChildren could injure themselves if theyadjust the steering wheel. There is a risk ofinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Adjusting the steering wheelmanually

G WARNINGIf the steering wheel is unlocked while thevehicle is in motion, it could change positionunexpectedly. This could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.

Before starting off, make sure the steeringwheel is locked. Never unlock the steeringwheel while the vehicle is in motion.

: Release lever; To adjust the steering wheel height= To adjust the steering wheel position

(fore-and-aft adjustment)X Push release lever : down completely.

The steering column is unlocked.X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired

position.X Push release lever : up completely.

The steering column is locked.X Check if the steering column is locked.

When doing so, try to push the steeringwheel up or down or try to move it in thefore-and-aft direction.

110 Steering wheelSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

Adjusting the steering wheelelectrically

: To adjust the steering wheel height; To adjust the steering wheel position

(fore-and-aft adjustment)The steering wheel can also be adjusted whenthe SmartKey is removed from the ignitionlock.

i Further related subjects:REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature

(Y page 112)RStoring settings (Y page 116)

Steering wheel heating


X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.

X To switch on/off: turn the lever in thedirection of arrow : or ;.Indicator lamp = lights up or goes out.

Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: when youremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock,the steering wheel heating is deactivated.Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when you switchoff the ignition and open the driver's door, thesteering wheel heating is deactivated.

Steering wheel 111

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

Problems with the steering wheel heating


The steering wheelheating has switchedoff prematurely orcannot be switched on.


the rear window defroster or interior lighting.

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature


G WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel, you and other vehicleoccupants – particularly children – couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature ismaking adjustments, make sure that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of thesteering wheel.If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress one of the memory function position

buttons, orRmove the switch for steering wheel

adjustment in the opposite direction to thatin which the steering wheel is moving.

The adjustment process is stopped.

G WARNINGIf children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature, they can become trapped,particularly when unattended. There is a riskof injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature is making adjustments, you could losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.

Always wait until the adjustment process iscomplete before driving off.

The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes gettingin and out of your vehicle easier.You can activate and deactivate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 277).

Position of the steering wheel when theEASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is activeThe steering wheel swings upwards whenyou:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with KEYLESS-GO in

position 1Ropen the driver's door and the SmartKey is

in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock

i The steering wheel only moves upwards ifit has not already reached the upper endstop.

Position of the steering wheel fordrivingThe steering wheel is moved to the lastselected position when:Rthe driver's door is closedRyou insert the SmartKey into the ignition

lockorRyou press the Start/Stop button once on

vehicles with KEYLESS-GOWhen you close the driver's door with theignition switched on, the steering wheel is

112 Steering wheelSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

also automatically moved to the previouslyset position.The last position of the steering wheel isstored when you switch off the ignition orwhen you store the setting with the memoryfunction (Y page 116).

Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT featureIf the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature istriggered in an accident, the steering columnwill move upwards when the driver's door isopened. This occurs irrespective of theposition of the SmartKey in the ignition lock.This makes it easier to exit the vehicle andrescue the occupants.The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature isonly operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRYfeature is activated in the on-board computer(Y page 277).

Mirrors

Rear-view mirror

X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever :forwards or back.

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

G WARNINGThe exterior mirror on the front-passengerside reduces the size of the image. Visibleobjects are actually closer than they appear.

This means that you could misjudge thedistance from road users traveling behind,e.g. when changing lane. There is a risk of anaccident.For this reason, always make sure of theactual distance from the road users travelingbehind by glancing over your shoulder.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

X Press button : for the left-hand exteriormirror or button ; for the right-handexterior mirror.The indicator lamp in the correspondingbutton lights up in red.The indicator lamp goes out again aftersome time. You can adjust the selectedmirror using adjustment button = as longas the indicator lamp is lit.

X Press adjustment button = up, down, orto the left or right until you have adjustedthe exterior mirror to the correct position.You should have a good overview of trafficconditions.

The convex exterior mirrors provide a largerfield of vision.The exterior mirrors are heated automaticallyif the rear window defroster is switched onand the outside temperature is low.

Mirrors 113

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outelectrically

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

X Briefly press button :.Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.

i Make sure that the exterior mirrors arealways folded out fully while driving. Theycould otherwise vibrate.

i If you are driving faster than30 mph (47 km/h), you can no longer foldin the exterior mirrors.

Setting the exterior mirrorsIf the battery has been disconnected orcompletely discharged, the exterior mirrorsmust be reset. The exterior mirrors willotherwise not fold in when you select the"Fold in mirrors when locking" function in theon-board computer (Y page 277).X Make sure that the SmartKey is in

position 1 in the ignition lock.X Briefly press button :.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outautomaticallyIf the "Fold in mirrors when locking" functionis activated in the on-board computer:(Y page 277)

Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically assoon as you lock the vehicle from theoutside.Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again

automatically as soon as you unlock thevehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door.

Exterior mirror pushed out of positionIf an exterior mirror has been pushed out ofposition, proceed as follows:X Vehicles without electrically folding

exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirrorinto the correct position manually.

X Vehicles with electrically folding exterior mirrors: press and hold button forfolding the mirrors :(Y page 114) until youhear a click and then the mirror engage inposition.The mirror housing is engaged again andyou can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual(Y page 113).

Automatic anti-glare mirrorsThe rear-view mirror and the exterior mirroron the driver's side automatically go into anti-glare mode if the following conditions are metsimultaneously:Rthe ignition is switched on andRincident light from headlamps strikes the

sensor in the rear-view mirror.

i The mirrors do not go into anti-glare modeif reverse gear is engaged or if the interiorlighting is switched on.

114 MirrorsSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

Parking position for the exteriormirror on the front-passenger side

Setting and storing the parking position

Using reverse gear

: Button for the driver's side exterior mirror; Button for the front-passenger side

exterior mirror= Adjustment button? Memory button MYou can position the front-passenger sideexterior mirror in such a way that you can seethe rear wheel on that side as soon as youengage reverse gear. You can store thisposition.X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and

that the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.

X Press button ; for the exterior mirror onthe front-passenger side.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the preset parking position.

X Use adjustment button = to adjust theexterior mirror to a position that allows youto see the rear wheel and the curb.The parking position is stored.

i If you shift the transmission to anotherposition, the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side returns to the drivingposition.

Using the memory button


exterior mirror= Adjustment button? Memory button MYou can position the front-passenger sideexterior mirror in such a way that you can seethe rear wheel on that side as soon as youengage reverse gear. This setting can bestored using memory button M ?.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in

position 2 in the ignition lock.X With the exterior mirror on the front-

passenger side activated, use adjustmentbutton = to adjust the exterior mirror. Inthe exterior mirror, the rear wheel and thecurb should be visible.

X Press memory button M ? and one of thearrows on adjustment button = withinthree seconds.The parking position is stored if the exteriormirror does not move.

X If the mirror moves out of position, repeatthe steps.

Mirrors 115

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

Calling up a stored parking positionsetting


exterior mirror= Adjustment button? Memory button MX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock.X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-

passenger side using button ;.X Engage reverse gear.

The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves back to its original position:Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph

(15 km/h)Rif you press button : for the exterior

mirror on the driver's side

Memory function

Storing settings

G WARNINGIf you use the memory function on the driver'sside while driving, you could lose control ofthe vehicle as a result of the adjustmentsbeing made. There is a risk of an accident.Only use the memory function on the driver'sside when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNINGWhen the memory function adjusts the seator steering wheel, you and other vehicleoccupants – particularly children – couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.While the memory function is makingadjustments, make sure that no one has anybody parts in the sweep of the seat or steeringwheel. If somebody becomes trapped,immediately release the memory functionposition button. The adjustment process isstopped.

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if theyactivate the memory function, particularlywhen unattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

With the memory function, you can store upto three different settings, e.g. for threedifferent people.The following settings are stored as a singlememory preset:Rposition of the seat, backrest and head

restraintRdriver's side: steering wheel positionRdriver's side: position of the exterior

mirrors on the driver's and front-passengersides

116 Memory functionSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

X Adjust the seat (Y page 104).X On the driver's side, adjust the steering

wheel (Y page 111) and the exterior mirrors(Y page 113).

X Press the M memory button and then pressone of the storage position buttons 1, 2 or3 within three seconds.The settings are stored in the selectedpreset position. A tone sounds when thesettings have been completed.

The memory function can still be used if theSmartKey has been removed.

Calling up a stored settingX Press the button for storage position 1, 2

or 3. Keep pressing until the seat, steeringwheel and exterior mirrors are in the storedposition.

i The setting procedure is interrupted assoon as you release the storage positionbuttons.

Memory function 117

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

118

Useful information ............................ 120Exterior lighting ................................ 120Interior lighting ................................. 127Replacing bulbs ................................. 128Windshield wipers ............................ 132

119

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Useful information



Exterior lighting

General notesFor reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you drive with the lightsswitched on even during the daytime. In somecountries, operation of the headlamps variesdue to legal requirements and self-imposedobligations.

Driving abroad

Conversion to symmetrical low beamSwitch the headlamps to symmetrical lowbeam in countries in which traffic drives onthe opposite side of the road from the countrywhere the vehicle is registered. This preventsglare to oncoming traffic. When usingsymmetrical lights, the edge of the road is notlit as widely and as far ahead as normal.Have the headlamps converted at a qualifiedspecialist workshop as close to the border aspossible before driving in these countries.

Conversion to asymmetrical low beamafter returningHave the headlamps converted back toasymmetrical low-beam headlamps at aqualified specialist workshop as soon aspossible after crossing the border again.

Setting the exterior lighting

Setting optionsExterior lighting can be set using:Rthe light switchRthe combination switch (Y page 123)Rthe on-board computer (Y page 274)

Light switch

Operation

1W Left-hand standing lamps2X Right-hand standing lamps3T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting4Ã Automatic headlamp mode,

controlled by the light sensor5L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsBR Rear fog lamp

If you hear a warning tone when you leave thevehicle, the lights may still be switched on.X Turn the light switch to Ã.The exterior lighting (except the parking/standing lamps) switches off automatically ifyou:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with the SmartKey

in position 0.

Automatic headlamp modeG WARNINGWhen the light switch is set to Ã, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched on

120 Exterior lightingLi

ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

automatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

The automatic headlamp feature is only anaid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle'slighting at all times.




Ã is the favored light switch setting. Thelight setting is automatically selectedaccording to the brightness of the ambientlight (exception: poor visibility due to weatherconditions such as fog, snow or spray):RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock:

the parking lamps are switched on or offautomatically depending on the brightnessof the ambient light.RWith the engine running: if you have

activated the daytime running lampsfunction via the on-board computer, thedaytime running lamps or the low-beamheadlamps and parking lamps are switchedon or off automatically depending on thebrightness of the ambient light.

X To switch on automatic headlamp mode: turn the light switch to Ã.

Only for Canada:The daytime running lamps improve thevisibility of your vehicle during the day. Thedaytime running lamps function is required bylaw in Canada. It cannot therefore bedeactivated.When the engine is running and the vehicle isstationary: if you move the selector lever froma drive position to P, the daytime runninglamps/low-beam headlamps go out afterthree minutes.When the engine is running, the vehicle isstationary and in high ambient light: if youturn the light switch to T, you turn on thedaytime running lamps and parking lamps.If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to L, the manual settings takeprecedence over the daytime running lamps.USA only:The daytime running lamps improve thevisibility of your vehicle during the day. To dothis, the daytime running lamps function mustbe switched on using the on-board computer(Y page 274).If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to T or L, the manual settingstake precedence over the daytime runninglamps.

i In the USA, the daytime running lamps aredeactivated upon delivery from the factory.

Low-beam headlampsG WARNINGWhen the light switch is set to Ã, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

Exterior lighting 121

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Z




Even if the light sensor does not detect thatit is dark, the parking lamps and low-beamheadlamps switch on when the ignition isswitched on and the light switch is set to theL position. This is a particularly usefulfunction in the event of rain and fog.X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:

turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L.The green L indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

Rear fog lamp

1W Left-hand standing lamps2X Right-hand standing lamps

3T Parking lamps, license plate andinstrument cluster lighting

4Ã Automatic headlamp mode,controlled by the light sensor

5L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsBR Rear fog lamp

The rear fog lamp improves visibility of yourvehicle for the traffic behind in the event ofthick fog. Please take note of the country-specific regulations for the use of rear foglamps.X To switch on the rear fog lamps: turn the

SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.X Press the R button.

The yellow R indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press theR button.The yellow R indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Parking lamps! If the battery has been excessively

discharged, the parking lamps or standinglamps are automatically switched off toenable the next engine start. Always parkyour vehicle safely and sufficiently litaccording to legal standards. Avoid thecontinuous use of the T parking lampsfor several hours. If possible, switch on theX right or the W left standing lamp.


ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers



controlled by the light sensor5L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsBR Rear fog lampX To switch on: turn light switch to T.

The green T indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

Standing lamps




Switching on the standing lamps ensures thecorresponding side of the vehicle isilluminated.X To switch on the standing lamps: the

SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it isin position 0.

X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand sideof the vehicle) or X (right-hand side ofthe vehicle).

Combination switch

Turn signal

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To indicate briefly: press the combination

switch briefly to the pressure point in thedirection of arrow ; or ?.The corresponding turn signal flashes threetimes.

X To indicate: press the combination switchbeyond the pressure point in the directionof arrow ; or ?.


Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Z

High-beam headlamps

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To switch on the high-beam headlamps:

turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.X Press the combination switch beyond the

pressure point in the direction ofarrow :.In the Ã position, the high-beamheadlamps are only switched on when it isdark and the engine is running.The blue K indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up when the high-beam headlamps are switched on.

X To switch off the high-beam headlamps: move the combination switchback to its normal position.The blue K indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

i Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist:when Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active,it controls activation of the high-beamheadlamps (Y page 125).

High-beam flasher

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To switch on: turn the SmartKey in the

ignition lock to position 1 or 2 or start theengine.

X Pull the combination switch in the directionof arrow =.

Hazard warning lamps

X To switch on the hazard warning lamps: press button :.All turn signals flash. If you now switch ona turn signal using the combination switch,only the turn signal lamp on thecorresponding side of the vehicle will flash.

X To switch off the hazard warning lamps: press button :.


ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

The hazard warning lamps automaticallyswitch on if:Ran air bag is deployed.Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a

speed of more than 45mph (70 km/h) andcomes to a standstill.

The hazard warning lamps switch offautomatically if the vehicle reaches a speedof over 6mph (10km/h) again after a fullbrake application.

i The hazard warning lamps still operate ifthe ignition is switched off.

Headlamp cleaning systemThe headlamps are cleaned automatically ifthe "Wipe with washer fluid" function isoperated five times (Y page 132) while thelights are on and the engine is running. Whenyou switch off the ignition, the automaticheadlamp cleaning system is reset andcounting is resumed from 0.

Active light function

The active light function is a system thatmoves the headlamps according to thesteering movements of the front wheels. Inthis way, relevant areas remain illuminatedwhile driving. This allows you to recognizepedestrians, cyclists and animals.Active: when the lights are switched on.

Cornering light function

The cornering light function improves theillumination of the road over a wide angle inthe direction you are turning, enabling bettervisibility in tight bends, for example. It canonly be activated when the low-beamheadlamps are switched on.Active: Rif you are driving at speeds below

25mph (40 km/h) and switch on the turnsignal or turn the steering wheelRif you are driving at speeds between

25mph (40 km/h) and45mph (70 km/h)and turn the steering wheel

Not active: if your speed exceeds25mph (40 km/h) or if you switch off the turnsignal or turn the steering wheel to thestraight-ahead position.The cornering light function may remain lit fora short time, but is automatically switched offafter no more than three minutes.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist


G WARNINGAdaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognizeroad users:Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestriansRwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclistsRwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier


Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Z

In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assistmay fail too recognize other road users thathave lights, or may recognize them too late.In this or similar situations, the automatichigh-beam headlamps will not be deactivatedor activated regardless. There is a risk of anaccident.Always carefully observe the traffic conditionsand switch off the high-beam headlamps ingood time.

You can use this function to set theheadlamps to change between low beam andhigh beam automatically. The systemrecognizes vehicles with their lights on, eitherapproaching from the opposite direction ortraveling in front of your vehicle, andconsequently switches the headlamps fromhigh beam to low beam.The system automatically adapts the low-beam headlamp range depending on thedistance to the other vehicle. Once thesystem no longer detects any other vehicles,it reactivates the high-beam headlamps.The system's optical sensor is located behindthe windshield near the overhead controlpanel.

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assiston/off

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To activate: activate the Adaptive

Highbeam Assist function using the on-board computer (Y page 275).

X Turn the light switch to Ã.X Press the combination switch beyond the

pressure point in the direction of arrow :(Y page 123).The _ indicator lamp in themultifunction display lights up if it is darkand the light sensor activates the low-beamheadlamps.If you are driving at speeds aboveapproximately 28 mph (45 km/h):the headlamp range is set automaticallydepending on the distance between thevehicle and other road users.If you are driving at speeds aboveapproximately 35 mph (55 km/h) and noother road users have been detected:the high-beam headlamps are switched onautomatically. The K indicator lamp inthe instrument cluster also lights up.If you are driving at speeds belowapproximately 30 mph (45 km/h) or otherroad users have been detected or the roadsare adequately lit:


ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

The high-beam headlamps are switched offautomatically. The K indicator lamp inthe instrument cluster goes out. The _indicator lamp in the multifunction displayremains lit.

X To deactivate: move the combinationswitch back to its normal position.The _ indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

Headlamps fogged up on the insideThe headlamps may fog up on the inside ifthere is high atmospheric humidity.X Switch on the lights and drive off.

The level of moisture diminishes,depending on the length of the journey andthe weather conditions (humidity andtemperature).

If the level of moisture does not diminish:

X Have the headlamps checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Interior lighting

Overview of interior lighting

Overhead control panel: p To switch the left-hand front reading

lamp on/off; c To switch the front interior lighting

on= v To switch the rear interior lighting

on/off

? | To switch the front interior lighting/automatic interior lighting control off

A p To switch the right-hand frontreading lamp on/off

B To switch the automatic interior lightingcontrol on

Interior lighting control

General notesIn order to prevent the vehicle's battery fromdischarging, the interior lighting functions areautomatically deactivated after some timeexcept for when the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.The color and brightness of the ambientlighting can be adjusted using the on-boardcomputer (Y page 275).

Automatic interior lighting control




on/off? | To switch the front interior lighting/

automatic interior lighting control offA p To switch the right-hand front

reading lamp on/offB To switch the automatic interior lighting

control on

Interior lighting 127

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Z

X To switch on: set the switch to centerposition B.

X To switch off: set the switch to the |position.

The interior lighting automatically switcheson if you:Runlock the vehicleRopen a doorRremove the SmartKey from the ignition

lock.The interior light is activated for a short whilewhen the SmartKey is removed from theignition lock. You can activate this delayedswitch-off using the on-board computer(Y page 276).

Manual interior lighting control




on/off? | To switch the front interior lighting/

automatic interior lighting control offA p To switch the right-hand front

reading lamp on/offB To switch the automatic interior lighting

control on

X To switch the front interior lighting on:set the switch to the c position.

X To switch the interior lighting off: set theswitch to the | position or (if the dooris closed) to the center position.

X To switch the rear interior lighting on/off: press the u button.

X To switch the reading lamps on/off:press the p button.

Crash-responsive emergency lightingThe interior lighting is activated automaticallyif the vehicle is involved in an accident.X To switch off the crash-responsive

emergency lighting: press the hazardwarning lamp button.

orX Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the

SmartKey.

Replacing bulbs


Xenon bulbs

G DANGERXenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can getan electric shock if you remove the cover ofthe Xenon bulb and touch the electricalcontacts. There is a risk of fatal injury.Never touch the parts or the electricalcontacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have workon the Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

If your vehicle is equipped with Xenon bulbs,you can recognize this by the following: thecone of light from the Xenon bulbs movesfrom the top to the bottom and back againwhen you start the engine. For this to beobserved, the lights must be switched onbefore starting the engine.

128 Replacing bulbsLi

ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Other bulbs

G WARNINGBulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hotwhen operating. If you change a bulb, youcould burn yourself on these components.There is a risk of injury.Allow these components to cool down beforechanging a bulb.

There are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbsthat you cannot replace. Replace only thebulbs listed (Y page 129). Have the bulbs thatyou cannot replace yourself changed at aqualified specialist workshop.If you require assistance changing bulbs,consult a qualified specialist workshop.Do not touch the glass tube of new bulbs withyour bare hands. Even minor contaminationcan burn into the glass surface and reducethe service life of the bulbs. Always use a lint-free cloth or only touch the base of the bulbwhen installing.Only use bulbs of the correct type.If the new bulb still does not light up, consulta qualified specialist workshop.Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Overview: changing bulbs/bulb typesYou can change the following bulbs. The bulbtype can be found in the legend.

Halogen headlamps: Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W; High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W= Parking lamp/standing lamp: W 5 W BV? Side marker lamp: WY 5 W

Tail lamp: Brake lamp: P 21 W-L

Changing the front bulbs

Removing and installing the cover in thefront wheel housingYou must remove the cover from the frontwheel housing before you can change thefront bulbs.

Replacing bulbs 129

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Z

X To remove: switch off the lights.X Turn the front wheels inwards.X Remove securing pin ; using a suitable

tool.X Slide cover : up and remove it.X To install: insert cover : again and slide

it down until it engages.X Insert securing pin ;.

Low-beam headlamps (halogenheadlamps)

G WARNINGThese bulbs are pressurized.They can explode when being changed if:Rthey are still hotRthey hit an object when being removedRthey are droppedThere is a risk of injury.You should wear eye protection and cleangloves when you are changing a bulb. Ifnecessary, have bulbs changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X Remove the cover in the front wheelhousing (Y page 129).

X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwiseand pull it out.

X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise andpull it out.

X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn

it clockwise.X Align housing cover : and turn it

clockwise until it engages.X Replace the cover in the front wheel

housing (Y page 129).

High-beam headlamps (halogenheadlamps)

G WARNINGThese bulbs are pressurized.They can explode when being changed if:Rthey are still hotRthey hit an object when being removedRthey are droppedThere is a risk of injury.You should wear eye protection and cleangloves when you are changing a bulb. Ifnecessary, have bulbs changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.

130 Replacing bulbsLi

ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwiseand pull it out.

X Pull lever = upwards and remove bulbholder ;.

X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.X Simultaneously press bulb holder ; and

pull lever = downwards.X Align housing cover : and turn it

clockwise until it engages.

Parking lamps/standing lamps(halogen headlamps)

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise

and pull it out.X Pull out bulb holder ;.X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.X Insert bulb holder ;.X Align housing cover : and turn it

clockwise until it engages.

Side marker lamps

X Remove the cover in the front wheelhousing (Y page 129).

X Turn cap ; counter-clockwise and removeit.

X Pull out bulb holder :.X Take the bulb out of bulb holder :.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder :.X Insert bulb holder :.X Align cap ; and turn it clockwise until it

engages.X Replace the cover in the front wheel

housing (Y page 129).

Replacing bulbs 131

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Z

Changing the rear bulbs

Opening and closing the service flap

Left-hand service flap

Right-hand service flap

You must open the service flap in the cargocompartment before you can change thebulbs in the brake lamp.X To open: release service flap : at the top,

e.g. with a screwdriver, and swing itdownward in the direction of the arrow.

X Right side: remove the first-aid kitbeforehand and pull the parcel net down.

X To close: reinsert service flap :.

Brake lamp

X Switch off the lights.X Open the cargo compartment.X Open the service flap (Y page 132).X Turn bulb holder : counter-clockwise and

remove it.X Take bulb out of bulb holder :.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder :.X Insert bulb holder : into the lamp and turn

it clockwise.X Close the service flap (Y page 132).

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wipers on/off

! Do not operate the windshield wiperswhen the windshield is dry, as this coulddamage the wiper blades. Moreover, dustthat has collected on the windshield canscratch the glass if wiping takes place whenthe windshield is dry.If it is necessary to switch on the windshieldwipers in dry weather conditions, alwaysuse washer fluid when operating thewindshield wipers.

! If the windshield wipers leave smears onthe windshield after the vehicle has beenwashed in an automatic car wash, wax orother residues may be the reason for this.Clean the windshield using washer fluidafter washing the vehicle in an automaticcar wash.

132 Windshield wipersLi

ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: dueto optical influences and the windshieldbecoming dirty in dry weather conditions,the windshield wipers may be activatedinadvertently. This could then damage thewindshield wiper blades or scratch thewindshield.For this reason, you should always switchoff the windshield wipers in dry weather.

Combination switch1 $ Windshield wiper off2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor

set to low sensitivity)3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor

set to high sensitivity)4 ° Continuous wipe, slow5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fastB í Single wipeC î To wipe with washer fluidX Switch on the ignition.X Turn the combination switch to the

corresponding position.In the Ä or Å position, the appropriatewiping frequency is set automaticallyaccording to the intensity of the rain. Inthe Å position, the rain sensor is moresensitive than in the Ä position, causingthe windshield wipers to wipe morefrequently.If the wiper blades are worn, the windshieldwill no longer be wiped properly. This couldprevent you from observing the trafficconditions, thereby causing an accident.

Replace the wiper blades twice a year, ideallyin spring and fall.

Switching the rear window wiper on/off

Combination switch: è Rear window wiper switch2 b To wipe with washer fluid3 I To switch on intermittent wiping4 0 To switch off intermittent wiping5 ô To wipe with washer fluidX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the

ignition lock (Y page 157).X Turn switch : on the combination switch

to the corresponding position.When the rear window wiper is switched on,the icon appears in the instrument cluster.

Replacing the wiper blades


G WARNINGIf the windshield wipers begin to move whileyou are changing the wiper blades, you couldbe trapped by the wiper arm. There is a riskof injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andignition before changing the wiper blades.

! Never open the hood/tailgate if a wiperarm has been folded away from thewindshield/rear window.

Windshield wipers 133

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Z

Never fold a windshield wiper arm withouta wiper blade back onto the windshield/rear window.Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly whenyou change the wiper blade. If you releasethe wiper arm without a wiper blade and itfalls onto the windshield/rear window, thewindshield/rear window may be damagedby the force of the impact.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe wiper blades changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades,make sure that you touch only the wiperarm of the wiper.

Changing the windshield wiper blades

Removing the wiper bladesX Remove the SmartKey from the ignition

lock.X Fold the wiper arm away from the

windshield.

X Firmly press release knob : and pull wiperblade ; upwards from the wiper arm in thedirection of the arrow.

Installing the wiper blades

X Position new wiper blade : in the retaineron the wiper arm and slide it into place inthe direction of the arrow.The wiper blade audibly engages.

X Make sure that wiper blade is seatedcorrectly.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto thewindshield.

Replacing the rear window wiper blade

Removing the wiper blades

X Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

X Fold wiper arm : away from the rearwindow until it engages.

X Position wiper blade ; at a right angle towiper arm :.

X Hold wiper arm : and press wiperblade ; in the direction of the arrow untilit releases.

X Remove wiper blade ;.


ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

Installing the wiper bladeX Place new wiper blade ; onto wiper

arm :.X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper

blade ; in the opposite direction to thearrow until it engages.

X Make sure that wiper blade ; is seatedcorrectly.

X Position wiper blade ; parallel to wiperarm :.

X Fold wiper arm : back onto the rearwindow.

Windshield wipers 135

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Z

Problems with the windshield wipers


The windshield wipersare jammed.

Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshieldwiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the

ignition lock.orX Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the

driver's door.X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipersfail completely.

The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist

workshop.


ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

Useful information ............................ 138Overview of climate control sys-tems ................................................... 138Operating the climate control sys-tems ................................................... 144Setting the air vents ......................... 151

137

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Useful information



Overview of climate control systems

Important safety notesObserve the settings recommended on thefollowing pages. The windows couldotherwise fog up.To prevent the windows from fogging up:Rswitch off climate control only brieflyRswitch on air-recirculation mode only

brieflyRswitch on the cooling with air

dehumidification functionRswitch on the defrost windshield function

briefly, if requiredClimate control regulates the temperatureand the humidity in the vehicle interior andfilters undesirable substances out of the air.Climate control is only operational when theengine is running. The system only worksoptimally when the side windows and the roofare closed.The residual heat function can only beactivated or deactivated with the ignitionswitched off (Y page 150).

i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief periodduring warm weather, e.g. using theconvenience opening feature (Y page 93).This will speed up the cooling process andthe desired vehicle interior temperaturewill be reached more quickly.

i The integrated filter can filter out mostparticles of dust, and completely filters outpollen. A clogged filter reduces the amountof air supplied to the vehicle interior. Forthis reason, you should always observe theinterval for replacing the filter, which isspecified in the Maintenance Booklet. As itdepends on environmental conditions, e.g.heavy air pollution, the interval may beshorter than stated in the MaintenanceBooklet.

i It is possible that the dehumidificationfunction of the climate control system maybe activated automatically an hour after theSmartKey has been removed. The vehicleis ventilated for 30 minutes.

138 Overview of climate control systemsCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

USA onlyFront control panel

: To set the temperature, left (Y page 146); To defrost the windshield (Y page 148)= To switch maximum cooling on/off (Y page 148)? To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 145)A To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 149)B To set the temperature, right (Y page 146)C To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 150)D To set the air distribution (Y page 147)E To increase the airflow (Y page 147)F To reduce the airflow (Y page 147)G To switch climate control on/off (Y page 144)H To set climate control to automatic (Y page 145)

Overview of climate control systems 139

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Canada onlyFront control panel

: To set the temperature, left (Y page 146); To defrost the windshield (Y page 148)= To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 148)? To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 145) or activates/

deactivates the residual heating function (Y page 150)A To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 149)B To set the temperature, right (Y page 146)C To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 150)D To set the air distribution (Y page 147)E To increase the airflow (Y page 147)F To reduce the airflow (Y page 147)G To switch climate control on/off (Y page 144)H To set climate control to automatic (Y page 145)

Rear control panel: To set rear-compartment climate control to automatic; To switch rear-compartment climate control on/off


imat

e co

ntro

l

= To direct the airflow through the rear air vents? To direct the airflow through the footwell vents

Information about using dual-zoneautomatic climate control

The following contains notes andrecommendations on optimum use of dual-zone automatic climate control.RActivate climate control using the Ã and¿/Á buttons. The indicator lamps inthe Ã and ¿/Á buttons light up.RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).ROnly use the defrosting function briefly

until the windshield is clear again.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.

if there are unpleasant outside odors orwhen in a tunnel. The windows couldotherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawninto the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.RUse the ZONE function to adopt the

temperature settings on the driver's sidefor the front-passenger side as well. Theindicator lamp above the á button goesout.

i During automatic engine switch-off, theECO start/stop function only operates at areduced capacity. If you require the fullclimate control output, you can switch offthe ECO start/stop function by pressingthe ECO button (Y page 163).


Clim

ate

cont

rol

Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control

USA onlyFront control panel

: To set the temperature, left (Y page 146); To defrost the windshield (Y page 148)= To switch maximum cooling on/off (Y page 148)? To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 145)A To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 149)B To set the temperature, right (Y page 146)C To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 148)D To switch climate control on/off (Y page 144)E To set the air distribution (Y page 147)F To increase the airflow (Y page 147)G To reduce the airflow (Y page 147)H DisplayI To adjust the climate mode settings (Y page 146)J To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 150)K To set climate control to automatic (Y page 145)

Rear control panel

L To increase the airflow (Y page 147)M To set the temperature (Y page 146)N To set rear-compartment climate control to automatic (Y page 145)O To direct the airflow through the rear air vents (Y page 147)P To direct the airflow through the footwell vents (Y page 147)


imat

e co

ntro

l

Q To switch rear-compartment climate control on/off (Y page 144)R To reduce the airflow (Y page 147)

Canada onlyFront control panel

: To set the temperature, left (Y page 146); To defrost the windshield (Y page 148)= To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 148)? To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 145) or activate/

deactivate the residual heating function (Y page 150)A To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 149)B To set the temperature, right (Y page 146)C To switch rear-compartment climate control on/offD To switch climate control on/off (Y page 144)E To set the air distribution (Y page 147)F To increase the airflow (Y page 147)G To reduce the airflow (Y page 147)H DisplayI To adjust the climate mode settings (Y page 146)J To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 150)K To set climate control to automatic (Y page 145)

Rear control panel

L To increase the airflow (Y page 147)M To set the temperature (Y page 146)N To set rear-compartment climate control to automatic (Y page 145)O To direct the airflow through the rear air vents (Y page 147)


Clim

ate

cont

rol

P To direct the airflow through the footwell vents (Y page 147)Q To switch rear-compartment climate control on/off (Y page 144)R To reduce the airflow (Y page 147)

Information about using 3-zoneautomatic climate control

The following contains instructions andrecommendations to enable you to get themost out of your automatic climate control.RActivate climate control using the Ã and¿ buttons. The indicator lamps abovethe Ã and ¿ buttons light up.RIn automatic mode, you can also use theñ button to set a climate mode(FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE). TheMEDIUM level is recommended.RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).ROnly use the defrosting function briefly

until the windshield is clear again.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.

if there are unpleasant outside odors orwhen in a tunnel. The windows couldotherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawninto the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.RUse the ZONE function to adopt the

temperature settings on the driver's sidefor the front-passenger side and the rearcompartment as well. The indicator lampabove the á button goes out.RUse the residual heat function if you want

to heat or ventilate the vehicle interiorwhen the ignition is switched off. Theresidual heat function can only be activatedor deactivated with the ignition switchedoff.

i During automatic engine switch-off, theECO start/stop function only operates at areduced capacity. If you require the fullclimate control output, you can switch offthe ECO start/stop function by pressingthe ECO button (Y page 163).

Operating the climate controlsystems

Switching climate control on/off

Points to observe before useWhen the climate control is switched off, theair supply and air circulation are alsoswitched off. Only use this setting for a briefperiod. The windows could otherwise fog up.Only switch off climate control briefly toprevent the windows from fogging up.

i Switch on climate control primarily usingthe Ã button (Y page 145).

In the rear compartment, you can also switchclimate control on and off using the Ã and^ buttons.

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock (Y page 157).X To activate: press the Ã button.

The indicator lamp in the Ã button lightsup. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.

orX Press the ^ button.

The indicator lamp in the ̂ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored.

X To deactivate: press the ^ button.The indicator lamp in the ̂ button lightsup.

144 Operating the climate control systemsCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

Activating/deactivating cooling withair dehumidification

Points to observe before useIf you switch off the cooling function, thevehicle will not be cooled when weatherconditions are warm. The windows can fog upmore quickly. Only deactivate the coolingwith air dehumidification function for a shorttime to prevent the windows from fogging up.The cooling with air dehumidification functionis only available when the engine is running.The air inside the vehicle is cooled anddehumidified according to the temperatureselected.Condensation may drip from the underside ofthe vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This isnormal and not a sign that there is amalfunction.


Example: ¿ button

X To activate: press the ¿/Á button.The indicator lamp in the ¿/Ábutton lights up.

X To deactivate: press the ¿/Ábutton.The indicator lamp in the ¿/Ábutton goes out. The cooling with airdehumidification function has a delayedswitch-off feature.

Problems with the "cooling with airdehumidification" functionWhen you press the ¿ button, theindicator lamp in the button flashes threetimes or remains off. You can no longer switchon the cooling with air dehumidificationfunction.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting climate control to automatic

Points to observe before useIf you switch off the cooling function, thevehicle will not be cooled when weatherconditions are warm. The windows can fog upmore quickly. Only deactivate the coolingwith air dehumidification function for a shorttime to prevent the windows from fogging up.In automatic mode, the set temperature ismaintained automatically at a constant level.The system automatically regulates thetemperature of the dispensed air, the airflowand the air distribution.Automatic mode will achieve optimaloperation if cooling with air dehumidificationis also activated. If necessary, cooling with airdehumidification can be deactivated.In the rear compartment, you can also switchclimate control for the rear seats to automaticmode using the Ã button.


Operating the climate control systems 145

Clim

ate

cont

rol

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 157).

X Set the desired temperature.X To activate: press the Ã button.

The indicator lamp in the Ã button lightsup. Automatic air distribution and airfloware activated.

X To select manually: press the _button.

orX Press the I or K button.

The indicator lamp in the Ã button goesout.

3-zone automatic climate control: whenautomatic mode is activated, you can selecta climate mode (Y page 146).

Adjusting the climate mode settingsYou can select the following climate modesettings in automatic mode:FOCUS high airflow that is set slightly

coolerMEDIUM medium airflow, standard settingDIFFUSE low airflow that is set slightly

warmer and with less draft


X Press the Ã button.X Press the ñ button repeatedly until the

desired climate mode appears in thedisplay.

Setting the temperature

Dual-zone automatic climate controlDifferent temperatures can be set for thedriver's and front-passenger sides.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock (Y page 157).X To increase/reduce: turn control : orB clockwise or counter-clockwise(Y page 139).Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

3-zone automatic climate control

Automatic climate control zones

You can select different temperature settingsfor the driver's and front-passenger sides aswell as for the rear compartment.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock (Y page 157).X To increase/reduce the temperature in

the front: turn control : or B clockwiseor counter-clockwise (Y page 142).Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

X To increase/reduce the temperature in the rear compartment using the front control panel: press the á button.The indicator lamp in the á button goesout.

X Turn control : clockwise or counter-clockwise (Y page 142).


imat

e co

ntro

l

Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).The temperature setting for the driver'sside is adopted for the rear compartmentand the front-passenger side.

X To increase/decrease the rear compartment temperature using the rear control panel: turn control Mclockwise or counter-clockwise on the rearcontrol panel (Y page 142).Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

Setting the air distribution

Air distribution settingsFront control panelP Directs the airflow through the center

ventsO Directs air through the footwell air

ventsS Directs the airflow through the center

and footwell vents¯ Directs air through the defroster ventsb Directs the airflow through the

defroster and center vents (Canadaonly)

a Directs air through the defroster andfootwell vents

_ Directs the airflow through thedefroster, center and footwell air vents(Canada only)

Rear control panelM Directs the airflow through the rear

center and rear side air ventsO Directs air through the footwell air

vents

i Using the rear control panel, you can alsoactivate both air distribution positionssimultaneously. In order to do this, pressboth air distribution buttons. The air is thenrouted through all rear air vents.

i Regardless of the air distribution setting,airflow is always directed through the sideair vents. The side air vents can only beclosed when the controls on the side airvents are turned downwards.

Adjusting


X Press the _ button repeatedly until thedesired symbol appears in the display.

Setting the airflow


X To increase: press the K button.X To reduce: press the I button.

i You can use 3-zone automatic climatecontrol to set the airflow in the rearcompartment separately.


Clim

ate

cont

rol

Switching the ZONE function on/off

X To activate: press the á button.The indicator lamp above the á buttonlights up.Dual-zone automatic climate control: thetemperature setting for the driver's side isnot adopted for the front-passenger side.3-zone automatic climate control: thetemperature setting for the driver's side isnot adopted for the front-passenger sideand the rear compartment.

X To deactivate: press the á button.The indicator lamp above the á buttongoes out.Dual-zone automatic climate control: thetemperature setting for the driver's side isadopted for the front-passenger side.3-zone automatic climate control: thetemperature setting for the driver's side isadopted for the front-passenger side andthe rear compartment.

Defrosting the windshieldYou can use this function to defrost thewindshield or to defrost the inside of thewindshield and the side windows.Switch off the "defrosting" function as soonas the windshield is clear again.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock (Y page 157).X To activate: press the ¬ button.

The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lightsup.

The climate control system switches to thefollowing functions:Rhigh airflowRhigh temperatureRair distribution to the windshield and

front side windowsRair-recirculation mode off

X To deactivate: press the ¬ button.The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored. Air-recirculation mode remainsdeactivated.

orX Press the Ã button.

The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goesout. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.

orX Turn controls : or B clockwise or

counter-clockwise:Dual-zone automatic climate control(Y page 139)3-zone automatic climate control(Y page 142)

orX Press the K or I button.

MAX COOL maximum coolingThe MAX COOL function is only available invehicles for the USA.

MAX COOL is only operational when theengine is running.


imat

e co

ntro

l

X To activate: press the Ù button.The indicator lamp in the button lights up.

X To activate: press off-road button Ùagain.The indicator lamp goes out. The previouslyselected settings are restored.

When you activate MAX COOL, climatecontrol switches to the following functions:Rmaximum coolingRmaximum airflowRair-recirculation mode on

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the insideX Activate the ¿ / Á cooling with air

dehumidification function.X Activate automatic mode Ã.X If the windows continue to fog up, activate

the defrosting function (Y page 148).i You should only select this setting until

the windshield is clear again.

Windows fogged up on the outsideX Press the _ button repeatedly until theP or O symbol appears in thedisplay.

i You should only select this setting untilthe windshield is clear again.

Rear window defroster


The rear window defroster has a high currentdraw. You should therefore switch it off assoon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise,the rear window defroster switches offautomatically after several minutes.If the battery voltage is too low, the rearwindow defroster may switch off.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock (Y page 157).X Press the ¤ button.

The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lightsup or goes out.


Clim

ate

cont

rol

Problems with the rear window defroster


The rear windowdefroster hasdeactivatedprematurely or cannotbe activated.

The battery has not been sufficiently charged.X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading

lamps or interior lighting.When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear windowdefroster is activated again automatically.

Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode

If you switch on air-recirculation mode, thewindows can fog up more quickly, inparticular at low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation mode briefly to prevent thewindows from fogging up.

You can deactivate the flow of fresh air ifunpleasant odors are entering the vehiclefrom outside. The air already inside thevehicle will then be recirculated.The operation of air-recirculation mode is thesame for all control panels.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock (Y page 157).X To activate: press the d button.

The indicator lamp in the d button lightsup.

i In the event of high pollution levels (3-zone automatic climate control only) or athigh outside temperatures, air-recirculation mode is automaticallyactivated. When air-recirculation mode is

activated automatically, the indicator lampin the d button is not lit.Outside air is added after about30 minutes.

X To deactivate: press the d button.The indicator lamp in the d button goesout.

i Air-recirculation mode deactivatesautomatically:Rafter approximately five minutes at

outside temperatures belowapproximately 41 ‡ (5 †)Rafter approximately five minutes if

cooling with air dehumidification isdeactivatedRafter approximately 30 minutes at

outside temperatures aboveapproximately 41 ‡(5 †) if the "Coolingwith air dehumidification" function isactivated

Activating/deactivating the residualheat function

The "residual heat" function is only availablein Canada.


imat

e co

ntro

l

It is possible to make use of the residual heatof the engine to continue heating thestationary vehicle for up to 30 minutes afterthe engine has been switched off. The heatingtime depends on the temperature that hasbeen set.X To activate: press the Ì/Á button.

The indicator lamp in the Ì/Ábutton lights up.

i The blower will run at a low speedregardless of the airflow setting.

i If you activate the residual heat functionat high temperatures, only the ventilationwill be activated. The blower runs atmedium speed.

X To deactivate: press the Ì/Ábutton.The indicator lamp in the Ì/Ábutton goes out.

Residual heat is deactivated automatically:Rafter approximately 30 minutesRwhen the ignition is switched onRif the battery voltage dropsRwhen the auxiliary heating is activated

Setting the air vents


G WARNINGVery hot or very cold air can flow from the airvents. This could result in burns or frostbite in

the immediate vicinity of the air vents. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants alwaysmaintain a sufficient distance to the airoutlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow toanother area of the vehicle interior.

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh airthrough the air vents into the vehicle interior,please observe the following notes:Rkeep the air inlet grille on the hood and in

the engine compartment on the front-passenger side free of blockages, such asice, snow or leaves.Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles

in the vehicle interior.

i For virtually draft-free ventilation, adjustthe sliders of the air vents to the centerposition.

Setting the center air vents

: Center air vent, left; Center air vent, right= Center vent thumbwheel, right? Center vent thumbwheel, left

X To open/close: turn thumbwheels =and ? to the right or left.

Setting the air vents 151

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Z

Setting the side air vents

: Side window defroster vent; Side air vent= Control for side air ventX To open/close: turn thumbwheel = up or

down.

Setting the glove box air vent! Close the air vent when heating the

vehicle.At high outside temperatures, open the airvent and activate the "cooling with airdehumidification" function. Otherwise,temperature-sensitive items stored in theglove box could be damaged.

: Air vent thumbwheel; Air vent

When automatic climate control is activated,the glove box can be ventilated, for instanceto cool its contents. The level of airflowdepends on the airflow and air distributionsettings.

X To open/close: turn thumbwheel :clockwise or counter-clockwise.

Setting the rear-compartment airvents

Setting the center vents in the rearcompartment

Example: center vents with rear control panel: Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel; Rear-compartment air vent, right= Rear control panel? Rear-compartment air vent, leftX To open/close: turn thumbwheel : up or

down.

Setting the rear-compartment side airvents

2nd row of seats

: B-pillar air vent; Thumbwheel for B-pillar air vent

152 Setting the air ventsCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

X To open/close: turn thumbwheel ; to theleft or right.

Setting the air vents 153

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Z

154

Useful information ............................ 156Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle 156Driving ............................................... 156Automatic transmission ................... 165Refueling ............................................ 173Parking ............................................... 179Driving tips ........................................ 182Driving systems ................................ 192Towing a trailer ................................. 253

155

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Useful information



Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle

Important safety notesNew and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect afterseveral hundred kilometers of driving.Compensate for this by applying greater forceto the brake pedal.

The first 1,000miles (1,500 km)The more you look after the engine when it isnew, the more satisfied you will be with itsperformance in the future.RYou should therefore drive at varying

vehicle and engine speeds for the first1,000 miles (1,500 km).RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full

throttle, during this period.RChange gear in good time, before the

tachometer needle is Ô of the way to thered area of the tachometer.RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to

brake the vehicle.RIf possible, do not depress the accelerator

pedal past the point of resistance(kickdown).ROnly select shift ranges 3, 2 or 1 when

driving slowly, e.g. in mountainous terrain.

After 1,000 miles (1,500 km), you canincrease the engine speed gradually andaccelerate the vehicle to full speed.Additional breaking-in notes for AMGvehicles:Rdo not drive faster than 85 mph

(140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles(1,500 km).Ronly allow the engine to reach a maximum

engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.Rchange gear in good time.Rideally, drive for the first 1,000 miles

(1,500km) in drive program C.

i You should also observe these notes onrunning in if the engine or parts of the drivetrain on your vehicle have been replaced.

i Always observe the respective speedlimits.

Driving


G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicleis jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats.

G WARNINGUnsuitable footwear can hinder correct usageof the pedals, e.g.:Rshoes with thick solesRshoes with high heelsRslippersThere is a risk of an accident.

156 DrivingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Wear suitable footwear to ensure correctusage of the pedals.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf the parking brake has not been fullyreleased when driving, the parking brake can:Roverheat and cause a fireRlose its hold function.There is a risk of fire and an accident. Releasethe parking brake fully before driving off.

! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not usethe engine's full performance until it hasreached operating temperature.Only shift the automatic transmission tothe desired drive position when the vehicleis stationary.Where possible, avoid spinning the drivewheels when pulling away on slipperyroads. You could otherwise damage thedrive train.

! AMG vehicles: at low engine oiltemperatures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), themaximum engine speed is restricted inorder to protect the engine. To protect theengine and maintain smooth engineoperation, avoid driving at full throttle whenthe engine is cold.

Key positions

SmartKey

g To remove the SmartKey1 Power supply for some consumers, such

as the windshield wipers2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)

and drive position3 To start the engine

As soon as the ignition is switched on, all theindicator lamps in the instrument cluster lightup. If an indicator lamp does not go out afterstarting the engine or lights up while driving,see (Y page 318).If the SmartKey is in position 0 in the ignitionlock for an extended period of time, it can nolonger be turned in the ignition lock. Thesteering is then locked. To unlock, remove theSmartKey and reinsert it into the ignition lock.The steering is locked when you remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.X Remove the SmartKey when the engine is

switched off.The starter battery could otherwise bedischarged.

If you cannot turn the SmartKey in the ignitionlock, the starter battery may not be chargedsufficiently.X Check the starter battery and recharge if

necessary (Y page 387).orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 389).

Driving 157

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

i The SmartKey can be turned in theignition lock even if it is not the correctSmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is notswitched on. The engine cannot be started.

KEYLESS-GO

General notesRDo not keep the KEYLESS-GO key:

- with electronic devices, e.g. a mobilephone or another SmartKey

- with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metalfoil

- inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal caseThis can impair the functionality of theKEYLESS-GO key.

Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key in thetemperature-controlled cup holder(Y page 344). Otherwise, the KEYLESS-GOkey will not be recognized.Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped witha SmartKey featuring an integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a detachable Start/Stopbutton.The Start/Stop button must be inserted in theignition lock and the SmartKey with theintegrated KEYLESS-GO function must be inthe vehicle.Pressing the Start/Stop button several timesin succession corresponds to the differentkey positions in the ignition lock. This is onlythe case if you are not depressing the brakepedal.If you depress the brake pedal and press theStart/Stop button, the engine startsimmediately.The Start/Stop button can be removed fromthe ignition lock. Then, you can insert theSmartKey into the ignition lock.

i You do not have to remove the Start/Stopbutton from the ignition lock when youleave the vehicle. You should, however,always take the SmartKey with you whenleaving the vehicle. As long as theSmartKey is in the vehicle:

Rthe vehicle can be started using theStart/Stop button andRelectrically powered equipment can be

operated.

i The engine can be turned off while thevehicle is in motion by pressing and holdingthe Start/Stop button for approximatelythree seconds. This function operatesindependently of the ECO start/stopautomatic engine switch-off function.

Key positions with KEYLESS-GO

As soon as the ignition is switched on, all theindicator lamps in the instrument cluster lightup. If an indicator lamp does not go out afterstarting the engine or lights up while driving,see (Y page 318).X Insert Start/Stop button : into ignition

lock ;.i When you insert Start/Stop button :

into ignition lock ;, the system needsapproximately two seconds recognitiontime. You can then use Start/Stopbutton :.

Activating power supplyX If Start/Stop button : has not yet been

pressed, this corresponds to the SmartKeybeing removed from the ignition.

X Press Start/Stop button : once.The power supply is switched on. You cannow activate the windshield wipers, forexample.

158 DrivingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

i The power supply is switched off again if:Rthe driver's door is opened andRyou press Start/Stop button : twice

when in this position.Switching on the ignitionX Press Start/Stop button : twice.

The ignition is switched on.i The power supply is switched off again if:Rthe driver's door is opened andRyou press Start/Stop button : once

when in this position.

Start/Stop button= USA only? Canada only

Starting the engine



people or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.

Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of


G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaceswithout sufficient ventilation.

i Vehicles with a gasoline engine: thecatalytic converter is preheated for up to30 seconds after a cold start. The sound ofthe engine may change during this time.

Automatic transmissionX Shift the transmission to position

P(Y page 165).The transmission position display in themultifunction display showsP(Y page 165).

i You can also start the engine when thetransmission is in position N.

Starting procedure with the SmartKeyX To start a gasoline engine: turn the

SmartKey to position 3 in the ignition lock

Driving 159

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

(Y page 157) and release it as soon as theengine is running.

X To start a diesel engine: turn theSmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock(Y page 157).The % preglow indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X When the % preglow indicator lampgoes out, turn the SmartKey to position3(Y page 157) and release it as soon as theengine is running.

i You can start the engine without preglowif the engine is warm.

Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engineX Depress the brake pedal and keep it

depressed.X To start a gasoline engine: press the

Start/Stop button (Y page 158) once.The engine starts.

X To start a diesel engine: press the Start/Stop button (Y page 158) once.Preglow is activated and the engine starts.

i The Start/Stop button can be used tostart the vehicle without inserting theSmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignitionlock and the SmartKey must be in thevehicle. This mode for starting the engineoperates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine start function.

Pulling away

Automatic transmission

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D orR, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. Thereis a risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift the transmission to position D orR(Y page 165).

X Release the brake pedal.X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.

The electric parking brake (Y page 180) isautomatically released.The red F (USA only) or ! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

i It is only possible to shift the transmissionfrom position P to the desired position ifyou depress the brake pedal. Only then isthe parking lock released. If you do notdepress the brake pedal, you can move theDIRECT SELECT lever but the parking lockremains engaged.

i The vehicle locks centrally once you havepulled away. The locking knobs in the doorsdrop down.You can open the doors from the inside atany time.You can also deactivate the automaticlocking feature (Y page 276).

i Upshifts take place at higher enginespeeds after a cold start. This helps thecatalytic converter to reach its operatingtemperature more quickly.

Pulling away with a trailer

160 DrivingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

To ensure that you do not roll backwardswhen pulling away on an uphill slope, engagethe electric parking brake.X Press and hold handle :.

The electric parking brake continues tobrake and prevent the vehicle from rollingbackwards.The red F (USA only) or ! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster remains on.

X Depress the accelerator pedal.X As soon as the vehicle/trailer combination

is held by the driving force of the engine,release lever :.The electric parking brake is released.The red F (USA only) or ! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

Hill start assist

G WARNINGAfter a short time, hill start assist will nolonger brake your vehicle and it could rollaway. There is a risk of an accident and injury.Therefore, quickly move your foot from thebrake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Neverleave the vehicle when it is held by hill startassist.

X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.The vehicle is then held for about a second.

X Pull away.Hill start assist helps you when pulling awayforwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient.It holds the vehicle for a short time after youhave removed your foot from the brake pedal.This gives you enough time to move your footfrom the brake pedal to the accelerator pedaland to depress it before the vehicle begins toroll.Hill start assist will not function if:Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on

a downhill gradient.Rthe transmission is in position N.

Rthe electric parking brake is applied.RESP® is malfunctioning.

ECO start/stop function


G WARNINGIf the engine is switched off automatically andyou exit the vehicle, the engine is restartedautomatically. The vehicle may begin moving.There is a risk of accident and injury.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe ignition and secure the vehicle againstrolling away.

General notes

: ECO start/stop display

If the ¤ symbol is shown in green in themultifunction display, the ECO start/stopfunction switches the engine offautomatically if the vehicle stops moving.The engine starts automatically when thedriver wants to pull away again. The ECOstart/stop function thereby helps you toreduce the fuel consumption and emissionsof your vehicle.Every time you switch on the engine using theSmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the ECOstart/stop function is activated.If the ECO start/stop function has beenmanually deactivated (Y page 163) or amalfunction has caused the system to bedeactivated, the ¤ symbol is notdisplayed.AMG vehicles: the Stop/Start active orStop/Start inactive message in the AMGmenu in the multifunction display goes out.

Driving 161

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop functionis only available in drive program C.For further information on automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 162) and automaticengine start (Y page 162).

Automatic engine switch-offIf the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D orN, the ECO start/stop function switches offthe engine automatically.The ECO start/stop function is operationaland the ¤ symbol is displayed in green inthe multifunction display, if:Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit

green.Rno off-road program has been selected.Rthe outside temperature is within the

comfort range.Rthe engine is at normal operating

temperature.Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior

has been reached.Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.Rthe system detects that the windshield is

not fogged up when the air-conditioningsystem is switched on.Rthe hood is closed.Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's

seat belt is fastened.If conditions for automatic engine switch-offhave not been fulfilled, the ¤ symbol willbe shown in yellow.AMG vehicles: the AMG menu in themultifunction display additionally shows theStop/Start inactive message.

i All of the vehicle's systems remain activewhen the engine has been stoppedautomatically.

i The HOLD function can be activated if theengine has been switched offautomatically. It is then not necessary tocontinue applying the brakes during theautomatic stop phase. When you depress

the accelerator pedal, the engine startsautomatically and the braking effect of theHOLD function is deactivated.

i All vehicles (apart from AMG vehicles): automatic engine switch-off cantake place a maximum of four timesconsecutively (initial stop then repeatedthree times). The ¤ symbol is shown inyellow in the multifunction display after theengine has been started automatically forthe fourth time. When the ¤ symbol isshown in green in the multifunction display,automatic engine switch-off is againpossible.

i AMG vehicles: times which the enginecan be automatically switched off.

Automatic engine startThe engine starts automatically if:Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function

by pressing the ECO button.Rin transmission position D or N the brake

pedal is released and the HOLD function isnot active.Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.Ryou engage reverse gear R.Ryou move the transmission out of position

P.Ryou switch to drive program S or M (AMG

vehicles).Ryou switch to an off-road program (except

for AMG vehicles).Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the

driver's door.Rthe vehicle starts to roll.Rthe brake system requires this.Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior

deviates from the set range.Rthe system detects moisture on the

windshield when the air-conditioningsystem is switched on.Rthe charge level of the battery is too low.

162 DrivingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

i Shifting the transmission to position Pdoes not start the engine.

i If you shift the transmission from R to D,the ECO start/stop function is availableagain once the ¤ symbol reappears ingreen in the multifunction display.

Deactivating/activating the ECO start/stop function

ECO button

Deactivating (except for AMG vehicles)X Press button :.

Indicator lamp ; on button : and the¤ symbol in the multifunction display goout.

Activating (except for AMG vehicles)X Press button :.

Indicator lamp ; on button : lights up. Ifall conditions for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 162) are fulfilled, the ¤symbol is shown in green in themultifunction display.If not all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off are fulfilled, the(Y page 162)¤ symbol is shown inyellow in the multifunction display. If this isthe case, the ECO start/stop function is notavailable.

Deactivating (AMG vehicles)X Press button : in drive program C.orX Switch to drive program S or M

(Y page 169).Indicator lamp ; on button : and the¤ symbol in the multifunction display goout.The Stop/Start active or Stop/Start inactive message in the AMG menu in themultifunction display goes out.

Activating (AMG vehicles)X Press button :.

Indicator lamp ; on button : lights up.If drive program S or M is active, theautomatic transmission switches to driveprogram C.If all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 162) are fulfilled, the¤ symbol is shown in green in themultifunction display. In addition, theStop/Start active message is shown inthe AMG menu in the multifunction display.If conditions for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 162) have not been fulfilled , the¤ symbol will be shown in yellow. If thisis the case, the ECO start/stop function isnot available. In addition, the Stop/Start inactive message is shown in the AMGmenu in the multifunction display.

i If indicator lamp ; on button : is off,the ECO start/stop function has beendeactivated manually or as the result of amalfunction. The engine will then not beswitched off automatically when thevehicle stops.

Driving 163

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Problems with the engine


The engine does notstart. The starter motorcan be heard.

RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.X Try to start the engine again (Y page 159). Avoid excessively

long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drainthe battery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does notstart. You cannot hearthe starter motor.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weakor discharged.X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 389).If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two

minutes.X Try to start the engine again.If the engine still does not start:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine is notrunning smoothly andis misfiring.

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanicalcomponent of the engine management system.X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist

workshop.Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalyticconverter and damage it.

The coolanttemperature gaugeshows a value above248 ‡ (120 †).

The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engineis no longer being cooled sufficiently.X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant

to cool down.X Check the coolant level (Y page 367). Observe the warning

notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.

164 DrivingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Automatic transmission


G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D orR, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. Thereis a risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches toneutral position N when you switch off theengine. The vehicle may roll away. There is arisk of an accident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking position P. Prevent the parkedvehicle from rolling away by applying theparking brake.

DIRECT SELECT lever

Overview of transmission positions

P Park position with parking lockR Reverse gearN NeutralD DriveThe DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of thesteering column.

i The DIRECT SELECT lever always returnsto its original position. The current

transmission position P, R, N or D appearsin the transmission position display(Y page 165) in the multifunction display.

Transmission position and driveprogram display! If the transmission position display in the

multifunction display is not working, youshould pull away carefully to check whetherthe desired transmission position isengaged. Ideally, you should selecttransmission position D and drive programC or S. Do not restrict the shift range.

Transmission position and drive program display: Transmission position display; Drive program display

The current transmission position and driveprogram appear in the multifunction display.

i The arrows in the transmission positiondisplay show how and into whichtransmission positions you can changeusing the DIRECT SELECT lever.

Engaging park position P! If the engine speed is too high or the

vehicle is moving, do not shift theautomatic transmission directly from D toR, from R to D or directly to P. Theautomatic transmission could otherwise bedamaged.

Automatic transmission 165

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

P Park position with parking lockR Reverse gearN NeutralD DriveX Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the

direction of arrow P.

i The automatic transmission shifts intopark position P automatically:Rif you open the driver's door while the

vehicle is stationary in transmissionposition D or RRif you open the door while traveling at

very low speeds in transmission positionD or R

Engaging park position P automaticallyPark position P is automatically engaged if:Ryou switch off the engine using the

SmartKey and remove the SmartKeyRyou switch off the engine using the Start/

Stop button and open one of the front doorsRthe HOLD (Y page 207) or DISTRONIC

PLUS (Y page 194) function brake yourvehicle until it is stationary and at least oneof the following conditions is fulfilled:- there is a system malfunction.- the vehicle is on a steep uphill or downhill

gradient. The electric parking brake isthen also applied.

Engaging reverse gear R! Only shift the automatic transmission to

R when the vehicle is stationary.X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the

brake pedal.X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the

first point of resistance.

Shifting to neutral N




X When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal.

X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or downto the first point of resistance.

If the engine has been switched off, theautomatic transmission automatically shiftsto N.If you want the automatic transmission toremain in neutral N, e.g. when having thevehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash witha towing system, observe the following notes:

166 Automatic transmissionDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Using the SmartKey:RMake sure that the ignition is switched on.RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the

brake pedal and keep it depressed.RShift to neutral N.RRelease the brake pedal.RIf the electric parking brake is engaged,

release it.RSwitch off the ignition and leave the

SmartKey in the ignition lock.Using KEYLESS-GO:RMake sure that the ignition is switched on.RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the

brake pedal and keep it depressed.REngage park position P.RRelease the brake pedal.RRemove the Start/Stop button from the

ignition lock.RInsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.RSwitch on the ignition.RDepress the brake pedal and keep it

depressed.RShift to neutral N.RRelease the brake pedal.RIf the electric parking brake is engaged,

release it.RSwitch off the ignition and leave the

SmartKey in the ignition lock.

Engaging drive position DX When the vehicle is stationary, depress the

brake pedal.X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past

the first point of resistance.

Transmission positions

B Park positionDo not shift the transmission intoposition P(Y page 179) unless thevehicle is stationary. The parkinglock should not be used as a brakewhen parking. Always apply theelectronic parking brake inaddition to the parking lock in orderto secure the vehicle.If the vehicle electronics aremalfunctioning, the transmissionmay be locked in position P. Havethe vehicle electronics checkedimmediately at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.The automatic transmission shiftsto P automatically if you:Rremove the SmartKeyRswitch off the engine when in R

or D and open one of the frontdoors

C Reverse gearOnly shift the transmission to Rwhen the vehicle is stationary.


Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

A NeutralDo not shift the transmission to Nwhile driving. Otherwise, theautomatic transmission could bedamaged.No power is transmitted from theengine to the drive wheels.Releasing the brakes will allow youto move the vehicle freely, e.g. topush it or tow it.If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:only shift the transmission toposition N if the vehicle is in dangerof skidding, e.g. on icy roads.If you switch off the engine usingthe SmartKey or the Start/Stopbutton, the automatic transmissionshifts to neutral N automatically.

! Rolling in neutral N can damagethe drive train.

7 DriveThe automatic transmissionchanges gear automatically. Allforward gears are available.

Changing gearThe automatic transmission shifts to theindividual gears automatically when it is intransmission position D. This automaticgearshifting behavior is determined by:Ra possible limitation of the shift rangeRthe position of the accelerator pedalRthe road speed

Driving tips

KickdownUse kickdown for maximum acceleration:X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the

pressure point.The transmission shifts to a lower geardepending on the engine speed.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal once thedesired speed is reached.The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Rocking the vehicle freeShifting the transmission repeatedly betweengears D and R may help to free the vehicle ifit has become stuck in slush or snow. Thevehicle's engine management restrictsrepeated shifting between gears up to amaximum speed of 5 mph (9 km/h). To shiftback and forth between transmissionpositions D and R, move the selector lever upand down beyond the pressure point.

Towing a trailerX Drive in the middle of the engine speed

range on uphill gradients.X Shift down to shift range 3 or

2(Y page 170) depending on the uphill ordownhill gradient, even if cruise control orDISTRONIC PLUS is activated.


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Program selector button

General notes

Program selector button on vehicles with theON&OFFROAD packageX Press program selector button :.

The letter M appears in the multifunctiondisplay. The manual drive program M isactivated.

Program selector button on AMG vehiclesX Press program selector button :

repeatedly until the letter for the desiredgearshift program appears in themultifunction display.

The program selector button allows you tochoose between different drivingcharacteristics.

i AMG vehicles: the automatictransmission switches to automatic driveprogram C each time the engine is started.

Drive programs on AMG vehicles

C ControlledEfficiency

Comfortable, economicaldriving

S Sport Sporty driving style

M Manual Manual gear shifting

i For further information on the automaticdrive program, see (Y page 169).

Steering wheel paddle shifters

In the manual drive program you can changegears manually using steering wheel paddleshifters : and ;(Y page 171).In the automatic drive program, you canrestrict or derestrict the shift range by usingsteering wheel paddle shifters : and ;(Y page 170).

i You can only change gear with thesteering wheel paddle shifters when thetransmission is in position D.

Automatic drive programDrive program E (drive program C on AMGvehicles) is characterized by the following:Rcomfort-oriented engine and automatic

transmission settingsRoptimal fuel consumption resulting from

the automatic transmission shifting upsooner


Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently inforward and reverse gears, unless theaccelerator pedal is depressed fullyRincreased sensitivity. This improves driving

stability on slippery road surfaces, forexampleRthe automatic transmission shifting up

sooner. This results in the vehicle beingdriven at lower engine speeds and thewheels being less likely to spin

Drive program S is characterized by thefollowing:Rsporty engine and transmission settingsRthe automatic transmission shifting up

laterRthe fuel consumption possibly being higher

as a result of the later automatictransmission shift points

Shift ranges

IntroductionIn transmission position D, you can use thesteering wheel paddle shifters to restrict orderestrict the shift range for the automatictransmission (Y page 169).The shift range selected is shown in themultifunction display. The automatictransmission shifts only as far as the selectedgear.

Driving situations

= You can use the engine's brakingeffect.

5 The braking effect of the engine canbe utilized on downhill gradients orwhen driving:Ron steep mountain roadsRin mountainous terrainRin arduous conditions

4 The braking effect of the engine canbe utilized on extremely steepdownhill gradients and longdownhill stretches.

Restricting the shift rangeX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle

shifter.The automatic transmission shifts downone gear and restricts the shift range to therelevant gear.

i If the engine exceeds the maximumengine speed when shifting down, theautomatic transmission protects againstengine damage by not shifting down.

i If the maximum engine speed for the shiftrange is reached and you continue toaccelerate, the automatic transmissionshifts up, even if the shift range isrestricted. This prevents the engine fromoverrevving.

Derestricting the shift rangeX Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle

shifter.The shift range is derestricted.


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Clearing the shift range restrictionX Pull and hold the right-hand steering wheel

paddle shifter until D is shown again in themultifunction display.The automatic transmission shifts from thecurrent shift range directly to D.

orX Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to shift the

transmission to position D.The automatic transmission shifts from thecurrent shift range directly to D.

Selecting the ideal shift rangeX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle

shifter and hold it in position.The automatic transmission shifts to thegear which allows optimum accelerationand deceleration. To do this, the automatictransmission shifts down one or moregears.

Manual drive program

Switching on the manual drive programIn manual drive program M, you can changegear using the steering wheel paddle shiftersif the transmission is in position D. You cansee the currently selected drive program andwhich gear is engaged in the multifunctiondisplay.X AMG vehicles: press the program selector

button (Y page 169) until M appears in themultifunction display.

Shifting up (all vehicles except AMGvehicles)X Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle

shifter (Y page 169).The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.

Shifting up (AMG vehicles)! In manual drive program M, the automatic

transmission does not shift upautomatically even when the enginelimiting speed for the current gear isreached. When the engine limiting speed isreached, the fuel supply is cut to preventthe engine from overrevving. Always makesure that the engine speed does not reachthe red area of the tachometer. There isotherwise a risk of engine damage.

: Gear indicator; Upshift indicator

Before the engine speed reaches the red area,an upshift indicator will be shown in themultifunction display.X If the color in the speedometer

multifunction display changes to red andthe UP display message is shown, shift upa gear.

DownshiftingX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle

shifter (Y page 169).The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.

Maximum accelerationX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle

shifter until the transmission selects theoptimum gear according to the speed.

i If you slow down or stop without shiftingdown, the automatic transmissionautomatically shifts down.


Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

KickdownYou can also use kickdown for maximumacceleration in manual drive program M.X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the

pressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to alower gear depending on the engine speed.

X Shift back up once the desired speed isreached.

i All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): ifyou apply full throttle, the automatictransmission shifts up to the next gearwhen the maximum engine speed isreached. This prevents the engine fromoverrevving.

i AMG vehicles: it is not possible to usekickdown in manual drive program M.

Switching off the manual drive programX Press the program selector button

(Y page 169) repeatedly until C or Sappears in the multifunction display.


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Problems with the transmission


The transmission hasproblems shifting gear.

The transmission is losing oil.X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist

workshop immediately.

The acceleration abilityis deteriorating.The transmission nolonger changes gear.

The transmission is in emergency mode.It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.X Stop the vehicle.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.X Shift the transmission to position D or R.

If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R isselected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.

X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialistworkshop immediately.

Transfer case! Performance tests may only be carried

out on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brakesystem or transfer case could otherwise bedamaged. Contact a qualified specialistworkshop for a performance test.

! Because ESP® is an automatic system,the engine and ignition must be switchedoff (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 or Start/Stop button in position 0 or 1) when theelectric parking brake is being tested on abrake dynamometer (maximum10 seconds).Braking triggered automatically by ESP®

may seriously damage the brake system.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith either the front or the rear axle raised,as doing so will damage the transmission.

This section is only valid for vehicles with 4-wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is alwaystransmitted to both axles.

Refueling


G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire andexplosion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.

Refueling 173

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediately

using soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,

immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistancewithout delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical

assistance without delay. Do not inducevomiting.RImmediately change out of clothing which

has come into contact with fuel.

G WARNINGElectrostatic buildup can create sparks andignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire andexplosion.Always touch the vehicle body before openingthe fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pumpnozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup isthereby discharged.

G WARNINGVehicles with a diesel engine:If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flashpoint is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.When the engine is running, exhaust systemcomponents could overheat without beingnoticed. There is a risk of fire.Never refuel with gasoline. Never mix gasolinewith diesel fuel.

! Do not use gasoline to refuel vehicles witha diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuelvehicles with a gasoline engine. Do notswitch on the ignition if you accidentallyrefuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, thefuel will enter the fuel system. Even smallamounts of the wrong fuel could result indamage to the fuel system and the engine.The repair costs are high. Notify a qualifiedspecialist workshop and have the fuel tankand fuel lines drained completely.

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage thefuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.

! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injectionsystem could be blocked by particles fromthe fuel can.

Do not get into the vehicle again during therefueling process. Otherwise, electrostaticcharge could build up again.If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could sprayout when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.

i Flexible Fuel vehicles can be recognizedby the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on theinside of the fuel filler flap.

For further information on fuel and fuel quality(Y page 445).

Refueling

Opening/closing the fuel filler flap

: To open the fuel filler flap; To insert the fuel filler cap= Fuel type to be used? Tire pressure table

The fuel filler flap is unlocked or lockedautomatically when you open or close thevehicle with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.

174 RefuelingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed8 in the instrument cluster. The arrownext to the filling pump indicates the side ofthe vehicle.

OpeningX Switch the engine off.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition

lock.X KEYLESS-GO: open the driver’s door.

This corresponds to key position 0: "keyremoved".The driver’s door can be closed again.

X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction ofarrow :.The fuel filler flap swings up.

X Turn the fuel filler flap counter-clockwiseand remove it.

X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holderbracket on the inside of filler flap ;.

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuelpump nozzle into the tank, attach andrefuel.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzleswitches off.

i Do not add any more fuel after the pumpstops filling for the first time. Otherwise,fuel may leak out.

ClosingX Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn

clockwise until it engages audibly.X Close the fuel filler flap.

i Close the fuel filler flap before locking thevehicle.

i If you are driving with the fuel filler capopen, the 8 reserve fuel warning lampflashes.In addition, the ; Check Engine warninglamp may light up (Y page 325).A message appears in the multifunctiondisplay (Y page 301).

For further information on warning andindicator lamps in the instrument cluster,see (Y page 325).

Refueling 175

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank


Fuel is leaking from thevehicle.

The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.

G WARNINGRisk of explosion or fire.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove

it immediately (Y page 157).X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does notstart.

The fuel tank of a vehicle with a diesel engine has been runcompletely dry.X Refuel the vehicle with at least 5.3 US qt (5 liters) of diesel.X Turn the ignition on for approximately ten seconds

(Y page 157).X Start the engine continuously for up to ten seconds until it runs

smoothly.If the engine does not start:X Turn the ignition on again for approximately ten seconds

(Y page 157).X Start the engine again continuously for up to ten seconds until

it runs smoothly.If the engine does not start after three attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flapcannot be opened.

The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.orThe SmartKey battery is discharged.X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 79).orX Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 80).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism isjammed.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

176 RefuelingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

DEF (BlueTEC vehicles only)

Important notes on useTo function properly, BlueTEC exhaust gasaftertreatment must be operated with thereducing agent DEF.When the supply of DEF is almost used up,the Check Additive See Operator's Manual message is shown in themultifunction display.When the DEF supply drops to a minimum, theRemaining Starts: 16 message is shownin the multifunction display.If the Remaining Starts: 16 messageappears in the multifunction display, you canstart the engine another 16 times. If DEF isnot refilled, you will subsequently be unable to start the engine. Add DEF tank withapproximately 1 gal (3.8 l) DEF. Have the DEFtank refilled at a qualified specialistworkshop.

i If you drive the vehicle faster than10 mph (16 km/h), the Check Additive See Operator's Manual message goesout after approximately one minute.

If the outside temperature is lower than12 ‡ (Ò11) †, damage may occur whenadding DEF. If DEF is frozen and there is anactive warning indicator, it may not bepossible to add DEF. Park the vehicle in awarmer place, e.g. in a garage, until DEF hasbecome fluid again. It will then be possible toadd DEF again. Alternatively, have the DEFtank refilled at a qualified specialistworkshop.Further information about BlueTEC exhaustgas aftertreatment and DEF is available at anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Important safety notes on the refillingprocedureDEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaustgas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is:Rnot poisonousRcolorless and odorlessRnot flammableWhen you open the DEF container, smallamounts of ammonia vapor may be released.Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and areparticularly irritating to the skin, to mucousmembranes and to the eyes. You mayexperience a burning sensation in your eyes,nose and throat. Coughing and watering ofthe eyes are possible.Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEFtank only in well-ventilated areas.DEF must not come into contact with yourskin, eyes or clothing and must not beswallowed. Keep DEF away from children.If you or other persons come into contact withDEF, observe the following:RRinse DEF from your skin immediately with

soap and water.RIf DEF comes into contact with your eyes,

immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistancewithout delay.RIf DEF has been swallowed, rinse your

mouth out immediately. Drink plenty ofwater. Seek medical assistance withoutdelay.RChange out of clothing contaminated with

DEF immediately.

! Only use DEF in accordance withISO 22241. Do not mix any additives withDEF, and do not dilute DEF with water. Thismay destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gasaftertreatment system.

! The vehicle must be parked on levelground to fill the DEF tank. The DEF tankcan only be filled as intended with thevehicle parked on a level surface. Thisavoids false level readings. Filling the tank

Refueling 177

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

is not permitted if the vehicle is not parkedon a level surface. There is a danger ofoverfilling, which could result in damage tocomponents of the BlueTEC exhaust gasaftertreatment.

! Rinse surfaces that have come intocontact with DEF immediately with water orremove DEF using a damp cloth and coldwater. If the DEF has already crystallized,use a sponge and cold water to clean it. DEFresidues crystallize after time andcontaminate the affected surfaces.

! DEF is not a fuel additive and must not beadded to the fuel tank. If DEF is added tothe fuel tank, this can lead to enginedamage.

For further information on DEF, see(Y page 448).

Opening the DEF filler cap

The fuel filler flap is unlocked or lockedautomatically when you open or close thevehicle with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.X Switch the ignition off.X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of

arrow :.The fuel filler flap swings up.

X Turn blue DEF filler cap ; counter-clockwise and remove it.DEF filler cap ; is secured with a plasticstrip.

DEF refill bottle! Only screw on the DEF refill bottle hand-

tight. It could otherwise be damaged.

X Unscrew the protective cap from DEF refillbottle :.

X Place DEF refill bottle : on the filler neckas shown and screw it on clockwise untilhand-tight.

X Press DEF refill bottle : towards the fillerneck.The DEF tank is filled. This may take up toone minute.

i When DEF refill bottle : is no longerpressed, filling stops and the bottle may betaken off again after being only partiallyemptied.

X Release DEF refill bottle :.X Turn DEF refill bottle : counter-clockwise

and remove it.X Screw the protective cap onto DEF refill

bottle : again.

DEF refill bottles can be obtained at many gasstations or at an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter. Refill bottles without a threaded capdo not provide overfill protection. DEF mayleak if overfilled. Mercedes Benz offersspecial refill bottles with a threaded seal.These are available at any authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

178 RefuelingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Closing the DEF filler cap

X Install DEF filler cap ; on the filler neckand turn it clockwise.

X To close the fuel filler flap, press it in thedirection of arrow :.

X Drive faster than 10 mph (16 km/h).The Check Additive See Operator's Manual message goes out afterapproximately one minute.

i If the Check Additive See Operator's Manual message continuesto be shown in the multifunction display,you must add more DEF.

Parking


G WARNINGIf flammable materials such as leaves, grassor twigs are exposed to prolonged contact toparts of the exhaust system that heat up, theycould ignite. There is a risk of fire.Park the vehicle so that no flammablematerials come into contact with parts of thevehicle which are hot. Take particular care notto park on dry grassland or harvested grainfields.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerably

more effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, they could set it in motion by, forexample:Rreleasing the parking brakeRshifting the automatic transmission out of

the parking position PRstarting the engine.They could also operate the vehicle'sequipment. There is a risk of an accident andinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! Always secure the vehicle correctlyagainst rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicleor its drivetrain could be damaged.

To ensure that the vehicle is secured againstrolling away unintentionally:Rthe electric parking brake must be applied.Rthe transmission must be in position P and

the SmartKey must be removed from theignition lock.Ron steep uphill or downhill gradients, turn

the front wheels towards the curb.Ron steep uphill or downhill gradients, the

front axle of an empty vehicle must besecured, for example with a wheel chock.Ron steep uphill or downhill gradients, the

rear axle of a laden vehicle must beadditionally secured, for example with awheel chock.

Parking 179

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Switching off the engine


G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches toneutral position N when you switch off theengine. The vehicle may roll away. There is arisk of an accident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking position P. Prevent the parkedvehicle from rolling away by applying theparking brake.

Using the SmartKeyX Apply the electric parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the

ignition lock and remove it.The immobilizer is activated.

i If you turn off the engine with theSmartKey and then remove it from theignition lock or open a front door, theautomatic transmission shifts to Pautomatically.

Using KEYLESS-GOX Apply the electric parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 158).

The engine stops and all the indicatorlamps in the instrument cluster go out.

i If you use the Start/Stop button to switchoff the engine, the automatic transmissionshifts to N automatically. If you then openone of the front doors, the automatictransmission shifts to P.

i In the event of an emergency, the enginecan be turned off while the vehicle is inmotion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for three seconds.

Electric parking brake

General notes

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, they could set it in motion by, forexample:Rreleasing the parking brakeRshifting the automatic transmission out of

the parking position PRstarting the engine.They could also operate the vehicle'sequipment. There is a risk of an accident andinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

i The electric parking brake performs afunction test at regular intervals while theengine is switched off. The sounds that canbe heard while this is occurring are normal.

Applying/releasing manually

X To engage: push handle :.When the electric parking brake isengaged, the F (USA only) or !(Canada only) red indicator lamp lights upin the instrument cluster.

i The electric parking brake can also beapplied when the SmartKey is removed.

180 ParkingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

X To release: pull handle :.The red F (USA only) or ! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

i The electric parking brake can only bereleased:Rif the SmartKey is in position 1 in the

ignition lock orRif the ignition was switched on using the

Start/Stop button.To ensure that you do not roll backwardswhen pulling away on an uphill slope, engagethe electric parking brake (Y page 160).

Applying automaticallyThe electric parking brake is appliedautomatically:Rif DISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to a

standstill orRif the HOLD function is keeping the vehicle

stationaryIn addition, at least one of the followingconditions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine is switched off.Rthe driver's door is open and the seat belt

is not fastened.Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy

period.The red F (USA only) or ! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clusterlights up.

Releasing automaticallyThe electric parking brake is releasedautomatically when all of the followingconditions are fulfilled:Rthe engine is running.Rthe transmission is in position D or R.Rthe seat belt has been fastened.Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.If the transmission is in position R, the trunklid must be closed.

If your seat belt is not fastened, the followingconditions must be fulfilled to automaticallyrelease the electric parking brake:Rthe driver's door is closed.Ryou have shifted out of transmission

position P or you have previously drivenfaster than 2 mph (3 km/h)

Emergency braking

X While driving, push handle : of the electricparking brake.

The vehicle can also be braked during anemergency by using the electric parkingbrake.

i The vehicle is braked for as long as thehandle of the electric parking brake ispressed. The longer the electric parkingbrake handle is depressed, the greater thebraking force.

During braking:Ra warning tone sounds.Rthe Release Park. Brake message

appearsRthe red F (USA only) or ! (Canada

only) indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster flashes.

When the vehicle has been braked to astandstill, the electric parking brake isengaged.

Parking 181

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Parking the vehicle for a long periodIf you leave the vehicle parked for longer thanfour weeks, the battery may be damaged byexhaustive discharging.X Connecting a trickle charger.i You can obtain information about trickle

chargers from a qualified specialistworkshop.

If you leave the vehicle parked for longer thansix weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage asa result of lack of use.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and

seek advice.

Driving tips

General notes


G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf you operate mobile communicationequipment while driving, you will bedistracted from traffic conditions. You couldalso lose control of the vehicle. There is a riskof an accident.Only operate this equipment when the vehicleis stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are driving. Somejurisdictions prohibit the driver from using amobile phone while driving a vehicle.If you make a call while driving, always usehands-free mode. Only operate the telephone

when the traffic situation permits. If you areunsure, pull over to a safe location and stopbefore operating the telephone.Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle coversa distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m)per second.

Drive sensibly – save fuelObserve the following tips to save fuel:X The tires should always be inflated to the

recommended tire pressure.X Remove unnecessary loads.X Remove roof carriers when they are not

needed.X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.X Have all maintenance work carried out as

indicated by the service intervals in theMaintenance Booklet or by the serviceinterval display.

Fuel consumption also increases whendriving in cold weather, in stop-start trafficand in hilly terrain.

Drinking and driving

G WARNINGDrinking and driving and/or taking drugs anddriving are very dangerous combinations.Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs canaffect your reflexes, perceptions andjudgment.The possibility of a serious or even fatalaccident are greatly increased when you drinkor take drugs and drive.Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allowanyone to drive who has been drinking ortaking drugs.

Emission control

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling

182 Driving tipsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaceswithout sufficient ventilation.

Certain engine systems are designed to keepthe level of poisonous components in exhaustfumes within legal limits.These systems only work at peak efficiency ifthey are serviced exactly in accordance withthe manufacturer's specifications. For thisreason, all work on the engine must be carriedout by qualified and authorized Mercedes-Benz technicians.The engine settings must not be changedunder any circumstances. Furthermore, allspecific service work must be carried out atregular intervals and in accordance with theMercedes-Benz service requirements. Detailscan be found in the Maintenance Booklet.

Braking


G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional enginebraking on a slippery road surface.

Downhill gradients! On long and steep gradients, you must

reduce the load on the brakes by shiftingearly to a lower gear. This allows you to takeadvantage of the engine braking effect andhelps avoid overheating and excessivewear of the brakes.When you take advantage of the enginebraking effect, a drive wheel may not turnfor some time, e.g. on a slippery roadsurface. This could cause damage to the

drive train. This type of damage is notcovered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty.

Do not depress the brake pedal continuouslywhile the vehicle is in motion, e.g. causing thebrakes to rub by constantly applying lightpressure to the pedal. This results inexcessive and premature wear to the brakepads.

Heavy and light loads

G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavyload, do not stop the vehicle immediately.Drive on for a short while. This allows theairflow to cool the brakes more quickly.

Wet roadsIf you have driven for a long time in heavy rainwithout braking, there may be a delayedreaction from the brakes when braking for thefirst time. This may also occur after thevehicle has been washed or driven throughdeep water.You then have to depress the brake pedalmore firmly. Maintain a greater distance fromthe vehicle in front.After driving on a wet road or having thevehicle washed, brake firmly while payingattention to the traffic conditions. This willwarm up the brake discs, thereby drying themmore quickly and protecting them againstcorrosion.

Driving tips 183

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Limited braking performance on salt-treated roadsIf you drive on salted roads, a layer of saltresidue may form on the brake discs andbrake pads. This can result in a significantlylonger braking distance.RBrake occasionally to remove any possible

salt residue. Make sure that you do notendanger other road users when doing so.RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the

beginning and end of a journey.RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle

ahead.

Servicing the brakes! If the red brake warning lamp lights up in

the instrument cluster and you hear awarning tone while the engine is running,the brake fluid level may be too low.Observe additional warning messages inthe multifunction display.The brake fluid level may be too low due tobrake pad wear or leaking brake lines.Have the brake system checkedimmediately. This work should be carriedout at a qualified specialist workshop.

! A function or performance test shouldonly be carried out on a 2-axledynamometer. If you are planning to havethe vehicle tested on such a dynamometer,contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter to obtain further information first.Otherwise, you could damage the drivetrain or the brake system.

! Because ESP® is an automatic system,the engine and ignition must be switchedoff (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 or Start/Stop button in position 0 or 1) when theelectric parking brake is being tested on abrake dynamometer (maximum10 seconds).Braking triggered automatically by ESP®

may seriously damage the brake system.

All checks and maintenance work on thebrake system must be carried out at aqualified specialist workshop. Consult aqualified specialist workshop to arrange this.Have brake pads installed and brake fluidreplaced at a qualified specialist workshop.If the brake system has only been subject tomoderate loads, you should test thefunctionality of your brakes at regularintervals. To do so, press firmly on the brakepedal when driving at a high speed. Thisimproves the grip of the brake pads.You can find a description of Brake Assist(BAS) on (Y page 67) or of BAS PLUS on(Y page 67).Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyhave brake pads/linings installed on yourvehicle which have been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspondto an equivalent quality standard. Brakepads/linings which have not been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are notof an equivalent quality could affect yourvehicle's operating safety.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyuse brake fluid that has been speciallyapproved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz,or which corresponds to an equivalent qualitystandard. Brake fluid which has not beenapproved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles orwhich is not of an equivalent quality couldaffect your vehicle's operating safety.

High-performance brake system forAMG vehiclesThe high-performance brake system isinstalled only on the ML 63 AMG.The high-performance brake system isdesigned for heavy loads. This may lead tonoise when braking. This will depend on:RSpeedRBraking forceREnvironmental conditions, such as

temperature and humidity

184 Driving tipsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

The wear of individual components of thebrake system, such as the brake pads/liningsor brake discs, depends on the individualdriving style and operating conditions.For this reason, it is impossible to state amileage that will be valid under allcircumstances. An aggressive driving stylewill lead to high wear. You can obtain furtherinformation about this from your authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.New and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect afterseveral hundred kilometers of driving.Compensate for this by applying greater forceto the brake pedal. Keep this in mind, andadapt your driving and braking accordinglyduring this break-in period.Excessive heavy braking results incorrespondingly high brake wear. Observethe # brake wear warning lamp in theinstrument cluster and note any brake statusmessages in the multifunction display.Especially for high performance driving, it isimportant to maintain and have the brakesystem checked regularly.

Driving on wet roads

HydroplaningIf water has accumulated to a certain depthon the road surface, there is a danger ofhydroplaning occurring, even if:Ryou drive at low speeds.Rthe tires have adequate tread depth.For this reason, in the event of heavy rain orin conditions in which hydroplaning mayoccur, you must drive in the followingmanner:Rlower your speed.Ravoid ruts.Rbrake carefully.

Driving on flooded roads! Do not drive through flooded areas.

Check the depth of any water before drivingthrough it. Drive slowly through standingwater. Otherwise, water may enter thevehicle interior or the engine compartment.This can damage the electroniccomponents in the engine or the automatictransmission. Water can also be drawn inby the engine's air suction nozzles and thiscan cause engine damage.

i Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package:set the raised level before driving throughstanding water.

Off-road fording! Under no circumstances should you

accelerate before entering the water. Thebow wave could cause water to enter anddamage the engine and other assemblies.

! Do not open any of the vehicle's doorswhile fording. Otherwise, water could getinto the vehicle interior and damage thevehicle's electronics and interiorequipment.

: Fording depth

Driving tips 185

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Fordingdepth

Steel-sprung vehicles 20 in(50 cm)

Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package and AMG vehicles

Raised level 20 in(50 cm)

REstablish how deep the water is and thecharacteristics of the body of water beforefording.RVehicles with the AIRMATIC package:

select the highest possible vehicle level.RRestrict the shift range to 1 or 2.RAvoid high engine speeds.REnter and exit the water at a flat place and

at a steady walking pace.RDrive slowly and at an even speed through

the water.RDo not stop.RWater offers a high degree of resistance,

and the ground is slippery and in somecases unstable. Therefore, it is difficult anddangerous to pull away in the water.REnsure that a bow wave does not form as

you drive.RClean any mud from the tire tread after

fording.RApply the brakes to dry them after fording.

Winter driving

General notes

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.

Do not shift down for additional enginebraking on a slippery road surface.

G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequateventilation is not possible, poisonous gasessuch as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter thevehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehiclebecomes trapped in snow. There is a risk offatal injury.If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heatingrunning, make sure the exhaust pipe and areaaround the vehicle are clear of snow. Toensure an adequate supply of fresh air, opena window on the side of the vehicle that is notfacing into the wind.

Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.

i Vehicles with a diesel engine: do notcover the radiator, e.g. with a protectivecover. The measuring function of theonboard diagnosis system may otherwiseprovide inaccurate values. Some of thesevalues are required by law and musttherefore always be accurate.

Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"section (Y page 400).

Driving with summer tiresObserve the notes in the "Winter operation"section (Y page 400).

Slippery road surfaces

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional enginebraking on a slippery road surface.

186 Driving tipsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot bestopped when moving at low speed:X Shift the transmission to position N.

i For more information on driving withsnow chains, see (Y page 401).

Drive particularly carefully on slippery roadsurfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steeringand braking maneuvers. Do not use the cruisecontrol or DISTRONIC PLUS.The outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning deviceand is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Changes in the outside temperature aredisplayed after a short delay.Indicated temperatures just above thefreezing point do not guarantee that the roadsurface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,especially in wooded areas or on bridges. Youshould pay special attention to roadconditions when temperatures are aroundfreezing point.

Off-road driving


G WARNINGIf you drive on a steep incline at an angle orturn when driving on an incline, the vehiclecould slip sideways, tip and rollover. There isa risk of an accident.Always drive on a steep incline in the line offall (straight up or down) and do not turn thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf the vehicle level is high, the vehicle centerof gravity is raised. This could cause thevehicle to tip over more easily on uphill ordownhill gradients. There is a risk of anaccident.Select the lowest possible vehicle level.

When driving off-road, sand, mud and water,possibly mixed with oil, for example, could get

into the brakes. This could result in a reducedbraking effect or in total brake failure and alsoin increased wear and tear. The brakingcharacteristics change depending on thematerial ingressing the brakes. Clean thebrakes after driving off-road. If you detect areduced braking effect or grinding noises,have the brake system checked in a qualifiedspecialist workshop as soon as possible.Adapt your driving style to the differentbraking characteristics.Driving off-road increases the likelihood ofdamage to the vehicle, which, in turn, can leadto failure of the mechanical assembly orsystems. Adapt your driving style to suit theterrain conditions. Drive carefully. Havedamage to the vehicle rectified immediatelyat a qualified specialist workshop.Do not switch to transmission position Nwhen driving off-road. You could lose controlof the vehicle if you attempt to brake usingthe service brake. If the gradient is too steep,drive backwards in reverse gear.

General notesRead this section carefully before driving yourvehicle off-road. Practice by driving over moregentle off-road terrain first.Familiarize yourself with the characteristicsof your vehicle and the gear shift operationbefore driving through difficult terrain.The following driving systems are speciallyadapted to off-road driving:ROff-road ABS (Y page 66)RAIRMATIC package (vehicle level)

(Y page 209)RDSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)

(Y page 246)Observe the following notes:RStop the vehicle before starting to drive

along an off-road route.RFor vehicles with the AIRMATIC

package: select a vehicle level that issuitable for the off-road terrain. To avoid

Driving tips 187

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

damaging the vehicle, make sure there isalways sufficient ground clearance.RCheck that items of luggage and loads are

stowed safely and are well secured(Y page 337).RAlways keep the engine running and in gear

when driving on a downhill gradient.Activate DSR (Y page 246).RAlways keep the doors, tailgate, windows

and sliding sunroof closed while driving.RAdapt your speed to the terrain. The

rougher, steeper or more ruts on theterrain, the slower your speed should be.RDrive slowly and at an even speed through

the water. Ensure that a bow wave does notform as you drive.RDrive with extreme care on unfamiliar off-

road routes where visibility is poor. Forsafety reasons, get out of the vehicle firstand survey the off-road route.RLook out for obstacles, such as rocks,

holes, tree stumps and furrows.RCheck the depth of water before fording

rivers and streams.RWhen fording, do not stop and do not

switch off the engine.ROn sand, drive quickly to overcome the

rolling resistance. Otherwise the vehicle'swheels could become stuck in looseground.RDo not jump with the vehicle as this will

interrupt the vehicle's propulsion.RAlways keep the engine running and in gear

when driving on a slope.RDo not shift the automatic transmission to

transmission position N.

i Do not use the HOLD function whendriving off-road, on steep uphill or downhillgradients or on slippery or loose surfaces.The HOLD function cannot hold the vehicleon such surfaces.

Checklist before driving off-road! If the engine oil warning lamp lights up

while the vehicle is in motion, stop thevehicle in a safe place as soon as possible.Check the engine oil level. The engine oilwarning lamp warning must not be ignored.Continuing the journey while the symbol isdisplayed could lead to engine damage.

X Engine oil level: check the engine oil leveland add oil if necessary.When driving on steep gradients, theengine oil level must be sufficiently high toensure a correct oil supply in the vehicle.

X DEF tank (BlueTEC vehicles): check thefluid level and, if necessary, refill to themaximum (13 l) (Y page 177).

X Wheel-changing tool kit: check that thejack is working and make sure you have thelug wrench, a robust tow cable and a foldingspade in the vehicle.

X Wheels and tires: check the tire treaddepth and tire pressure.

X Check for damage and remove any foreignobjects, e.g. small stones, from thewheels/tires.

X Replace any missing valve caps.X Replace dented or damaged wheels.X Rims: dented or bent rims can result in a

loss of tire pressure and damage the tirebead. Therefore, check your rims beforedriving off-road and replace them asrequired.

Checklist after driving off-road! If you detect damage to the vehicle after

driving off-road, have the vehicle checkedimmediately at a qualified specialistworkshop.

X Deactivate DSR (Y page 246).X Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package:

lower the vehicle to a ride height suitablefor the road conditions, e.g. to thehighway/high-speed level.

188 Driving tipsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

X Clean the headlamps and rear lights andcheck for damage.

X Clean the front and rear license plates.X Clean the wheels/tires with a water jet and

remove any foreign objects.X Clean the wheels, wheel housings and the

vehicle underside with a water jet; checkfor any foreign objects and damage.

X Check whether twigs or other parts ofplants have become trapped. Theseincrease the risk of fire and can damagefuel pipes, brake hoses or the rubberbellows of the axle joints and propellershafts.

X After the trip, examine without fail theentire undercarriage, wheels, tires, brakes,bodywork structure, steering, chassis andexhaust system for damage.

X After driving for extended periods acrosssand, mud, gravel, water or in similarly dirtyconditions, have the brake discs, wheels,brake pads/linings and axle joints checkedand cleaned.

X If you detect strong vibrations after off-roadtravel, check for foreign objects in thewheels and drive train and remove them ifnecessary. Foreign objects can disturb thebalance and cause vibrations.

Driving over rough terrain places greaterdemands on your vehicle than driving onnormal roads. After driving off-road, checkthe vehicle. This allows you to detect damagepromptly and reduce the risk of an accidentto yourself and other road users.

Driving on sandObserve the following rules when driving onsand:Rvehicles with the AIRMATIC package:

select a raised vehicle level.Ravoid high engine speeds.Rselect a shift range appropriate to the

terrain.

Rdrive quickly to overcome the rollingresistance. Otherwise the vehicle's wheelscould become stuck in loose ground.Rdrive in the tracks of other vehicles if

possible. Make sure that:- the tire ruts are not too deep.- the sand is sufficiently firm.- the ground clearance of the vehicle is

sufficient.

Tire ruts and gravel roads! Check that the ruts are not too deep and

that your vehicle has sufficient clearance.Otherwise, your vehicle could be damagedor bottom out and get stuck.

Observe the following rules when drivingalong ruts in off-road terrain or on roads withloose gravel:Rvehicles with the AIRMATIC package:

select a raised vehicle level.Ravoid high engine speeds.Rselect shift range 1.Rdrive slowly.Rwhere ruts are too deep, drive with the

wheels of one side on the center grassyarea, if possible.

Crossing obstacles! Obstacles could damage the floor of the

vehicle or components of the chassis. Askpassengers for guidance when driving overlarge obstacles. The passenger shouldalways keep a safe distance from thevehicle when doing so in order to avoidinjury as a result of unexpected vehiclemovements. After driving off-road or overobstacles, check the vehicle for possibledamage, especially to the underbody andthe components of the chassis.

Driving tips 189

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Observe the following rules when driving overtree stumps, large stones and otherobstacles:RRaise the vehicle level.RAvoid high engine speeds.RSelect shift range 1.RDrive very slowly.RDrive straight over the center of obstacles.

Traveling uphill

Approach/departure angle

G WARNINGIf you drive on a steep incline at an angle orturn when driving on an incline, the vehiclecould slip sideways, tip and rollover. There isa risk of an accident.Always drive on a steep incline in the line offall (straight up or down) and do not turn thevehicle.

All vehicles (except vehicles with AMG bodystyling)

: ;

Steel-sprung vehicles

26° 25°

Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package

Highway level 23° 23°

Raised level 30° 28°

Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package


Off-road level 1 26° 25°



AMG vehicles

Highway level (insports mode withthe AMG adaptivesuspension systemactivated)

19° 21°


Vehicles with AMG bodystyling

: ;

Steel-sprung vehicles

25° 25°

Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package



190 Driving tipsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

: ;

Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package





RObserve the rules on off-road driving.RDo not drive at an angle on slopes, inclines

or gradients, but instead follow the directline of fall. The maximum gradient-climbingcapability of your vehicle is 100%, whichcorresponds to an approach/departureangle of 45°. Note that the climbing abilityof your vehicle depends on the terrainconditions.RBefore tackling steep downhill gradients,

select shift range 1.RDrive slowly.RAvoid high engine speeds – drive at an

appropriate engine speed (maximum3,000 rpm).RWhen driving down an incline, make use of

the engine's braking effect. Observe theengine speed; do not overrev the engine.RCheck the brakes after prolonged off-road

driving.

i Hill start assist will aid you when pullingaway on a hill.For more information, see "Hill start assist"(Y page 161).

Do not switch to transmission position Nwhen driving off-road. If you try to brake thevehicle using the service brake, you couldlose control of the vehicle. If the gradient istoo steep for your vehicle, drive back down inreverse gear.

Maximum gradient-climbing capabilityOn good road surfaces the maximumgradient-climbing capability of your vehicle is100%, which corresponds to an approach/departure angle of 45°. Note that thevehicle's gradient-climbing capabilitydepends on the off-road conditions.Accelerate carefully and make sure that thewheels do not spin when driving on steepterrain.

i If the load on the front axle is reducedwhen pulling away on a steep uphill slope,the front wheels have a tendency to spin.4ETS recognizes this and brakes thewheels accordingly. The rear wheel torqueis increased, making it easier to drive off.

HilltopsWhen driving up an uphill gradient, slightlyreduce pressure on the acceleratorimmediately before reaching the brow of thehill. Use the vehicle's own impetus to driveover the top of the hill.This style of driving prevents:Rthe vehicle from lifting off the ground on the

brow of a hillRthe vehicle from traveling too quickly down

the other side

Driving downhillRDrive slowly.RDo not drive at an angle down steep

inclines. Steer into the line of fall and drivewith the front wheels aligned straight.Otherwise, the vehicle could slip sideways,tip and rollover.RBefore tackling steep downhill gradients,

select shift range 1.RActivate DSR. If this is not sufficient, brake

gently. When doing so, make sure that thevehicle is facing in the direction of the lineof fall.RCheck that the brakes are working normally

after a long downhill stretch.

Driving tips 191

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

i The special off-road ABS setting enablesa precise, brief and repeated locking of thefront wheels. This causes them to dig intoloose earth. Be aware that the front wheelseasily skid across the ground surface ifcompletely braked and therefore lose theirability to steer.

Driving systems

Cruise control

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, cruisecontrol can neither reduce the risk of anaccident nor override the laws of physics.Cruise control cannot take into account theroad, traffic and weather conditions. Cruisecontrol is only an aid. You are responsible forthe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehiclespeed, for braking in good time and forstaying in your lane.Do not use cruise control:Rin road and traffic conditions which do not

allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.in heavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or

accelerating could cause the drive wheelsto lose traction and the vehicle could thenskidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,

heavy rain or snowIf there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

General notesCruise control maintains a constant roadspeed for you. It brakes automatically in orderto avoid exceeding the set speed. On long andsteep downhill gradients, especially if thevehicle is laden or towing a trailer, you mustselect shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. Bydoing so, you will make use of the brakingeffect of the engine, which relieves the load

on the brake system and prevents the brakesfrom overheating and wearing too quickly.Use cruise control only if road and trafficconditions make it appropriate to maintain asteady speed for a prolonged period. You canstore any road speed above 20 mph(30 km/h).

i Cruise control should not be activatedduring off-road driving.

Cruise control lever

: To activate or increase speed; To activate or reduce speed= To deactivate cruise control? To activate at the current speed/last

stored speedWhen you activate cruise control, the storedspeed is shown in the multifunction displayfor five seconds. In the multifunction display,the segments between the stored speed andthe maximum speed light up.

Activation conditionsTo activate cruise control, all of the followingactivation conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe electric parking brake must be

released.Ryou are driving faster than 20mph

(30 km/h).RESP® must be active, but not intervening.Rthe transmission must be in position D.

192 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

RDSR must be deactivated.Roff-road program 2 must be deactivated

(vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package).

Storing, maintaining and calling up aspeed

Storing and maintaining a speed

X Accelerate the vehicle to the desiredspeed.

X Briefly press the cruise control leverup : or down ;.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Cruise control is activated. The vehicleautomatically maintains the stored speed.

You can accept the current speed if you aredriving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).

i Cruise control may be unable to maintainthe stored speed on uphill gradients. Thestored speed is resumed when the gradientevens out. Cruise control maintains thestored speed on downhill gradients byautomatically applying the brakes.

Storing or calling up a speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicleaccelerates or decelerates. If you do not knowthe stored speed, the vehicle could accelerateor brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of anaccident.

Pay attention to the road and trafficconditions before calling up the stored speed.If you do not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou :.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.The first time cruise control is activated, itstores the current speed or regulates thespeed of the vehicle to the previouslystored speed.

Setting a speed

Keep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has accelerated or braked tothe speed set.X Press the cruise control lever up : for a

higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph

increments (1 km/h increments): briefly

Driving systems 193

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

press the cruise control lever up : ordown ; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up : or down ; the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph increments (10 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control leverup : or down ; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up : or down ; the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

i Cruise control is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. Forexample, if you accelerate briefly toovertake, cruise control adjusts thevehicle's speed to the last speed storedafter you have finished overtaking.

Deactivating cruise control

There are several ways to deactivate cruisecontrol:X Briefly press the cruise control lever

forwards :.orX Brake.Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:Ryou engage the electric parking brake.Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph

(30 km/h).RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®.

Ryou activate DSR.Ryou shift the transmission to position N

while driving.If cruise control is deactivated, you will heara warning tone. You will see the Cruise Control Off message in the multifunctiondisplay for approximately five seconds.

i When you switch off the engine, the lastspeed stored is cleared.

DISTRONIC PLUS


G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:Rpeople or animalsRstationary obstacles on the road, e.g.

stopped or parked vehiclesRoncoming and crossing trafficAs a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither givewarnings nor intervene in such situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearlyidentify other road users and complex trafficsituations.In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and then

brake the vehicleRneither give a warning nor interveneRaccelerate unexpectedlyThere is a risk of an accident.Continue to drive carefully and be ready tobrake, in particular when warned to do so byDISTRONIC PLUS.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with upto 40% of the maximum braking force. If this


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUSwarns you visually and audibly. There is a riskof an accident.In such cases, apply the brakes yourself andtry to take evasive action.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakesautomatically in certain situations. Toprevent damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

If you fail to adapt your driving style,DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the riskof accident nor override the laws of physics.DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into accountthe road, traffic and weather conditions.DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:Rin road and traffic conditions which do not

allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.in heavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or

accelerating could cause the drive wheelsto lose traction and the vehicle could thenskidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,

heavy rain or snowDISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrowvehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, orvehicles driving on a different line.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else

covering the sensorsRsnow or heavy rainRinterference by other radar sourcesRstrong radar reflections, for example, in

parking garages

If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects avehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS mayunexpectedly accelerate the vehicle to thestored speed.This speed may:Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane

or an exit laneRbe so high when driving in the right-hand

lane that you overtake vehicles in the left-hand laneRbe so high when driving in the left-hand lane

that you overtake vehicles in the right-handlane

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

General notesDISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed andautomatically helps you maintain thedistance to the vehicle detected in front.DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically sothat the set speed is not exceeded.On long and steep downhill gradients,especially if the vehicle is laden or towing atrailer, you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3in good time. By doing so, you will make useof the braking effect of the engine, Thisrelieves the load on the brake system andprevents the brakes from overheating andwearing too quickly.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a slower-movingvehicle in front, your vehicle is braked in orderto maintain the preset distance to the vehiclein front.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a riskof a collision, you will be warned visually andacoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannotprevent a collision without your intervention.An intermittent warning tone will then soundand the distance warning lamp will light up inthe instrument cluster. Brake immediately inorder to increase the distance to the vehiclein front or take evasive action provided it issafe to do so.

Driving systems 195

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

For DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you whendriving, the radar sensor system must be:Ractivated (Y page 277)RoperationalIf there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONICPLUS operates in the same way as cruisecontrol in the speed range between 20 mph(Canada: 30 km/h) and120 mph (Canada:200 km/h). If a vehicle is driving in front ofyou, it operates in the speed range between0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada:200 km/h).Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving onroads with steep gradients.As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves,it can resemble the radar detectors of theresponsible authorities. You can refer to therelevant chapter in the Operator's Manual ifquestions are asked about this.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCCas a "Vehicular Radar System". The radarsensor is intended for use in an automotiveradar system only. Removing, tamperingwith, or altering the device will void anywarranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of thedevice will void any warranties, and is notpermitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or usein any non-approved way.

Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

Cruise control lever

: To activate or increase speed; To activate or reduce speed= To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS? To activate at the current speed/last

stored speedA To set the specified minimum distance

Activating DISTRONIC PLUS

Activation conditionsIn order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, thefollowing conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine must be started. It may take up

to two minutes after pulling away beforeDISTRONIC PLUS is operational.Rthe electric parking brake must be

released.RESP® must be active, but not intervening.Rthe transmission must be in position D.Rthe driver's door must be closed when you

shift from P to D or your seat belt must befastened.Rthe front-passenger door and rear doors

must be closed.Roff-road program 2 must be deactivated

(vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package).RDSR must be deactivated.Rthe vehicle must not skid.


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Activating while driving

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou ; or press it up : or down =.DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up : to thepressure point for a higher speed or down= for a lower speed.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up or down, the last speed storedis increased or reduced.

orX To adjust the set speed in 5 mph

increments (10 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control leverup : past the pressure point for a higherspeed or down = for a lower speed.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up or down, the last speed storedis increased or reduced.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of thevehicle in front, but only up to the desiredstored speed.

If the vehicle in front has been detected andis shown in the multifunction display, you canalso activate DISTRONIC PLUS when drivingat speeds below 20 mph (30km/h). If thevehicle in front is no longer detected anddisplayed, for example because it haschanged lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS isdeactivated. You will hear a warning tone ifthis is the case.

i If you do not fully release the acceleratorpedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Passivemessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay. The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will then not bemaintained. You will be driving at the speedyou determine by the position of theaccelerator pedal.

Activating when driving towards astationary vehicleX Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards

you ; or press it up : or down =.DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up : to thepressure point for a higher speed or down= for a lower speed.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up or down, the last speed storedis increased or reduced.

orX To adjust the set speed in 5 mph

increments (10 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control leverup : past the pressure point for a higherspeed or down = for a lower speed.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up or down, the last speed storedis increased or reduced.

If the vehicle in front of you is stationary, youcan only activate DISTRONIC PLUS once yourvehicle is stationary as well.

i DISTRONIC PLUS can only be activated atunder 20 mph (30km/h) if a vehicle in fronthas been detected. Therefore, theDISTRONIC PLUS distance display in theinstrument cluster should be activated(Y page 272).

i You can use the cruise control lever to setthe stored speed and the control on thecruise control lever to set the specifiedminimum distance (Y page 200).

Driving systems 197

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Activating at the current speed/laststored speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicleaccelerates or decelerates. If you do not knowthe stored speed, the vehicle could accelerateor brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of anaccident.Pay attention to the road and trafficconditions before calling up the stored speed.If you do not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou :.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The firsttime it is activated, the current speed isstored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruisespeed to the previously stored value.

Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

Pulling away and driving

X If the vehicle in front pulls away: removeyour foot from the brake pedal.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou ; or press it up : or down =.

orX Accelerate briefly.

Your vehicle pulls away and adapts itsspeed to that of the vehicle in front.

If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONICPLUS operates in the same way as cruisecontrol.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehiclein front has slowed down, it brakes yourvehicle. In this way, the distance you haveselected is maintained.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-movingvehicle in front, it increases the driving speed.However, the vehicle is only accelerated upto the speed you have stored.If you depress the brake, DISTRONIC PLUS isdeactivated unless your vehicle is stationary.

Changing lanesIf you change to the passing lane, DISTRONICPLUS supports you when:Ryou are driving faster than 40mph

(60 km/h)RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the

distance to a vehicle in front


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signalRDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger

of collisionIf these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicleis accelerated. Acceleration will beinterrupted if changing lanes takes too longor if the distance between your vehicle andthe vehicle in front becomes too small.

i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUSmonitors the left lane on left-hand drivevehicles and the right lane on right-handdrive vehicles.

Vehicles with COMAND

Example: traffic circle

i The following function is not operationalin all countries.

DISTRONIC PLUS uses additional informationfrom your navigation system so that it canreact appropriately to certain trafficsituations. This is the case if, while followinga vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS is active and you:Rapproach or drive through a traffic circleRapproach a T-intersectionRturn off at a highway exitEven if the vehicle in front leaves thedetection range, DISTRONIC PLUStemporarily maintains the current drivingspeed and does not accelerate. This is basedon the current map data in the navigationsystem.The current speed is maintained:Rapproximately 10 seconds before the

traffic circle/T intersection and

approximately 1.5 seconds when driving ona traffic circle.Rapproximately 12 seconds before reaching

a highway exit and approximately4 seconds after the highway exit.

Afterwards, the vehicle accelerates back tothe set speed you specified.

StoppingG WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, even if it is brakedonly by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in

the voltage supply.RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated

with the cruise control lever, e.g. by avehicle occupant or from outside thevehicle.Rthe electrical system in the engine

compartment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,

e.g. by a vehicle occupant.There is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offDISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehiclein front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle untilit is stationary.Once your vehicle is stationary, it remainsstationary and you do not need to depress thebrake.After a time, the electric parking brakesecures the vehicle and relieves the servicebrake.Depending on the specified minimumdistance, your vehicle will come to a standstillat a sufficient distance behind the vehicle infront. The specified minimum distance is setusing the control on the cruise control lever.

Driving systems 199

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

The electric parking brake automaticallysecures the vehicle if DISTRONIC PLUS isactivated and:Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's

seat belt is unfastened.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is

automatically switched off by the ECOstart/stop function.Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.On steep uphill or downhill inclines or if thereis a malfunction, the transmission may alsoautomatically be shifted into position P.

Setting a speed

Keep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has accelerated or braked tothe speed set.X Press the cruise control lever up : for a

higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph

increments (1 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up : ordown ; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up : or down ; the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph increments (10 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control leverup : or down ; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up : or down ;, the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. If youaccelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUSadjusts the vehicle's speed to the lastspeed stored after you have finishedovertaking.

Setting the specified minimum distance

You can set the specified minimum distancefor DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time spanbetween one and two seconds. With thisfunction, you can set the minimum distancethat DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle infront, dependent on vehicle speed. You cansee this distance in the multifunction display(Y page 202).X To increase: turn control ; in direction=.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greaterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.

X To decrease: turn control ; indirection :.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.

i Make sure that you maintain a sufficientlysafe distance from the vehicle in front.Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front ifnecessary.


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS

There are several ways to deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS:X Briefly press the cruise control lever

forwards :.orX Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, youwill see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off messagein the multifunction display for approximatelyfive seconds.

i The last speed stored remains stored untilyou switch off the engine.

i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. If youaccelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUSadjusts the vehicle's speed to the lastspeed stored after you have finishedovertaking.

DISTRONIC PLUS is automaticallydeactivated if:Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if

the vehicle is automatically secured withthe electric parking brakeRyou are driving slower than 15 mph

(25 km/h) and there is no vehicle in front,or if the vehicle in front is no longerdetectedRESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®

Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N positionRyou switch off the radar sensor system

(Y page 277)

Ryou pull the cruise control lever towardsyou in order to pull away and the front-passenger door or one of the rear doors isopenRyou activate DSRRyou activate off-road program 2 on vehicles

with the ON&OFFROAD packageRthe vehicle has skiddedIf DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you willhear a warning tone. You will see theDISTRONIC PLUS Off message in themultifunction display for approximately fiveseconds.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Displays in the speedometer

Example: DISTRONIC PLUS displays in thespeedometer

When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one ortwo segments ; in the set speed range lightup.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,segments ; between speed of the vehicle infront : and stored speed = light up.

i For design reasons, the speed displayedin the speedometer may differ slightly fromthe speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.

Driving systems 201

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS isdeactivated

Distance display when DISTRONIC PLUS isdeactivated: Vehicle in front, if detected; Distance indicator, current distance to

the vehicle in front= Specified minimum distance to the

vehicle in front; adjustable? Own vehicle

In the Assistance menu (Y page 272) of theon-board computer, you can select thedistance display.X Select the Distance display function

using the on-board computer(Y page 272).

In the Assistance menu of the on-boardcomputer, you can also activate or deactivatePRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 272).

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS isactivated

Distance display with DISTRONIC PLUS activatedin the multifunction display: DISTRONIC PLUS activated; Own vehicle= Specified minimum distance to the

vehicle in front; adjustable? Vehicle in front, if detected

In the Assistance menu (Y page 272)of theon-board computer, you can select thedistance display.X Select the Distance display function

using the on-board computer(Y page 272).

You will see the stored speed for about fiveseconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS.

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesPay particular attention in the following trafficsituations:Rcornering, going into and coming out of a

bendRvehicles traveling on a different lineRother vehicles changing lanesRnarrow vehiclesRobstructions and stationary vehiclesRcrossing vehiclesIn such situations, brake if necessary.DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Cornering, going into and coming out of abend

The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detectvehicles when cornering is limited. Yourvehicle may brake unexpectedly or late.

Vehicles traveling on a different line

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehiclestraveling on a different line. The distance tothe vehicle in front will be too short.

Other vehicles changing lanes

DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected thevehicle cutting in yet. The distance to thisvehicle will be too short.

Narrow vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected thevehicle in front on the edge of the road,because of its narrow width. The distance tothe vehicle in front will be too short.

Obstructions and stationary vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake forobstacles or stationary vehicles. If, forexample, the detected vehicle turns a cornerand reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle,DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these.

Driving systems 203

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Crossing vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detectvehicles that are crossing your lane.Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lightswith crossing traffic, for example, could causeyour vehicle to pull away unintentionally.

Level control (vehicles with theON&OFFROAD package)


G WARNINGWhen the vehicle is being lowered, peoplecould become trapped if their limbs arebetween the vehicle body and the wheels orunderneath the vehicle. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure no one is underneath the vehicleor in the immediate vicinity of the wheelarches when the vehicle is being lowered.

G WARNINGWhen you drive with the vehicle raised, thedriving characteristics could be impaired bythe vehicle's raised center of gravity. Thevehicle could rollover more easily, forexample on a bend. There is a risk of anaccident.Always select as low a vehicle level aspossible and adjust your driving style.

G WARNINGWhen you drive with the chassis lowered orraised, the vehicle's braking and driving

characteristics can be significantly impaired.You could also exceed the permissible vehicleheight if the chassis is raised. There is a riskof an accident.Adjust the vehicle level before pulling away.

G WARNINGDue to the high center of gravity, the vehiclemay start to skid and roll over in the event ofan abrupt steering maneuver and/or whenthe vehicle's speed is not adapted to the roadconditions. There is a risk of an accident.Always adapt your speed and driving style tothe vehicle's driving characteristics and to theprevailing road and weather conditions.

! When driving on extremely rough terrain,select a high vehicle level in good time.Make sure there is always sufficient groundclearance. You will otherwise damage thevehicle.RUtility vehicles have a significantly higher

rollover rate than other types of vehicles.Failure to operate this vehicle safely mayresult in an accident, rollover of the vehicle,and severe or fatal injury.RIn a rollover crash, an unbelted person is

significantly more likely to die than aperson wearing a seat belt.You and all vehicle occupants shouldalways wear your seat belts.

Level control adapts the vehicle levelautomatically to the current operating anddriving situation. This results in reduced fuelconsumption and improved handling.Make changes to the vehicle level while thevehicle is in motion. This enables the vehicleto adjust to the new level as quickly aspossible.The vehicle level may change visibly if youpark the vehicle and the outside temperaturechanges. If the temperature drops, thevehicle level is lower; with an increase intemperature, the vehicle level rises.


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

If you unlock the vehicle or open a door, thevehicle begins to compensate for loaddiscrepancies while still parked. However, forsignificant level changes, such as after thevehicle has been stationary for a long period,the engine must be on. For safety reasons,the vehicle is only lowered when the doors areclosed. Lowering is interrupted if a door isopened, and it continues once the door hasbeen closed.For information about driving off-road, see(Y page 187).

Basic settingsThe extent to which the vehicle is raised orlowered depends on the basic settingselected.Select:Rhighway/high-speed level for driving on

normal roadsRoff-road level 1 for driving on easily

negotiable off-road terrainRoff-road level 2 for driving on normal off-

road terrainRoff-road level 3 for freeing the vehicle in

particularly rough terrain at low speedsonly

The individual vehicle levels differ fromhighway level as follows:Rhighway level: +/–0 in (+/–0 mm)Rhigh-speed level: –0.6 in (–15 mm)Roff-road level 1: + 1.2 in (+30 mm)Roff-road level 2: + 2.3 in (+60 mm)Roff-road level 3: + 3.6 in (+ 90 mm)

Highway/high-speed level! Make sure that there is enough ground

clearance when the vehicle is beinglowered. It could otherwise hit the ground,damaging the underbody.

: Selector wheel; To raise the level= Indicator lamps? To lower the levelX Start the engine.X Selector wheel : engaged: briefly press

selector wheel :.Selector wheel : extends.

If one or more indicator lamps = are on:X Turn selector wheel : counter-

clockwise ? until all indicator lamps =that are lit start to flash.The vehicle is lowered to highway level. Assoon as the next lowest level is reached,the indicator lamp stops flashing and goesout.

During the adjustment, the Loweringmessage, for example, appears in themultifunction display.If you press the % or a button on themultifunction steering wheel, the message

Driving systems 205

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

will disappear. Once highway level has beenreached, all indicator lamps = go out.The vehicle automatically selects highwaylevel if you are driving at a speed above70 mph (115 km/h) or if you drive at a speedbetween 62 mph (100 km/h) and 70 mph(115 km/h) for approximately 20 seconds.The vehicle is lowered to high-speed level ifyou are traveling at higher speeds.

Off-road levels

General notesROnly select off-road level 3 for driving off-

road in particularly rough terrain.RAdjust your driving style to the altered

handling characteristics.RDo not drive faster than 12 mph

(20 km/h).

Only select an off-road level when this isappropriate for road conditions. Otherwise,fuel consumption increases and handling maybe affected.X Start the engine.X Selector wheel : engaged: briefly press


X To raise: turn selector wheel :clockwise ;.The vehicle is raised.

orX To lower: turn selector wheel : counter-

clockwise ?.The vehicle is lowered.

Indicator lamps = for the desired off-roadlevel flash:ROff-road level 1: the lower indicator lamp

flashesROff-road level 2: the lower and center

indicator lamps flashROff-road level 3: all three indicator lamps

flashThe vehicle adjusts to the off-road levelselected. As soon as an off-road level isreached, the corresponding indicator lampstops flashing and lights up constantly.

Raising the vehicleDuring the adjustment, the Vehicle rising message, for example, appears in themultifunction display.The vehicle rises from highway level to off-road level 1.If you press the % or a button on themultifunction steering wheel, the messagewill disappear.

i Up to off-road level 2, you can hide themessages using the % or a buttonon the multifunction steering wheel.

Once off-road level 2 has been reached, thelower and center indicator lamps of theselector wheel are on.

While the adjustment from off-road level 2 tooff-road level 3 is taking place, you will see amessage such as the following in themultifunction display: Vehicle rising Max. speed 12 mph (20 km/h).


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

The Max. Speed 12 mph (20 km/h)message draws your attention to themaximum speed permitted for off-roadlevel 3.Once off-road level 3 has been reached, youwill see a message shown in white in themultifunction display, for example: Max. Speed 12 mph (20 km/h).If you drive above 20 km/h at off-road level3, you will see the following message in redin the multifunction display: Vehicle Lowering Max. Speed 12 mph (20 km/h).i You cannot clear these messages.You also hear a warning. The vehicle islowered and off-road level 3 is canceled.If you continue to increase your speed, thered message continues to be shown in themultifunction display. The newly set level isnot displayed until the vehicle has been setto a level suitable for the current speed.

Lowering the vehicle

If you maintain or reduce your speed, you willsee a message in white in the display whilethe vehicle is being lowered, such as thefollowing: Vehicle Lowering Max. Speed 12 mph (20 km/h).The vehicle is lowered to off-road level 2.If you select an off-road level when driving attoo high a speed, the Please reduce speed message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

You can select from the following:ROff-road level 1 at speeds up to 60 mph

(100 km/h)ROff-road level 2 at speeds up to 40 mph

(65 km/h)ROff-road level 3 at speeds up to 12 mph

(20 km/h)If you are driving above 50 mph (80 km/h) ordrive between 40 mph (65 km/h) and50 mph (80 km/h) for longer than20 seconds, off-road level 2 will be canceled.The vehicle is lowered to off-road level 1.You will see a message in the multifunctiondisplay, for example: Lowering.If you are driving above 70 mph (115 km/h)or drive between 62 mph (100 km/h) and70 mph (115 km/h) for longer than20 seconds, off-road level 1 will be canceled.Depending on the vehicle's speed and theADS mode selected (Y page 209), the vehicleis automatically lowered to highway or high-speed level.You will see a message in the multifunctiondisplay, for example: Lowering.

HOLD function


G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, it can still roll awaydespite being braked by the HOLD function if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in

the voltage supply.Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by

pressing the accelerator pedal or the brakepedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.Rthe electrical system in the engine

compartment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnectedThere is a risk of an accident.

Driving systems 207

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe HOLD function and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.


Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 208).

General notesThe HOLD function can assist the driver in thefollowing situations:Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep

slopesRwhen maneuvering on steep slopesRwhen waiting in trafficThe vehicle is kept stationary without thedriver having to depress the brake pedal.The braking effect is canceled and the HOLDfunction deactivated when you depress theaccelerator pedal to pull away.

i Do not use the HOLD function whendriving off-road, on steep uphill or downhillgradients or on slippery or loose surfaces.The HOLD function cannot hold the vehicleon such surfaces.

Activation conditionsYou can activate the HOLD function if:Rthe vehicle is stationaryRthe engine is runningRthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt

is fastenedRthe electric parking brake is releasedRthe transmission is in position D, R or NRDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated

Activating the HOLD functionX Make sure that the activation conditions

are met.X Depress the brake pedal.X Quickly depress the brake pedal further

until ë appears in the multifunctiondisplay.The HOLD function is activated. You canrelease the brake pedal.

i If depressing the brake pedal the firsttime does not activate the HOLD function,wait briefly and then try again.

Deactivating the HOLD functionThe HOLD function is deactivatedautomatically if:Ryou accelerate and the transmission is in

position D or RRyou shift the transmission to position PRyou depress the brake pedal again with a

certain amount of pressure until ëdisappears from the multifunction displayRyou secure the vehicle using the electric

parking brakeRyou activate DISTRONIC PLUS

i After a time, the electric parking brakesecures the vehicle and relieves the servicebrake.

The electric parking brake automaticallysecures the vehicle if the HOLD function isactivated and:Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's

seat belt is unfastened.Rthe engine is switched off.Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.On steep uphill or downhill inclines or if thereis a malfunction, the transmission may alsobe automatically shifted into position P.


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

AIRMATIC package

General notesAIRMATIC regulates the level of your vehicle.As well as level control (Y page 210), yourvehicle can be equipped with ADS (AdaptiveDamping System) (Y page 209) and ACTIVECURVE SYSTEM (Y page 209).Observe the notes on driving with a trailer(Y page 253).

ADS (Adaptive Damping System)

General notesADS adapts the damping characteristics tothe current operating and driving situation.This depends on:Ryour driving styleRthe road surface conditionsRthe ADS settingRthe vehicle level settingYour selection remains stored even if youremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

Sports tuning

Example: vehicles without the ON&OFFROADpackage: Suspension tuning button; Indicator lamp for sports tuning= Indicator lamp for comfort tuningX Start the engine.

X Press button :.Indicator lamp ; lights up. Sportssuspension tuning is selected. The vehicleis lowered by 0.6 in (15 mm).

The firmer suspension tuning in Sport modeensures even better contact with the road.Select this mode when employing a sportydriving style, e.g. on winding country roads.

Comfort tuning

Example: vehicles without the ON&OFFROADpackage: Suspension tuning button; Indicator lamp for sports tuning= Indicator lamp for comfort tuningX Press button :.

Indicator lamp = lights up. Comfort tuningis selected. The vehicle is raised by 0.6 in(15 mm).

In comfort mode, the driving characteristicsof your vehicle are more comfortable.Therefore, select this mode if you favor amore comfortable driving style. Selectcomfort mode also when driving fast onstraight roads, e.g. on straight stretches offreeway.

Active Curve SystemThe Active Curve System uses activestabilizers to optimize both driving comfortand vehicle agility. Depending on the ADSmode selected (Y page 209), the Active CurveSystem also changes the setting.

Driving systems 209

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

If you select ADS comfort mode:Rrolling movement is reduced in the event of

changing surface undulationsRthe roll angle when cornering is reducedRthe driving style is agileIf you select ADS sport mode:Rthe roll angle is reduced significantlyRthe driving style is even more agile

Level control

Important safety notesG WARNINGWhen the vehicle is being lowered, peoplecould become trapped if their limbs arebetween the vehicle body and the wheels orunderneath the vehicle. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure no one is underneath the vehicleor in the immediate vicinity of the wheelarches when the vehicle is being lowered.

G WARNINGWhen you drive with the vehicle raised, thedriving characteristics could be impaired bythe vehicle's raised center of gravity. Thevehicle could rollover more easily, forexample on a bend. There is a risk of anaccident.Always select as low a vehicle level aspossible and adjust your driving style.

G WARNINGWhen you drive with the chassis lowered orraised, the vehicle's braking and drivingcharacteristics can be significantly impaired.You could also exceed the permissible vehicleheight if the chassis is raised. There is a riskof an accident.Adjust the vehicle level before pulling away.

G WARNINGDue to the high center of gravity, the vehiclemay start to skid and roll over in the event ofan abrupt steering maneuver and/or when

the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the roadconditions. There is a risk of an accident.Always adapt your speed and driving style tothe vehicle's driving characteristics and to theprevailing road and weather conditions.

! When driving on extremely rough terrain,select a high vehicle level in good time.Make sure there is always sufficient groundclearance. You will otherwise damage thevehicle.

! When you raise the vehicle in such a waythat not all wheels have contact with theground, remove the SmartKey from theignition lock.RUtility vehicles have a significantly higher

rollover rate than other types of vehicles.Failure to operate this vehicle safely mayresult in an accident, rollover of the vehicle,and severe or fatal injury.RIn a rollover crash, an unbelted person is

significantly more likely to die than aperson wearing a seat belt.You and all vehicle occupants shouldalways wear your seat belts.

General notesFurther information about "Driving off-road"(Y page 187).Level control adapts the vehicle levelautomatically to the current operating anddriving situation. This results in reduced fuelconsumption and improved handling.If you select ADS comfort mode(Y page 209), the vehicle is lowered to high-speed level as the speed increases. As thevehicle speed decreases, the vehicle is raisedback up to highway level.If you select ADS sport mode (Y page 209),the vehicle skips highway level and lowersdirectly to high-speed level depending on thebasic setting (Y page 211).Make changes to the vehicle level while thevehicle is in motion. This enables the vehicleto adjust to the new level as quickly aspossible.


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

The vehicle level may change visibly if youpark the vehicle and the outside temperaturechanges. If the temperature drops, thevehicle level is lower; with an increase intemperature, the vehicle level rises.If you unlock the vehicle or open a door, thevehicle begins to compensate for loaddiscrepancies while still parked. However, forsignificant level changes, such as after thevehicle has been stationary for a long period,the engine must be on. For safety reasons,the vehicle is only lowered when the doors areclosed. Lowering is interrupted if a door isopened, and it continues once the door hasbeen closed.

Basic settingsThe extent to which the vehicle is raised orlowered depends on the basic settingselected. Select raised level for off-roaddriving or highway/high-speed level fornormal roads.The individual vehicle levels differ fromhighway level as follows:Rhighway level: +/–0 in (+/–0 mm)Rhigh-speed level: –0.6 in (–15 mm)Rraised level: +2.3 in (+60 mm)

Raised level

Only select raised level if this is appropriatefor the road conditions. Otherwise, fuelconsumption may increase and handling maybe affected.X Start the engine.

If indicator lamp ; is not lit:X Press button :.

Indicator lamp ; flashes. The vehicle risesto raised level.

During the adjustment, the Vehicle rising message, for example, appears in themultifunction display.If you press the % or a button on themultifunction steering wheel, the messagewill disappear.Once the vehicle has reached raised level,indicator lamp ; remains lit. The Vehicle rising message disappears from themultifunction display.If you try to select raised level at a speedabove 40 mph (64 km/h), the Drive More Slowly message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

Highway/high-speed level! Make sure that there is enough ground

clearance when the vehicle is beinglowered. It could otherwise hit the ground,damaging the underbody.

Driving systems 211

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

: Level control button; Level control indicator lampX Start the engine.

If indicator lamp ; is lit:X Press button :.

Indicator lamp ; flashes. The vehicle isadjusting to highway/high-speed level.

During the adjustment, the Loweringmessage, for example, appears in themultifunction display.If you press the % or a button on themultifunction steering wheel, the messagewill disappear.Once highway level has been reached,indicator lamp ; goes out. The Loweringmessage disappears from the multifunctiondisplay.

The vehicle automatically adjusts to highwaylevel when you:Rdrive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h) orRdrive between 40 mph (64 km/h) and

50 mph (80 km/h) for approximately20 seconds

Depending on the ADS mode selected(Y page 209), the vehicle is lowered to high-speed level at high speeds.

AMG adaptive sport suspensionsystem

Rear axle level controlThe vehicle automatically sets the vehiclelevel at the rear axle. Rear axle level controlensures the best possible suspension andthat the ground clearance remains constanteven when the vehicle is loaded. Thisimproves driving safety and fuelconsumption.

Suspension tuning

General notesThe electronically controlled damping systemworks continuously. This improves drivingsafety and ride comfort.The damping is tuned individually to eachwheel and depends on:Ryour driving style, e.g. sportyRthe road surface condition, e.g. bumpsRyour individual selection of Sport, Sport +

or ComfortIf you select Sport or Sport + mode andrestart the engine, the suspension settingreverts to Comfort mode.


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Sport mode

The firmer suspension tuning in Sport modeensures even better contact with the road.Select this mode when employing a sportydriving style, e.g. on winding country roads.X Press the : button once.

Indicator lamp ; lights up. You haveselected Sport mode.The AMG Suspension System SPORTmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

Sport + modeThe very firm setting of the suspension tuningin Sport + mode ensures the best possiblecontact with the road. Select this mode onlywhen driving on race circuits.If indicator lamps = and ; are off:X Press button : twice.

Indicator lamps = and ; light up. Youhave selected Sport + mode.The AMG Suspension System SPORT +message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

If indicator lamp ; lights up:X Press the : button once.

Second indicator lamp = lights up. Youhave selected Sport + mode.The AMG Suspension System SPORT +message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

Comfort modeIn Comfort mode, the driving characteristicsof your vehicle are more comfortable.Therefore, select this mode if you favor amore comfortable driving style. Selectcomfort mode also when driving fast onstraight roads, e.g. on straight stretches offreeway.X Press button : repeatedly until indicator

lamps = and ; go out.You have selected Comfort mode.The AMG Suspension System COMFORTmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

PARKTRONIC

Important safety notesPARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid withultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually andaudibly the distance between your vehicleand an object.PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to yourimmediate surroundings. You are alwaysresponsible for safe maneuvering, parkingand exiting a parking space. Whenmaneuvering, parking or pulling out of aparking space, make sure that there are nopersons, animals or objects in the area inwhich you are maneuvering.

! When parking, pay particular attention toobjects above or below the sensors, suchas flower pots or trailer drawbars.PARKTRONIC does not detect such objectswhen they are in the immediate vicinity ofthe vehicle. You could damage the vehicleor the objects.The sensors may not detect snow and otherobjects that absorb ultrasonic waves.Ultrasonic sources such as an automaticcar wash, the compressed-air brakes on atruck or a pneumatic drill could causePARKTRONIC to malfunction.

Driving systems 213

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

PARKTRONIC may not function correctly onuneven terrain.

PARKTRONIC is activated automatically whenyou:Rswitch on the ignitionRshift the transmission to position D, R or NRrelease the electric parking brakePARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above11 mph (18km/h). It is reactivated at lowerspeeds.PARKTRONIC monitors the area around yourvehicle using six sensors in the front bumperand four sensors in the rear bumper.

: Sensors in the front bumper, left-handside (example)

Range of the sensors

General notesPARKTRONIC does not take objects intoconsideration that are:Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people,

animals or objectsRabove the detection range, e.g.

overhanging loads, truck overhangs orloading ramps.

Side view

Top view

The sensors must be free from dirt, ice orslush. They can otherwise not functioncorrectly. Clean the sensors regularly, takingcare not to scratch or damage them(Y page 373).

Front sensors

Center Approx. 40in (approx.100cm)

Corners Approx. 24in (approx.60cm)

Rear sensors

Center Approx. 48in (approx.120cm)

Corners Approx. 32in (approx.80cm)

Minimum distance

Center Approx. 8in (approx. 20cm)

Corners Approx. 6in (approx. 15cm)


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

If there is an obstacle within this range, therelevant warning displays light up and awarning tone sounds. If the distance fallsbelow the minimum, the distance may nolonger be shown.

Warning displays

Warning display for the front area: Segments on the left-hand side of the

vehicle; Segments on the right-hand side of the

vehicle= Segments showing operational readiness

The warning displays show the distancebetween the sensors and the obstacle. Thewarning display for the front area is locatedon the dashboard above the center air vents.The warning display for the rear area is in theroof lamp in the rear compartment.The warning display for each side of thevehicle is divided into five yellow and two redsegments. PARKTRONIC is operational ifyellow segments showing operationalreadiness = light up.The selected transmission position and thedirection in which the vehicle is rollingdetermine which warning display is activewhen the engine is running.

Transmission position

Warning display

D Front area activated

R, N or the vehicleis rollingbackwards

Rear and front areasactivated

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, depending on thevehicle's distance from the obstacle.From the:Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an

intermittent warning tone forapproximately two seconds.Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a

warning tone for approximately twoseconds. This indicates that you have nowreached the minimum distance.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

: Indicator lamp; Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

If indicator lamp : lights up, PARKTRONIC isdeactivated. Active Park Assist is then alsodeactivated.

i PARKTRONIC is automatically activatedwhen you turn the SmartKey to position 2in the ignition lock.

Driving systems 215

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Towing a trailer! Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer tow

hitch is not required. PARKTRONICmeasures the minimum detection range toan obstacle from the bumper, not the ballcoupling.

PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear areawhen you establish an electrical connectionbetween your vehicle and a trailer.


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Problems with PARKTRONIC


Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.You also hear a warningtone for approximatelytwo seconds.PARKTRONIC isdeactivated afterapproximately fiveseconds, and theindicator lamp in thePARKTRONIC buttonlights up.

PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified

specialist workshop.

Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.PARKTRONIC isdeactivated afterapproximately fiveseconds.

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 373).X Switch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio orultrasound waves.X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Active Parking Assist

Important safety notesActive Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is nota replacement for your attention to yourimmediate surroundings. You are alwaysresponsible for safe maneuvering, parkingand exiting a parking space. Whenmaneuvering, parking or pulling out of aparking space, make sure that there are nopersons, animals or objects in the area inwhich you are maneuvering.

G WARNINGThe vehicle swings out when parking and indoing so could cross into the opposite lane.This could result in a collision with anotherroad user. There is a risk of an accident.Pay attention to other road users whenparking. Stop the vehicle if necessary or

cancel the Active Parking Assist parkingprocedure.

! If unavoidable, you should drive overobstacles such as curbs slowly and not ata sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damagethe wheels or tires.

Active Parking Assist may possibly indicateparking spaces which are not suitable forparking, for example:Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibitedRin front of driveways or entrances and exitsRon unsuitable surfaces

Driving systems 217

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Parking tips:ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the

parking space as possible.RParking spaces that are littered, overgrown

or partially occupied by trailer drawbarsmight be identified incorrectly or not at all.RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking

space being measured inaccurately.RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC

(Y page 215) warning messages during theparking procedure.RWhen transporting a load which protrudes

from your vehicle, you should not useActive Parking Assist.RNever use Active Parking Assist when snow

chains are installed.RMake sure that the tire pressures are

always correct. This has a direct influenceon the parking characteristics of thevehicle.

General notesActive Parking Assist is an electronic parkingaid with ultrasound. Ultrasound is used tomeasure the road on both sides of the vehicle.A suitable parking space is indicated by theparking symbol. Active steering interventioncan assist you during parking.You may also use PARKTRONIC(Y page 213). When PARKTRONIC is switchedoff, Active Parking Assist is also unavailable.Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces:Rthat are parallel to the direction of travelRthat are on straight roads, not bendsRthat are on the same level as the road, e.g.

not on the pavement

Detecting parking spaces

G WARNINGIf there are objects above the detection range,Active Parking Assist may turn prematurely.You may cause a collision as a result. There isa risk of an accident.

If there are objects above the detection range,stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist.

Objects located above the height range ofActive Parking Assist will not be detectedwhen the parking space is measured. Theseare not taken into account when the parkingprocedure is calculated, e.g. overhangingloads, tail sections or loading ramps of goodsvehicles. In some circumstances, ActiveParking Assist may therefore guide you intothe parking space too early.

: Detected parking space on the left; Parking symbol= Detected parking space on the right

Active Parking Assist is switched onautomatically when driving forwards. Thesystem is operational at speeds of up toapproximately 22 mph (35 km/h). While inoperation, the system independently locatesand measures parking spaces on both sidesof the vehicle. When driving at speeds below19 mph (30 km/h), you will see the parkingsymbol as a status indicator in the instrumentcluster. By default, Active Parking Assist onlydisplays parking spaces on the front-passenger side. Parking spaces on thedriver's side are displayed as soon as the turnsignal on the driver's side is activated. To parkon the driver's side, you must leave thedriver's side turn signal switched on. Thismust remain switched on until youacknowledge the use of Active Parking Assistby pressing the a button on themultifunction steering wheel.When a parking space has been detected, anarrow towards the right or the left alsoappears.


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Active Parking Assist will only detect parkingspaces:Rthat are parallel to the direction of travelRthat are at least 59 in (1.5 m) wideRthat are at least 51 in (1.3 m) longer than

your vehicleA parking space is displayed while you aredriving past it, and until you areapproximately 50 ft (15 m) away from it.

Parking

G WARNINGActive Parking Assist merely aids you byintervening actively in the steering. If you donot brake there is a risk of an accident.Always apply the brakes yourself whenmaneuvering and parking.

X Stop the vehicle when the parking spacesymbol shows the desired parking space inthe instrument cluster.

X Shift the transmission to position R.The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:% message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

X To cancel the procedure: press the% button on the multifunction steeringwheel or pull away.

orX To park using Active Parking Assist:

press the a button on the multifunctionsteering wheel.The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundingsmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake

at all times. When backing up, drive at aspeed below approximately 6 mph(10 km/h). Otherwise Active Parking Assistwill be canceled.

i In tight parking spaces, you will achievethe best parking results by backing up as

far as possible. When doing so, alsoobserve the PARKTRONIC messages.

X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds thecontinuous warning tone, if not before.Maneuvering may be required in tightparking spaces.

The Park Assist active Select D Observe surroundings message appears inthe multifunction display.X Shift the transmission to position D while

the vehicle is stationary.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction.The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundingsmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

i You will achieve the best results bywaiting for the steering procedure tocomplete before pulling away.

X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at alltimes.

X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds thecontinuous warning tone, if not before.

The Park Assist active Select R Observe surroundings message appears inthe multifunction display.Further transmission shifts may benecessary.As soon as the parking procedure iscomplete, the Park Assist switched offmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay. PARKTRONIC is still available.X Maneuver if necessary.X Always observe the warning messages

displayed by PARKTRONIC (Y page 215).Parking tips:RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the

parking space after parking is dependenton various factors. These include theposition and shape of the vehicles parkedin front and behind it and the conditions ofthe location. It may be the case that ActiveParking Assist guides you too far into a

Driving systems 219

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

parking space, or not far enough into it. Insome cases, it may also lead you across oronto the curb. If necessary, you shouldcancel the parking procedure with ActiveParking Assist.RYou can also engage forward gear

prematurely. The vehicle redirects anddoes not drive as far into the parking space.Should the gear change occur too soon toachieve a sensible parking position, theparking procedure will be aborted.RYou can intervene in the steering procedure

to correct it at any time. Active ParkingAssist will then be canceled.

Exiting a parking space

G WARNINGActive Parking Assist does not monitor streettraffic. In some cases, the vehicle will alsotake you onto sections of the oncoming lanewhen exiting a parking space.You are responsible for safety at all times andmust pay attention to any road usersapproaching or passing. Stop the vehicle ifnecessary or cancel Active Parking Assist.

Active Parking Assist can only assist you withexiting a parking space if you have parked thevehicle using Active Parking Assist.X Start the engine.X Switch on the turn signal on the side facing

the street.X Shift the transmission to position D or R.

The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:% message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

X To cancel the procedure: press the% button on the multifunction steeringwheel or pull away.

orX To exit a parking space using Active

Parking Assist: press the a button onthe multifunction steering wheel.The Park Assist Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundings

message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.X Reverse the vehicle or drive forwards, being

ready to brake at all times. Do not exceeda maximum speed of approximately6 mph (10 km/h) when exiting a parkingspace. Otherwise, Active Parking Assist willbe deactivated.


X Shift the transmission to position D or R asrequired while the vehicle is stationary.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction.

i You will achieve the best results bywaiting for the steering procedure tocomplete before pulling away.If you back up after activation, the steeringwheel is moved to the straight-aheadposition.

X Drive forwards or back up the vehicle, beingready to brake at all times.


X Drive forwards and back up as instructedby the PARKTRONIC warning displays.

Once you have exited the parking spacecompletely, the steering wheel is moved tothe straight-ahead position. You hear a toneand the message Park Assist Finishedappears in the multifunction display. You willthen have to steer and merge into traffic onyour own. PARKTRONIC is still available.

Canceling Active Parking AssistX Stop the movement of the multifunction

steering wheel or steer yourself.Active Parking Assist will be canceled atonce. The Park Assist Canceled


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

orX Press the PARKTRONIC button on the

center console (Y page 215).PARKTRONIC is switched off and ActiveParking Assist is immediately canceled.The Park Assist Canceled messageappears in the multifunction display.

Active Parking Assist is canceledautomatically if:Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no

longer possible.Ryou are driving faster than 6mph

(10 km/h).Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. The

÷ warning lamp lights up in theinstrument cluster.

A warning tone sounds. The parking symboldisappears and the multifunction displayshows the Park Assist Canceledmessage.When Active Parking Assist is canceled, youmust steer again yourself.

Towing a trailerFor vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, theminimum length for parking spaces is slightlyincreased.If you have attached a trailer to your vehicle,you should not use Active Parking Assist.Once the electrical connection is establishedbetween your vehicle and the trailer, ActiveParking Assist is no longer available.PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area.

Rear view camera

Important safety notesThe rear view camera is only an aid. It is nota replacement for your attention to yourimmediate surroundings. You are alwaysresponsible for safe maneuvering andparking. When maneuvering or parking, make

sure that there are no persons, animals orobjects in the area in which you aremaneuvering.Under the following circumstances, the rearview camera will not function, or will functionin a limited manner:Rthe tailgate is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the camera is exposed to very bright lightRif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED

lighting (the display may flicker)Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,

e.g. when driving into a heated garage inwinterRif the camera lens is dirty or obstructedRif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In

this event, have the camera position andsetting checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

General notes

Rear view camera : is in the handle on thetailgate.Rear view camera : is an optical parking andmaneuvering aid. It shows the area behindyour vehicle with guide lines in the COMANDdisplay.The area behind the vehicle is displayed as amirror image, as in the rear view mirror.

i The text of messages shown in theCOMAND display depends on the languagesetting. The following are examples of rear

Driving systems 221

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

view camera messages in the COMANDdisplay.

Activating/deactivating the rear viewcamera

X To activate: make sure that the SmartKeyis in position 2 in the ignition lock.

X Make sure that the function "show rearview camera display" is selected inCOMAND.

X Engage reverse gear.The area behind the vehicle is shown in theCOMAND display with guide lines.

X To change the function mode for vehicles with trailer tow hitch: using theCOMAND controller, select symbol : forthe "Reverse parking" function orsymbol ; for "Coupling up a trailer" (seethe separate COMAND operatinginstructions).The symbol of the selected function ishighlighted.

To deactivate: the rear view camera isdeactivated if you:Rshift the transmission to position PRdrive forwards 33 ft (10 m)Rshift the transmission from R to another

position (after 15 seconds)Rdrive forwards at a speed of over 5 mph

(10km/h)

Displays in the COMAND displayThe rear view camera may show a distortedview of obstacles, show them incorrectly ornot at all. The rear view camera does not showobjects in the following positions:Rvery close to the rear bumperRunder the rear bumperRin the area immediately above the tailgate

handle

! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe rear section of an HGVRa slanted postUse the guidelines only for orientation.Approach objects no further than thebottom-most guideline.

: White guide line without turning thesteering wheel, vehicle width includingthe exterior mirrors (static)

; Yellow guide line at a distance ofapproximately 13 ft (4.0m) from the rearof the vehicle

= Red guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Yellow lane marking tires at currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

A Yellow guide line at a distance ofapproximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rearof the vehicle

B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)C BumperD Red guide line at a distance of

approximately 10 in (0.25 m) from therear of the vehicle

The guide lines are shown when thetransmission is in position R.The distance specifications only apply toobjects that are at ground level.

Additional messages for vehicles withPARKTRONIC: Front warning display; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement

operational readiness indicator= Rear warning display

Vehicles with PARKTRONIC: ifPARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 215), anadditional operational readiness indicator willappear in COMAND display ;. If thePARKTRONIC warning displays are active orlight up, warning displays : and = are also

active or light up correspondingly in theCOMAND display.

Reverse parking function

Backing up straight into a parking spacewithout turning the steering wheel

: White guide line without turning thesteering wheel, vehicle width includingthe exterior mirrors (static)

; Red guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

= Yellow guide line at a distance ofapproximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rearof the vehicle

? Red guide line at a distance ofapproximately 10 in (0.25 m) from therear of the vehicle

X Make sure that the rear view camera isswitched on (Y page 222).The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X With the help of white guide line :, checkwhether the vehicle will fit into the parkingspace.

X Using white guide line : as a guide,carefully back up until you reach the endposition.Red guide line ? is then at the end of theparking space. The vehicle is almostparallel in the parking space.

Driving systems 223

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Reverse perpendicular parking with thesteering wheel at an angle

Turning the steering wheel: Red guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

; Parking space markingX Make sure that the rear view camera is

switched on (Y page 222).The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X Drive past the parking space and bring thevehicle to a standstill.

X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn thesteering wheel in the direction of theparking space until red guide line :reaches parking space marking ;.

X Keep the steering wheel in that positionand back up carefully.

Backing up with the steering wheel turned: Red guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactlyin front of the parking space.The white lane should be as close to parallelwith the parking space marking aspossible.

Driving to the final position: White guide line at current steering wheel

angle; Parking space markingX Turn the steering wheel to the center

position while the vehicle is stationary.

: Red guide line at a distance ofapproximately 10 in (0.25 m) from therear of the vehicle

; White guide line without turning thesteering wheel

= End of parking spaceX Back up carefully until you have reached

the final position.Red guide line : is then at end of parkingspace =. The vehicle is almost parallel inthe parking space.


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

"Coupling up a trailer" function! The following distance specifications

refer to trailer tow hitches with ballcoupling that have been approved for thisvehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Distances maydiffer if you use other ball couplings. In thiscase, take into account that actualdistances will not match the followingdistance specifications. Otherwise youcould damage the trailer and vehicle.

: Vehicle center point on the yellow guideline at a distance of approximately 3 ft(1 m) from the rear of the vehicle

; Trailer drawbar= Ball coupling

This function is only available on vehicles witha trailer tow hitch.X Set the height of trailer drawbar ; so that

it is slightly higher than ball coupling =.X Position the vehicle centrally in front of

trailer drawbar ;.

: Ball coupling; Red guide line at a distance of

approximately 10 in (0.25 m) from the ballcoupling

= Trailer drawbar marker assistant? Trailer drawbarA Symbol for the "Coupling up a trailer"

functionX Use the COMAND controller to select

symbol A, see the separate operatinginstructions for COMAND.The "Coupling up a trailer" function isselected. The distance specifications nowonly apply to objects that are at the samelevel as the ball coupling.

X Reverse carefully, making sure that trailerdrawbar marker assistant = pointsapproximately in the direction of trailerdrawbar ?.

X Reverse carefully until trailer drawbar ?reaches red guide line ;.

X Couple up the trailer (Y page 253).

360° camera (surround view)

Important safety notesThe 360° camera is only an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to yourimmediate surroundings. You are alwaysresponsible for safe maneuvering andparking. When maneuvering or parking, makesure that there are no persons, animals or

Driving systems 225

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

objects in the area in which you aremaneuvering.The 360° camera may show a distorted viewof obstacles, show them incorrectly or not atall. It cannot show objects in the followingareas:Runder the front bumperRvery close to the front bumperRvery close to the rear bumperRunder the rear bumperRin close range above the handle on the

trunk lidRvery close to the exterior mirrorsYou are always responsible for safety, andmust always pay attention to yoursurroundings when parking andmaneuvering. This applies to the areasbehind, in front of and beside the vehicle. Youcould otherwise endanger yourself andothers.The rear view camera will not function or willfunction in a limited manner:Rif the doors are openRif the exterior mirrors are folded inRif the trunk lid is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the cameras are exposed to very bright

lightRif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED

lighting (the display may flicker)Rif you exit a heated garage in winter,

resulting in a rapid change in temperatureRif the camera lenses are dirty or coveredRif the vehicle components in which the

cameras are installed are damaged. In thisevent, have the camera position and settingchecked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Do not use the 360° camera in this case. Youcan otherwise injure others or cause damageto objects or the vehicle.

General notesThe 360° camera is a system consisting offour cameras.The system analyzes images from thefollowing cameras:RRear view cameraRFront cameraRTwo cameras in the exterior rear view

mirrorsThe cameras capture the immediatesurroundings of the vehicle. The systemsupports you, e.g. when parking or if vision isrestricted at an exit.The 360° camera images can be shown in fullscreen mode or in seven different split-screenviews on the COMAND display. A split-screenview also includes a top view of the vehicle.This view is calculated from the data suppliedby the installed cameras (virtual camera).The seven split-screen views are:Rtop view and picture from the rear view

camera (130° viewing angle)Rtop view and picture from the front camera

(without displaying the maximum steeringwheel angle)Rtop view and enlarged rear viewRtop view and enlarged front viewRtop view and trailer view (vehicles with

trailer tow hitch)Rtop view and pictures from the rearward

facing mirror cameras (rear wheel view)Rtop view and pictures from the forward

facing mirror cameras (front wheel view)

i The top view and trailer view are availablefor vehicles equipped with a trailer towhitch.

When the function is active and you shift thetransmission from position D or R to N, yousee the previous view in the COMANDdisplay. The dynamic guidelines are hidden.When you change between transmissionpositions D and R, you see the previouslyselected front or rear view.


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Activation conditionsThe 360° camera image can be displayed if:Ryour vehicle is equipped with a 360°

cameraRCOMAND is switched on, see the separate

COMAND operating instructionsRthe 360° camera function is activated

Activating the 360° camera using theSYS buttonX Press and hold the W button for longer

than 2 seconds, see the separate COMANDoperating instructions.Depending on whether position D or R isengaged, the following is shown:Rfull screen display with the image from

the front cameraRfull screen display with the image from

the rear camera

Activating the 360° camera withCOMANDX Press the W button, see the separate

COMAND operating instructions.X Select System by turning cVd the

COMAND controller and press W toconfirm.

X Select 360° camera and press W toconfirm.Depending on whether position D or R isengaged, the following is shown:Ra split screen with top view and the

image from the front camera orRa split screen with top view and the

image from the rear view cameraFor further information about the COMANDController, see the separate COMANDoperating instructions.

Activating the 360° camera usingreverse gearThe 360° camera images can beautomatically displayed by engaging reversegear.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position

2 in the ignition lock.X Make sure that the Activation by R gear setting is active in COMAND, see theseparate COMAND operating instructions.

X To show the 360° camera image: engagereverse gear.The COMAND display shows the areabehind the vehicle in split screen:Rvehicle with guide linesRtop view of the vehicle

Selecting the split-screen and fullscreen displaysX To switch between split screen views:

switch to the line with the vehicle icons bysliding ZV the COMAND controller.

X Turn cVd the COMAND controller andselect one of the vehicle symbols.

X To switch to full screen mode: selectFull screen by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W toconfirm.

Displays in the COMAND display

Important safety notes! Objects not at ground level may appear to

be further away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe rear section of an HGVRa slanted postUse the guidelines only for orientation.Approach objects no further than thebottom-most guideline.

Driving systems 227

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Top view with picture from the rear viewcamera

: Symbol for the split screen setting withtop view and rear view camera image

; Yellow guide line at a distance ofapproximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rearof the vehicle

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)


A Yellow guide line at a distance ofapproximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rearof the vehicle

B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)C Red guide line at a distance of

approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from therear of the vehicle

D Bumper

The guide lines are shown when thetransmission is in position R.The distance specifications only apply toobjects that are at ground level.

Top view with picture from the frontcamera

: Symbol for the split screen setting withtop view and front camera image

; Yellow guide line at a distance ofapproximately 13 ft (4.0m) from the frontof the vehicle

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)


A Yellow guide line at a distance ofapproximately 3 ft (1.0m) from the frontof the vehicle

B Red guide line at a distance ofapproximately 12 in (0.30 m) from thefront of the vehicle


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Top view and enlarged rear view

: Symbol for the split screen setting withtop view and rear view camera imageenlarged

; Red guide line at a distance ofapproximately 12 in (0.30 m) from therear of the vehicle

This view assists you in estimating thedistance to the vehicle behind you.

i This setting can also be selected as anenlarged front view.

Top view with picture from the mirrorcamera

: Symbol for the top view and forward-facing mirror camera setting

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors (right sideof vehicle)

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors (left side ofvehicle)

Top view with trailer view

: Symbol for the trailer view setting; Trailer drawbar marker assistant= Red guide line at a distance of

approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the ballcoupling

Display with the PARKTRONIC display

Example: full screen mode with PARKTRONICdisplay: Symbol for the full screen setting with rear

view camera imageIf the vehicle is equipped with PARKTRONICand the function is active (Y page 215),warning displays ; in the COMAND displayare also active or light up accordingly.PARKTRONIC appears:Rin split screen view as red or yellow

brackets around the vehicle icon in the topview, orRin the full screen view, on the right-hand

side at the bottom as red or yellow bracketsaround the vehicle icon

Driving systems 229

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

i The full screen display can also beselected as front view.

Exiting 360° camera display modeAs soon as your vehicle exceeds a speed of19 mph (30 km/h) with the functionactivated, the function switches off. TheCOMAND display switches back to thepreviously selected view. You can also switchthe display by selecting the & symbol in thedisplay and pressing W the COMANDcontroller.

ATTENTION ASSIST

Important safety notesATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to thedriver. It might not always recognize fatigueor increasing inattentiveness in time or fail torecognize them at all. The system is not asubstitute for a well-rested and attentivedriver.ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,monotonous journeys, such as on highways.It is active in the range between 50 mph(80 km/h) and 112 mph (180 km/h).If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typicalindicators of fatigue or increasing lapses inconcentration on the part of the driver, itsuggests you take a break.ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level offatigue or lapses in concentration by takingthe following criteria into account:Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steering

characteristicsRjourney details, e.g. time of day and length

of journeyThe functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST isrestricted and warnings may be delayed ornot occur at all:Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the

surface is uneven or if there are potholesRif there is a strong side wind

Rif you have adopted a sporty driving stylewith high cornering speeds or high rates ofaccelerationRif you are predominantly driving slower

than 50 mph (80 km/h) or faster than112 mph (180 km/h)Rif you are currently using COMAND or

making a telephone call with itRif the time has been set incorrectlyRin active driving situations, such as when

you change lanes or change your speed

Warning and display messages in themultifunction display

X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-board computer (Y page 273).Symbol : appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

X The Attention Assist: Take a Break! message appears in the multifunction display. If necessary, takea break.

X Press the a or % button to confirmthe message.

If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, you will bewarned no sooner than 20 minutes after yourjourney has begun. In addition to the messageshown in the multifunction display, you willthen hear an intermittent warning tone twice.On long journeys, take regular breaks in goodtime to allow yourself to rest properly. If youdo not take a break and ATTENTION ASSISTstill detects increasing lapses inconcentration, you will be warned again after15 minutes at the earliest.


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when youcontinue your journey and starts assessingyour tiredness again if:Ryou switch off the engine.Ryou take off your seat belt and open the

driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers orto take a break.

Night View Assist Plus

Important safety notesNight View Assist Plus is only an aid and is nota substitute for attentive driving. Do not relyon the Night View Assist Plus display. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed and for braking ingood time. Drive carefully and always adaptyour driving style to suit the prevailing roadand traffic conditions.The system may be impaired or may notfunction if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow,

rain, fog or sprayRthe windshield is dirty, fogged up or

covered, for instance by a sticker, in thevicinity of the cameraRon bends, on uphill gradients or downhill

gradientsPedestrian recognition may be impaired orinoperative if:Rpedestrians are partially or entirely

obscured by objects, e.g. parked vehiclesRthe silhouette of the pedestrian in the Night

View Assist Plus display is incomplete orinterrupted, e.g. by powerful lightreflectionsRpedestrians do not contrast adequately

from the backgroundRpedestrians are not in an upright position,

e.g. sitting, squatting or lying

General notes

In addition to the illumination provided by thenormal headlamps, Night View Assist Plususes infrared light to illuminate the road.Night View Assist Plus camera : picks upthe infrared light and displays a monochromeimage in COMAND. The image displayed inCOMAND corresponds to a road lit up by high-beam headlamps. This enables you to see theroad's course and any obstacles in good time.If pedestrian recognition is activated,pedestrians recognized by the system arehighlighted in the Night View Assist Plusdisplay.Light from the headlamps of oncomingvehicles does not affect the Night View AssistPlus display in the multifunction display. Thisis also the case if you cant switch on the high-beam headlamps due to oncoming traffic.

i Infrared light is not visible to the humaneye and therefore does not glare. NightView Assist Plus can therefore remainswitched on even if there is oncomingtraffic.

Activating Night View Assist Plus

Activation conditionsYou can only activate Night View Assist Plusif:Rthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition

lock.Rit is dark.

Driving systems 231

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Rthe light switch is in the Ã or Lposition.Rreverse gear has not been engaged.

Switching on Night View Assist Plus

X Make sure that COMAND is switched on.X Press button :.

The Night View Assist Plus display appearsin the COMAND display.

You can read about how to adjust thebrightness of the COMAND display in theCOMAND operating instructions.

i The infrared headlamps only switch onwhen the vehicle is being driven at speedsof approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Thismeans that you do not have the full visualrange while the vehicle is stationary andcannot check whether Night View AssistPlus is working.

Pedestrian recognition

: Night View Assist Plus display; Pedestrian recognized

= Framing? Symbol for active pedestrian recognition

i Animals are not recognized by pedestrianrecognition.

Night View Assist Plus is able to recognizepedestrians by typical characteristics, e.g. asilhouette in the shape of a person.Pedestrian recognition is then switched onautomatically if:RNight View Assist Plus is activatedRyou exceed a speed of approximately

6 mph (10 km/h)Rthe surroundings are dark, e.g. when

driving outside built-up areas withoutstreet lighting

If pedestrian recognition is active,symbol ? appears. If pedestrians aredetected, they are highlighted with framing=. If the pedestrian recognition system hasbrought a pedestrian to your attention, lookthrough the windshield to evaluate thesituation. The actual distance to objects andpedestrians cannot be gaged accurately bylooking at a screen.It may be the case that objects are highlightedas well as pedestrians.

Fogged up or dirty windshieldIf the windshield in front of the camera isfogged up or dirty on the inside or outside, theNight View Assist Plus display is affected.X To defrost: check the automatic air

conditioning settings (Y page 149) and folddown the camera cover (Y page 375).

X To defrost the inside of the windshield:fold down the camera cover (Y page 375)and clean the windshield (Y page 372).


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Problems with Night View Assist Plus


The picture quality ofNight View Assist Plushas deteriorated.

The windshield wipers are smearing the windshield.X Replace the wiper blades (Y page 133).

The windshield is smeared after the vehicle has been cleaned in acar wash.X Clean the windshield (Y page 372).

There is windshield chip damage in the camera's field of vision.X Replace the windshield.

The windshield is fogged up on the inside.X Defrost the windshield (Y page 149).

The windshield is iced up.X De-ice the windshield (Y page 148).

There is dirt on the inside of the windshield.X Clean the inside of the windshield (Y page 372).

Lane Tracking package

General notesThe Lane Tracking package consists of BlindSpot Assist (Y page 233) and Lane KeepingAssist (Y page 235).

Blind Spot Assist

Important safety notesG WARNINGBlind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,

placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles approaching and driving by with a

speed difference of more thanapproximately 6.8 mph (11 km/h)

As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not givewarnings in such situations. There is a risk ofan accident.Always observe the traffic conditionscarefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail todetect some vehicles and is no substitute forattentive driving.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCCas a "Vehicular Radar System". The radarsensor is intended for use in an automotiveradar system only. Removing, tamperingwith, or altering the device will void anywarranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

General notesBlind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor systemto monitor the areas on both sides of yourvehicle. It supports you from a speed ofapproximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warningdisplay in the exterior mirrors draws yourattention to vehicles detected in the

Driving systems 233

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

monitored area. If you then switch on thecorresponding turn signal to change lanes,you will also receive a visual and audiblecollision warning. Blind Spot Assist usessensors in the rear bumper for monitoringpurposes.For Blind Spot Assist to assist you whendriving, the radar sensor system must be:Ractivated (Y page 277)Roperational

Monitoring range of the sensorsIn particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else

covering the sensorsRpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain,

snow or sprayRnarrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or

bicyclesRthe road has very wide lanesRthe road has narrow lanesRyou are not driving in the middle of the laneRthere are barriers or similar lane bordersVehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.

Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to10 ft (3m) behind your vehicle and directlynext to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram.

If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehicle maybe indicated, especially if the vehicles are notdriving in the middle of their lane. This maybe the case if there are vehicles driving at theinner edge of their lanes.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when

driving close to crash barriers or similarsolid lane borders.Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an

extended period next to long vehicles, suchas trucks.

The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assistare integrated into the sides of the rearbumper. Make sure that the bumper is free ofdirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors.The sensors must not be covered, forexample by cycle racks or overhanging loads.Following a severe impact or in the event ofdamage to the bumpers, have the conditionof the radar sensors checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist mayotherwise not work properly.

Indicator and warning displayBlind Spot Assist is not active at speeds belowapproximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles inthe monitoring range are then not indicated.

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp

When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicatorlamp : in the exterior mirrors lights upyellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h).At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h) the


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

indicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assistis operational.If a vehicle is detected within the monitoringrange of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above20 mph (30km/h), warning lamp : on thecorresponding side lights up red. This warningis always emitted when a vehicle enters theblind spot monitoring range from behind orfrom the side. When you overtake a vehicle,the warning only occurs if the difference inspeed is less than 7 mph (12km/h).The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reversegear is engaged. In this event, Blind SpotAssist is no longer active.The brightness of the indicator/warninglamps is adjusted automatically according tothe ambient light.

Collision warningIf a vehicle is detected in the monitoring rangeof Blind Spot Assist and you switch on thecorresponding turn signal, a double warningtone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. Ifthe turn signal remains on, vehicles detectedare indicated by the flashing of red warninglamp :. There are no further warning tones.

Switching on Blind Spot Assist

X Make sure that the radar sensor system(Y page 277) and Blind Spot Assist

(Y page 273) are activated in the on-boardcomputer.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrorslight up red for approximately1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.

Towing a trailerWhen you attach a trailer, make sure you havecorrectly established the electricalconnection. This can be accomplished bychecking the trailer lighting. In this event,Blind Spot Assist is deactivated. The indicatorlamp in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow,and the Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manualmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

i You can deactivate the indicator lamps inthe exterior mirrors.To do so, switch off Blind Spot Assist when:Rthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the

ignition lockRthe engine is not runningRthe electrical connection to the trailer

has been established

Lane Keeping Assist

Important safety notesG WARNINGLane Keeping Assist may not always clearlyrecognize lane markings.In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and stay in lane, in particular ifwarned by Lane Keeping Assist.

Driving systems 235

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

G WARNINGThe Lane Keeping Assist warning does notreturn the vehicle to the original lane. Thereis a risk of an accident.You should always steer, brake or accelerateyourself, in particular if warned by LaneKeeping Assist.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, LaneKeeping Assist can neither reduce the risk ofan accident nor override the laws of physics.Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into accountthe road, traffic and weather conditions. LaneKeeping Assist is merely an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep thevehicle in the lane.The system may be impaired or may notfunction if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to

insufficient illumination of the road, or dueto snow, rain, fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,

the sun or reflections (e.g. when the roadsurface is wet)Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged

or covered, for instance by a sticker, in thevicinity of the cameraRthere are no, several or unclear lane

markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with roadconstruction workRthe lane markings are worn away, dark or

covered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is too

small and the lane markings thus cannot bedetectedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.

lanes branch off, cross one another ormergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are strong shadows cast on the lane

General notesLane Keeping Assist monitors the area infront of your vehicle by means of a camera atthe top of the windshield. Lane Keeping Assistdetects lane markings on the road and warnsyou before you leave your laneunintentionally.

: Lane Keeping Assist camera

If you select km on the on-board computer inthe Display Unit Speed-/Odometerfunction (Y page 274), Lane Keeping Assistis active starting at a speed of 60 km/h. If themiles display unit is selected, the assistancerange begins at 40 mph.A warning may be given if a front wheelpasses over a lane marking. It will warn youby means of intermittent vibration in thesteering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.

Switching on Lane Keeping Assist

X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist usingthe on-board computer; to do so, selectStandard or Adaptive(Y page 273).Symbol : appears in the multifunctiondisplay.If you drive at speeds above 40 mph(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

symbol : is shown in green. Lane KeepingAssist is ready for use.

StandardIf Standard is selected, no warning vibrationoccurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,

the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as

ABS, BAS or ESP®.

AdaptiveIf Adaptive is selected, no warning vibrationoccurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,

the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.

ABS, BAS or ESP®.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.Ryou brake hard.Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an

obstacle or change lanes quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.In order that you are warned only whennecessary and in good time if you cross thelane marking, the system recognizes certainconditions and warns you accordingly.The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a

bend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a

highway.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

Active Driving Assistance package

General notesThe Active Driving Assistance packageconsists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 194),Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 237) andActive Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 241).

Active Blind Spot Assist

General notesActive Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensorsystem to monitor the side areas of yourvehicle which are behind the driver. A warningdisplay in the exterior mirrors draws yourattention to vehicles detected in themonitored area. If you then switch on thecorresponding turn signal to change lane, youwill also receive an optical and audiblewarning. If a risk of lateral collision isdetected, corrective braking may help youavoid a collision. To support the course-correcting brake application, Active BlindSpot Assist uses the forward-facing radarsensor system. The free space in the directionof travel is then evaluated.Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from aspeed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).For Active Blind Spot Assist to assist youwhen driving, the radar sensor system mustbe:Ractivated (Y page 277)Roperational

Important safety notesActive Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It mayfail to detect some vehicles and is nosubstitute for attentive driving.

G WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,

placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles approaching and driving by with a

speed difference of more thanapproximately 6.8 mph (11 km/h)

Driving systems 237

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist mayneither give warnings nor intervene in suchsituations. There is a risk of an accident.Always observe the traffic conditionscarefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

i USA only: This device has been approvedby the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System".The radar sensor is intended for use in anautomotive radar system only. Removal,tampering, or altering of the device will voidany warranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of thedevice will void any warranties, and is notpermitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or usein any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

Monitoring areaIn particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else

covering the sensorsRpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain,

snow or sprayRnarrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or

bicyclesRthe road has very wide lanesRthe road has narrow lanes

Ryou are not driving in the middle of the laneRthere are barriers or similar lane bordersVehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.

Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area upto 10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle anddirectly next to your vehicle, as shown in thediagram. For this purpose, Active Blind SpotAssist uses radar sensors in the rear bumper.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehicle maybe indicated, especially if the vehicles are notdriving in the middle of their lane. This maybe the case if there are vehicles at the inneredge of your lane.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when

driving close to crash barriers or similarsolid lane borders.Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving

alongside particularly long vehicles, e.g.trucks, for a prolonged time.

The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors areintegrated into the front and rear bumpersand behind a cover in the radiator grill. Makesure that the bumpers and the cover in theradiator grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. Therear sensors must not be covered, forexample by cycle racks or overhanging cargo.Following a severe impact or in the event of


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

damage to the bumpers, have the function ofthe radar sensors checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assistmay otherwise no longer work properly.

Indicator and warning display

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp

Active Blind Spot Assist is not active atspeeds below approximately 20 mph(30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring rangeare then not indicated.When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated,indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lightsup yellow at speeds of up to20 mph(30 km/h). At speeds above 20 mph(30km/h), the indicator lamp goes out andActive Blind Spot Assist is operational.If a vehicle is detected within the monitoringrange of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above20 mph (30km/h), warning lamp : on thecorresponding side lights up red. This warningis always emitted when a vehicle enters theblind spot monitoring range from behind orfrom the side. When you overtake a vehicle,the warning only occurs if the difference inspeed is less than 7 mph (12km/h).The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reversegear is engaged. In this event, Active BlindSpot Assist is no longer active.The brightness of the indicator/warninglamps is adjusted automatically according tothe ambient light.

Visual and acoustic collision warning

If you switch on the turn signals to changelanes and a vehicle is detected in the sidemonitoring range, you receive a visual andacoustic collision warning. You then hear adouble warning tone and red warninglamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on,detected vehicles are indicated by theflashing of red warning lamp :. There are nofurther warning tones.

Course-correcting brake applicationG WARNINGA course-correcting brake application cannotalways prevent a collision. There is a risk ofan accident.Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warnsyou or makes a course-correcting brakeapplication. Always maintain a safe distanceat the sides.

G WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist does not detect alltraffic situations and road users. In very rarecases, the system may make an inappropriatebrake application. There is a risk of anaccident.An inappropriate brake application may beinterrupted at any time if you steer slightly inthe opposite direction or accelerate. Alwaysmake sure that there is sufficient distance onthe side for other traffic or obstacles.

Driving systems 239

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of alateral collision in the monitoring range, acourse-correcting brake application is carriedout. This is meant to assist you in avoiding acollision.If a course-correcting brake applicationoccurs, red warning lamp : flashes in theexterior mirror and a dual warning tonesounds. In addition, display ; appears in themultifunction display.The course-correcting brake application isavailable in the speed range between 20 mph(30 km/h) and120 mph (200km/h).Either no braking application, or a course-correcting brake application adapted to thedriving situation occurs if:Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash

barriers, located on both sides of yourvehicle.Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at the

side.Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with

high cornering speeds.Ryou clearly brake or accelerate.

Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake.RESP® is switched off.Rthe off-road program is activated (vehicles

without the ON&OFFROAD package).Roff-road program 1 or 2 is activated

(vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package).Rthe LOW RANGE off-road gear is activated

(vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package).Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is

detected.

Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist

X Make sure that the radar sensor system(Y page 277) and Active Blind Spot Assist(Y page 273) are activated in the on-boardcomputer.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrorslight up red for approximately1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.

Towing a trailerWhen you attach a trailer, make sure you havecorrectly established the electricalconnection. This can be accomplished bychecking the trailer lighting. Active Blind SpotAssist is then deactivated. The indicator lamplights up yellow in the exterior mirrors and theActive Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manualmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Active Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the areain front of your vehicle by means ofcamera : at the top of the windshield. ActiveLane Keeping Assist detects lane markings onthe road and warns you before you leave yourlane unintentionally. If you do not react to thewarning, a lane-correcting application of thebrakes can bring the vehicle back into theoriginal lane.If you select km on the on-board computer inthe Display Unit Speed-/Odometerfunction (Y page 274), Active Lane KeepingAssist is activated starting at a speed of60 km/h. If the miles display unit is selected,the assistance range begins at 40 mph.

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, ActiveLane Keeping Assist can neither reduce therisk of accident nor override the laws ofphysics. Lane Keeping Assist cannot take intoaccount the road, traffic and weatherconditions. Lane Keeping Assist is merely anaid. You are responsible for the distance tothe vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, forbraking in good time and for staying in yourlane.Active Lane Keeping Assist cannotcontinuously keep your vehicle in its lane.

G WARNINGActive Lane Keeping Assist cannot alwaysclearly detect lane markings.

In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assistcan:Rgive an unnecessary warning and then

make a course-correcting brake applicationto the vehicleRnot give a warning or interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and keep within the lane, especiallyif Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you.Terminate the intervention in a non-criticaldriving situation.

The system may be impaired or may notfunction if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to

insufficient illumination of the road, or dueto snow, rain, fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,

the sun or reflections (e.g. when the roadsurface is wet)Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged

or covered, for instance by a sticker, in thevicinity of the cameraRthere are no, several or unclear lane

markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with roadconstruction workRthe lane markings are worn away, dark or

covered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is too

small and the lane markings thus cannot bedetectedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.

lanes branch off, cross one another ormergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are highly variable shade conditions

on the roadwayRno vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane

and there are broken lane markings

Warning vibration in the steering wheelA warning may be given if a front wheelpasses over a lane marking. It will warn you

Driving systems 241

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

by means of intermittent vibration in thesteering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.In order that you are warned only whennecessary and in good time if you cross thelane marking, the system recognizes certainconditions and warns you accordingly.The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a

bend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a

freeway.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

Lane-correcting brake applicationG WARNINGA lane-correcting brake application cannotalways bring the vehicle back into the originallane. There is a risk of an accident.Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warnsyou or makes a lane-correcting brakeapplication.

G WARNINGActive Lane Keeping Assist does not detecttraffic conditions or road users. In very rarecases, the system may make an inappropriatebrake application, e.g. after intentionallydriving over a solid lane marking. There is arisk of an accident.An inappropriate brake application may beinterrupted at any time if you steer slightly inthe opposite direction. Always make sure thatthere is sufficient distance on the side forother traffic or obstacles.

If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,display : appears in the multifunctiondisplay.If you leave your lane, under certaincircumstances the vehicle will brake brieflyon one side. This is meant to assist you inbringing the vehicle back to the original lane.This function is available in the range between40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and200 km/h).A lane-correcting brake application can onlybe made after driving over a solid,recognizable lane marking. Before this, awarning must be given by means ofintermittent vibration in the steering wheel.In addition, a lane with lane markings on bothsides must be recognized. The brakeapplication also slightly reduces vehiclespeed.

i A further lane-correcting brakeapplication can only occur after yourvehicle has returned to the original lane.

No lane-correcting brake application occursif:Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or

accelerate.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.Ryou have switched on the turn signal.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.

ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active BlindSpot Assist.Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with

high cornering speeds or high rates ofacceleration.


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

RESP® is switched off.Rthe transmission is not in position D.Ron vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the

electrical connection to the trailer has beencorrectly established.Rthe off-road program is activated (vehicles

without the ON&OFFROAD package).Roff-road program 1 or 2 is activated

(vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package).Rthe LOW RANGE off-road gear is activated

(vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package).Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has

been detected and displayed.Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detecttraffic situations or road users. Aninappropriate brake application may beinterrupted at any time if you:Rsteer slightly in the opposite directionRswitch on the turn signalRclearly brake or accelerateA lane-correcting brake application isinterrupted automatically if:Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.

ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active BlindSpot Assist.Rlane markings can no longer be recognized.

Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist

X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist usingthe on-board computer; to do so, selectStandard or Adaptive(Y page 273).Symbol : appears in the multifunctiondisplay.If Standard is selected, no warningvibration occurs if:

Ryou switch on the turn signals. In thisevent, the warnings are suppressed for acertain period of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, such

as ABS, BAS or ESP®.If Adaptive is selected, no warningvibration occurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this

event, the warnings are suppressed for acertain period of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.

ABS, BAS or ESP®.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.Ryou brake hard.Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid

an obstacle or change lanes quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.

Towing a trailerWhen you attach a trailer, make sure you havecorrectly established the electricalconnection. This can be accomplished bychecking the trailer lighting.

On-road programs (vehicles with theON&OFFROAD package)

General notesThe on-road programs assist you during on-road driving and the off-road programs whendriving off-road (Y page 248).The following program messages remain inthe multifunction display until thecorresponding vehicle level has been set. Upto off-road level 2, you can hide the programmessages using the % or a button onthe multifunction steering wheel.

Driving systems 243

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

AUTO program

Select the AUTO program for a morecomfortable ride under all normal drivingconditions.Your selection remains stored even if youremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X Selector wheel : engaged: briefly press


X To select: turn selector wheel : untilindicator lamp ; comes on.AUTO indicator = appears in themultifunction display.RHighway level is set.RADS (Adaptive Damping System) adapts

comfortable damping characteristics tothe current operating and drivingconditions.RThe automatic transmission selects the

automatic drive program for acomfortable driving style that providesfor optimum fuel consumption.

SPORT program

Select the SPORT program for sporty,dynamic handling.Your selection remains stored even if youremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X Selector wheel : engaged: briefly press


X To select: turn selector wheel : untilindicator lamp ; comes on.SPORT indicator = appears in themultifunction display.RThe high-speed level of –15 mm when

compared with highway level is set.RADS (Adaptive Damping System) adapts

sporty damping characteristics to thecurrent operating and driving conditions.RThe automatic transmission selects the

automatic drive program for a sportydriving style.RThe sporty accelerator pedal curve is

selected, e.g. the accelerator pedal no


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

longer has to be pressed as far toaccelerate.RThe sporty steering curve is selected,

e.g. greater force is required whensteering.

i You cannot select the SPORT program ifLOW RANGE has been selected. TheDrive Program SPORT Not in LOW RANGE message then appears in themultifunction display.

Snow program

Select the snow program for driving in snowwith or without snow chains.X Selector wheel : engaged: briefly press


X To select: turn selector wheel : untilindicator lamp ; comes on.Snow indicator = appears in themultifunction display.

RHighway level is set.RADS (Adaptive Damping System) adapts

comfortable damping characteristics tothe current operating and drivingconditions.R4ETS and the differential lock are

adapted for driving on snow-coveredroads.RThe automatic transmission selects the

automatic drive program for acomfortable driving style that providesfor optimum fuel consumption.RThe soft accelerator pedal curve is

selected, e.g. the accelerator pedal mustbe pressed significantly further toaccelerate.RThe optimum gear for pulling away is

engaged.

Trailer program

Select the trailer program when towing atrailer.

Driving systems 245

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

X Selector wheel : engaged: briefly pressselector wheel :.Selector wheel : extends.

X To select: turn selector wheel : untilindicator lamp ; comes on.Trailer indicator = appears in themultifunction display.RHighway level is set.RADS (Adaptive Damping System) adapts

comfortable damping characteristics tothe current operating and drivingconditions.RThe automatic transmission selects the

automatic drive program for acomfortable driving style that providesfor optimum fuel consumption, changinggear at optimum points.RWhile pulling away, the differential locks

are engaged.

Off-road driving systems

4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive)If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATICcan neither reduce the risk of accident noroverride the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannottake account of road, weather and trafficconditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.

! Never tow the vehicle with one axleraised. This may damage the transfer case.Damage of this sort is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Allwheels must remain either on the groundor be fully raised. Observe the instructionsfor towing the vehicle with all wheels in fullcontact with the ground.

! A function or performance test shouldonly be carried out on a two-axledynamometer. Before you operate thevehicle on such a dynamometer, pleaseconsult a qualified workshop. You could

otherwise damage the drive train or thebrake system.

4MATIC ensures that all four wheels arepermanently driven. Together with ESP® and4ETS, it improves the traction of your vehiclewhenever a drive wheel spins due toinsufficient grip.

i In wintry driving conditions, the maximumeffect of 4MATIC can only be achieved ifyou use winter tires (M+S tires), with snowchains if necessary.

Further information about "Driving off-road"(Y page 187).

DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)

Important safety notesDSR assists you when driving downhill. Itkeeps the speed of travel at the speed set onthe on-board computer. The steeper thedownhill gradient, the greater the DSRbraking effect on the vehicle. When driving onflat stretches of road or on an uphill gradient,the DSR braking effect is minimal ornonexistent.DSR controls the set speed when it is activeand the automatic transmission is in the D,R or N position. By accelerating or braking,you can always drive at a higher or a lowerspeed than that set on the on-boardcomputer.Further information about "Driving off-road"(Y page 187).If you fail to adapt your driving style, DSR canneither reduce the risk of accident noroverride the laws of physics. DSR cannot takeaccount of road, weather and trafficconditions. DSR is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.You are always responsible for keepingcontrol of the vehicle and for assessingwhether the downhill gradient can bemanaged. DSR may not always be able tokeep to the set speed, depending on road


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

surface and tire conditions. Select a setspeed suitable for the prevailing conditionsand when necessary, apply the brakesmanually.

G WARNINGIf the speed driven and the set speed deviateand you activate DSR on a slippery roadsurface, the wheels may lose traction. If thewheels lose traction. the vehicle can no longerbe steered. There is an increased danger ofskidding and accidents.Never activate DSR on slippery road surfaces.

Activating DSRG WARNINGIf you drive faster than the set speed andactivate DSR, the vehicle will decelerate ondownhill gradients. If you do not know the setspeed, the vehicle could decelerateunexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.Decelerate the vehicle to the set speed beforeactivating DSR. If you do not know what thestored set speed is, store the desired setspeed again.

Example: vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package: DSR button; DSR indicator lampX Press button :.

Indicator lamp ; lights up.The Ã DSR symbol appears in themultifunction display.

You can only activate DSR when driving atspeeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).

If the current vehicle speed is too high, theÃ DSR symbol appears in themultifunction display with the Max. Speed 25 mph message (Canada: 40 km/h).

i You cannot activate DSR if the SPORT on-road program is activated. The Ã DSRsymbol and the Not in Drive Program SPORT message then appear in themultifunction display.

Deactivating DSRX Press button :.

Indicator lamp ; goes out.The Ã DSR symbol appears in themultifunction display with the Offmessage.

DSR switches off automatically if you drivefaster than 28 mph (Canada: 45 km/h). TheÃ DSR symbol appears in themultifunction display with the Off message.The status indicator in the multifunctiondisplay goes out. You also hear a warning. Onvehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package, ifyou select a different on-road/off-roadprogram, DSR is also deactivated.

Changing the set speed

Driving systems 247

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

X To increase or decrease in 1 mph increments (Canada: 1 km/h increments): briefly press the cruisecontrol lever up : for a higher set speedor down ; for a lower set speed.The set speed appears in the multifunctiondisplay with the Ã DSR symbol. It is alsodisplayed in status indicator =.

When DSR is activated, you can change theset speed to a value between 1 mph and11 mph (Canada: between 2 km/h and18 km/h).

i The DSR set speed is always changed in1 mph increments (Canada: 1 km/hincrements). This is regardless of whetheryou press the cruise control lever to orbeyond the pressure point.

Off-road program (vehicles without theON&OFFROAD package)

: Off-road program button; Off-road program indicator lampX To switch on: press button :.

Indicator lamp ; lights up. The Ç off-road indicator appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

X To switch off: press button :.Indicator lamp ; and the Ç off-roadindicator go out in the multifunctiondisplay.

The off-road program assists you in drivingoff-road. The engine’s performancecharacteristics and the gearshifting

characteristics of the automatic transmissionare adapted for this purpose. ABS, ESP® and4ETS programs especially adapted to off-roaddriving are activated. A gentle acceleratorpedal curve is also selected, i.e. theaccelerator pedal must be depressed muchfurther in order to accelerate.Do not use the off-road program on roads thatare snow-covered or icy or if you havemounted snow chains on your vehicle.For information about driving off-road, see(Y page 187).

Off-road programs (vehicles with theON&OFFROAD package)

General notesThe off-road programs assist you in drivingoff-road. The engine’s performancecharacteristics and the gearshiftingcharacteristics of the automatic transmissionare adapted for this purpose. ABS, ESP® and4ETS programs especially adapted to off-roaddriving are activated. An accelerator pedalcurve suitable for the terrain is selected, i.e.the accelerator pedal must be depressedfurther to accelerate.Do not use the off-road programs on roadsthat are snow-covered or icy or if you havemounted snow chains on your vehicle.For information on driving off-road, see(Y page 187).The following program messages are shownin the multifunction display until theapplicable vehicle level is set. Up to off-roadlevel 2, you can hide the program messagesusing the % or the a button on themultifunction steering wheel.


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Off-road program 1


X To select: turn selector wheel : untilindicator lamp ; comes on.Off-road indicator = appears in themultifunction display.Off-road level 1 is set to +1.2 in (+ 30 mm)above the highway level.

If you drive at a speed above 70 mph(110 km/h), off-road program 1 switches toAUTO program.Select off-road program 1 for gentle off-roadterrain, e.g. for gravel or sand surfaces ortracks. The engine's torque is restricted to alimited degree and the drive wheels can spin.The spinning wheels produce a cutting effectfor better traction.You can only activate off-road program 1when driving at speeds below 60 mph(100 km/h). The Drive Program OFFROAD 1 Max Speed 60 mph (100 km/h) messageappears in the multifunction display.

Off-road program 2


X To select: turn selector wheel : untilindicator lamp ; comes on.Off-road indicator = appears in themultifunction display.ROff-road level 1 is set to +2.4 in

(+60 mm) above the highway level.RDSR is switched on.RThe differential lock is closed.

Off-road program 2 automatically switches tooff-road program 1 if you drive faster than30 mph (45 km/h).Select off-road program 2 for rough terrain,e.g. for steep and/or rough terrain or drivingon rocky terrain.

i Your vehicle has an automaticallyactivated differential lock for the transfercase. It controls the balance between thefront and rear axles.

Driving systems 249

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

The differential lock improves the vehicle’straction. 4ETS (Y page 70) controls thebalance between both wheels on an axle.

You can only activate off-road program 2when driving at speeds below 25 mph(40 km/h).

LOW RANGE off-road gear (vehicleswith the ON&OFFROAD package)

Important safety notesG WARNINGIf you select the LOW RANGE off-road gear ona slippery road surface, the wheels could losetraction:Rif you remove your foot from the

accelerator pedal when drivingRif off road ABS intervenes when brakingIf the wheels lose traction. the vehicle can nolonger be steered. There is an increaseddanger of skidding and accidents.Never select the LOW RANGE off-road gearwhen driving on slippery road surfaces.

G WARNINGIf you do not wait for the transfer case gearchange process to complete, the transfercase could remain in the neutral position. Thepower transmission to the driven wheels isthen interrupted. There is a danger of thevehicle rolling away unintentionally. There isa risk of an accident.Wait until the transfer case shift process iscompleted.

Do not turn off the engine while changing gearand do not shift the automatic transmissionto another position.

General notes

: LOW RANGE off-road gear button; LOW RANGE off-road gear indicator lamp

HIGH RANGE Position for all normal on-road driving conditions

LOW RANGE Off-road position fordriving off-road andfordingThe transmission ratiobetween the engine andwheels is onlyapproximately one third ofthat in the HIGH RANGEroad position. Drive torqueis thus proportionatelyhigher.Do not use LOW RANGE:Ron slippery road

surfaces, e.g. in the caseof slushRon snow or ice-covered

roadsRif you have mounted

snow chains to yourvehicle

The LOW RANGE off-road gear assists you indriving off-road and when fording. When LOWRANGE is engaged, the engine’s performancecharacteristics and the gearshiftingcharacteristics of the automatic transmissionare adapted for this purpose.


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Further information about "Driving off-road"(Y page 187). You will find information aboutdriving safety systems in conjunction withLOW RANGE in the "Safety" section(Y page 65).

From HIGH RANGE to LOW RANGE! Only change from LOW RANGE to HIGH

RANGE if:Rthe engine is running.Rthe transmission is in position NRyou are driving at a speed below

40 km/hX Press LOW RANGE button :.

Indicator lamp ; flashes.When the gear change is complete,indicator lamp ; lights up. LOW RANGEindicator appears in the multifunctiondisplay and in the status indicator.While indicator lamp ; is flashing, you cancancel the gear change by pressing LOWRANGE button : again.

i You cannot activate LOW RANGE if theSPORT on-road program is activated. TheLOW RANGE Not in Drive Program SPORT message then appears in themultifunction display.

From LOW RANGE to HIGH RANGE! Only change from LOW RANGE to HIGH

RANGE if:Rthe engine is running.Rthe transmission is in position NRyou are driving at a speed below

70 km/hX Press LOW RANGE button :.

Indicator lamp ; flashes.When the gear change is complete,indicator lamp ; goes out. In themultifunction display, the LOW RANGE Offmessage appears and status indicator =goes out.

While indicator lamp ; is flashing, you cancancel the gear change by pressing LOWRANGE button : again.

Driving systems 251

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Messages in the multifunction displayIf a gear change process has not been successful, the following messages may be displayedin the multifunction display:

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

LOW RANGE Max. Speed 40 km/h

You have been driving faster than 40 km/h. Additionally, theindicator lamp on the button in the center console blinks.X Drive more slowly to carry out the gear change process.

LOW RANGE Shift to Position N Briefly

The transmission is in position D and you are driving at below40 km/h.X Shift the transmission to N to complete the gear change

process.

LOW RANGE Shifting Canceled Please Reactivate

The gear change process was not carried out.X Ensure that all gear change conditions are fulfilled and carry out

the gear change process again.

LOW RANGE Stop Apply Parking Brake

A warning tone also sounds. The gear change process has not beencompleted. LOW RANGE is in the neutral position. There is noconnection between the engine and the drive wheels.

! Do not drive any further. You could otherwise damage thevehicle's drive train.

X Stop the vehicle. Take into account the road and trafficconditions when doing this.

X Depress the electric parking brake (Y page 180).X Carry out the gear change process again.

If the gear change process has been carried out, the LOW RANGE Stop Apply Parking Brake message disappears.

ON&OFFROAD menu in the COMANDdisplay (vehicles with theON&OFFROAD package)

You can display some driving systems, drivingprograms and additional information in theCOMAND display.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position

2 in the ignition lock.X Make sure that COMAND is activated, see

the separate COMAND operatinginstructions.

X Press function button :.The corresponding displays appear in theCOMAND display:Rlevel controlRsteering angleRvehicle's angle of inclination


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Ruphill or downhill gradient in percentageRon-road/off-road program selectedRcondition of the differential lock for the

transfer caseRthe LOW RANGE off-road gear is selectedRcondition of the LOW RANGE off-road

gearRthe on-road trailer program is selected

Towing a trailer

Notes on towing a trailer


G WARNINGIf you install a ball coupling other than the onedelivered with the vehicle, the trailer tow hitchand the rear axle may be overloaded. Thisapplies especially if the ball coupling inquestion is longer or angled differently. Thiscould seriously impair the drivingcharacteristics and the trailer can comeloose. There is a risk of an accident.Only install the ball coupling delivered withthe vehicle or a ball coupling that is designedto meet your trailer towing requirements. Donot modify the ball coupling or the trailer towhitch.

G WARNINGIf the ball coupling is not installed correctly ornot secured with the bolt provided and thecorresponding spring cotter, the trailer maycome loose. There is a risk of an accident.Always install and secure the ball coupling asdescribed. Before every journey, ensure thatthe ball coupling is secured with the bolt andthe corresponding spring cotter.

G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can even

cause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.

G WARNINGWhen the vehicle/trailer combination beginsto lurch, you could lose control of it. Thevehicle/trailer combination could evenrollover. There is a risk of an accident.On no account should you attempt tostraighten up the vehicle/trailer combinationby increasing the speed. Reduce vehiclespeed and do not countersteer. Apply thebrake as necessary.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

Please observe the manufacturer's operatinginstructions for the trailer coupling if adetachable trailer coupling is used.Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. Ifyou do not couple the trailer to the towingvehicle correctly, the trailer could becomedetached.Make sure that the following values are notexceeded:Rthe permissible trailer drawbar noseweightRthe permissible trailer loadRthe permissible rear axle load of the towing

vehicleRthe maximum permissible gross vehicle

weight of both the towing vehicle and thetrailer

The applicable permissible values, whichmust not be exceeded, can be found:Rin the vehicle documentsRon the identification plates of the trailer tow

hitch, the trailer and the vehicleIf the values differ, the lowest value applies.You will find the values approved by themanufacturer on the vehicle identification

Towing a trailer 253

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

plates and those for the towing vehicle under"Technical data" (Y page 455).When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handlingcharacteristics will be different in comparisonwith when driving without a trailer.The vehicle/trailer combination:Ris heavierRis restricted in its acceleration and

gradient-climbing capabilityRhas an increased braking distanceRis affected more by strong crosswindsRdemands more sensitive steeringRhas a larger turning radiusThis could impair the handlingcharacteristics.When towing a trailer, always adjust yourspeed to the current road and weatherconditions. Do not exceed the maximumpermissible speed for your vehicle/trailercombination.

General notesRDo not exceed the legally prescribed

maximum speed for vehicle/trailercombinations in the relevant country.This lowers the risk of an accident.ROnly install an approved trailer coupling on

your vehicle.Further information on availability and oninstallation is available from any authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.RThe bumpers of your vehicle are not

suitable for installing detachable trailercouplings.RDo not install hired trailer couplings or

other detachable trailer couplings on thebumpers of your vehicle.RIf you no longer need the ball coupling,

remove it from the ball coupling recess.This will reduce the risk of damage to theball coupling.

i When towing a trailer, set the tirepressure on the rear axle of the towing

vehicle for a maximum load; see the tirepressure table in the fuel filler flap(Y page 419).

You will find installation dimensions and loadsin the "Technical data" section(Y page 454).The maximum noseweight of the trailerdrawbar on the ball coupling is575 lbs(261 kg) for all models (except themodel ML 350 BlueEFFICIENCY).The maximum noseweight of the trailerdrawbar on the ball coupling is 529 lbs(240 kg) for the modelML 350 BlueEFFICIENCY.The actual noseweight may not be higher thanthe value which is given. The value can befound on the trailer tow hitch or traileridentification plates. The lowest weightapplies.Please note that when towing a trailer,PARKTRONIC (Y page 213) and Blind SpotAssist (Y page 233) are only available withlimitations, or not at all.

i On vehicles without level control, theheight of the ball coupling will alteraccording to the load placed on the vehicle.If necessary, use a trailer with a height-adjustable drawbar.

Driving tipsi Observe the information on ESP® trailer

stabilization (Y page 72) and on pullingaway with a trailer (Y page 160).

The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/trailer combinations depends on the type oftrailer. Before beginning the journey, checkthe trailer's documents to see what themaximum permissible speed is. Observe thelegally prescribed maximum speed in therelevant country.For certain Mercedes-Benz vehicles, themaximum permissible rear axle load isincreased when towing a trailer. See"Technical data" to find out whether thisapplies to your vehicle (Y page 455). If you

254 Towing a trailerDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

utilize any of the added maximum rear axleload when towing a trailer, the vehicle/trailercombination may not exceed a maximumspeed of 60 mph (100 km/h) for reasonsconcerning the operating permit. This alsoapplies in countries in which the permissiblemaximum speed for vehicle/trailercombinations is above 60 mph (100 km/h).When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handlingcharacteristics will be different in comparisonwith when driving without a trailer.On long and steep downhill gradients, youmust select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time.

i This also applies if you have activatedcruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS.

This will use the braking effect of the engine,so that less braking will be required tomaintain the speed, This relieves the load onthe brake system and prevents the brakesfrom overheating and wearing too quickly. Ifyou need additional braking, depress thebrake pedal repeatedly rather thancontinuously.

Driving tipsIf the trailer swings from side to side:X Do not accelerate.X Do not counter-steer.X Brake if necessary.RMaintain a greater distance from the

vehicle in front than when driving without atrailer.RAvoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake

gently at first to allow the trailer to run on.Then, increase the braking force rapidly.RThe values given for gradient-climbing

capabilities from a standstill refer to sealevel. When driving in mountainous areas,note that the power output of the engineand, consequently, the vehicle's gradient-climbing capability, decreases withincreasing altitude.

Installing the ball coupling

G WARNINGIf the ball coupling is not installed and securedcorrectly it can become detached while thevehicle is in motion and fall onto the road.There is a risk of accident and injury.Always install and secure the ball coupling asdescribed. Before every journey, ensure thatthe ball coupling is secured with the bolt andthe corresponding spring cotter.

G WARNINGIf the ball coupling is not installed correctly ornot secured with the bolt provided and thecorresponding spring cotter, the trailer maycome loose. There is a risk of an accident.Always install and secure the ball coupling asdescribed. Before every journey, ensure thatthe ball coupling is secured with the bolt andthe corresponding spring cotter.

G WARNINGIf the ball coupling is not installed and securedcorrectly the trailer may come loose. There isa risk of an accident.Install and secure the ball coupling asdescribed in the ball coupling installationinstructions. Make sure that the ball couplingis installed and secured correctly before everyjourney.

Cover cap


Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

X Pull protective cap : in the direction of thearrow, out of the ball coupling recess.

X Place protective cap : in the ball couplingrecess.

Ball coupling recess

Holes in the ball coupling and ball coupling recessX Insert the ball coupling horizontally into ball

coupling recess ; in the direction of thearrow until the holes in ball coupling = arein line with the holes in ball couplingrecess ?.

Bolt

X Slide bolt A into the hole in the ballcoupling recess and the ball coupling to thestop.

Bolt and spring cotterX Secure the bolt using spring cotter B.

Correctly installed and secured ball couplingX Check the ball coupling, bolt and spring

cotter for correct installation.

If the ball coupling cannot be correctlymounted, remove the ball coupling. Underthese circumstances, the ball coupling mustnot be used for trailer towing.If the ball coupling cannot be locked and thekey cannot be removed, remove the ballcoupling and clean it. If the ball coupling canstill not be installed (locked) after it has beencleaned, remove the ball coupling. The trailertow hitch must then not be used to tow atrailer, as safe operation cannot beguaranteed.Have the entire trailer tow hitch checked at aqualified specialist workshop.


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Coupling up a trailer! Do not connect the trailer's brake system

(if featured) to the hydraulic brake systemof the towing vehicle, as the latter isequipped with an anti-lock brake system.Doing so will result in a loss of function ofthe brake systems of both the vehicle andthe trailer.

X Make sure that the automatic transmissionis set to position P.

X Apply the vehicle's electric parking brake.X Start the engine.X Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package:

select highway level.X Vehicles with ADS: set ADS to AUTO or

COMF.X Switch off the engine.X Close all doors and the tailgate.X Couple up the trailer.X Establish all electrical connections.X Check that the trailer lighting system is

working.

i Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package:with a trailer attached, the vehicle willalways remain at highway level. Whencoupling up a trailer, please observe thefollowing:RUnless highway level has been set

manually, the vehicle is automaticallylowered to highway level. This is the caseif a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) is reached.RHigh-speed level is not available.These restrictions apply to all accessoriespowered through a connection to the trailerpower socket of your vehicle, e.g. a bicyclecarrier.

Observe the maximum permissible trailerdimensions (width and length).Most U.S. states and all Canadian provincesrequire by law:RSafety chains between the towing vehicle

and the trailer. The chains should be cross-wound under the trailer drawbar. They must

be fastened to the vehicle's trailercoupling, not to the bumper or the axle.Leave enough play in the chains to maketight cornering possible.RA separate brake system for certain types

of trailer.RA safety switch for braked trailers. Check

the specific legal requirements applicableto your state.If the trailer detaches from the towingvehicle, the safety switch applies thetrailer's brakes.

Towing a trailerThere are numerous legal requirementsconcerning the towing of a trailer, e.g. speedrestrictions. Make sure that your vehicle/trailer combination complies with the localrequirements not only in your area ofresidence but also at any location to whichyou are traveling. The police and localauthorities can provide reliable information.Please observe the following when towing atrailer:RTo acquaint yourself with driving with a

trailer and with the resulting changes tohandling, you should practice cornering,stopping and backing up in a traffic-freelocation.RBefore driving, check:

- Trailer tow hitch- Safety switch for braked trailers- Safety chains- Electrical connections- Lights- the wheelsRAdjust the exterior mirrors to provide an

unobstructed view of the rear section of thetrailer.RIf the trailer features electronically

controlled brakes, pull away the vehicle/trailer combination carefully, manually


Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

brake using the brake controller, and checkthe brakes for correct function.RSecure any objects on the trailer to prevent

the cargo from slipping when the vehicle isin motion.RIf you couple up a trailer, regularly check

the cargo for secure fastening and makesure that the trailer lamps and (ifapplicable) the trailer brakes arefunctioning correctly.RBear in mind that the handling will be less

stable when towing a trailer than whendriving without one. Avoid sudden steeringmovements.RThe vehicle/trailer combination is heavier,

accelerates more slowly, has a decreasedgradient climbing capability and a longerbraking distance.It is more susceptible to side winds andrequires more careful steering.RIf possible, avoid abrupt braking. Depress

the brake pedal moderately at first, so thatthe trailer can activate its own brakes. Thenincrease the pressure on the brake pedal.RIf the automatic transmission continues to

shift back and forth between two gearswhen driving up or downhill, restrict theshift range. Select shift range 4, 3, 2, or 1.A lower gear and lower speed reduce therisk of engine failure.RWhen driving downhill, shift to a lower gear

to utilize the engine's braking effect.Avoid continuous brake application as thismay overheat the vehicle brakes and, ifinstalled, the trailer brakes.RIf the coolant temperature increases

dramatically while the air-conditioningsystem is switched on, switch off the air-conditioning system.Coolant heat can additionally be dissipatedby opening the windows and by setting the

blower fan and the interior temperature tomaximum.RWhen overtaking, pay particular attention

to the extended length of your vehicle/trailer combination.Due to the length of your vehicle/trailercombination, you will have to travel anadditional distance beyond the vehicle youare overtaking before returning to theprevious lane.

Decoupling a trailer

G WARNINGIf you uncouple a trailer with the overrunbrake engaged, you could trap your handbetween the vehicle and the trailer drawbar.There is a risk of injury.Do not uncouple a trailer if the overrun brakeis engaged.

G WARNINGVehicles with level control:The vehicle is lowered as soon as youdisconnect the trailer cable. This could resultin your limbs or those of other people that arebetween the vehicle body and tires orunderneath the vehicle being trapped. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody is in the immediatevicinity of the wheel housings or under thevehicle when you disconnect the trailer cable.

! Do not disconnect a trailer with anengaged overrun brake. Otherwise, yourvehicle could be damaged by therebounding of the overrun brake.

X Make sure that the automatic transmissionis set to position P.

X Apply the vehicle's electric parking brake.X Start the engine.X Close all doors and the tailgate.X Apply the trailer's parking brake.


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

X Detach the trailer cable and decouple thetrailer.

X Switch off the engine.

Permissible trailer loads and drawbarloads

Weight specifications

Maximum permissible gross vehicleweight ratingThe gross trailer weight is calculated byadding the weight of the trailer to the weightof the load and equipment on the trailer.Permissible gross weight (all models exceptthe ML 350 BlueEFFICIENCY): 7,198 lbs(3,265 kg).Permissible gross weight(ML 350 BlueEFFICIENCY): 6,613 lbs(3,000 kg).

Permissible noseweightThe maximum permissible trailer drawbarnoseweight is the maximum weight withwhich the trailer drawbar can be loaded.All models (except theML 350 BlueEFFICIENCY: 575 lbs (261 kg).ML 350 BlueEFFICIENCY: 529 lbs (240 kg).Limit for Mercedes-Benz-approved trailercouplings.

Loading a trailerRWhen loading the trailer, make sure that

neither the permissible gross weight of thetrailer nor the gross vehicle weight isexceeded. The permissible gross vehicleweight is indicated on the identificationplate on the B-pillar on the driver's side ofthe vehicle.You can find the maximum permissiblevalues on the type plates of your vehicleand the trailer. When calculating how muchweight the vehicle and trailer may carry,

pay attention to the respective lowestvalues.RThe trailer drawbar load on the ball coupling

must be added to the rear axle load to avoidexceeding the permissible gross axleweight. The permissible gross vehicleweight is indicated on the identificationplate on the B-pillar on the driver's side ofthe vehicle.

i Mercedes-Benz recommends a trailerload where the trailer drawbar noseweightaccounts for 8% to 15% of the trailer'spermissible gross weight.

i The weight of additional accessories,passengers, and cargo reduces thepermissible trailer load and drawbar loadfor your vehicle.

Checking the vehicle and trailer weightRTo check that the weights of the towing

vehicle and the trailer comply with themaximum permissible values, have thevehicle/trailer combination (including thedriver, passengers, and cargo with a fullyladen trailer) weighed on a calibratedweighbridge.RCheck the gross axle weight rating of the

front and rear axles, the gross weight of thetrailer and trailer drawbar load.

Removing the ball couplingX Remove the spring cotter.X Remove the bolt from the ball coupling

recess.X Remove the ball coupling from the ball

coupling recess.X Clean the ball coupling if it is dirty.Information on cleaning and care of the trailertow hitch can be found at (Y page 374).


Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Storing the ball coupling

G WARNINGDo not carry the ball coupling in the vehicleinterior if it is not secured.Otherwise, you and others could be injured bythe ball coupling being thrown around if you:Rbrake sharplyRchange direction suddenlyRare involved in an accident

Trailer power supply! You can connect accessories with a

maximum power consumption of 240 W tothe permanent power supply.You must not charge a trailer battery usingthe power supply.

The trailer socket of your vehicle is equippedat the factory with a permanent power supply.The permanent power supply is supplied viatrailer socket pin 4.The trailer's permanent power supply isswitched off in the event of low vehicle supplyvoltage and after six hours at the latest.A qualified specialist workshop can providemore information about installing the trailerelectrics.


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Useful information ............................ 262Important safety notes .................... 262Displays and operation .................... 263Menus and submenus ...................... 266Display messages ............................. 282Warning and indicator lamps in theinstrument cluster ............................ 316

261

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Useful information




G WARNINGIf you operate information systems andcommunication equipment integrated in thevehicle while driving, you will be distractedfrom traffic conditions. You could also losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate theequipment when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNINGIf the instrument cluster has failed ormalfunctioned, you may not recognizefunction restrictions in systems relevant tosafety. The operating safety of your vehiclemay be impaired. There is a risk of anaccident.Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checkedat a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

You must observe the legal requirements forthe country in which you are currently drivingwhen operating the on-board computer.The on-board computer only shows messagesor warnings from certain systems in the

multifunction display. You should thereforemake sure your vehicle is operating safely atall times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is notoperating safely may cause an accident.For an overview, see the instrument panelillustration (Y page 33).

262 Important safety notesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Displays and operation

Instrument cluster

Instrument cluster: miles: Speedometer with segments (Y page 264); Fuel gauge= Tachometer (Y page 264)? Coolant temperature (Y page 263)A Multifunction display (Y page 265)B Instrument cluster lighting (Y page 263)

Instrument cluster lightingThe lighting in the instrument cluster, in thedisplays and the controls in the vehicleinterior can be adjusted using the brightnesscontrol knob.The brightness control knob is located on thebottom left of the instrument cluster(Y page 33).X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise

or counter-clockwise.If the light switch is set to Ã, T orL, the brightness is dependent uponthe brightness of the ambient light.

i The light sensor in the instrument clusterautomatically controls the brightness ofthe multifunction display.

In daylight, the displays in the instrumentcluster are not illuminated.

Coolant temperature display

G WARNINGDriving when your engine is overheated cancause some fluids which may have leaked intothe engine compartment to catch fire. Youcould be seriously burned.Steam from an overheated engine can causeserious burns which can occur just by openingthe engine hood. Stay away from the engineif you see or hear steam coming from it.Stop the vehicle in a safe location away fromother traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the

Displays and operation 263

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle untilthe engine has cooled down.

! A display message is shown if the coolanttemperature is too high.If the coolant temperature is over248 ‡(120 †), do not continue driving. Theengine will otherwise be damaged.

The coolant temperature gauge is in theinstrument cluster on the right-hand side(Y page 33).Under normal operating conditions and withthe specified coolant level, the coolanttemperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

Tachometer! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as

this could damage the engine.The red band in the tachometer indicates theengine's overrevving range.The fuel supply is interrupted to protect theengine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature displayYou should pay special attention to roadconditions when temperatures are aroundfreezing point.The outside temperature display is in themultifunction display (Y page 265).Changes in the outside temperature aredisplayed after a short delay.

Speedometer with segmentsThe segments in the speedometer indicatewhich speed range is available.RCruise control activated (Y page 192):

The segments light up from the storedspeed to the maximum speed.RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 194):

One or two segments in the set speedrange light up.RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front:

The segments between the speed of thevehicle in front and the stored speed lightup.

Operating the on-board computer

Overview

: Multifunction display; Switches on the Voice Control System;

see the separate operating instructions= Right control panel? Left control panelA Back buttonX To activate the on-board computer: turn

the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignitionlock.

You can control the multifunction display andthe settings in the on-board computer usingthe buttons on the multifunction steeringwheel.

264 Displays and operationOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Left control panel

=

;

RCalls up the menu and menu bar

9

:

Press briefly:RScrolls in listsRSelects a submenu or functionRIn the Audio menu: selects a

stored station, an audio track ora video sceneRIn the Tel (telephone) menu:

switches to the phone book andselects a name or telephonenumber

9

:

Press and hold:RIn the Audio menu: selects the

previous/next station or selectsan audio track or a video sceneusing rapid scrollingRIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:

starts rapid scrolling if the phonebook is open

a RConfirms a selection/displaymessageRIn the Tel (telephone) menu:

switches to the telephone bookand starts dialing the selectednumberRIn the Audio menu: stops the

station search function at thedesired station

Right control panel

~ RRejects or ends a callRExits phone book/redial

memory

6 RMakes or accepts a callRSwitches to the redial memory

WX

RAdjusts the volume

8 RMute

Back button

% Press briefly:RBackRSwitches off the Voice Control

System; see the separateoperating instructionsRHides display messages/calls

up the last Trip menu functionusedRExits the telephone book/redial

memory

% Press and hold:RCalls up the standard display in

the Trip menu

Multifunction display

: Time; Permanent display: outside temperature

or speed (Y page 274)= Description field? Menu bar

Displays and operation 265

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

A Drive program (Y page 165)B Transmission position (Y page 165)X To show menu bar ?: press the =

or ; button on the steering wheel.

Menu bar ? disappears after a few seconds.Text field = shows the selected menu orsubmenu as well as display messages.

i You can set the time using the audiosystem or COMAND; see the separateoperating instructions.

The following messages may appear in themultifunction display:XjY Active Parking Assist

(Y page 217)CRUISE Cruise control (Y page 192)fDSR DSR (Y page 246)Ç Off-road program (vehicles

without the ON&OFFROADpackage) (Y page 248)

Ç Off-road program (vehicles withthe ON&OFFROAD package)(Y page 248)

LOW RANGE

LOW RANGE off-road gear(Y page 250)

_ Adaptive high-beam Assist(Y page 126)

À ATTENTION ASSIST(Y page 230)

¤ ECO start/stop function(Y page 161)

Ã Lane Keeping Assist(Y page 235)

Ã Active Lane Keeping Assist(Y page 241)

ë HOLD function (Y page 207)Ä Distance warning function

(Y page 68)Ä PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 73)

Menus and submenus

Menu overviewPress the = or ; button on thesteering wheel to call up the menu bar andselect a menu.Operating the on-board computer(Y page 264).Depending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you can call up the following menus:RTrip menu (Y page 266)RNavi menu (navigation instructions)

(Y page 268)RAudio menu (Y page 269)RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 270)RDriveAssist menu (assistance)

(Y page 272)RServ. menu (Y page 273)RSett. menu (Y page 274)RON&OFFROAD menu (Y page 278)RAMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 278)

Trip menu

Standard display

X Press and hold the % button on thesteering wheel until the Trip menu withtrip odometer : and odometer ; isshown.

266 Menus and submenusOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Trip computer "From Start" or "FromReset"

Example: trip computer "From Start": Distance; Time= Average speed? Average fuel consumptionX Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Trip menu.X Press 9 or : to select From Start

or From Reset.The values in the From Start submenu arecalculated from the start of a journey, whilethe values in the From Reset submenu arecalculated from the last time the submenuwas reset (Y page 268).The From Start trip computer isautomatically reset when:RThe ignition has been switched off for more

than four hours.R999 hours have been exceeded.R9,999 miles have been exceeded.The From Reset trip computer isautomatically reset if the value exceeds9,999 hours or 99,999 miles.

Displaying the range and current fuelconsumption

: Approximate range; Current fuel consumption (not for AMG

vehicles)X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Trip menu.X Press the 9 or : button to select the

current fuel consumption (not for AMGvehicles) and the approximate range.

The approximate range that can be covereddepends on the fuel level and your currentdriving style. If there is only a small amountof fuel left in the fuel tank, the display showsa vehicle being refueled C instead of therange.

Digital speedometer

: Digital speedometerX Press the = or ; button on the


digital speedometer.

Menus and submenus 267

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Resetting values

Example: resetting the trip computer "From Start"X Press the = or ; button on the


function that you wish to reset.X Press the a button.X Press the : button to select Yes and

press the a button to confirm.

You can reset the values of the followingfunctions:Rtrip odometerR"From Start" trip computerR"From Reset" trip computer

Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructionsIn the Navi menu, the multifunction displayshows navigation instructions.For more information, see the separateoperating instructions.X Switch on the audio system with Becker®

MAP PILOT or COMAND; see the separateoperating instructions.

X Press the = or ; button on thesteering wheel to select the Navi menu.

Route guidance not active

: Direction of travel; Current street

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

: Distance to the destination; Distance to the next change of direction= Current street? Symbol "follow the road's course"

Change of direction announced without alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Change-of-direction icon

When a change of direction has beenannounced, you will see visual distancedisplay ; next to the symbol for change ofdirection =. This shortens from the bottom


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

to the top of the display as you approach thepoint of the announced change of direction.

Change of direction announced with alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Lane recommendation? New lane during a change of directionA Uninterrupted laneB Change-of-direction icon

On multilane roads, the system can displaylane recommendation = for the next changeof direction. During the change of direction,additional lanes may be displayed.Lane recommendations are only displayed ifthe relevant data is available on the digitalmap.

Other status indicators of thenavigation systemRO: you have reached the destination or an

intermediate destination.RNew Route... or Calculating Route:

calculating a new routeROff Map or Off Mapped Road: the vehicle

position is outside the area of the digitalmap (off-map position).RNo Route: no route could be calculated to

the selected destination.

Audio menu

Selecting a radio station

: Waveband; Station frequency with memory position

i Station ; is displayed with the stationfrequency or station name. The memoryposition is only displayed along withstation ; if this has been stored.

X Switch on COMAND and select Radio; seethe separate operating instructions.

X Press the = or ; button on thesteering wheel to select the Audio menu.

X To select a stored station: briefly pressthe 9 or : button.

X To select a station from the station list: press and briefly hold the 9or : button.

If no station list is received:X To select a station using the station

search: press and briefly hold the 9or : button.

i For information on switching wavebandand storing stations; see the separateoperating instructions.

i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like anormal radio.For more information on satellite radiooperation, see the separate operatinginstructions.


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Operating an audio player or audiomedia

Display CD/DVD changer (example): Current CD in the CD/DVD changer; Current title

Audio data from various audio devices ormedia can be played, depending on theequipment installed in the vehicle.X Switch on COMAND and activate audio

CD/DVD mode or MP3 mode; see theseparate operating instructions.

X Press the = or ; button on thesteering wheel to select the Audio menu.

X To select the next/previous track:briefly press the 9 or : button.

X To select a track from the track list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the9 or : button until desiredtrack ; has been reached.If you press and hold 9 or :, therapid scrolling speed is increased. Not allaudio drives or data carriers support thisfunction.

If track information is stored on the audiodevice or medium, the multifunction displaywill show the number and title of the track.The current track does not appear in audioAUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: externalaudio source connected).

Video DVD operation

Display CD/DVD changer (example): Current DVD in the CD/DVD changer; Current sceneX Switch on COMAND and select video DVD;

see the separate operating instructions.X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Audio menu.X To select the next/previous scene:

briefly press the 9 or : button.X To select a scene from the scene list

(rapid scrolling): press and hold the9 or : button until desiredscene ; has been reached.

Telephone menu

Introduction

G WARNINGThe driver's attention to the road must alwaysbe his/her primary focus when driving. Foryour safety and the safety of others, werecommend that you pull over to a safelocation and stop before placing or taking atelephone call. If you choose to use thetelephone while driving, please use the hands-free device and only use the telephone whenroad, weather and traffic conditions permit.Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver fromusing a mobile phone while driving a vehicle.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle coversa distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m)every second.


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

X Switch on the mobile phone (see theseparate operating instructions).

X Switch on COMAND (see the separateoperating instructions).

X Establish a Bluetooth® connection toCOMAND; see the separate operatinginstructions.

X Press the = or ; button on thesteering wheel to select the Tel menu.

You will see one of the following displaymessages in the multifunction display:RPhone READY or the name of the network

provider: the mobile phone has found anetwork and is ready to receive.RTelephone No Service: there is no

network available or the mobile phone issearching for a network.

Accepting a call

Example: incoming call

If someone calls you when you are in theTel menu, a display message appears in themultifunction display.X Press the 6 button on the steering

wheel to accept an incoming call.You can accept a call even if you are not inthe Tel menu.

Rejecting or ending a callX Press the ~ button on the steering

wheel.You can end or reject a call even if you are notin the Tel menu.

Dialing a number from the phone bookX Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Tel menu.X Press the 9, : or a button to

switch to the phone book.X Press the 9 or : button to select the

desired name.orX To begin rapid scrolling: press and hold

the 9 or : button for longer thanone second.Rapid scrolling stops when you release thebutton or reach the end of the list.

X If only one telephone number is stored for a name: press the 6 or a buttonto start dialing.

orX If there is more than one number for a

particular name: press the 6 or abutton to display the numbers.

X Press the 9 or : button to select thenumber you want to dial.

X Press the 6 or a button to startdialing.

orX To exit the telephone book: press the~ or % button.

RedialingThe on-board computer saves the last namesor numbers dialed in the redial memory.X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Tel menu.X Press the 6 button to switch to the

redial memory.X Press the 9 or : button to select the

desired name or number.X Press the 6 or a button to start

dialing.orX To exit the redial memory: press the~ or % button.


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Assistance menu

Introduction

In the DriveAssist menu, you have thefollowing options:Rshowing the distance display

(Y page 272)Ractivating/deactivating the distance

warning function (Y page 272)Ractivating/deactivating the PRE-SAFE®

Brake (Y page 272)Ractivating/deactivating ATTENTION

ASSIST (Y page 273)Ractivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist

or Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 273)Ractivating/deactivating Lane Keeping

Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist(Y page 273)

Showing the distance displayX Press = or ; on the steering wheel

to select the DriveAssist menu.X Press the 9 or : button to selectDistance Display.

X Press the a button.The DISTRONIC PLUS distance displayappears in the multifunction display(Y page 202).

If the Sensors Deactivated messageappears, the radar sensor system isdeactivated.X Activate the radar sensor system

(Y page 277).

Switching the distance warningfunction on and offX Press = or ; on the steering wheel

to select the DriveAssist menu.X Press 9 or : to select Dist. Warning.

X Press the a button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press the abutton again.

When the distance warning function isactivated, the multifunction display showsthe Ä symbol if the HOLD function is notactivated (Y page 207).Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: ifPARKTRONIC is activated and you are drivingat a speed under 22 mph (35 km/h), the jActive Parking Assist symbol is shown insteadof the Ä symbol (Y page 217).Further information on the distance warningfunction (Y page 68).

Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE®

BrakePRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicleswith DISTRONIC PLUS.X Press = or ; on the steering wheel

to select the DriveAssist menu.X Press the 9 or : button to selectPRE-SAFE Brake.



When PRE-SAFE® Brake is activated, themultifunction display shows the Ä symbolas long as the HOLD function is not activated(Y page 207).Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: ifPARKTRONIC is activated and you are drivingat a speed under 22 mph (35 km/h), the jActive Parking Assist symbol is shown insteadof the Ä symbol (Y page 217).


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

If the PRE-SAFE Brake: Sensors Deactivated message appears, the radarsensor system is deactivated.X Activate the radar sensor system

(Y page 277).

For more information on PRE-SAFE® Brake,see (Y page 73).

Activating/deactivating ATTENTIONASSISTX Press = or ; on the steering wheel

to select the DriveAssist menu.X Press the 9 or : button to selectAttention Asst.



When ATTENTION ASSIST is activated, theÀ symbol appears in the multifunctiondisplay when the ignition is on.For further information about ATTENTIONASSIST, see (Y page 230).

Activating/deactivating Blind SpotAssistX Press = or ; on the steering wheel

to select the DriveAssist menu.X Press the 9 or : button to selectBlind Spot Asst..



If the Blind Spot Assist Sensors Deactivated or Active Blind Spot Assist Sensors Deactivated messageappears, the radar sensor system isdeactivated.X Activate the radar sensor system

(Y page 277).

For further information about Blind SpotAssist, see (Y page 233).For further information about Active BlindSpot Assist, see (Y page 237).

Activating/deactivating Lane KeepingAssistX Press = or ; on the steering wheel

to select the DriveAssist menu.X Press the 9 or : button to selectLane Keep. Asst.


X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to set Off, Standard

or Adaptive.X Press the a button to save the setting.

When Lane Keeping Assist or Active LaneKeeping Assist is activated, the Ã symbolappears in the multifunction display when theignition is on.For further information about Lane KeepingAssist, see (Y page 235).For further information about Active LaneKeeping Assist, see (Y page 241).

Maintenance menu

In the Serv menu, you have the followingoptions:Rcall up display messages in message

memory (Y page 282)Rrestart the tire pressure loss warning

system (Y page 406)


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Rcheck the tire pressure electronically(Y page 406)Rcall up service due date (Y page 369)

Settings menu

Introduction

In the Sett. menu, you have the followingoptions:Rchanging the instrument cluster settings

(Y page 274)Rchanging the light settings (Y page 274)Rchanging the vehicle settings

(Y page 276)Rchanging the convenience settings

(Y page 277)Rrestoring the factory settings

(Y page 278)

Instrument cluster submenu

Selecting the unit of measurement fordistanceThe Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:function allows you to choose whethercertain displays appear in kilometers or milesin the multifunction display.You can determine whether the multifunctiondisplay shows some messages in miles orkilometers.X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theInst. Cluster submenu.

X Press a to confirm.

X Press the : or 9 button to select theDisplay Unit Speed-/Odometer:function.You will see the selected setting: km ormiles.

X Press the a button to save the setting.

The selected unit of measurement fordistance applies to:Rthe digital speedometer in the Trip menuRthe odometer and the trip odometerRthe trip computerRcurrent consumption and the rangeRthe navigation instructions in the Navi

menuRcruise controlRDISTRONIC PLUSRASSYST PLUS service interval display

Selecting the permanent display functionYou can determine whether the multifunctiondisplay permanently shows your speed or theoutside temperature.X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theInst. Cluster submenu.

X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select thePermanent Display: function.You will see the selected setting: Outside Temperature or Speedometer km/h(USA)/Speedometer mph (Canada).


i The speed is shown in km/h (USA)/mph(Canada).

Light submenu

Setting the daytime running lampsi This function is not available in Canada.


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

X Press the = or ; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the : or 9 button to select theLights submenu.

X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to select the Daytime Running Lights: function.If the Daytime Running Lights: havebeen switched on, the cone of light and theW symbol in the multifunction displayare shown in red.


Further information on daytime runninglamps (Y page 120).

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/offX Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theLights submenu.

X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theAdaptive Highbeam function.If the Adaptive Highbeam function hasbeen switched on, the cone of light and the_ symbol in the upper multifunctiondisplay are shown in red.


For further information about AdaptiveHighbeam Assist, see (Y page 126).

Setting the brightness of the ambientlightingX Press the = or ; button on the


X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theAmb. Light +/-. function.You will see the selected setting.


X Press the : or 9 button to adjust thebrightness to any level from Off to Level 5 (bright).

X Press the a or % button to save thesetting.

Setting the ambient lighting colorX Press the = or ; button on the


X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theAmbient Light Color function.

X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to set the

color to SOLAR, NEUTRAL or POLAR.X Press the a or % button to save the

setting.

Surround lighting and exterior lightingdelayed switch-offX Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theLight submenu.

X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to select theSurround Lighting function.When the Surround Lighting function isactivated, the light cone and the areaaround the vehicle are displayed in red inthe multifunction display.


Deactivating delayed switch-off of theexterior lighting temporarily:X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the

SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock.The exterior lighting delayed switch-off isdeactivated.


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting isreactivated the next time you start theengine.If you have activated the Surround Lighting function and the light switch is setto Ã, the following functions are activatedwhen it is dark:RSurround lighting: the exterior lighting

remains lit for 40 seconds after unlockingwith the SmartKey. If you start the engine,the surround lighting is switched off andthe automatic headlamp mode is activated(Y page 120).RExterior lighting delayed switch-off: the

exterior lighting remains lit for60 seconds after the engine is switched off.If you close all the doors and the tailgate,the exterior lighting goes off after5 seconds.

i Depending on your vehicle's equipment,when the surround lighting and delayedswitch-off exterior lighting are on, thefollowing light up:RParking lampsRDaytime running lampsRSide marker lampsRSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors

Activating/deactivating the interiorlighting delayed switch-offIf you activate the Interior Lighting Delay function, the interior lighting remainson for 20seconds after you remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.X Press the = or ; button on the


X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to select theInterior Lighting Delay function.When the Interior Lighting Delayfunction is activated, the vehicle interior is

displayed in red in the multifunctiondisplay.


Vehicle submenu

Activating/deactivating the automaticdoor locking mechanismIf you activate the Automatic Door Lockfunction, the vehicle is centrally locked abovea speed of around 9 mph (15 km/h).X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.X Press : or 9 to select the Vehicle

submenu.X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to select theAutomatic Door Lock function.When the Automatic Door Lock functionis activated, the vehicle doors are displayedin red in the multifunction display.


For further information on the automaticlocking feature, see (Y page 86).

Activating/deactivating the acousticlocking verification signalIf you switch on the Acoustic Lock function,an acoustic signal sounds when you lock thevehicle.X Press the = or ; button on the


submenu.X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theAcoustic Lock function.If the Acoustic Lock function is activated,the & symbol in the multifunctiondisplay lights up red.



-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Activating/deactivating the radar sensorsystemX Press the = or ; button on the


submenu.X Press a to confirm.X Press the 9 or : button to selectRadar Sensor (See Oper. Manual):.You will see the selected setting: Enabledor Disabled.


The following systems are switched off whenthe radar sensor system is deactivated:RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 194)RBAS PLUS (Y page 67)RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 73)RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 233)RActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 237)

Convenience submenu

Activating/deactivating the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT featureG WARNINGYou must make sure no one can becometrapped or injured by the moving steeringwheel when the easy-entry/exit feature isactivated.To stop steering wheel movement, movesteering wheel adjustment lever or press oneof the memory position buttons.Do not leave children unattended in thevehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.Children could open the driver's door andunintentionally activate the easy-entry/exitfeature, which could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury.

X Press the = or ; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the : or 9 button to select theConvenience submenu.

X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to select the Easy Entry/Exit function.If the Easy Entry/Exit function isactivated, the vehicle steering wheel isdisplayed in red in the multifunctiondisplay.


Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature (Y page 112).

Switching the belt adjustment on/offX Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theConvenience submenu.

X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theBelt Adjustment function.When the Belt Adjustment function isactivated, the vehicle seat belt is displayedin red in the multifunction display.


For further information on belt adjustment,see (Y page 57).

Switching the fold-in mirrors whenlocking feature on/offThis function is only available on vehicles withthe memory function (Y page 116).When you activate the Auto. Mirror Folding function, the exterior mirrors arefolded in when the vehicle is locked. If youunlock the vehicle and then open a door, theexterior mirrors fold out again.X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theConvenience submenu.



On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

X Press : or 9 to select the Auto. Mirror Folding function.If the Auto. Mirror Folding function isactivated, the vehicle's exterior mirror isdisplayed in red in the multifunctiondisplay.


: To fold the exterior mirrors in or out

If you have switched the Auto. Mirror Folding on and you fold the exterior mirrorsin using button : , they will not fold outautomatically (Y page 114).You can then only fold out the exterior mirrorsusing button :.

Restoring the factory settingsX Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theFactory Setting submenu.

X Press a to confirm.The Reset All Settings? messageappears.

X Press the : or 9 button to selectNo or Yes.

X Press a to confirm the selection.If you select Yes, the multifunction displayshows a confirmation message.

For safety reasons, the Daytime Running Lights function in the Lights submenu isonly reset if the vehicle is stationary.

ON&OFFROAD menu

Multifunction display (example)X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the ON&OFFROADmenu.

You can set the following current settings toappear in the ON&OFFROAD menu:ROn-road program (Y page 243)ROff-road program (Y page 248)

AMG menu in AMG vehicles

AMG displays

: Digital speedometer; Gear indicator= Upshift indicator? Engine oil temperatureA Coolant temperatureB ECO start/stop function status indicator

(Y page 161)X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the AMG menu.Upshift indicator UP= indicates that theengine has reached the overrevving rangewhen in the manual gearshift program.Upshift indicator UP= fades out othermessages until you have shifted up.When the engine oil temperature is below176 ‡ (80 †) the oil temperature is shown in


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

blue. Avoid driving at full engine output duringthis time.

SETUP

: Drive program (C/S/M); ESP® mode (ON/OFF)= Suspension tuning (COMFORT/SPORT/

SPORT+)

SETUP shows the drive program, the ESP®

(Electronic Stability Program) mode and thesuspension tuning.X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the AMG menu.X Press the 9 button repeatedly until

SETUP is displayed.

RACETIMER

Displaying and starting RACETIMERThe RACETIMER is only intended for use on aclosed race circuit. Do not use the functionon public roads.

: Lap; RACETIMER

You can start the RACETIMER when theengine is running or if the SmartKey is inposition 2 in the ignition lock.X Press = or ; on the steering wheel

to select the AMG menu.X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the

RACETIMER is shown.X To start: press the a button to start the

RACETIMER.

Displaying the intermediate time

X Press the = or ; button to selectInterm. Time.

X Press a to confirm.The intermediate time is displayed for fiveseconds.

Starting a new lap

: RACETIMER; Fastest lap time (best lap)= LapX Press a to confirm New Lap.

i It is possible to store a maximum ofsixteen laps. The 16th lap can only becompleted with Finish Lap.


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Stopping the RACETIMER

X Press the % button on the steeringwheel.

X Press a to confirm Yes.

The RACETIMER interrupts timing when youstop the vehicle and turn the SmartKey toposition 1 in the ignition lock. If you turn theSmartKey to position 2 or 3 and then pressa to confirm Start, timing is continued.

Resetting the current lapX Stop the RACETIMER.X Press the = or ; button to selectReset Lap.

X Press a to reset the lap time to "0".

Deleting all laps

If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMERis reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps aredeleted.You cannot delete individual stored laps. Ifyou have stopped 16 laps, the current lapdoes not have to be reset.X Reset the current lap.X Press a to confirm Reset.Reset Race Timer? appears in themultifunction display.

X Press the : button to select Yes andpress the a button to confirm.All laps are deleted.

Overall statistics

: RACETIMER overall evaluation; Total time driven= Average speed? Distance coveredA Maximum speed

This function is shown if you have stored atleast one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the AMG menu.X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the

overall evaluation is shown.

Lap statistics

: Lap; Lap time= Average lap speed? Lap lengthA Top speed during lap


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

This function is only available if you havestored at least two laps and have stopped theRACETIMER.X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the AMG menu.X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the

lap evaluation is shown.Each lap is shown in a separate submenu.The fastest lap is indicated by flashingsymbol :.

X Press the 9 or : button to select adifferent lap evaluation.


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages

Introduction

General notesDisplay messages appear in the multifunction display.Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator'sManual and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display.Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes inthis Operator's Manual.Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:RHOLD function (Y page 207)RParking (Y page 179)

Hiding display messagesX Press the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.

The display message is cleared.The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-prioritydisplay messages cannot be hidden.The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for themessages have been remedied.

Message memoryThe on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You cancall up the display messages:X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.

If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages, for example.X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages.X Press a to confirm.X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.

When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have beenrectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.

282 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Safety systems


!÷Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hillstart assist and ESP® trailer stabilization are temporarilyunavailable.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS andPRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up inthe instrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.Possible causes are:RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete.RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a short distance on a suitable stretch of road,

making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph(20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

!÷Inoperative See Operator's Manual

ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assistand ESP® trailer stabilization are unavailable due to a malfunction.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS andPRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.The $ (USA only)/J (Canada only), ÷, å and !warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNING

Display messages 283

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M SolutionsThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

÷Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist andESP® trailer stabilization are unavailable due to a malfunction.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS andPRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a short distance on a suitable stretch of road,

making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph(20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays


÷Inoperative See Operator's Manual

ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist andESP® trailer stabilization are unavailable due to a malfunction.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS andPRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

T!÷Inoperative See Operator's Manual

EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailerstabilization are unavailable due to a malfunction.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS andPRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up inthe instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z


F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Please Release Parking Brake

The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lampflashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automaticrelease of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 180).You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.X Release the electric parking brake manually.

The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lampflashes and a warning tone sounds.You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking(Y page 180).

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Parking Brake See Operator's Manual

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To apply:X Switch the ignition off.X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.X Shift the transmission to P.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow ! warning lamp and the red F (USAonly)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp light up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Release the electric parking brake manually.orX Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 180).

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays


The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lampflashes and the yellow ! warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Release the electric parking brake manually.

To apply:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Apply the electric parking brake manually.

If the red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lampcontinues to flash:X Do not drive on.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 422).X Shift the transmission to P.X Turn the front wheels towards the curb.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USAonly)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about tenseconds after the electric parking brake has been applied orreleased. It then goes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Apply the electric parking brake.

If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:X Shift the transmission to P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake:X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 180).

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z


The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply orrelease the electric parking brake, the red F (USAonly)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible toapply the electric parking brake manually.X Shift the transmission to P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Parking Brake Inoperative

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USAonly)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about tenseconds after the electric parking brake has been applied orreleased. It then goes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because ofovervoltage or undervoltage.X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by

charging the battery or restarting the engine.X Engage or release the electric parking brake.

If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parkingbrake:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Engage or release the electric parking brake.

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The display message is only shown while the vehicle is in motion.The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and the red F (USAonly)/ ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.X Shift the transmission to P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Turn On the Ignition to Release the Parking Brake

The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp lightsup.You attempted to release the electric parking brake while theignition was switched off.X SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.X KEYLESS-GO: switch on the ignition.


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays


$(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Check Brake Fluid Level

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. Inaddition, the $ (USA only)/J (Canada only) warning lamplights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

#Check Brake Pad Wear

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Gmbrace Inoperative

USA only: one or more of the main functions in the mbrace systemare malfunctioning.Canada only: one or more of the main functions of the TELEAIDsystem are malfunctioning.X USA only: have the mbrace system checked at a qualified

specialist workshop.X Canada only: have the TELEAID system checked at a qualified


PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Operator's Manual

Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupantsafety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z


PRE-SAFEFunctions Currently Limited See Operator's Manual

Vehicles without the Active Driving Assistance package: AdaptiveBrake Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe sensor in the bumper is dirty.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to

electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.RAMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the displaymessage disappears.Adaptive Brake Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179).X Clean the bumpers (Y page 373).X Restart the engine.X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP®(Y page 71).


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays


PRE-SAFEFunctions Currently Limited See Operator's Manual

Vehicles with the Active Driving Assistance package:PRE-SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper are dirty.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to

electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.RAMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the displaymessage disappears.PRE-SAFE® Brake is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179).X Clean the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper

(Y page 373).X Restart the engine.X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP®(Y page 71).

PRE-SAFEFunctions Limited See Operator's Manual

Vehicles without the Active Driving Assistance package: AdaptiveBrake Assist is faulty. The distance warning function may also havefailed.Vehicles with the Active Driving Assistance package:PRE-SAFE® Brake is faulty. BAS PLUS or the distance warningfunction may also have failed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6SRS Malfunction Service Required

There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem).The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either betriggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may notbe triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.Further information on occupant safety (Y page 43).


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z


6Front Left Malfunction Service Required or Front Right Malfunction Service Required

SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either betriggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may notbe triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Rear Left Malfunction Service Required or Rear Right Malfunction Service Required

SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.


6Rear Center Malfunction Service Required

SRS has malfunctioned at the rear center. The 6 warning lampalso lights up in the instrument cluster.


6Left Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required or Right Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required

There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand windowcurtain air bag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in theinstrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays


Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual

The front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, eventhough:Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the

system's weight threshold is located on the front-passengerseat.orRthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied.The system may detect objects or forces applying additionalweight on the seat.

G WARNINGThe air bag may deploy unintentionally.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179).X Switch the ignition off.X Open the front-passenger door.X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-

passenger seat.X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the

weight.The system may otherwise detect the additional weight andinterpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actuallyis.

X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the ̂ a indicator lamp in the center console andthe multifunction display and check the following:

Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Rthe ̂ a indicator lamp must light up and remain lit. When

the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant Classification System)has disabled the front-passenger air bag (Y page 48).Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual display messages must not be shown inthe multifunction display.

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessarysystem checks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in themultifunction display.


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M SolutionsIf these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can beoccupied again. Whether the ̂ a indicator lamp remains litor goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operatingcorrectly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual

The front-passenger air bag is disabled during the journey, eventhough:Ran adult

orRa person larger than a certain size is occupying the front-

passenger seat.If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system mayinterpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.

G WARNINGThe front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179).X Switch the ignition off.X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and

switch on the ignition.X Observe the ̂ a indicator lamp in the center console and

the multifunction display and check the following:Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Rthe ̂ a indicator lamp must light up and remain lit. When

the indicator lamp is on, OCS has disabled the front-passengerair bag (Y page 48).Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual display messages must not be shown inthe multifunction display.

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessarysystem checks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in themultifunction display.


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M SolutionsIf these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can beoccupied again. Whether the ̂ a indicator lamp remains litor goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operatingcorrectly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Lightsi Display messages about LEDs:

This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.


b Check Left Cornering Light or Check Right Cornering Light

The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself

(Y page 129).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left Low Beam or Check Right Low Beam

The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself


bCheck Trailer Left Turn Signal or Check Trailer Right Turn Signal

The left or right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself.orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Rear Left Turn Signal or Check Rear Right Turn Signal

The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself



On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z


bCheck Front Left Turn Signal or Check Front Right Turn Signal

The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself


bCheck Left Mirror Turn Signal or Check Right Mirror Turn Signal

The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror isdefective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself


bCheck Center Brake Lamp

The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself


bCheck Left Brake Lamp or Check Right Brake Lamp

The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself


bCheck Left Tail and Brake Lamps or Check Right Tail and Brake Lamps

The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself


bCheck Left High Beam or Check Right High Beam

The left or right-hand high beam is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself



-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays


bLicense Plate Lamp

The left or right-hand license plate lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself


bCheck Front Left Parking Lamp or Check Front Right Parking Lamp

The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself


bBackup Light

The backup lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself


bCheck Front Left Sidemarker Lamp or Check Front Right Sidemarker Lamp

The left or right front side marker lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself


bCheck Left Tail Lamp or Check Right Tail Lamp

The left or right-hand tail lamp is defective.orThe rear left or right side marker lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself


bCheck Left Daytime Running Light or Check Right Daytime Running Light

The left-hand or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself



On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z


bActive Headlamps Inoperative

The active light function is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bMalfunction See Operator's Manual

The exterior lighting is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: a fuse may have blown.X Check the fuses (Y page 394).X If necessary, replace the blown fuse. Observe the warning notes.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bAuto Lamp Function Inoperative

The light sensor is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bSwitch Off Lights

The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. Awarning tone also sounds.X Turn the light switch to Ã.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarilyinoperative. Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.X Clean the windshield.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again,the Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message isdisplayed.Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Engine


+Check Coolant Level See Operator's Manual

The coolant level is too low.

! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the enginecooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so(Y page 367).

X If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have theengine coolant system checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

? The fan motor is faulty.X At coolant temperatures under 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the next

qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in

mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

?Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off

The coolant is too hot.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGDo not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment tocatch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhich can occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,

paying attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179).X Wait until the engine has cooled down.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not

blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out

and the coolant temperature is under 248 ‡ (120 †).Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist

workshop immediately.Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolantlevel, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z


# The battery is not being charged.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes are:Ra defective alternatorRa torn poly-V-beltRa malfunction in the electronicsX Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,

paying attention to road and traffic conditions.X Open the hood.X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.If the poly-V-belt is torn:! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the poly-V-belt is not damaged:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

4Check Engine Oil At Next Refueling

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.A warning tone also sounds.X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest

(Y page 366).X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 366).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if

engine oil needs to be added more often than usual.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine willotherwise be damaged.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

http://www.mbusa.com



4Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 quart)

AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low.X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest

(Y page 366).X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 366).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if

engine oil needs to be added more often than usual.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine willotherwise be damaged.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

8Fuel Level Low

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.

8Gas Cap Loose

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.

If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:X Close the fuel filler cap.

If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

8Ultra Low-sulfur Diesel Fuel Only

Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel level has fallen below thereserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.X Only use commercially available vehicular ULTRA-LOW SULFUR

HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL (ULSD, 15ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM).

¸Replace Air Filter

Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and mustbe replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

!Check Fuel Filter

Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. Thewater must be drained off.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z




ØCheck Additive See Operator's Manual

The DEF tank is almost empty.X Have the DEF tank filled as soon as possible at a qualified

specialist workshop (Y page 177).

ØRemaining Starts: 16

The DEF level has fallen to a minimum. You can start the engine afurther 16 times.X Have the DEF tank filled immediately at a qualified specialist

workshop (Y page 177).

i You can start the engine a further 16 times. If DEF is not added,it will then not be possible to restart the engine. Fill the DEF tankwith about 1 gal (3.8 l) of DEF (Y page 177).

Driving systems


ÀAttention Assist: Take a Break!

Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigueor a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tonealso sounds.X If necessary, take a break.During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you getenough rest.

ÀAttention Assist Inoperative

ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ÁDrive More Slowly

You cannot change the vehicle level. Possible causes are:Ryou are driving too fast for the selected vehicle level.Ryou are towing a trailer.Rthe trailer-coupling socket is being used, e.g. for a bicycle rack.X Drive more slowly and then select the desired vehicle level

again.RVehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package (Y page 204)RVehicles with the AIRMATIC package (Y page 210)

X Observe the notes on towing a trailer (Y page 253).


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays


ÁCompressor Is Cooling

You have selected a higher vehicle level. The compressor firstneeds to cool down because of frequent level changes.X Drive in a manner appropriate for the current vehicle level.X Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance.X Allow the compressor to cool down.

When the compressor has cooled down, the display messagedisappears. The vehicle then continues rising to the selectedlevel.

ÁMalfunction

AIRMATIC is malfunctioning.X Drive in a manner appropriate for the current vehicle level, but

no faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).X Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance.X Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

ÁMax. Speed 12 mph

You are exceeding the speed permissible for the selected off-roadlevel.In addition, the vehicle level display appears between the vehicleicon and the display message, and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGThe vehicle could tip and rollover.There is a risk of an accident.X Adjust your driving style to the altered handling characteristics.X Only make slight steering movements and avoid fast steering

movements.X Do not drive faster than 12 mph (20 km/h) until off-road level 2

has been reached.

ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM Malfunctioning

The Active Curve System is faulty. The vehicle's handlingcharacteristics may be affected.X Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).X Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop.


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z


ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM Malfunction See Operator's Manual

The Active Curve System is faulty. The vehicle's handlingcharacteristics are severely impaired. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThere is a risk of an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Adjust your driving style to the altered handling characteristics.X Avoid sudden acceleration in tight bends and fast steering

movements.X Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80km/h).X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

ÁRaising Max. Speed 12 mph

The vehicle is being adjusted to off-road level 3. The displaymessage informs you of the maximum speed permissible for off-road level 3.X Do not drive faster than 12 mph (20 km/h).

gLowering Max. Speed 12 mph

The vehicle is being lowered from off-road level 3 to off-road level2. The display message informs you of the maximum speedpermissible for off-road level 3.X Do not drive faster than 12 mph (20 km/h) until off-road level 2

has been reached.

8Different. Lock Sys. Malfunction

The differential lock is malfunctioning.X Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80km/h).X Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

8Different. Locking Sys. Cooling Down Please Wait

The differential lock is too hot and has been disengaged.X Drive on carefully.X Allow the differential lock to cool down.

The differential lock reengages as soon as it has cooled down.

LOW RANGE Stop Apply Parking Brake

A gearshift process has been canceled. LOW RANGE is in theneutral position. There is no connection between the engine andthe drive wheels.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Apply the electric parking brake. Do not continue driving under

any circumstances.X Repeat the gearshift process.


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays


LOW RANGE Malfunction To Park Apply Brake

LOW RANGE is malfunctioning.X Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80km/h).X When parking, secure the vehicle against rolling away

(Y page 179).X Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

LOW RANGE Max. Speed 25 mph

You have exceeded the maximum speed for the gearshift process.X Drive more slowly.

The gear change is made.

LOW RANGE Max. Speed 40 mph

You have exceeded the maximum speed for the gearshift process.X Drive more slowly.

The gear change is made.

LOW RANGE Shift to Position N Briefly

You have reduced the vehicle speed, but the automatictransmission is not in position N.X Briefly shift the automatic transmission to position N.

LOW RANGE Shifting Canceled Please Reactivate

The gearshift process has been canceled.X Repeat the gearshift process.

Ã Inoperative

DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) is deactivated due to amalfunction.X Have DSR checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

ëOff

The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.A warning tone also sounds.X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 207).

Radar Sensors Deactivated See Operator's Manual

The radar sensor system is deactivated.X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 277).


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z


Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual or Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivatedand temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the displaymessage disappears.Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operationalagain.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179).X Clean the windshield.

Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative or Active Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative

Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual or Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarilyinoperative.You have established the electrical connection between the trailerand your vehicle.X Press a on the steering wheel to confirm the display

message.Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is deactivated whiletowing a trailer.


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays


Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarilyinoperative. Possible causes are:Rthe sensors are dirty.Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature

range.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to

electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.

The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exteriormirrors.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the displaymessage disappears.Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179).X Clean the sensors (Y page 373).X Restart the engine.

Blind Spot Assist Inoperative or Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is defective.The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exteriormirrors.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park Assist Canceled

The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not beenfastened.X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the

driver's door closed.

You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheelwhile steering intervention was active.X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the

multifunction steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.

The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 217).


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z


Park Assist Inoperative

You have just carried out a large number of turning or parkingmaneuvers.Active Parking Assist will become available again afterapproximately ten minutes (Y page 217).X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Switch off and restart the engine.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

PARKTRONIC is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park Assist Finished

The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.The display message disappears automatically.

DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 194).If it was deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds.

DISTRONIC PLUS Now Available

DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having beentemporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 194).

DISTRONIC PLUS Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper are dirty.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to

electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.A warning tone also sounds.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the displaymessage disappears.DISTRONIC is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179).X Clean the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper

(Y page 373).X Restart the engine.


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays


DISTRONIC PLUS Inoperative

DISTRONIC PLUS is defective.BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) and PRE-SAFE® Brake may beinoperative as well.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUS Inactive

You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is nolonger controlling the speed of the vehicle.X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS--- mph

An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS

(Y page 194).

Cruise Control Inoperative

Cruise control is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise Control--- mph

A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), forexample.X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and

store the speed.X Check the activation conditions for cruise control

(Y page 192).


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Tires


Check Tire Pressure Soon

The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significantloss in pressure.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of thefollowing hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed

increase.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly

impair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may

be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking

maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a

flat tire (Y page 381).X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire

pressure.X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire

pressure is correct (Y page 406).

Check Tire Pressure Then Restart Run Flat Indicator

The tire pressure loss warning system generated a displaymessage and has not been restarted since.X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 406).

Run Flat Indicator Inoperative

The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Correct Tire Pressure

The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tirepressure difference between the wheels is too great.X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 406).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 409).


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays


Check Tires The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.




be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking


flat tire (Y page 381).X Check the tire pressure (Y page 406).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

Warning Tire Malfunction

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. Thewheel position is shown in the multifunction display.

G WARNINGIf you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards:RA flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.RYou could lose control of the vehicle.RContinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-

up and possibly a fire.There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking


flat tire (Y page 381).


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z


Tire Press. Monitor Currently Unavailable

Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be receivedfrom the wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarilymalfunctioning.X Drive on.

The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as theproblem has been solved.

TirePress. Sensor(s) Missing

There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or severalwheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in themultifunction display.X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified


Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors

The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor.The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.

The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after drivingfor a few minutes.

Tire Press. Monitor Inoperative

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicle


Shift to 'P' or 'N' to Start Engine

You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission inposition R or D.X Shift the transmission to position P or N.

Auxiliary Battery Malfunction

The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longerbeing charged.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity.X Until then, set the automatic transmission to position P before

you switch off the engine.X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179).

Apply Brake to Shift from 'P'

You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever toposition D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal.X Depress the brake pedal.


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays


Transmission Not in P Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away

The driver's door is open and the transmission is in position R, Nor D.A warning tone also sounds.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179).

Service Required Do Not Shift Gears Visit Dealer

You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.A warning tone also sounds.If transmission position D is selected:X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the

transmission from position D.

If transmission position R, N or P is selected:X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Only Shift to 'P' when Vehicle is Stationary

The vehicle is moving.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Shift the transmission to position P.

A The tailgate is open.

G WARNINGWhen the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicleinterior if the tailgate is open.There is a risk of poisoning.X Close the tailgate.

? The hood is open.

G WARNINGThe open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179).X Close the hood.

C At least one door is open.A warning tone also sounds.X Close all the doors.


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z


ÐPower Steering Malfunction See Operator's Manual

The power steering is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified

specialist workshop.X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the

nearest qualified specialist workshop.

Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver range.X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol

appears in the multifunction display.

¥Check Washer Fluid

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has droppedbelow the minimum.X Add washer fluid (Y page 368).

Wiper Malfunctioning

The windshield wipers are malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Hazard Warning Flashers Malfunctioning

The hazard warning lamps are faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

SmartKey


ÂKey Does Not Belong to Vehicle

You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.X Use the correct SmartKey.

ÂTake Your Key from Ignition

The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.X Remove the SmartKey.

ÂObtain a New Key

The SmartKey needs to be replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays


ÂReplace Key Battery

The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged.X Change the batteries (Y page 81).

ÂDon't Forget Your Key

This display message is displayed for a maximum of 60 secondsand is simply a reminder.You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off.The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the ignition lock.X Remember to take the KEYLESS-GO key with you when you

leave the vehicle.

ÂKey Not Detected (red display message)

The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle.A warning tone also sounds.If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehiclecentrally or start the engine.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179).X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key.

The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is runningbecause there is interference from a strong source of radio waves.A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179).X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

ÂKey Not Detected (white displaymessage)

The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present.X Change the location of the SmartKey with the KEYLESS-GO

functions in the vehicle.

If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected:X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

ÂKey Detected in Vehicle

The KEYLESS-GO key has been detected inside the vehicle duringlocking.X Remove the KEYLESS-GO key from the vehicle.


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z


ÂRemove 'Start' Button and Insert Key

KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. Awarning tone also sounds.X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the

desired position.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ÂClose Doors to Lock Vehicle

At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.X Close all doors and lock the vehicle again.

Warning and indicator lamps in theinstrument cluster

OverviewL Low-beam headlamps

(Y page 121)T Parking lamps (Y page 122)K High-beam headlamps

(Y page 124)#! Turn signal (Y page 123)ü Seat belts (Y page 317)$ (USA) Brakes (Y page 318)J (Canada) Brakes (Y page 318)! ABS (Y page 319)÷ ESP®(Y page 321)å ESP® OFF (Y page 321)F (USA) Electric parking brake (red)

(Y page 324)! (Canada) Electric parking brake (red)

(Y page 324)! Electric parking brake

(yellow) (Y page 324)6 SRS (Y page 324); Check Engine (Y page 325)8 Reserve fuel (Y page 325)? Coolant (Y page 326)· Distance warning function

(Y page 328)

% Diesel engine: preglow(Y page 159)

h Tire pressure monitor(Y page 329)

316 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Safety

Seat belts


ü

After starting theengine, the red seatbelt warning lamp lightsup for 6 seconds.

The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passengerto fasten their seat belts.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 56).

ü

After starting theengine, the red seatbelt warning lamp lightsup. In addition, awarning tone soundsfor up to six seconds.

The driver's seat belt is not fastened.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 56).

The warning tone ceases.

ü

The red seat beltwarning lamp lights upafter the engine starts,as soon as the driver'sor the front-passengerdoor is closed.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 56).

The warning lamp goes out.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat.X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow

them in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out.

ü

The red seat beltwarning lamp flashesand an intermittentaudible warningsounds.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. Youare driving faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or have briefly drivenfaster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 56).

The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning toneceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. You are drivingfaster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or have briefly driven faster than15 mph (25 km/h).X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow

them in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning toneceases.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 317

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Safety systems


$ (USA only)J (Canada only)The red brake systemwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine isrunning. A warning tonealso sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the brakingcharacteristics may be affected.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying


X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.

$ (USA only)J (Canada only)The red brake systemwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine isrunning. A warning tonealso sounds.

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying


X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179).X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the

malfunction.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays


!

The yellow ABS warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to amalfunction. For this reason, BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS,ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE®

Brake, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, the HOLD function, hillstart assist and ESP® trailer stabilization are also deactivated, forexample.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that othersystems, such as the navigation system or the automatictransmission, will not be available.


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z


!

The yellow ABS warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

ABS is temporarily unavailable. Therefore, BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®,EBD (electronic brake force distribution), PRE-SAFE®,PRE-SAFE® Brake, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, the HOLDfunction, hill start assist, and ESP® trailer stabilization, forexample, are also deactivated.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.Possible causes are:RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete.RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is a risk of an accident.X Carefully drive a short distance on a suitable stretch of road,

making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph(20 km/h).The functions mentioned above are available again when thewarning lamp goes out.

If the warning lamp is still on:X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays


!

The yellow ABS warninglamp is lit while theengine is running. Awarning tone alsosounds.

EBD is malfunctioning. Therefore, ABS, BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®,PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST,the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilization,for example, are not available either.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction


$ (USA only)J (Canada only)÷å!

The red brake warninglamp, the yellow ESP®

and ESP® OFF warninglamps and the yellowABS warning lamp arelit while the engine isrunning.

ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Therefore, BAS, BAS PLUS,PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST,the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilization,for example, are also not available.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction



On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z


÷

The yellow ESP®

warning lamp flasheswhile the vehicle is inmotion.

ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk ofskidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as

necessary.X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.X Do not deactivate ESP®.

In rare cases (Y page 71), it may be best to deactivate ESP®.

å

The yellow ESP® OFFwarning lamp is lit whilethe engine is running.

ESP® is deactivated.

G WARNING

If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Reactivate ESP®.

In rare cases (Y page 71), it may be best to deactivate ESP®.X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

If ESP® cannot be activated:X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

÷å

The yellow ESP® andESP® OFF warninglamps are lit while theengine is running.

ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST, the HOLD function, hill start assist andESP® trailer stabilization are not available due to a malfunction.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction



-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays


÷å

The yellow ESP® andESP® OFF warninglamps are lit while theengine is running.

ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist andESP® trailer stabilization are temporarily unavailable.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS andPRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.Self-diagnosis is not yet complete.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a short distance on a suitable stretch of road,

making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph(20 km/h).The functions mentioned above are available again when thewarning lamp goes out.

If the warning lamp is still on:X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction



On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z


F (USA only)! (Canada only)The red electric parkingbrake indicator lampflashes or lights upand/or!

warning lamp for theelectric parking brakelights up.

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

6

The red SRS warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem).

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either betriggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may notbe triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Drive on carefully.X Have SRS checked at a qualified specialist workshop

immediately.For further information about SRS, see (Y page 43).


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Engine


;

The yellow CheckEngine warning lamplights up while theengine is running.

There may be a malfunction, for example:Rin the engine managementRin the fuel injection systemRin the exhaust systemRin the ignition system (for vehicles with a gasoline engine)Rin the fuel systemThe emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine maybe running in emergency mode.X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified


i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualifiedspecialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warninglamp lights up. This is due to the legal requirements in effect inthese states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulationsapply in the state in which you are currently driving.

Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry(Y page 176).X Start the engine three to four times after refueling.

If the yellow Check Engine warning lamp goes out, emergencyrunning mode is canceled. The vehicle need not be checked.

8

The yellow reserve fuelwarning lamp lights upwhile the engine isrunning.

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

8

The yellow reserve fuelwarning lamp flasheswhile the vehicle is inmotion.In addition, the ;Check Engine warninglamp may light up.

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler

cap.X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist

workshop.


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z


?

The red coolantwarning lamp lights upwhile the engine isrunning and the coolanttemperature gauge isat the start of the scale.

The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge isdefective.The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is arisk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,

paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continuedriving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays


?

The red coolantwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine isrunning.

The coolant level is too low.

! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the enginecooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiatormay be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may bemalfunctioning.The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooledsufficiently.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,

paying attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until

the engine has cooled down.X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning

notes (Y page 367).X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the

engine coolant system checked.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not

blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is

under 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in


?

The red coolantwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine isrunning. A warning tonealso sounds.

The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). Theairflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant levelmay be too low.

G WARNINGThe engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment tocatch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhich can occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M SolutionsX Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,

paying attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until

the engine has cooled down.X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning

notes (Y page 367).X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the

engine coolant system checked.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not

blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.X At coolant temperatures under 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the next

qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in


Driving systems


·

The red distancewarning functionwarning lamp comes onwhile the vehicle ismoving. A warning tonealso sounds.

You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your lineof travel at too high a speed.X Be prepared to brake immediately.X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to

brake or take evasive action.Further information on DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 194).Further information on PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 73).Further information on the distance warning function(Y page 68).


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Tires


h

USA only:The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.Canada only:The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss) is lit.

The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in atleast one of the tires.




be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179).X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a

flat tire (Y page 381).X Check the tire pressure (Y page 406).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

h

USA only:The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss/malfunction) flashes forapproximately oneminute and thenremains lit.

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

G WARNINGThe system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tirepressure.There is a risk of an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

330

Useful information ............................ 332Stowage areas .................................. 332Features ............................................. 343

331

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Useful information



Stowage areas

Loading guidelines

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury,particularly in the event of sudden braking ora sudden change in direction.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.


The gross vehicle weight (GVW) is the vehicleweight including fuel, vehicle tool kit, sparewheel, installed accessories, vehicleoccupants and luggage/cargo.The gross load limit and the gross vehicleweight rating (GVWR) for your vehicle must

never be exceeded. The gross load limit andthe GVWR are specified on the vehicleidentification plate on the B-pillar of thedriver's door (Y page 410).The load must also be distributed so that theweight on each axle never exceeds the grossaxle weight rating (GAWR) for the front andrear axles. The specifications for GVWR andGAWR are on the vehicle identification plateon the B-pillar of the driver's door(Y page 410).Observe the notes on the loading the vehicle(Y page 410).The handling characteristics of a ladenvehicle are dependent on the distribution ofthe load within the vehicle. For this reason,you should observe the following notes whentransporting a load:RNever exceed the maximum permissible

gross vehicle weight or the gross axleweight rating of the vehicle (includingoccupants).RThe cargo compartment is the preferred

place to carry objects.RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as

possible and as low down in the cargocompartment as possible.RThe load must not protrude above the

upper edge of the seat backrests.RAlways place the load against the rear or

front seat backrests. Make sure that theseat backrests are securely locked intoplace.RAlways place the load behind unoccupied

seats if possible.RUse the cargo tie down rings and the parcel

nets to transport loads and luggage.RUse cargo tie-down rings and fastening

materials appropriate for the weight andsize of the load.RHook in the cargo net when loading.RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and

wear-resistant tie-downs. pad sharp edgesfor protection.

332 Stowage areasSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

Stowage space


G WARNINGIf objects in the passenger compartment arestowed incorrectly, they can slide or bethrown around and hit vehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury, particularly in theevent of sudden braking or a sudden changein direction.RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be

thrown around in such situations.RAlways make sure that objects do not

protrude from stowage spaces, parcel netsor stowage nets.RClose the lockable stowage spaces while

driving.RStow and secure objects that are heavy,

hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or toolarge in the cargo compartment.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 332).

Glove box

X To open: pull handle : and open glove boxflap ;.

X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwardsuntil it engages.

i The glove box can be cooled(Y page 152).

1 Glove box unlocked2 Glove box locked

The glove box can be locked and unlockedusing the mechanical key.

Partition : for stowing flat objects is locatedin the upper section of the glove box. It canbe removed to increase the stowage space inthe glove box.X To remove: pull partition : forwards and

outX To install: insert partition : and push it

back until it engages.

Stowage areas 333

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

Stowage compartment under thearmrest

X To open: pull handle : up.The armrest folds out.

In the stowage compartment, there is astowage tray.

i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, aUSB connection and an AUX IN connectionor a Media Interface are installed in thestowage compartment.Media Interface is a universal interface formobile audio equipment, e.g. for an iPod®

or MP3 Player.

i There is a removable stowage tray in thestorage compartment, in which objectssuch as an iPod® can be stored.

Eyeglasses compartment

X To open: press marking :.The eyeglasses compartment opensdownwards.

X To close: press marking : again andeyeglasses compartment returns upwardsand engages.

Make sure that the eyeglasses compartmentis always closed while the vehicle is in motion.

Stowage compartment in the frontcenter console

X To open: slide cover : forwards.Stowage compartment ; appears.

X To close: pull cover : back as far as it willgo.

Stowage compartment in the rearcenter console

X To open: briefly press the stowagecompartment marking.The stowage compartment opens.

334 Stowage areasSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

i Depending on the vehicle's equipment,there may be open stowage spaces aboveand below the stowage compartment.

Stowage net

G WARNINGVehicles with the Occupant ClassificationSystem (OCS):If the gross weight of the objects in thestowage net on the back of the front-passenger seat is greater than 4.4 lb (2 kg),OCS cannot correctly assess the occupant'sweight category. The front-passenger front airbag could deploy without cause, or may fail todeploy in the event of an accident. This posesan increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Never exceed the permissible gross weight of4.4 lb (2 kg). Stow and secure heavy objectsin the cargo compartment.

Stowage nets are located in the front-passenger footwell and on the back of thedriver's and the front-passenger seat.Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 332)and the safety notes regarding stowagespaces (Y page 333).

Through-loading facility in the rearIf objects or loads are not secured when beingtransported in the through-loading facility,they could slip or be thrown around andthereby hit vehicle occupants.Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 332)and the safety notes regarding stowagespaces (Y page 333).

The through-loading facility is opened fromthe cargo compartment.X Release the seat backrests in the second

row of seats and tilt them in the cargo/loadposition (Y page 106).

X Fold down the rear seat armrest.X Pull the center head restraint on the rear

bench seat into the uppermost position(Y page 104).

X Slide release catch : to the left and swingflap ; to the left until it is lying on the rearside of the rear bench seat.

X Push cover = forward until it is lying on therear seat armrest.

Cargo compartment enlargement


G WARNINGIf the rear bench seat/rear seat and seatbackrest are not engaged they could fold

Stowage areas 335

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

forwards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in theevent of an accident.RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be

pushed into the seat belt by the rear benchseat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. Theseat belt can no longer offer the intendedlevel of protection and could even causeinjuries.RObjects or loads in the trunk/cargo

compartment cannot be restrained by theseat backrest.

There is an increased risk of injury.Before every trip, make sure that the seatbackrests and the rear bench seat/rear seatare engaged.

! Fold the seat cushion upwards beforefolding the rear bench seat forward.Otherwise, the backrests may be damaged.When the backrest is folded forwards, thefront seats should not be moved to theirrearmost position. Otherwise, the frontseats and the rear bench seat could bedamaged.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 332).The left-hand and right-hand rear seatbackrests can be folded forwards separatelyto increase the cargo compartment capacity.

Folding the rear bench seat forwards! The backrest is heavy. Therefore, take

care when folding it down. Make sure thatthe head restraints are pushed all the wayin so that the backrests and seat cushionsare not damaged.

i If the driver's or front-passenger seat isset for a larger person, it may not bepossible to fold the rear bench seatforwards. In this case, move the front seatsas far forward as possible.

X Move the head restraints to the lowestposition (Y page 106).

X Fold seat cushion : upwards.

X Pull release handle ; upwards in thedirection of the arrow until the backrest isfully released.

X Fold the backrest forwards until it reachesthe cargo compartment position.

X Guide seat belts ; under respectiveclips :.

336 Stowage areasSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

Folding the rear bench seat back

X Fold seat backrest ; back until it engages.Make sure not to trap the seat belt whiledoing so.

X Swing seat cushion : back.X Pull up and adjust the head restraints if

necessary (Y page 106).

Securing cargo

Cargo tie-down rings

General notesG WARNINGThe Top Tether anchorages cannot secure aload. If you secure a load with the Top Tetheranchorages, the Top Tether anchorages couldbe pulled out during braking, abrupt changesin direction or in the event of an accident. Theload could slip, tip over or be flung around andthereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a riskof injury.Only use the cargo tie down rings whensecuring a load.

Observe the following notes on securingloads:RSecure the load using the cargo tie-down

rings.RDistribute the load on the cargo tie down

rings evenly.RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure

a load, as these are only intended as ananti-slip protection for light loads.

RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edgesor corners.RPad sharp edges for protection.

Cargo compartment

There are four cargo tie-down rings : in thecargo compartment.Before using the cargo tie-down rings on thefront right-hand side of the cargocompartment, the stowage net must bepushed down.

Bag hook

G WARNINGThe bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objectsor items of luggage. Objects or items ofluggage could be flung around and thereby hitvehicle occupants when braking or abruptlychanging directions. There is a risk of injury.Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragileobjects on the bag hooks.

! The bag hook can bear a maximum loadof 6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used tosecure a load.

Stowage areas 337

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

There is a bag hook in the cargo compartmenton the left-hand side.X Press bag hook marking :.X Turn bag hook : until it engages.

Securing hooks

There are two securing hooks : on each sideof the cargo compartment.Only secure lightweight luggage items on themounting hooks to a maximum of 9 lbs(4 kg).

Cargo compartment cover


G WARNINGOn its own, the cargo compartment covercannot secure or restrain heavy objects,items of luggage and heavy loads. You couldbe hit by an unsecured load during suddenchanges in direction, braking or in the event

of an accident. There is an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. byusing tie downs, even if you are using thecargo compartment cover.

! When loading the vehicle, make sure thatyou do not stack the load in the cargocompartment higher than the lower edge ofthe side windows. Do not place heavyobjects on top of the cargo compartmentcover.

A cargo compartment cover or a combinedcargo cover and net (cargo compartmentcover with cargo net) is installed, dependingon equipment, behind the rear bench seatbackrest.

Extending/retracting the cargocompartment cover

X To extend: pull the cargo compartmentcover back by grab handle : and clip itinto retainers ; on the left and right.

X To retract: unhook the cargo compartmentcover from left-hand and right-handretainers ;.

X Guide cargo compartment cover forwardsby grab handle : until it is completelyrolled up.

338 Stowage areasSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

Removing/installing the cargocompartment cover (without integratedcargo net)

X To remove: make sure that cargocompartment cover : is rolled up.

X Push end cap = of cargo compartmentcover : in the direction of the arrow onthe right or left-hand side.

X Push cargo compartment cover : intoopposite anchorage ;.

X Remove cargo compartment cover :.X To install: if installed, remove the

protective caps from the side panels of theseat row in which the cargo compartmentcover is to be installed. Use a suitableobject here, e.g. a coin.

X Install the protective caps to the sidepanels of the other seat row.

X Place cargo compartment cover : intoanchorage ; on the right or left-hand side.

X Push in opposite end cap = of cargocompartment cover : in the direction ofthe arrow and insert cargo compartmentcover : into opposite anchorage ;.

Removing/installing the combinedcargo cover and net (cargocompartment cover with integratedcargo net)

You can install and remove the combinedcargo cover and net from the cargocompartment.X Make sure that the cargo net and the cargo

compartment cover are rolled up.X To remove: press button ;.X Swing the combined cargo cover and net in

the direction of the arrow.X First, detach the combined cargo cover and

net from left-hand catch : and thenremove it from right-hand fixture =.

X To install: push the combined cargo coverand net up to the stop into right-handfixture =.

X Place the combined cargo cover and netinto the left-hand fixture and push it intocatch : until the combined cargo coverand net engages audibly.

Stowage areas 339

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

X Make sure that red lock statusindicator ? is no longer visible. Thecombined cargo cover and net willotherwise not be locked in place.

Cargo net in combined cargo coverand net


G WARNINGOn its own, the cargo net cannot secure orrestrain heavy objects, items of luggage andheavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecuredload during sudden changes in direction,braking or in the event of an accident. Thereis an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. byusing tie downs, even if you are using thecargo net.

It is important to use a cargo net if you loadthe vehicle with small objects above the seatbackrests. For safety reasons, always use acargo net when transporting loads.

Attaching the cargo net

X Pull the cargo net up by tab : and hook itinto eyelets ; using both hands.

Coat hooks on the tailgate

: Coat hook

EASY-PACK load-securing kit

Components and storageThe EASY-PACK load-securing kit allows youto use your cargo compartment for a varietyof purposes. The accessory parts are locatedunder the cargo compartment floor.X Open the cargo compartment floor

(Y page 342).

EASY-PACK load-securing kit accessory parts: Bag containing the brackets and luggage

holder; Telescopic rod

340 Stowage areasSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

Inserting the brackets into the loadingrail

X Insert bracket : into the center of loadingrail ?.

X Press release button ; and pushbracket : into the desired position inloading rail ?.

X Let go of release button ;.X Press locking button =.

Bracket : is locked in loading rail ?.X If necessary, fold cargo tie-down ring A

upwards.

Luggage holder! Only use the luggage holder to secure

cargo with a maximum weight of 15.4 lbs(7 kg) and with dimensions that the luggageholder can safely and securely contain.

The luggage holder can be used to securelight loads against the side wall of the cargocompartment to prevent them from movingaround.

X To install: insert two brackets A into theleft or right loading rail (Y page 340).

X Press release button : of the luggageholder and pull the strap out slightly.

X Insert luggage holder ; into brackets Aand, while doing so, press release button= and push the luggage holder downwardsuntil it engages.

X Press release button : of the luggageholder and pull the strap out in the directionof the arrow.

X Place the load between the strap and thecargo compartment side wall.

X Using one hand, press locking button : ofthe luggage holder.

X With your other hand, let the strap go slowlyuntil the load is secured.

X Make sure that locking button ? onbrackets A is pressed.This keeps brackets A in place on theloading rail.

X To remove: press release button = onrespective bracket A and remove luggageholder ; by pulling upwards and out.

Telescopic rod

The telescopic rod can be used to secure theload against the rear seats to prevent it frommoving around.

Stowage areas 341

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

X To install: insert one bracket ; into boththe left and the right loading rails and slideit to the desired position (Y page 340).

X Insert telescopic rod : into brackets ;and, while doing so, press releasebutton ? and push the rod downwardsuntil it engages.

X Make sure that locking button = onbrackets ; is pressed.This keeps brackets ; in place on theloading rail.

X To remove: press release button ? onrespective bracket ; and removetelescopic rod : by pulling it upwards andout.

Stowage well under the cargocompartment floor

G WARNINGIf you drive when the cargo compartment flooris open, objects could be flung around, thusstriking vehicle occupants. There is a risk ofinjury, particularly in the event of suddenbraking or a sudden change in direction.Always close the cargo compartment floorbefore a journey.

A removable insert under the cargocompartment floor contains the parts of theEASY-PACK load-securing kit. The tire-change tool kit is stored beneath this insert.

X To open: holding the ribbing, presshandle : downwards ;.Handle : folds up.

X Swing the cargo compartment floorupwards using handle : until it restsagainst the cargo compartment cover.

X Fold out hook = on the underside of thecargo compartment floor in the direction ofthe arrow.

X Attach hook = to the cargocompartment's upper seal ?.

X To close: detach hook = from the cargocompartment's upper seal ?.

X Fasten hook = to the bracket on theunderside of the cargo compartment floor.

X Fold the trunk floor down.X Press the cargo compartment floor

down ; until it engages.

i To remove the cargo compartment floor,undo the press studs below the cargocompartment floor. When you re-install the

342 Stowage areasSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

cargo compartment floor, fasten it with thepress studs.

Roof carrier


G WARNINGWhen you load the roof, the center of gravityof the vehicle rises and the drivingcharacteristics change. If you exceed themaximum roof load, the drivingcharacteristics, as well as steering andbraking, will be greatly impaired. There is arisk of an accident.Never exceed the maximum roof load andadjust your driving style.

! Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use roof carriers that have been testedand approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.This helps to prevent damage to thevehicle.Position the load on the roof carrier in sucha way that the vehicle will not sustaindamage even when it is in motion.Depending on the vehicle equipment,ensure that when the roof carrier isinstalled you can:Rraise the sliding sunroof fullyRopen the panorama roof with power tilt/

sliding panel fullyRopen the tailgate fully

The maximum roof load is 220 lbs(100 kg).

Attaching the roof carrier

X Secure the roof carrier to roof rails :. Indoing so, observe the manufacturer'sinstallation instructions.

Features

Cup holder


G WARNINGIf objects in the passenger compartment arestowed incorrectly, they can slide or bethrown around and hit vehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury, particularly in theevent of sudden braking or a sudden changein direction.RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be

thrown around in such situations.RAlways make sure that objects do not

protrude from stowage spaces, parcel netsor stowage nets.RClose the lockable stowage spaces while

driving.RStow and secure objects that are heavy,

hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or toolarge in the cargo compartment.

! Only use the cup holders for containers ofthe right size and which have lids. Thedrinks could otherwise spill.

The stowage compartments in the doorsprovide space for bottles with a capacity ofup to 34 fl. oz. (1.0 liter).

Features 343

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

The bottles are not secured or prevented fromtipping over. Therefore, do not place any opendrink containers in the stowagecompartments.

Cup holder in the front-compartmentcenter console

: Cup holder; CoverX To open: slide cover ; to its foremost

position.X To close: pull cover ; back as far as it will

go.You can remove the cup holder's rubber matfor cleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarmwater only.

Temperature-controlled cup holder inthe front-compartment center console

: Cup holder; Residual heat indicator lamp= Switch

The temperature-controlled cup holder canbe used to keep cold drinks cool and warmdrinks warm.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock.X To switch on the cooling function: press

and hold button = until the blue indicatorlamp on the button lights up.

X To switch on the heating function: pressand hold button = until the red indicatorlamp on the button lights up.

X To switch off the function: press and holdbutton = until the indicator lamp on thebutton goes out.

When the heating function is used, the metalinsert of the cup holder is heated. Once acertain temperature is reached, residual heatindicator lamp ; lights up. This means thatthe metal insert of the cup holder is hot. Forthis reason, you must not reach into the cupholder metal insert.Do not use hard or sharp objects to clean thecup holder. Use only a soft cloth to clean it.

Cup holder in the rear seat armrest! Do not sit on or support your body weight

on the rear seat armrest when it is foldeddown, as you could otherwise damage it.

X Fold down the rear seat armrest.Cup holder : is located in the rear seatarmrest.

344 FeaturesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

Sun visors

Overview

G WARNINGIf the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is foldedup when the vehicle is in motion, you could beblinded by incident light. There is a risk of anaccident.Always keep the mirror cover folded downwhile driving.

: Mirror light; Bracket= Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket? Vanity mirrorA Mirror cover

Vanity mirror in the sun visorMirror light : only functions if the sun visoris clipped into bracket ; and mirror coverA has been folded up.

Glare from the side

X Fold down sun visor :.X Pull sun visor : out of retainer =.X Swing sun visor : to the side.X Slide sun visor : horizontally as required.X Fold down additional sun visor ; to the

windshield.

Roller sunblinds on the rear sidewindows

! Always guide the roller sunblind by hand.Do not let it snap back suddenly as thiswould damage the automatic rollermechanism.

! Do not drive the vehicle with the rollersunblind hooked in and the side windowsopened simultaneously. The roller sunblindcan jump out of the retainers and springback suddenly when driving at high speeds,e.g. when driving on the freeway. This coulddamage the inertia reel. Therefore, eitherclose the side window or retract the rollersunblind before driving at high speeds.

X To extend: pull the roller sunblind out bytab : and hook it onto retainers ; at theback of the window.

Features 345

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

The roller sunblind can be hooked back intoplace should it pop out from the top of theguide rail.X Tilt pull-out profile : as illustrated.X Slip guide bush ; into open area of guide

rail =.X Straighten up pull-out profile : again.

Ashtray

Front ashtray! The holder under the ashtray is not heat

resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in theashtray, make sure that the ashtray isproperly engaged. Otherwise, the holdercould be damaged.

X To open: slide cover : to its foremostposition.

X Fold cover = of the insert upwards.X To remove the insert: push insert = to

the left ?.Insert = slides out slightly to the right.

X Lift insert = up ; and out.X To re-install the insert: place insert =

into the holder and press it down on theright until it engages.


Rear-compartment ashtray! Close the ashtray when it is not in use and

before you fold the rear seats forward. Youcan otherwise damage the ashtray.

X To open: briefly press cover ; at the top.The ashtray opens.

X To remove the insert: push into recess= from the right.Ashtray insert : slides out slightly to theright.

X Lift insert : up and out.X To re-install the insert: place insert :

into the holder and press down on the rightuntil it engages.

Vehicles without a Rear Seat EntertainmentSystem have an ashtray in the center consolein the rear compartment.

Cigarette lighter

G WARNINGYou can burn yourself if you touch the hotheating element or the socket of the cigarettelighter.

346 FeaturesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:Rthe hot cigarette lighter fallsRa child holds the hot cigarette lighter to

objects, for exampleThere is a risk of fire and injury.Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.Always make sure that the cigarette lighter isout of reach of children. Never leave childrenunsupervised in the vehicle.

! The cigarette lighter in the center consolein the front compartment is not intendedfor operating the tire inflation compressor.

Your attention must always be focused on thetraffic conditions. Only use the cigarettelighter when road and traffic conditionspermit.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock (Y page 157).X To open: slide cover : to its foremost

position.X Press in cigarette lighter ;.

Cigarette lighter ; will pop outautomatically when the heating element isred-hot.


12 V sockets

General notesX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the

ignition lock (Y page 157).With the exception of the socket in the frontcenter console, all sockets can be used foraccessories with a maximum current draw of240 W (20 A). The socket in the front centerconsole can be used for accessories with amaximum current draw of 180 W (15 A).Accessories include such items as lamps orchargers for mobile phones.If you use the sockets for long periods whenthe engine is switched off, the battery maydischarge.

i An emergency cut-out ensures that theon-board voltage does not drop too low. Ifthe on-board voltage is too low, the powerto the sockets is automatically cut. Thisensures that there is sufficient power tostart the engine.

Socket in the front-compartment centerconsole! The socket is not suitable for operating

the tire inflation compressor.

X To open: slide cover : to its foremostposition.

X Lift up the cover of socket ;.X To close: pull cover : back as far as it will

go.

Features 347

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

Socket in the rear-compartment centerconsole

X Lift up the cover of socket :.

Vehicles with the Rear Seat EntertainmentSystem have two sockets in the centerconsole in the rear compartment.

Socket in the cargo compartment

X Lift up the cover of socket :.

115 V socket


G DANGERWhen a suitable device is connected, the115 V power socket will be carrying a highvoltage. You could receive an electric shockif the connector cable or the 115 V powersocket is pulled out of the trim or is damagedor wet. There is a risk of fatal injury.

RUse only connector cables that are dry andfree of damage.RWhen the ignition is off, make sure that the

115 V power socket is dry.RHave the 115 V power socket checked or

replaced immediately at a qualifiedspecialized workshop if it is damaged or hasbeen pulled out of the trim.RNever plug the connector cable into a

115 V power socket that is damaged or hasbeen pulled out of the trim.

G DANGERIf you reach into the power socket or pluginappropriate devices into the power socket,you could receive an electric shock. There isa risk of fatal injury.Only connect appropriate devices to thepower socket.

! Note that work and repairs on the 115 Vpower socket should only be carried out byqualified specialist personnel.

General notes115 V power socket provides an alternatingvoltage of 115 V so that small electronicdevices can be connected. These devices,such as games consoles, chargers andlaptops, should not consume more than amaximum of 150 watts altogether.Requirements for operation of these devices:Rthe electronic device that you connect has

a suitable connector and conforms tostandards specific to the country you arein.Rthe plug of the electronic device is plugged

correctly into 115 V power socket.Rthe maximum wattage of the device to be

connected must not exceed 150 watts.Rthe on-board power supply is within a

permissible voltage range.Rthe 12 V sockets in the rear compartment

and the cargo compartment areoperational.

348 FeaturesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

Using the 115 V power socket

X To switch on: switch the ignition on.X Open flap =.X Insert the plug of the electronic device into

115 V power socket :.Indicator lamp ; lights up.

X To turn off: disconnect the plug from115 V power socket :.Ensure that you do not pull on the cord.

Features 349

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

Problems with the 115 V power socket


The warning lamp onthe 115 V power socketis not lit.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak.X Start the engine.orX Charge the battery (Y page 387).

If the indicator lamp still does not light up:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The temperature of the DC/AC converter is temporarily too high.X Remove the electronic device connector from the 115 V socket.X Let the DC/AC converter cool down.

If the indicator lamp still does not light up after cooling down theconverter:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

You have connected an electronic device that has a constantnominal power of less than 150 watts, but a very high switch-oncurrent. This device will not work. If you connect such a device,the 115 V power socket will not supply it with power.X Connect a suitable device.

mbrace

Important safety notes! You must have a license agreement to

activate the mbrace service. Make surethat your system is activated and ready foruse. To register, press the ï MB Info callbutton. If any of the steps mentioned arenot carried out, the system may not beactivated.If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephonehotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer

Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at

1-888-923-8367

Shortly after successfully registering with thembrace service (Canada: TELEAID), a user IDand password will be sent to you by post. USAonly: you can use this password to log ontothe mbrace area under "Owners Online" athttp://www.mbusa.com.The mbrace system is available if:Rit has been activated and is operationalRthe corresponding mobile phone network

is available for transmitting data to theCustomer CenterRa service subscription is availableRthe starter battery is sufficiently charged

i Determining the location of the vehicle ona map is only possible if:RGPS reception is available.Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to

the Customer Assistance Center.

350 FeaturesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es


The mbrace systemTo adjust the volume during an mbrace call,proceed as follows:X Press the W or X button on the

multifunction steering wheel.orX Use the volume controller of the audio

system/COMAND.The mbrace system provides variousservices, e.g.:Rautomatic and manual emergency callRRoadside Assistance callRMB Info callUSA only: you can find information and adescription of all available features under"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

System self-testAfter you have switched on the ignition, thesystem carries out a self-diagnosis.A malfunction in the system has beendetected if one of the following occurs:RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does

not come on during the system self-test.RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside

Assistance button does not light up duringself-diagnosis of the system.RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call

button does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system.RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the

following buttons continues to light up redafter the system self-diagnosis:- SOS button- the F Roadside Assistance call

button- the ï MB Info call buttonRThe mbrace Inoperative or mbrace Service Not Activated messageappears in the multifunction display afterthe system self-diagnosis.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlinedabove, the system may not operate asexpected. In the event of an emergency, helpwill have to be summoned by other means.Have the system checked at the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contactthe following service hotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance

Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at

1-888-923-8367

Emergency call

Important safety notes! You must have a license agreement to

activate the mbrace service. Make surethat your system is activated and ready foruse. To register, press the ï MB Info callbutton. If any of the steps mentioned arenot carried out, the system may not beactivated.If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephonehotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer


1-888-923-8367

General notesAn emergency call is dialed automatically ifan air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device istriggered.

i You cannot end an automaticallytriggered emergency call yourself.

An emergency call can also be initiatedmanually.As soon as the emergency call has beeninitiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button

Features 351

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z


flashes. The Connecting Call messageappears in the multifunction display.The audio output is muted.Once the connection has been made, theCall Connected message appears in themultifunction display.All important information on the emergencyis transmitted, for example:RCurrent location of the vehicle (as

determined by the GPS system)RVehicle identification numberRInformation on the severity of the accidentShortly after the emergency call has beeninitiated, a voice connection is automaticallyestablished between the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center and the vehicleoccupants.RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the

Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter attempts to get more informationon the emergency.RIf there is no response from the vehicle

occupants, an ambulance is immediatelysent to the vehicle.

The mbrace system has not been able toinitiate an emergency call if no voiceconnection to the Response Center has beenestablished. This can occur, for example, ifthe relevant mobile phone network is notavailable. The indicator lamp in the SOSbutton flashes continuously.The Call Failed message appears in themultifunction display and must be confirmed.In this case, seek assistance by other means.

Making an emergency callG WARNINGIt can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,even if you have pressed the SOS button in anemergency if:Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the

vehicle, e.g. if there is a fire after anaccidentRthe vehicle is on a dangerous section of

roadRthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be

seen by other road users, particularly whendark or in poor visibility conditions

There is a risk of an accident and injury.Leave the vehicle immediately in this orsimilar situations as soon as it is safe to doso. Move to a safe location along with othervehicle occupants. In such situations, securethe vehicle in accordance with nationalregulations, e. g. with a warning triangle.

X To initiate an emergency call manually: press cover : briefly to open.

X Press SOS button ; briefly.The indicator lamp in SOS button ;flashes until the emergency call isconcluded.

X Wait for a voice connection to theMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter.

X After the emergency call, close cover :.

i If the mobile phone network is notavailable, mbrace is not able to make anemergency call. If you leave the vehicle

352 FeaturesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

immediately after pressing the SOS button,you do not know if mbrace has successfullymade the emergency call. In this situation,seek additional assistance by other means.

Roadside Assistance button

X Press Roadside Assistance button :.This initiates a call to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center. The indicatorlamp in Roadside Assistance button :flashes while the call is active. TheConnecting Call message appears onthe multifunction display. The audio outputis muted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Connected message appears in themultifunction display.If a cellular phone network is available andthere is sufficient GPS reception, the mbracesystem transmits data to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center, for example:RCurrent location of the vehicleRVehicle identification number

i The display of the audio system orCOMAND shows that an mbrace call isactive. During the call, you can change tothe navigation menu by pressing the NAVIbutton on COMAND, for example.Voice output is not available.

A voice connection is established betweenthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter and the vehicle occupants.From the vehicle remote malfunctiondiagnosis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer

Assistance center can ascertain the nature ofthe problem (Y page 357).The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or arranges for your vehicleto be transported to the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. You may be chargedfor services such as repair work and/ortowing. Further details are available in yourmbrace manual.

i The mbrace system failed to initiate aRoadside Assistance call if:Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside

Assistance call button : is flashingcontinuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-

Benz Customer Assistance Center wasestablished.

This may be because the correspondingmobile phone network is not available.The Call Failed message appears in themultifunction display.

X To end a call: press the ~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding button for ending

a phone call on the audio system or onCOMAND.

MB Info call button

Features 353

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

X Press MB Info call button :.This initiates a call to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center. The indicatorlamp in MB Info call button : flashes whilethe connection is being made. TheConnecting Call message appears onthe multifunction display. The audio systemis muted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Connected message appears in themultifunction display.If a cellular phone network is available andthere is sufficient GPS reception, the mbracesystem transmits data to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center, for example:RCurrent location of the vehicleRVehicle identification number

i The display of the audio system orCOMAND shows that an mbrace call isactive. During the call, you can change tothe navigation menu by pressing the NAVIbutton on COMAND, for example.Voice output is not available.

A voice connection is established betweenthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter and the vehicle occupants. You canobtain information on how to operate yourvehicle's systems, on the location of thenearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center,and on further products and services offeredby Mercedes-Benz USA.USA only: you can find further information onthe mbrace system under "Owners Online" athttp://www.mbusa.com.

i The mbrace system failed to initiate anMB Info call if:Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call

button : is flashing continuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-

Benz Customer Assistance Center wasestablished.

This may be because the correspondingmobile phone network is not available.

The Call Failed message appears in themultifunction display.

X To end a call: press the ~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding button for ending

a phone call on the audio system or onCOMAND.

Call priorityWhen service calls are active, e.g. RoadsideAssistance or MB Info calls, an emergencycall can still be initiated. In this case, anemergency call will take priority and overrideall other active calls.The indicator lamp of the respective buttonflashes until the call is ended. An emergencycall can only be terminated by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.All other calls can be ended by pressing:Rthe ~ button on the multifunction

steering wheelRthe corresponding button on the audio

system or on COMAND for ending atelephone call

i If an mbrace call is initiated, audio outputis muted. The mobile phone is no longerconnected to COMAND. However, if youwould like to use your mobile phone, do soonly when the vehicle is stationary and in asafe location.

Downloading destinations in COMAND

Downloading destinationsDestination Download gives you access to adata bank with over 15 million Points ofInterest (POIs). These can be downloaded onthe navigation system in your vehicle. If youknow the destination, the address can bedownloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain thelocation of Points of Interest (POIs)/important destinations in the vicinity.

354 FeaturesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es


Furthermore, you can download routes withup to 20 way points.You are prompted to confirm route guidanceto the address entered.The system calculates the route andsubsequently starts the route guidance withthe address entered.

i If you select No, the address can be storedin the address book.

i The Destination Download function isavailable if the corresponding mobilephone network is available and datatransfer is possible.

i You can only use the DestinationDownload function if the vehicle isequipped with a navigation system.

Route AssistanceThis service is part of the mbrace PLUSPackage and cannot be purchasedseparately.

i You can also use the Route Assistancefunction if your vehicle is not equipped witha navigation system.

Within the framework of this service, youreceive a professional and reliable form ofnavigation support without having to leaveyour vehicle.The customer service representative finds asuitable route depending on your vehicle'scurrent position and the desired destination.You will then be guided live through thecurrent route section.

Search & Send

General notesi To use "Search & Send", your vehicle

must be equipped with mbrace and anavigation system. You must also have anmbrace service subscription.

"Search & Send" is a destination entryservice. A destination address which is foundon Google Maps® can be transferred via

mbrace directly to your vehicle's navigationsystem.

Specifying and sending the destinationaddressX Go to the website http://

www.maps.google.com and enter adestination address into the entry field.

X To send the destination address to the e-mail address of your mbrace account: click on the correspondingbutton.

i Example:If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then'Mercedes-Benz', the destination addresswill be sent to your vehicle.

X When the "Send" dialog window appears:In the relevant field, enter the e-mailaddress which you specified whenactivating your mbrace account.

X Click "Send".

i Information on specific commands suchas "Address entry" or "Sending" can befound on the website.

Calling up destination addressesX Switch on the ignition.

The destination address is loaded into thevehicle's navigation system.A display message appears, askingwhether navigation should be started.

X Select Yes by sliding XVY and turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The system calculates the route andsubsequently starts the route guidancewith the address entered.

i If you select No, the address can be storedin the address book.

i If you have sent more than onedestination address, each individualdestination must be confirmed separately.

i Destination addresses are loaded in thesame order as the order in which they were

Features 355

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

http://www.maps.google.com

http://www.maps.google.com

sent. If you have multiple Mercedes-Benzvehicles with mbrace and active mbraceaccounts:if multiple vehicles are registered under thesame e-mail address, the destination willbe sent to all the vehicles.

Vehicle remote openingYou can use the vehicle remote opening if youhave unintentionally locked your vehicle anda replacement SmartKey is not available. Thevehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center.The vehicle can be immediately openedremotely within four days of the ignition beingturned off. After this time, the remote openingmay be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After30 days the vehicle can no longer be openedremotely.X Contact the following service hotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer


1-888-923-8367You will be asked for your password.

X Return to your vehicle at the time agreedupon with the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center.

USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can beopened via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"

sectionRthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,

Blackberry)To do this, you will need your identificationnumber and password.

i Vehicle remote opening is only possible ifthe corresponding mobile phone networkis accessible.

Vehicle remote closingThe remote closing feature can be used whenyou have forgotten to lock the vehicle and youare no longer nearby. The vehicle can then belocked by the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center.The vehicle can be immediately remotelylocked within four days of the ignition beingturned off. After this time, the remote closingmay be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After30 days the vehicle can no longer be closedremotely.X Contact the following service hotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer


1-888-923-8367You will be asked for your PIN.

The next time you are inside the vehicle andyou switch on the ignition, the Doors Locked Remotely message appears in themultifunction display.USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can belocked via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"

sectionRthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,

Blackberry)To do this, you will need your identificationnumber and password.

i The vehicle remote closing feature isavailable when the relevant mobile phonenetwork is available and data connection ispossible.

356 FeaturesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

Stolen vehicle recovery serviceIf your vehicle has been stolen:X Notify the police.

The police will issue a numbered incidentreport.

X This number will be forwarded to theMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter together with your PIN.The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter then attempts to locate the mbracesystem. The Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center contacts you and thelocal law enforcement agency if the vehicleis located. However, only the lawenforcement agency is informed of thelocation of the vehicle.

i If the anti-theft alarm system is activatedfor longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance center isautomatically informed.

Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosisWith the vehicle remote malfunctiondiagnosis (Vehicle Health Check), theCustomer Assistance center can provideimproved support for problems with yourvehicle. During an existing call, vehicle datais transferred to the Customer Assistancecenter. The customer service representativecan use the received data to decide what kindof assistance is required. You are then, forexample, guided to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service center or a recovery vehicle iscalled.If vehicle data needs to be transferred duringan MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call,this is initiated by the Customer Assistancecenter. You will see the Roadside Assistance Connected message in theCOMAND display. If the vehicle remotemalfunction diagnosis is able to be started,the Request for vehicle diagnosis received. Start vehicle diagnosis?message appears in the display.

X Press Yes to confirm the message.X If the Vehicle Diagnosis: Please switch on ignition. message appears:turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.

X If the Please follow the instructions received by phone and move your vehicle to a safe position. message appears: follow theinstructions of the customer servicerepresentative.The message in the display disappears.If you select Cancel, the vehicle remotemalfunction diagnosis is canceledcompletely.The vehicle operating state check begins.Meanwhile, the Vehicle diagnosis activated message appears.

When the check is finished, the Sending vehicle diagnosis data...(Voice connection may be interrupted during data transfer.) messageappears. The vehicle data can now be sent tothe Customer Assistance center.X Press OK to confirm the message.

The voice connection with the CustomerAssistance center is terminated.The Vehicle Diagnosis: Transferring data... appears.The vehicle data is sent to the CustomerAssistance center.

Depending on what the customer servicerepresentative agreed with you, the voiceconnection is re-established after the transferis complete. If necessary, you will becontacted at a later time by another means,e.g. by E-Mail or telephone.Further functions of the vehicle remotemalfunction diagnosis include, for example:Rtransfer of service data to the Customer

Assistance center. If a service is overdue,the COMAND display shows a message

Features 357

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

about various special offers at yourworkshop.Rmonthly status information E-Mail on oil

level, air pressure, maintenance, brakes,etc. If applicable, you will receiveinformation on special offers in the E-Mail.USA only: this information can also becalled up under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

Information on the data stored in the vehicle(Y page 28).Information on roadside assistance(Y page 25).

Downloading routesDownloading routes allows you to transferand save predefined routes in the navigationsystem. To do this, an SD memory card mustbe inserted into the COMAND system. If noSD memory card is inserted, you must insertthe card into the card slot on the COMANDsystem before saving.A route can be prepared and sent either by acustomer service representative or via thembrace portal on the Internet. Each route caninclude up to 20 way points. When a route hasbeen received by the navigation system, the'Route name' has been saved to memory card. Do you want to start route guidance? message appears on theCOMAND display. The route is saved to theSD memory card.X To start route guidance: select Yes.

An overview of the route is shown in thedisplay.

i If you select No, the saved route can becalled up later in the navigation menu.

X Select Start.Route guidance is started.

i Downloaded and saved data can be calledup again in COMAND.You can find further information in theseparate COMAND operating instructions.

Speed alertYou can define the upper speed limit, whichmust not be exceeded by the vehicle. If thisselected speed is exceeded by the vehicle, amessage will be sent to the CustomerAssistance center. The Customer Assistancecenter then forwards this information to you.You can select the way in which you receivethis information beforehand. Possible optionsinclude SMS, E-Mail or an automated call.The data which is sent to the CustomerAssistance center contains the followinginformation:Rthe location where the speed limit was

exceededRthe time at which the speed limit was

exceededRthe selected speed limit which was

exceeded

Geo fencingGeo fencing allows you to select areas whichthe vehicle should not enter or leave. You willbe informed if the vehicle crosses theboundaries of the selected areas. You canselect the way in which you receive thisinformation beforehand. Possible optionsinclude SMS, E-Mail or an automated call.The area can be determined as either a circleor a polygon with a maximum of ten corners.You can specify up to ten areassimultaneously. Different settings arepossible for each area.USA only: these settings can be called upunder "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info calland inform the customer servicerepresentative that you wish to activate geofencing.Currently inactive areas can be activated bySMS.

358 FeaturesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es





Triggering the vehicle alarmWith this function, you can trigger thevehicle's panic alarm via SMS. An alarmsounds and the exterior lighting flashes.Depending on the setting, the panic alarmlasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, thealarm switches off.

Garage door opener


G WARNINGWhen you operate or program the garage doorwith the integrated garage door opener,persons in the range of movement of thegarage door can become trapped or struck bythe garage door. There is a risk of injury.When using the integrated garage dooropener, always make sure that nobody iswithin the range of movement of the garagedoor.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaceswithout sufficient ventilation.

The HomeLink® garage door openerintegrated in the rear-view mirror allows youto operate up to three different door and gatesystems.Only operate garage doors using theintegrated garage door opener if:Rthey are equipped with a safety stop and

reverse feature, andRthey conform to the current U.S. safety

standards.When programming a garage door opener,park vehicle outside the garage.

i Certain garage door drives areincompatible with the integrated garage

door opener. If you have difficultyprogramming the integrated garage dooropener, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Alternatively, you can call the followingtelephone assistance services:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer

Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedesRCanada: Customer Service at

1-800-387-0100RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515

(free of charge)More information on HomeLink® and/orcompatible products is also availableonline at http://www.homelink.com.

i Notes on the declaration of conformity(Y page 27).

Programming

Programming buttonsObserve the "Important safety notes"(Y page 359).

Integrated garage door opener in the rear-viewmirror

Garage door remote control A is not part ofthe integrated garage door opener.X The first time before programming, clear

the integrated garage door opener memory(Y page 361).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

Features 359

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

http://www.homelink.com

X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? onthe integrated garage door opener.After a short time, indicator lamp : lightsup yellow.

i Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soonas button ;, = or ? is programmed forthe first time. If the selected button hasalready been programmed, indicatorlamp : will only light up yellow after tenseconds have elapsed.

X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicatorlamp : flashes yellow.

X Point garage door remote control Atowards buttons ; to ? on the rear-viewmirror at a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to20 cm).

i The required distance between remotecontrol A and the integrated garage dooropener depends on the garage door drivesystem. Several attempts might benecessary. You should test every positionfor at least 25 seconds before tryinganother position.

X Press and hold button B on remote controlA until indicator lamp : lights up green.If indicator lamp : lights up green orflashes, then programming has beensuccessful.

X Release button B on remote control A forthe garage door drive system.

X If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeatthe programming procedure for thecorresponding button on the rear-viewmirror. When doing so, vary the distancebetween remote control A and the rear-view mirror.

i If the indicator lamp flashes green aftersuccessful programming, the garage doorsystem is using a rolling code. Afterprogramming, you must synchronize thegarage door opener integrated in the rear-view mirror with the receiver of the garagedoor system.

Synchronizing the rolling codeObserve the "Important safety notes"(Y page 359).Your vehicle must be within reach of thegarage door or exterior gate drive. Make surethat neither your vehicle nor any persons/objects are present within the sweep of thedoor or gate.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock.X Press the program button of the door or

gate drive (see the door or gate driveoperating instructions, e.g. under"programming of additional remotecontrols").

i Usually, you now have 30seconds toinitiate the next step.

X Press previously programmed button ;,= or ? of the integrated garage dooropener until the door closes.The rolling code synchronization is thencomplete.

Notes on programming the remotecontrolCanadian radio frequency laws require a"break" (or interruption) of the transmissionsignals after broadcasting for a few seconds.Therefore, these signals may not last longenough for the integrated garage dooropener. The signal is not recognized duringprogramming. Comparable with Canadianlaw, some U.S. garage door openers alsofeature a "break".Proceed as follows:Rif you live in CanadaRif you have difficulties programming the

garage door opener (regardless of whereyou live) when using the programmingsteps

360 FeaturesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? onthe integrated garage door opener.After a short time, indicator lamp : lightsup yellow.

X Release the button.Indicator lamp : flashes yellow.

X Press button B of garage door remotecontrol A for two seconds, then release itfor two seconds.

X Press button B again for two seconds.X Repeat this sequence on button B of

remote control A until indicator lamp :lights up green.If indicator lamp : turns red, repeat theprocess.

X Continue with the other programmingsteps (see above).

Problems when programmingIf you are experiencing problemsprogramming the integrated garage dooropener on the rear-view mirror, take note ofthe following instructions:RCheck the transmitter frequency of garage

door drive remote control A. This canusually be found on the back of the remotecontrol.The integrated garage door opener iscompatible with devices that have unitswhich operate in the frequency range of280to 433MHz.RReplace the batteries in garage door

remote control A. This increases thelikelihood that garage door remote controlA will transmit a strong and precise signalto the integrated garage door opener in therear-view mirror.RWhen programming, hold remote controlA at varying distances and angles from thebutton that you are programming. Tryvarious angles at a distance between 2and12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same anglebut at varying distances.RIf another remote control for the same

garage door drive is available, repeat the

same programming steps with this remotecontrol. Before performing these steps,make sure that new batteries have beeninstalled in garage door drive remotecontrol A.RNote that some remote controls only

transmit for a limited amount of time (theindicator lamp on the remote control goesout). Press button B on remote controlA again before transmission ends.RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door

opener unit. This can improve signalreception/transmission.

Opening/closing the garage doorAfter it has been programmed, the integratedgarage door opener performs the function ofthe garage door system remote control.Please also read the operating instructionsfor the garage door system.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock.X Press button ;, = or ? which you have

programmed to operate the garage door.Garage door system with a fixed code:indicator lamp : lights up green.Garage door system with a rolling code:indicator lamp : flashes green.

i The transmitter will transmit a signal aslong as the button is pressed. Thetransmission is halted after a maximum often seconds and indicator lamp : lightsup yellow. Press button ;, = or ? againif necessary.

Clearing the memoryX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock.X Press buttons ; and ?.

The indicator lamp lights up yellow.X Press and hold buttons ; and ? until the

indicator lamp turns green.

Features 361

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

i Make sure that you clear the memory ofthe integrated garage door opener beforeselling the vehicle.

Compass

Calling up the compassInformation on operating the compass can befound in the separate COMAND OperatingInstructions.

Floormats

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicleis jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats.

Floormat on the driver's side (example)X Driver's seat/front-passenger seat:

slide the respective seat back.X Rear seats: slide the respective seat

forwards.X To install: place the floormat in the

footwell.X Press studs : onto retainers ;.

X To remove: pull the floormat fromretainers ;.

X Remove the floormat.

Infrared reflective windshield

The infrared reflecting glass prevents thevehicle interior from becoming too hot. It alsoblocks radio waves up into the gigahertzrange.To enable operation of radio-controlledequipment, e.g. toll recording systems, areason the windshield are permeable to radiowaves :. In these areas, you can installradio-controlled systems.These areas can best be seen from outsidethe vehicle by observing the light reflected offthe windshield.

362 FeaturesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

Useful information ............................ 364Engine compartment ........................ 364Maintenance ...................................... 368Care .................................................... 369

363

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Useful information



Engine compartment

Hood


G WARNINGIf the hood is unlatched, it may open up whenthe vehicle is in motion and block your view.There is a risk of an accident.Never unlatch the hood while driving.

G WARNINGWhen opening and closing the hood, it maysuddenly fall into the closed position. There isa risk of injury to persons within range ofmovement of the hood.Open and close the hood only when no one iswithin its range of movement.

G WARNINGCertain components in the enginecompartment, such as the engine, radiatorand parts of the exhaust system, can becomevery hot. Working in the engine compartmentposes a risk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine isoverheated or when there is a fire in theengine compartment could expose you to hotgases or other service products. There is arisk of injury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

G WARNINGThe engine compartment contains movingcomponents. Certain components, such asthe radiator fan, may continue to run or startagain suddenly when the ignition is off. Thereis a risk of injury.If you need to do any work inside the enginecompartment,Rswitch off the ignitionRnever reach into the area where there is a

risk of danger from moving components,such as the fan rotation areaRkeep clothing away from moving parts

G WARNINGThe ignition system and the fuel injectionsystem work under high voltage. If you touchcomponents which are under voltage, youcould get an electric shock. There is a risk ofinjury.Never touch components of the ignitionsystem or fuel injection system when theignition is switched on.

Opening the hood

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set in motion, you can be injuredby the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

364 Engine compartmentM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

! Make sure that the windshield wipers arenot folded away from the windshield. Youcould otherwise damage the windshieldwipers or the hood.

X Make sure that the windshield wipers areturned off.

X Pull release lever : on the hood.The hood is released.

X Reach into the gap, pull hood catchhandle ; up and lift the hood.If you lift the hood approximately15 inches (40cm) the hood is opened andheld open automatically by the gas-filledstruts.

Closing the hoodX Lower the hood and let it fall from a height

of approximately 8 in (20 cm).X Check that the hood has engaged properly.

If the hood can be raised slightly, it is notproperly engaged. Open it again and closeit with a little more force.

RadiatorVehicles with a diesel engine: do not coverthe radiator, for example with a winter frontor bug cover. The readings of the on-board-diagnostic system may otherwise beinaccurate. Some of these readings arerequired by law and must be accurate at alltimes.

Engine oil

General notesDepending on the driving style, the vehicleconsumes up to 0.9 US qts (0.8 l) of oil overa distance of 600 miles (1000 km). The oilconsumption may be higher than this whenthe vehicle is new or if you frequently drive athigh engine speeds.Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick maybe in a different location.When checking the oil level:Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.Rthe engine should be switched off for

approximately five minutes if the engine isat normal operating temperature.Rif the engine is not at normal operating

temperature, e.g. if the engine was onlystarted briefly: wait about 30 minutesbefore carrying out the measurement.

Engine compartment 365

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

Checking the oil level using the oildipstick

Example: vehicles with a gasoline engine

Example: vehicles with a diesel engineX Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide

tube.X Wipe off oil dipstick :.X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide

tube to the stop, and take it out again.If the level is between MIN mark = andMAX mark ;, the oil level is correct.

X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark= or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) ofengine oil.

Adding engine oil

G WARNINGIf engine oil comes into contact with hotcomponents in the engine compartment, itmay ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that engine oil is not spilled nextto the filler neck. Let the engine cool down

and thoroughly clean the engine oil off thecomponents before starting the engine.

H Environmental noteWhen adding oil, take care not to spill any. Ifoil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmfulto the environment.

! Only use engine oils and oil filters thathave been approved for vehicles with aservice system. You can obtain a list of theengine oils and oil filters tested andapproved in accordance with theMercedes-Benz Specifications for ServiceProducts at any Mercedes-Benz Servicecenter.Damage to the engine or exhaust system iscaused by the following:Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have

not been specifically approved for theservice systemRreplacing engine oil and oil filters after

the interval for replacement specified bythe service system has been exceededRusing engine oil additives.

! Do not add too much oil. adding too muchengine oil can result in damage to theengine or to the catalytic converter. Haveexcess engine oil siphoned off.

366 Engine compartmentM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

Example: engine oil capX Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove

it.X Add engine oil.

If the oil level is at or below the MIN markon the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter)of engine oil.

X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turnclockwise.Ensure that the cap locks into placesecurely.

X Check the oil level again with the oildipstick (Y page 366).

Further information on engine oil(Y page 449).

Additional service products

Checking coolant level

G WARNINGThe engine cooling system is pressurized,particularly when the engine is warm. Whenopening the cap, you could be scalded by hotcoolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury.Let the engine cool down before opening thecap. Wear eye and hand protection whenopening the cap. Open the cap slowly half aturn to allow pressure to escape.

X Park the vehicle on a level surface.Only check the coolant level when thevehicle is on a level surface and the enginehas cooled down.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 157).On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press theStart/Stop button twice (Y page 158).

X Check the coolant temperature gauge inthe multifunction display.The coolant temperature must be below158 ‡ (70 †).

X Turn the SmartKey to position0 (Y page 157) in the ignition lock.

X Slowly turn cap : half a turn counter-clockwise to allow excess pressure toescape.

X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise andremove it.If the coolant is at the level of marker bar= in the filler neck when cold, there isenough coolant in coolant expansiontank ;.If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in(1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the fuelfiller neck when warm, there is enoughcoolant in expansion tank ;.

X If necessary, add coolant that has beentested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as faras it will go.

For further information on coolant, see(Y page 451).

Engine compartment 367

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

Adding washer fluid to the windshieldwasher system/headlamp cleaningsystem

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate is highlyflammable. If it comes into contact with hotengine components or the exhaust system itcould ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washerconcentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

Example: washer fluid reservoir

Example: washer fluid reservoir in AMG vehiclesX To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.X Add the premixed washer fluid.X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck

until it engages.The washer fluid reservoir is used for both thewindshield washer system and the headlampcleaning system.Further information on windshield washerfluid/antifreeze (Y page 452).

Maintenance

ASSYST PLUS

Service messageThe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayinforms you of the next service due date.Information on the type of service and serviceintervals (see the separate MaintenanceBooklet).You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or athttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

i The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not show any information on theengine oil level. Observe the notes on theengine oil level (Y page 365).

The multifunction display shows a servicemessage for several seconds, e.g.:RNext Service A in .. DaysRService A DueRService A Exceeded by ... DaysDepending on the operating conditions of thevehicle, the remaining time or distance untilthe next service due date is displayed.The letter A or B, possibly in connection witha number or another letter, shows the type ofservice. A stands for a minor service and B fora major service.You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not take into account any periods oftime during which the battery isdisconnected.Maintaining the time-dependent serviceschedule:X Note down the service due date displayed

in the multifunction display beforedisconnecting the battery.

orX After reconnecting the battery, subtract

the battery disconnection periods from theservice date shown on the display.

368 MaintenanceM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are


Hiding a service messageX Press the % or a button on the

steering wheel.

Displaying service messagesX Switch on the ignition.X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.X Press the 9 or : button to select theASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm bypressing the a button.The service due date appears in themultifunction display.

Information about Service

Resetting the ASSYST PLUS serviceinterval display! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval

display has been inadvertently reset, thissetting can be corrected at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.Have service work carried out as describedin the Maintenance Booklet. This mayotherwise lead to increased wear anddamage to the major assemblies or thevehicle.

A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will resetthe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayafter the service work has been carried out.You can also obtain further information onmaintenance work, for example.

Special service requirementsThe specified maintenance interval takes onlythe normal operation of the vehicle intoaccount. Under arduous operating conditionsor increased load on the vehicle,maintenance work must be carried out morefrequently, for example:Rregular city driving with frequent

intermediate stopsRif the vehicle is primarily used to travel

short distances

Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor roadsurfacesRif the engine is often left idling for long

periodsUnder these or similar conditions, have, forexample, the air filter, engine oil and oil filterreplaced or changed more frequently. Underarduous operating conditions, the tires mustbe checked more often. Further informationcan be obtained at a qualified specialistworkshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

Driving abroadAn extensive Mercedes-Benz Service networkis also available in other countries. You canobtain further information from anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Care

General notes

H Environmental noteDispose of empty packaging and cleaningcloths in an environmentally responsiblemanner.

! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use anyof the following:Rdry, rough or hard clothsRabrasive cleaning agentsRsolventsRcleaning agents containing solventsDo not scrub.Do not touch the surfaces or protectivefilms with hard objects, e.g. a ring or icescraper. You could otherwise scratch ordamage the surfaces and protective film.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, you

Care 369

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

should drive for a few minutes aftercleaning. Braking heats the brake discs andthe brake pads/linings, thus drying them.The vehicle can then be parked.

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition forretaining the quality in the long term.Use care products and cleaning agentsrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Washing the vehicle and cleaning thepaintwork

Automatic car wash

G WARNINGBraking efficiency is reduced after washingthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.After the vehicle has been washed, brakecarefully while paying attention to the trafficconditions until full braking power is restored.


! Never clean your vehicle in a TouchlessAutomatic Car Wash as these use specialcleaning agents. These cleaning agents candamage the paintwork or plastic parts.

! Make sure that:Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroof

are fully closed.Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off

(the OFF button has been pressed).Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position

0.Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged.

! In car washes with a towing mechanism,make sure that the automatic transmission

is in transmission position N, otherwise thevehicle could be damaged.RVehicles with a SmartKey:

Do not remove the SmartKey from theignition lock. Do not open the driver'sdoor or front-passenger door when theengine is switched off. Otherwise, theautomatic transmission selects parkposition P automatically and locks thewheels. You can prevent this by shiftingthe automatic transmission to Nbeforehand.RVehicles with KEYLESS-GO:

Do not open the driver's door or front-passenger door when the engine isswitched off. Otherwise, the automatictransmission selects park position Pautomatically and locks the wheels.

Observe the following to make sure that theautomatic transmission stays in position N:X Make sure the vehicle is stationary and the

ignition is switched off.X Turn the SmartKey to position

2 (Y page 157) in the ignition lock.Use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO.

X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Shift the automatic transmission to

position N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the

SmartKey in the ignition lock.You can wash the vehicle in an automatic carwash from the very start.If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it beforecleaning it in an automatic car wash.After using an automatic car wash, wipe offwax from the windshield and the wiperblades. This will prevent smears and reducewiping noises caused by residue on thewindshield.

370 CareM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

Washing by handIn some countries, washing by hand is onlyallowed at specially equipped washing bays.Observe the legal requirements in allcountries concerned.X Do not use hot water and do not wash the

vehicle in direct sunlight.X Use a soft sponge to clean.X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car

shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a

gentle jet of water.X Do not point the water jet directly towards

the air inlets.X Use plenty of water and rinse out the

sponge frequently.X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry

thoroughly with a chamois.X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the

paintwork.When using the vehicle in winter, remove alltraces of road salt deposits carefully and assoon as possible.

Power washers

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components.Components damaged in this way may failunexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replacedimmediately.

! Always maintain a distance of at least11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and thepower washer nozzle. Information aboutthe correct distance is available from theequipment manufacturer.Move the power washer nozzle aroundwhen cleaning your vehicle.

Do not aim directly at any of the following:RtiresRdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.Relectrical componentsRbatteryRconnectorsRlightsRsealsRtrimRventilation slotsDamaged seals or electrical componentscan lead to leaks or failures.

Cleaning the paintwork! Do not affix:RstickersRfilmsRmagnetic plates or similar itemsto painted surfaces. You could otherwisedamage the paintwork.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affectedby corrosion and damage caused byinadequate care cannot always be completelyrepaired. In such cases, visit a qualifiedspecialist workshop.X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,

while avoiding rubbing too hard.X Soak insect remains with insect remover

and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse

off the treated areas afterwards.X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,

oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gentlywith a cloth soaked in petroleum ether orlighter fluid.

X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.X Use silicone remover to remove wax.If water no longer forms "beads" on the paintsurface, use the paint care productsrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This is the case approximately every

Care 371

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

three to five months, depending on theclimate conditions and the care product used.If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or ifthe paint has become dull, the paint cleanerrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz should be used.Do not use these care products in the sun oron the hood while the hood is hot.X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB

Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage tothe paintwork quickly and provisionally.

Matte finish care! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy

wheels. Polishing causes the finish toshine.

! The following may cause the paint tobecome shiny and thus reduce the matteeffect:RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable

materials.RFrequent use of car washes.RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight.

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing orpolishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g.wax. These products are only suitable forhigh-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicleswith matte finish leads to considerablesurface damage (shiny, spotted areas).Always have paintwork repairs performedat a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

! Do not use wash programs with a hot waxtreatment under any circumstances.

Observe these notes if your vehicle has aclear matte finish. This will help you to avoiddamage to the paintwork due to incorrecttreatment.These notes also apply to light alloy wheelswith a clear matte finish.

i The vehicle should preferably be washedby hand using a soft sponge, car shampooand plenty of water.

i Use only insect remover and car shampoofrom the range of recommended andapproved Mercedes-Benz care products.

Cleaning the vehicle parts

Cleaning the wheels! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products

to remove brake dust. This could damagewheel bolts and brake components.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes aftercleaning. Braking heats the brake discs andthe brake pads/linings, thus drying them.The vehicle can then be parked.

Cleaning the windows

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,solvents or cleaning agents containingsolvents to clean the inside of the windows.Do not touch the insides of the windowswith hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper orring. There is otherwise a risk of damagingthe windows.

! Clean the water drainage channels of thewindshield and the rear window at regularintervals. Deposits such as leaves, petalsand pollen may under certaincircumstances prevent water from draining

372 CareM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

away. This can lead to corrosion damageand damage to electronic components.

X Clean the inside and outside of thewindows with a damp cloth and a cleaningproduct that is recommended andapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning wiper blades

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise,the wiper blade could be damaged.

! Do not clean wiper blades too often anddo not rub them too hard. Otherwise, thegraphite coating could be damaged. Thiscould cause wiper noise.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windshield could be damaged ifthe wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms away fromthe windshield.

X Carefully clean the wiper blades with adamp cloth.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms back againbefore switching on the ignition.

Cleaning the exterior lighting! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning

cloths which are suitable for plastic lightlenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents orcleaning cloths could scratch or damagethe plastic light lenses.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the exteriorlighting using a wet sponge and a mildcleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz carshampoo or cleaning cloths.

Mirror turn signals! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning

cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaningcloths could scratch or damage the plasticlenses of the mirror turn signals.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turnsignals in the exterior mirror housing usinga wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaningcloths.

Cleaning the sensors! If you clean the sensors with a power

washer, make sure that you keep adistance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) betweenthe vehicle and the power washer nozzle.Information about the correct distance isavailable from the equipmentmanufacturer.

X Clean sensors : of the driving systemswith water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Cleaning the rear view camera! Do not clean the camera lens and the area

around the rear view camera with a powerwasher.

Care 373

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

X Use clear water and a soft cloth to cleancamera lens :.

Cleaning the exhaust pipe! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-

based cleaning agents such as sanitarycleansers or wheel cleaners.

Impurities combined with the effects of roadgrit and corrosive environmental factors maycause flash rust to form on the surface. Youcan restore the original shine of the exhaustpipe by cleaning it regularly, especially inwinter and after washing.X Clean the exhaust pipe with a chrome care

product tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the trailer tow hitch

H Environmental noteDispose of rags soaked in oil and grease in anenvironmentally responsible manner.

! Do not clean the ball coupling with apower washer. Do not use solvents.

! Observe the note on care provided by thetrailer manufacturer.

The ball coupling must be cleaned if itbecomes dirty or corroded.X Remove rust on the ball of the ball coupling,

e.g. with a wire brush.X Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or

a brush.X After cleaning, lightly oil or grease ball

coupling :.X Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch is

working properly.

i You can also have the maintenance workon the ball coupling and the trailer tow hitchcarried out by a qualified specialistworkshop.

Interior care

Cleaning the display! For cleaning, do not use any of the

following:Ralcohol-based thinner or gasolineRabrasive cleaning agentsRcommercially-available household

cleaning agentsThese may damage the display surface. Donot put pressure on the display surfacewhen cleaning. This could lead toirreparable damage to the display.

374 CareM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

X Before cleaning the display, make sure thatit is switched off and has cooled down.

X Clean the display surface using acommercially available microfiber clothand TFT/LCD display cleaner.

X Dry the display surface using a drymicrofiber cloth.

Cleaning Night View Assist Plus

G WARNINGAlways remember that your primaryresponsibility is to drive the vehicle. The drivermust always concentrate on the road. Foryour safety and the safety of others, stop thevehicle before trying to clean fogged-upwindows or to clean the window in front of theNight View Assist Plus camera.Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle coversa distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) persecond.

! Never clean the camera lens. Whencleaning the field of vision of the drivingsystems, make sure that you do not sprayglass cleaner on the camera lens. If thecamera lens is dirty, visit a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X Fold down the camera cover by recess :.

X Use a soft cloth to clean the windshield infront of camera ;.

Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNINGCare products and cleaning agents containingsolvents cause surfaces in the cockpit tobecome porous. As a result, plastic parts maycome loose in the event of air bagdeployment. There is a risk of injury.Do not use any care products and cleaningagents to clean the cockpit.

! Do not affix the following to plasticsurfaces:RstickersRfilmsRscented oil bottles or similar itemsYou can otherwise damage the plastic.

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellentor sunscreen to come into contact with theplastic trim. This maintains the high-qualitylook of the surfaces.

X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-freecloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaningproducts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.The surface may change color temporarily.Wait until the surface is dry again.

Care 375

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

Cleaning the steering wheel and gear orselector leverX Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use

leather care agents that have beenrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning genuine wood and trimelements! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents

such as tar remover, wheel cleaners,polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a riskof damaging the surface.

! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.The trim pieces have a chrome look but aremostly made of anodized aluminum andcan lose their shine if chrome polish isused. Use a damp, lint-free cloth insteadwhen cleaning the trim pieces.If the chrome-plated trim pieces are verydirty, you can use a chrome polish. If youare unsure as to whether the trim piecesare chrome-plated or not, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces witha damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibercloth.

X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaningproducts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the seat covers

General notes! Do not use microfiber cloths to clean

genuine leather, artificial leather orAlcantara® covers. If used often, these candamage the cover.

i Note that regular care is essential toensure that the appearance and comfort ofthe covers is retained over time.

Genuine leather seat covers! To retain the natural appearance of the

leather, observe the following cleaninginstructions:RClean genuine leather covers carefully

with a damp cloth and then wipe thecovers down with a dry cloth.RMake sure that the leather does not

become soaked. It may otherwisebecome rough and cracked.ROnly use leather care agents that have

been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from aqualified specialist workshop.

Leather is a natural product.It exhibits natural surface characteristics, forexample:RDifferences in the textureRSigns of stretching and markingRSlight nuances of colorThese are characteristics of leather and notmaterial defects.

Seat covers of other materials! Observe the following when cleaning:RClean artificial leather covers with a cloth

moistened with a solution containing1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).RClean cloth covers with a microfiber

cloth moistened with a solutioncontaining 1% detergent (e.g. dishwashing liquid). Rub carefully and alwayswipe entire seat sections to avoid leavingvisible lines. Leave the seat to dryafterwards. Cleaning results depend onthe type of dirt and how long it has beenthere.RClean Alcantara® covers with a damp

cloth. Make sure that you wipe entireseat sections to avoid leaving visiblelines.

376 CareM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNINGSeat belts can become severely weakened ifbleached or dyed. This could cause the seatbelts to tear or fail, for instance, in the eventof an accident. This poses an increased riskof injury or fatal injury.Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

! Do not clean the seat belts using chemicalcleaning agents. Do not dry the seat beltsby warming them above 176 ‡ (80 †) orplacing them in direct sunlight.

X Use clean, lukewarm water and soapsolution.

Cleaning the roof lining and carpetsX Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush

or dry shampoo.X Carpets: use the carpet and textile

cleaning agents recommended andapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

Care 377

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

378

Useful information ............................ 380Where will I find...? ........................... 380Flat tire .............................................. 381Battery (vehicle) ................................ 385Jump-starting .................................... 389Towing and tow-starting .................. 391Fuses .................................................. 394

379

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

Useful information



Where will I find...?

First-aid kit

X Open the tailgate.X Remove first-aid kit : from the parcel net.i Check the expiration date on the first-aid

kit at least once a year. Replace thecontents if necessary, and replace missingitems.

Vehicle tool kit

General notesThe vehicle tool kit can be found in thestowage well under the cargo compartmentfloor.

i Apart from certain country-specificvariations, the vehicles are not equippedwith a tire-change tool kit. Some tools for

changing a wheel are specific to thevehicle. For more information on whichtools are required to perform a wheelchange on your vehicle, consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop.Tools required for changing a wheel mayinclude, for example:RJackRWheel chockRLug wrenchRRatchet wrenchRAlignment bolt

Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit

Vehicle tool kit (example): Lug wrench; Jack= Alignment bolt? Tire inflation compressorA Tire sealant filler bottleB Folding wheel chockC Towing eyeD Ratchet wrench

Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 383).

380 Where will I find...?Br

eakd

own

assi

stan

ce

Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergencyspare wheel

Example: vehicles with AIRMATIC and trailer towhitch: Folding wheel chock; Lug wrench= Alignment bolt? Ball coupling of the trailer tow hitchA Towing eyeB JackC Ratchet wrenchX Lift the cargo compartment floor up

(Y page 342).X Remove the "Minispare" emergency spare

wheel (Y page 437).

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicleYour vehicle may be equipped with:RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat

properties) (Y page 382)Vehicle preparation is not necessary onvehicles with MOExtended tires.Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 380)Ran emergency spare wheel (only for certain

countries) (Y page 436)Information on changing/mounting a wheel(Y page 421).

X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground, as far away as possible fromtraffic.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away

(Y page 179).X If possible, bring the front wheels into the

straight-ahead position.X Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package:

make sure that highway level is selected(Y page 209).

X Switch off the engine.X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove

the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the

driver's door.The on-board electronics now have status0. This is the same as the key having beenremoved.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove theStart/Stop button from the ignition lock(Y page 158).

X All occupants must get out of the vehicle.Make sure that they are not endangered asthey do so.

X Make sure that no one is near the dangerarea while a wheel is being changed.Anyone who is not directly assisting in thewheel change should, for example, standbehind the barrier.

X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention totraffic conditions when doing so.

X Close the driver's door.X Unload heavy luggage.

i Only operate the tire inflation compressorusing a 12 V socket, even if the ignition isturned off (Y page 347).An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-board voltage does not drop too low. If theon-board voltage is too low, the power tothe sockets is automatically cut. Thisensures that there is sufficient power tostart the engine.

Flat tire 381

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)

General notesWith MOExtended tires (tires with run flatcharacteristics), you can continue to driveyour vehicle even if there is a total loss ofpressure in one or more tires. The affectedtire must not show any clearly visible damage.You can recognize MOExtended tires by theMOExtended marking which appears on thesidewall of the tire. You will find this markingnext to the tire size designation, the load-bearing capacity and the speed index(Y page 415).MOExtended tires may only be used inconjunction with an active tire pressure losswarning system or with an active tire pressuremonitor.If the pressure loss warning message appears in the multifunction display:RObserve the instructions in the display

messages (Y page 310).RCheck the tire for damage.RIf driving on, observe the following notes.The maximum driving distance isapproximately 50 miles (80 km) when thevehicle is partially laden and approximately18 miles (30 km) when the vehicle is fullyladen.In addition to the vehicle load, the drivingdistance possible depends upon:RspeedRroad conditionRoutside temperatureThe driving distance possible in run-flat modemay be reduced by extreme drivingconditions/maneuvers, or it can be increasedthrough a moderate style of driving.The maximum permissible distance whichcan be driven in run-flat mode is counted fromthe moment the tire pressure loss warningappears in the multifunction display.

You must not exceed a maximum speed of50 mph (80 km/h).

i When replacing one or all tires, make surethat you use only tires:Rof the size specified for the vehicle andRmarked "MOExtended"If a tire has gone flat and cannot bereplaced with a MOExtended tire, astandard tire may be used as a temporarymeasure. Make sure that you use theproper size and type (summer or wintertire).

i Vehicles with MOExtended tires are notequipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.It is therefore recommended that youadditionally equip your vehicle with aTIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do notfeature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from aqualified specialist workshop.


G WARNINGWhen driving in emergency mode, the drivingcharacteristics deteriorate, e.g. whencornering, accelerating quickly and whenbraking. There is a risk of an accident.Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,off-road). This applies in particular to a ladenvehicle.Stop driving in emergency mode if:Ryou hear banging noises.Rthe vehicle starts to shake.Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.RESP® is intervening constantly.Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.After driving in emergency mode, have thewheel rims checked at a qualified specialistworkshop with regard to their further use. Thedefective tire must be replaced in every case.

382 Flat tireBr

eakd

own

assi

stan

ce

TIREFIT kit

Using the TIREFIT kitTIREFIT is a tire sealant.TIREFIT can be used to seal small puncturesof up to 0.16 inches (4 mm), particularly onthe tire tread. You can use TIREFIT at outsidetemperatures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).

TIREFIT sticker, 2-partX Do not remove any foreign objects which

have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws ornails.

X Remove the tire sealant bottle, theaccompanying TIREFIT sticker and the tireinflation compressor from the stowage wellunderneath the cargo compartment floor(Y page 380).

X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker withinthe driver's field of vision.

X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near thevalve on the wheel with the defective tire.

X Pull plug ? with the cable and hose A outof the housing.

X Screw hose A onto flange B of tiresealant bottle :.

X Place tire sealant bottle : headdownwards into recess ; of the tireinflation compressor.

X Remove the cap from valve C on the faultytire.

X Screw filler hose D onto valve C.

X Insert connector ? into a 12 V socket inyour vehicle.Observe the notes on sockets(Y page 347).


X Press on/off switch = on the tire inflationcompressor to I.The tire inflation compressor is switchedon. The tire is inflated.

i First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire.The pressure can briefly rise toapproximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).Do not switch off the tire inflation compressor during this phase.

X Allow the tire inflation compressor to runfor five minutes. The tire should then haveattained a pressure of at least 180 kPa(1.8 bar/26 psi).

If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)has been attained after five minutes:(Y page 384).

Flat tire 383

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

Z

If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)has not been attained after five minutes:(Y page 384).

i If tire sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. Itcan then be removed like a layer of film.If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant,have them cleaned with perchloroethyleneat a dry cleaner as soon as possible.

Tire pressure not reachedIf a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) hasnot been achieved after five minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of

the faulty tire.X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse

approximately 30 ft (10 m).X Pump up the tire again.

After a maximum of five minutes the tirepressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter the specified time, the tire is too badlydamaged. The tire sealant cannot repair thetire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tirepressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and drivingcharacteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Tire pressure reached

G WARNINGA tire temporarily sealed with tire sealantimpairs the driving characteristics and is notsuitable for higher speeds. There is a risk ofaccident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleaccordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceedthe specified maximum speed with a tire thathas been repaired using tire sealant.

! Residue from the tire sealant may comeout of the filler hose after use. This couldcause stains.Therefore, place the filler hose in the plasticbag which contained the TIREFIT kit.

H Environmental noteHave the used tire sealant bottle disposed ofprofessionally, e.g. at a qualified specialistworkshop.

If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)has been attained after five minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of

the faulty tire.X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire

inflation compressor.X Pull away immediately.

The maximum speed for a tire sealed withtire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upperpart of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixedto the instrument cluster in the driver'sfield of vision.

X Stop after driving for approximately tenminutes and check the tire pressure withthe tire inflation compressor.The tire pressure must now be at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter driving for a short period, the tire is toobadly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repairthe tire in this instance. Damaged tires and atire pressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and drivingcharacteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi) (for the values,see the Tire and Loading Information

384 Flat tireBr

eakd

own

assi

stan

ce

placard on the B-pillar on the driver's sideor tire pressure table on the fuel filler flap).

X To increase the tire pressure: switch onthe tire inflation compressor.

E Pressure release buttonF Pressure gaugeX To reduce the tire pressure: press

pressure release button E on the fillerhose.

X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tireinflation compressor.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialistworkshop and have the tire changed there.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced assoon as possible at a qualified specialistworkshop.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced everyfour years at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Battery (vehicle)

Important safety notesSpecial tools and expert knowledge arerequired when working on the battery, e.g.removal and installing. You should thereforehave all work involving the battery carried outat a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGWork carried out incorrectly on the batterycan, for example, lead to a short circuit anddamage your vehicle's electronic system. This

can disrupt driving safety systems such asABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP®

(Electronic Stability Program).RIf ABS malfunctions, the wheels can lock

during braking. This limits the steerabilityof the vehicle when braking and the brakingdistance may increase. There is a risk ofaccident.RIf ESP® malfunctions, the vehicle will not be

stabilized if it starts to skid or a wheel startsto spin. There is a risk of accident.

You should therefore have all work involvingthe battery carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

G WARNINGElectrostatic build-up can lead to the creationof sparks, which could ignite the highlyexplosive gases of a battery. There is a risk ofan explosion.Before handling the battery, touch the vehiclebody to remove any existing electrostaticbuild-up.

The highly flammable gas mixture forms whencharging the battery as well as when jump-starting.Always make sure that neither you nor thebattery is electrostatically charged. There isa build-up of electrostatic charge, e.g.:Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic

fibersRdue to friction between clothing and seatsRif you push or pull the battery across the

carpet or other synthetic materialsRif you wipe the battery with a cloth.

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a batteryproduces hydrogen gas. If a short circuitoccurs or sparks are created, the hydrogengas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.

Battery (vehicle) 385

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

Z

RMake sure that the positive terminal of aconnected battery does not come intocontact with vehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on a

battery.RIt is important that you observe the

described order of the battery terminalswhen connecting and disconnecting abattery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the

battery poles with identical polarity areconnected.RIt is particularly important to observe the

described order when connecting anddisconnecting the jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the battery

terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not leanover the battery. Keep children away frombatteries. Wash battery acid immediately withwater and seek medical attention.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualifiedspecialist workshop or aspecial collection point forused batteries.

! Have the battery checked regularly at aqualified specialist workshop.

Observe the service intervals in theMaintenance Booklet or contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop for more information.

! You should have all work involving thebattery carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop. In the exceptional case that it isnecessary for you to disconnect the batteryyourself, make sure that:Ryou switch off the engine and remove the

SmartKey. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, ensure that the ignition is switchedoff. Check that all the indicator lamps inthe instrument cluster are off. Otherwise,electronic components, such as thealternator, may be damaged.Ryou first remove the negative terminal

clamp and then the positive terminalclamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.Otherwise, the vehicle's electronicsystem may be damaged.Rthe transmission is locked in position P

after disconnecting the battery. Thevehicle is secured against rolling away.You can then no longer move the vehicle.

The battery and the cover of the positiveterminal clamp must be installed securelyduring operation.

Comply with safety precautions and takeprotective measures when handlingbatteries.

WARNING

Fire, open flames and smoking areprohibited when handling thebattery. Avoid creating sparks.

Battery acid is caustic. Avoidcontact with the skin, eyes orclothing.Wear suitable protective clothing,in particular gloves, an apron anda face mask.

386 Battery (vehicle)Br

eakd

own

assi

stan

ce

Immediately rinse acid splashesoff with clean water. Consult adoctor if necessary.Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you only use batterieswhich have been tested and approved foryour vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Thesebatteries provide increased impactprotection to prevent vehicle occupants fromsuffering acid burns should the battery bedamaged in the event of an accident.In order for the battery to achieve themaximum possible service life, it must alwaysbe sufficiently charged.The vehicle battery, like other batteries, candischarge over time if you do not use thevehicle. In this case, have the batterydisconnected at a qualified specialistworkshop. You can also charge the batterywith a charger recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified specialist workshopfor further information.Have the battery charge level checked morefrequently if you use the vehicle mainly forshort trips or if you leave it standing idle fora lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialistworkshop if you wish to leave your vehicleparked for a long period of time.

i Remove the SmartKey if you park thevehicle and do not require any electricalconsumers. The vehicle will then use verylittle energy, thus conserving batterypower.

Charging the battery

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosivegases can escape from the battery. There is arisk of an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting.Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not leanover the battery. Keep children away frombatteries. Wash battery acid immediately withwater and seek medical attention.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze attemperatures below freezing point. Whenjump-starting the vehicle or charging thebattery, gases can escape from the battery.There is a risk of an explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out beforecharging it or jump-starting.

! Only use battery chargers with amaximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

! Only charge the battery using the jump-starting connection point.

Never charge a battery still installed in thevehicle unless a battery charger unitapproved by Mercedes-Benz is being used. Abattery charger unit specially adapted forMercedes-Benz vehicles and tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz is available as anaccessory. It permits the charging of thebattery in its installed position. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center for furtherinformation and availability. Charge thebattery in accordance with the separateinstructions for the battery charger.The jump-starting connection point is in theengine compartment (Y page 389).

Battery (vehicle) 387

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

Z

Read the battery charger's operatinginstructions before charging the battery.X Open the hood (Y page 364).X Connect the battery charger to the positive

terminal and ground point in the sameorder as when connecting the donorbattery in the jump-starting procedure(Y page 389).

388 Battery (vehicle)Br

eakd

own

assi

stan

ce

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of apositive terminal and an earth point, in the engine compartment.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water andseek medical attention.

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a riskof an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparksare created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with

vehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting

and disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting

the jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting thevehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

G WARNINGNon-combusted fuel can collect in the exhaust system and ignite. There is a risk of fire. Avoidrepeated and lengthy starting attempts.

! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could bedamaged by the non-combusted fuel.

Jump-starting 389

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

Z

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumpercables. Observe the following points:RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,

jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected

for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.Make sure that:Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.Rwhen the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminal

clamp do not come into contact with other metal sections.Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.

These parts move when the engine is started and while it is running.X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it (Y page 157). On vehicles

with KEYLESS-GO, make sure the ignition is switched off (Y page 158). All indicator lampsin the instrument cluster must be off.

X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.).X Open the hood (Y page 364).

Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting device.

390 Jump-startingBr

eakd

own

assi

stan

ce

X Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow.X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B

using the jumper cable, always begin with positive terminal ; on your own vehicle first.X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using

the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to donor battery B first.X Start the engine.X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.X First, remove the jumper cables from earth point A and negative terminal ?, then from

positive clamp ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your ownvehicle first.

X Close cover : of positive terminal ; after removing the jumper cables.X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at anyqualified specialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting


G WARNINGFunctions relevant to safety are restricted orno longer available if:Rthe engine is not running.Rthe brake system or the power steering is

malfunctioning.Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply

or the vehicle's electrical system.If your vehicle is being towed, much moreforce may be necessary to steer or brake.There is a risk of an accident.In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,make sure that the steering moves freely.

G WARNINGIf the weight of the vehicle to be towed or tow-started is greater than the permissible grossweight of your vehicle:Rthe towing eye could detach itselfRthe vehicle/trailer combination could

rollover.

There is a risk of an accident.When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,its weight should not be greater than thepermissible gross weight of your vehicle.

G WARNINGThe vehicle is braked when the HOLD functionor DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Therefore,deactivate HOLD and DISTRONIC PLUS if thevehicle is to be towed.

! Make sure that the electric parking brakeis released. If the electric parking brake isfaulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop.

! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at thetowing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle couldbe damaged.

! Do not use the towing eye for recovery,this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt,recover the vehicle with a crane.

! When towing, pull away slowly andsmoothly. If the tractive power is too high,the vehicles could be damaged.

Towing and tow-starting 391

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

Z

! When towing vehicles with KEYLESS-GO,use the key instead of the Start/Stopbutton. Otherwise, the automatictransmission may shift to position P whenthe driver's or front-passenger door areopened, which could lead to damage to thetransmission.

! Do not tow with sling-type equipment.This could damage the vehicle.

! Vehicles with differential locks: makesure the differential locks are in automaticmode. When towing, the differential locksmust not be switched on. The transmissionmay otherwise be damaged.

! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of30 miles (50km). The towing speed of30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded.If the vehicle has to be towed more than30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must beraised and transported.

! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, itsweight must not exceed the maximumpermissible gross vehicle weight of yourvehicle.

Information on your vehicle's gross vehicleweight rating can be found on the vehicleidentification plate (Y page 443).It is better to have the vehicle transportedthan to have it towed.If the vehicle has suffered transmissiondamage, have it transported on a transporteror trailer.The automatic transmission must be inposition N when the vehicle is being towed.The battery must be connected and charged.Otherwise, you:Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in

the ignition lockRcannot release the electric parking brakeRcannot shift the automatic transmission to

position Ni Deactivate the automatic locking feature

(Y page 276). You could otherwise be

locked out when pushing or towing thevehicle.

Installing/removing the towing eye

Installing the towing eye

Example: towing eye mounting covers: Front cover; Back cover

Vehicles with a trailer tow hitch: if possible,connect the towbar to the trailer tow hitch(Y page 253).The brackets for the screw-in towing eyes arelocated in the bumpers. They are at the frontand at the rear, under the covers.X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle

tool kit (Y page 380).X To open the cover at the front: press the

mark on cover : inwards in the directionof the arrow.

X To open the cover at the rear: insert aflat, blunt object into the cutout and levercover ; out of the bumper.

X Take cover : or ; off the opening.X Screw the towing eye in clockwise to the

stop and tighten it.

392 Towing and tow-startingBr

eakd

own

assi

stan

ce

Removing the towing eyeX Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it.X Attach cover : or ; to the bumper and

press until it engages.X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit.

Towing the vehicle with the rear axleraised

! The ignition must be switched off if youare towing the vehicle with the rear axleraised. Intervention by ESP® couldotherwise damage the brake system.

Only possible for vehicles without 4MATIC.X Switch on the hazard warning lamps

(Y page 124).X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the

ignition lock and remove the SmartKeyfrom the ignition lock.

X When leaving the vehicle, take theSmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO key with you.

When towing your vehicle with the rear axleraised, it is important that you observe thesafety instructions (Y page 391).

Towing a vehicle with both axles onthe ground

It is important that you observe the safetyinstructions when towing away your vehicle(Y page 391).The automatic transmission automaticallyshifts to position P when you open the driver'sor front-passenger door or when you removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock.

In order to ensure that the automatictransmission stays in position N when towingthe vehicle, you must observe the followingpoints:X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and

the SmartKey in the ignition lock is inposition 0.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use theSmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button(Y page 158).

X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Shift the automatic transmission to

position N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the

ignition lock.X Switch on the hazard warning lamps

(Y page 124).i In order to signal a change of direction

when towing the vehicle with the hazardwarning lamps switched on, use thecombination switch as usual. In this case,only the indicator lamps for the direction oftravel flash. After resetting thecombination switch, the hazard warninglamp starts flashing again.

Transporting the vehicle! Only lash the vehicle down by the wheels

or wheel rims, not by parts of the vehiclesuch as axle or steering components.Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.

The towing eyes or trailer tow hitch can beused to pull the vehicle onto a trailer ortransporter if you wish to transport it.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock.X Shift the automatic transmission to

position N.

Towing and tow-starting 393

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

Z

As soon as the vehicle is loaded:X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by

applying the electric parking brake.X Shift the automatic transmission to

position P.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the

ignition lock and remove it.X Secure the vehicle.

Information on 4MATIC vehicles! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed

with either the front or the rear axle raised,as doing so will damage the transmission.

If the vehicle has transmission damage ordamage to the front or rear axle, have ittransported on a transporter or trailer.In the event of damage to the electrical systemIf the battery is defective, the automatictransmission will be locked in position P. Toshift the automatic transmission to positionN, you must provide power to the vehicle'selectrical system in the same way as whenjump-starting (Y page 389).Have the vehicle transported on a transporteror trailer.

Recovering a vehicle that has becomestuck

! Pull away smoothly, slowly, and in astraight line when pulling out a vehicle thathas become stuck. Excessive tractivepower could damage the vehicles.

If the drive wheels get trapped on loose ormuddy ground, recover the vehicle with theutmost care, especially so if the vehicle isladen.Never attempt to recover a vehicle with atrailer attached.Pull out the vehicle backwards, if possible,using the tracks it made when it becamestuck.

Tow-starting (emergency enginestarting)

! Vehicles with an automatic transmissionmust not be tow-started. You couldotherwise damage the automatictransmission.

You can find information on "Jump-starting"at (Y page 389).

Fuses


G WARNINGOnly use fuses that have been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles and that have thecorrect fuse rating for the systemsconcerned. Do not attempt to repair or bridgefaulty fuses. Using fuses that have not beenapproved or attempting to repair or bridgefaulty fuses could cause the fuse to beoverloaded and result in a fire. Have the causetraced and rectified at a qualified specialistworkshop.

! For the fuse boxes in the enginecompartment and under the rear benchseat, only use fuses with the suffix "S".Otherwise, components or systems couldbe damaged.

The fuses in your vehicle serve to close downfaulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all thecomponents on the circuit and their functionsstop operating.Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses ofthe same rating, which you can recognize bythe color and value. The fuse ratings are listedin the fuse allocation chart.If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have thecause traced and rectified at a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

394 FusesBr

eakd

own

assi

stan

ce

Before changing a fuseX Secure the vehicle against rolling away

(Y page 179).X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the

ignition lock and remove it (Y page 157).On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make surethe ignition is switched off (Y page 158).All indicator lamps in the instrument clustermust be off.

The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:Rfuse box on the front-passenger side of the

dashboardRfuse box in the engine compartment on the

right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewedin the direction of travelRFuse box under the rear bench seatThe fuse allocation chart is located in the fusebox under the rear bench seat (Y page 395).

Dashboard fuse box! Do not use a pointed object such as a

screwdriver to open the cover in thedashboard. You could damage thedashboard or the cover.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

X To open: pull cover : outwards in thedirection of the arrow and remove it.

X To close: clip in cover : on the front ofthe dashboard.

X Fold cover : inwards until it engages.

Fuse box in the engine compartment! Make sure that no moisture can enter the

fuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

X Open the hood.X Remove any existing moisture from the

fuse box using a dry cloth.X To open: open clamps ;.X Fold up cover : in the direction of the

arrow and remove it.X To close: check whether the seal is seated

correctly in cover :.X Insert cover : at the side of the fuse box

into the retainers.X Fold down cover : and close clamps ;.X Close the hood.

Fuse box under the rear bench seat! Make sure that no moisture can enter the

fuse box when the cover is open.

Fuses 395

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

Z

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses or the covercould be damaged by the rear bench seat.

X Fold the right-hand rear bench seat forward(Y page 335).

X To open: lift and fold out carpet : in thedirection of the arrow.

X Release clamps ; by pressing them in thedirection of the arrow.

X Fold cover = up in the direction of thearrow and remove it.

i The fuse allocation chart is located undercover =.

X To close: insert cover = into the retainerson the side of the fuse box.

X Fold down cover = until clamps ; engageaudibly.

X Fold the right-hand rear bench seat back(Y page 335).

396 FusesBr

eakd

own

assi

stan

ce

Useful information ............................ 398Important safety notes .................... 398Operation ........................................... 398Winter operation ............................... 400Tire pressure ..................................... 402Loading the vehicle .......................... 410All about wheels and tires ............... 413Changing a wheel ............................. 421Wheel and tire combinations ........... 426Emergency spare wheel ................... 436

397

Whe

els

and

tires

Useful information




G WARNINGIf wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,the wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay be damaged. There is a risk of anaccident.Always replace wheels and tires with thosethat fulfill the specifications of the originalpart.When replacing wheels, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmodelWhen replacing tires, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmanufacturerRmodel

G WARNINGA flat tire severely impairs the driving,steering and braking characteristics of thevehicle. There is a risk of accident.Tires without run-flat characteristics:Rdo not drive with a flat tire.Rimmediately replace the flat tire with your

emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, orconsult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tires with run-flat characteristics:Rpay attention to the information and

warning notices on MOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics).

Accessories that are not approved for yourvehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not beingused correctly can impair the operatingsafety.Before purchasing and using non-approvedaccessories, visit a qualified specialistworkshop and inquire about:RsuitabilityRlegal stipulationsRfactory recommendationsInformation on the dimensions and types ofwheels and tires for your vehicle can be foundin the "Wheel/tire combinations" section(Y page 426).Information on air pressure for the tires onyour vehicle can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading

Information placard on the B-pillar(Y page 410)Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler

flap (Y page 174)Rin the "Tire pressure" sectionRunder "Tire pressure" (Y page 402)

Operation

Information on drivingIf the vehicle is heavily loaded, check the tirepressures and correct them if necessary.While driving, pay attention to vibrations,noises and unusual handling characteristics,e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate thatthe wheels or tires are damaged. If yoususpect that a tire is defective, reduce yourspeed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soonas possible to check the wheels and tires fordamage. Hidden tire damage could also becausing the unusual handling characteristics.If you find no signs of damage, have the tires

398 OperationW

heel

s an

d tir

es

and wheels checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.When parking your vehicle, make sure thatthe tires do not get deformed by the curb orother obstacles. If it is necessary to drive overcurbs, speed humps or similar elevations, tryto do so slowly and at an obtuse angle.Otherwise, the tires, particularly thesidewalls, may be damaged.

Regular checking of wheels and tires

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflationpressure loss. As a result, you could losecontrol of your vehicle. There is a risk ofaccident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

Regularly check the wheels and tires of yourvehicle for damage at least once a month, aswell as after driving off-road or on roughroads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss oftire pressure. Pay particular attention todamage such as:Rcuts in the tiresRpuncturesRtears in the tiresRbulges on tiresRdeformation or severe corrosion on wheelsRegularly check the tire tread depth and thecondition of the tread across the whole widthof the tire (Y page 399). If necessary, turnthe front wheels to full lock in order to inspectthe inner side of the tire surface.All wheels must have a valve cap to protectthe valve against dirt and moisture. Do notmount anything onto the valve other than thestandard valve cap or other valve capsapproved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.Do not use any other valve caps or systems,e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems.

Regularly check the pressure of all the tiresparticularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tirepressure as necessary (Y page 402).Observe the notes on the emergency sparewheel (Y page 436).The service life of tires depends on thefollowing factors amongst other things:RDriving styleRTire pressureRDistance covered

Tire tread

G WARNINGInsufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.This means that on wet road surfaces, the riskof hydroplaning increases, in particular wherespeed is not adapted to suit the drivingconditions. There is a risk of accident.If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tiresmay exhibit different levels of wear atdifferent locations on the tire tread. Thus, youshould regularly check the tread depth andthe condition of the tread across the entirewidth of all tires.Minimum tire tread depth for:RSummer tires: â in (3 mm)RM+S tires: ã in (4 mm)For safety reasons, replace the tires beforethe legally prescribed limit for the minimumtire tread depth is reached.

Operation 399

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Bar indicator : for tread wear is integratedinto the tire tread.Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required bylaw. Six indicators are positioned on the tiretread. They are visible once the tread depthis approximately á in (1.6 mm). If this is thecase, the tire is so worn that it must bereplaced.

Selecting, mounting and replacingtiresROnly mount tires and wheels of the same

type and make.Exception: it is permissible to install adifferent type or make in the event of a flattire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics" section(Y page 382).ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto

the wheels.RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for

the first 60 miles (100 km). They only reachtheir full performance after this distance.RDo not drive with tires which have too little

tread depth, as this significantly reducesthe traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).RReplace the tires after six years at the

latest, regardless of wear.Observe the notes on the emergency sparewheel (Y page 436).

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)

With MOExtended tires (tires with run flatcharacteristics), you can continue to driveyour vehicle even if there is a total loss ofpressure in one or more tires.MOExtended tires may only be used inconjunction with an active tire pressure losswarning system or with an active tire pressuremonitor and on wheels specifically tested byMercedes-Benz.

Notes on driving with MOExtended tires witha flat tire (Y page 382).

i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tiresare not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at thefactory. It is therefore recommended thatyou additionally equip your vehicle with aTIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do notfeature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from aqualified specialist workshop.

Winter operation

General notesHave your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 421).

Driving with summer tiresAt temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summertires lose elasticity and therefore traction andbraking power. Change the tires on yourvehicle to M+S tires. Using summer tires atvery cold temperatures could cause cracks toform, thereby damaging the tirespermanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot acceptresponsibility for this type of damage.

M+S tires

G WARNINGM+S tires with a tire tread depth of less thanã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winterand do not provide sufficient traction. Thereis a risk of an accident.M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ãin (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.

At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), usewinter tires or all-season tires. Both types oftire are identified by the M+S marking.

400 Winter operationW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Only winter tires bearing the i snowflakesymbol in addition to the M+S markingprovide the best possible grip in wintry roadconditions.Only these tires will allow driving safetysystems such as ABS and ESP® to functionoptimally in winter. These tires have beendeveloped specifically for driving in snow.Use M+S tires of the same make and tread onall wheels to maintain safe handlingcharacteristics.Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed specified for the M+S tires you havemounted.Once the winter tires are mounted:X Check the tire pressures (Y page 405).X Restart the tire pressure monitor

(Y page 406).X Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire

pressure loss warning system(Y page 406).

For more information on driving with theemergency spare wheel, see (Y page 436).

Snow chains

G WARNINGIf snow chains are installed to the frontwheels, they may drag against the vehiclebody or chassis components. This couldcause damage to the vehicle or the tires.There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Rnever install snow chains to the front

wheelsRalways install snow chains in pairs to the

rear wheels.

! You must drive at raised vehicle level(height 1) if snow chains have beeninstalled. The vehicle may otherwise bedamaged.

! Vehicles with Adaptive Damping System (ADS): do not use the sports mode

if you have installed snow chains. Thevehicle may otherwise be damaged.

! On some tire sizes there is not enoughspace for snow chains. To avoid damage tothe vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel andtire combinations" section under "Tires andwheels".

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you only use snow chainsthat have been specially approved for yourvehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of acorresponding standard of quality.If you intend to mount snow chains, pleasebear the following points in mind:ROnly use snow chains when driving on

roads completely covered by snow.Remove the snow chains as soon aspossible when you come to a road that isnot snow-covered.RDo not exceed the maximum permissible

speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).RLocal regulations may restrict the use of

snow chains. Observe the appropriateregulations if you wish to mount snowchains.RSnow chains may not be mounted on all

wheel/tire combinations. Permissiblewheel-tire combinations (Y page 426).

i You may wish to deactivate ESP® whenpulling away with snow chains installed(Y page 71). This way you can allow thewheels to spin in a controlled manner,achieving an increased driving force(cutting action).

For more information on driving with anemergency spare wheel, see (Y page 436).

Winter operation 401

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specifications


G WARNINGTires with tire pressures that are too low ortoo high are associated with the followinghazards:Rthey can burst, in particular if the vehicle is

heavily laden or when driven at highspeeds.Rthe tires can wear excessively and/or

unevenly, which can severely impair tiretraction.Rthe driving, steering and braking

characteristics may be severely impaired.There is a risk of accident.Follow recommended tire inflation pressuresand check the pressure of all the tiresincluding the spare wheel:Rmonthly, at leastRif the load changesRbefore beginning a long journeyRunder different operating conditions, e.g.

off-road drivingIf necessary, correct the tire pressure.

i The specifications on the sample Tire andLoading Information placard and tirepressure tables are examples. Tirepressure specifications are vehicle-specificand may deviate from the data shown here.The tire pressure specifications that arevalid for your vehicle can be found on theTire and Loading Information placard andtire pressure table on the vehicle.

General notesThe recommended tire pressures for the tiresmounted at the factory can be found on thelabels described here.Operation with the emergency spare wheel(Y page 436).

Operation with a trailer: the applicablevalue for the rear tires is the maximum tirepressure value stated in the table inside thefuel filler flap.Further information on tire pressures can beobtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire and Loading Information placard

: Recommended tire pressures

The Tire and Loading Information placard ison the B-pillar on the driver's side of thevehicle (Y page 410).The Tire and Loading Information placardcontains the recommended tire pressures forcold tires. The recommended tire pressuresare valid for the maximum permissible loadand up to the maximum permissible vehiclespeed.

Tire pressure tableThe tire pressure table is on the inside of thefuel filler flap.

Example: tire pressure table for all tires permittedfor this vehicle by the factory

402 Tire pressureW

heel

s an

d tir

es

The tire pressure table contains therecommended pressures for cold tires forvarious operating conditions, i.e. differingload and speed conditions.

Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions

If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tirepressure information following is only validfor that tire size. The load conditions "partiallyladen" and "fully laden" are defined in thetable for different numbers of occupants andamounts of luggage. The actual number ofseats may differ.

Some tire pressure tables show only the rimdiameters instead of the full tire size, e.g.R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire sizeand can be found on the tire sidewall(Y page 415).If the tire pressures have been set to thelower values for lighter loads and/or lowerroad speeds, the pressures should be resetto the higher values:Rif you want to drive with an increased load

and/orRif you want to drive at higher road speeds.

i The tire pressures for increased loadsand/or higher road speeds, shown in thetire pressure table, may have a negativeeffect on driving comfort.

If the tire pressure is not set correctly, thiscan lead to an excessive build up of heat anda sudden loss of pressure.For more information, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNINGIf the tire pressure drops repeatedly, thewheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tirepressure that is too low may result in a tireblow-out. There is a risk of an accident.RCheck the tire for foreign objects.RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the

valve is leaking.If you are unable to rectify the damage,contact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you fit unsuitable accessories onto tirevalves, the tire valves may be overloaded andmalfunction, which can cause tire pressureloss. Due to their design, retrofitted tirepressure monitors keep the tire valve open.This can also result in tire pressure loss. Thereis a risk of an accident.Only screw the standard valve cap or othervalve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz foryour vehicle onto the tire valve.

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check thetire pressure. The outer appearance of a tiredoes not permit any reliable conclusion aboutthe tire pressure. On vehicles equipped withthe electronic tire pressure monitoringsystem, the tire pressure can be checkedusing the on-board computer.The tire temperature and pressure increasewhen the vehicle is in motion. This isdependent on the driving speed and the load.

Tire pressure 403

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Therefore, you should only correct tirepressures when the tires are cold.The tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked without

direct sunlight on the tires for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has not been driven further

than 1 mile (1.6 km)The tire temperature changes depending onthe outside temperature, the vehicle speedand the tire load. If the tire temperaturechanges by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressurechanges by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account whenchecking the pressure of warm tires. Onlycorrect the tire pressure if it is too low for thecurrent operating conditions. If you check thetire pressure when the tires are warm, theresulting value will be higher than if the tireswere cold. This is normal. Do not reduce thetire pressure to the value specified for coldtires. The tire pressure would otherwise betoo low.Observe the recommended tire pressures forcold tires:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard

on the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the inside of

the fuel filler flapRprinted in yellow on the rim of the

emergency/collapsible spare wheel(depending on vehicle equipment)

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflation

G WARNINGTires with pressure that is too low canoverheat and burst as a consequence. Inaddition, they also suffer from excessive and/or irregular wear, which can severely impairthe braking properties and the drivingcharacteristics. There is a risk of an accident.

Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires may:Roverheat, leading to tire defectsRhave an adverse effect on handling

characteristicsRwear quickly and unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption

Overinflation

G WARNINGTires with excessively high pressure can burstbecause they are damaged more easily byroad debris, potholes etc. In addition, theyalso suffer from irregular wear, which canseverely impair the braking properties and thedriving characteristics. There is a risk of anaccident.Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Overinflated tires may:Rincrease the braking distanceRhave an adverse effect on handling

characteristicsRwear quickly and unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on ride comfortRbe more susceptible to damage

Maximum tire pressures

: Example: maximum permissible tirepressure

404 Tire pressureW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Never exceed the maximum permissible tireinflation pressure. Always observe therecommended tire pressure for your vehiclewhen adjusting the tire pressure(Y page 402).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

Checking the tire pressures

Important safety notesObserve the notes on tire pressure(Y page 402).Information on air pressure for the tires onyour vehicle can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading

Information placard loading informationtable on the B-pillar (Y page 410)Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler

flapRin the "Tire pressure" sectionRunder "Tire pressure" (Y page 402)

Checking tire pressures manuallyTo determine and set the correct tirepressure, proceed as follows:X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to

be checked.X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto

the valve.X Read the tire pressure and compare it with

the recommended value on the Tire andLoading Information placard (Y page 402).

X If the tire pressure is too low, increase it tothe recommended value.

X If the tire pressure is too high, release airby pressing down the metal pin in the valve.Use the tip of a pen, for example. Then,check the tire pressure again using the tirepressure gauge.

X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.X Repeat these steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure loss warning system(Canada only)

General notesWhile the vehicle is in motion, the tirepressure loss warning system monitors theset tire pressure using the rotational speed ofthe wheels. This enables the system to detectsignificant pressure loss in a tire. If the speedof rotation of a wheel changes as a result ofa loss of pressure, a corresponding warningmessage will appear in the multifunctiondisplay.You can recognize the tire pressure losswarning by the Run Flat Indicator Active Press 'OK' to Restart messagewhich appears in the Serv. menu of themultifunction display. Information on themessage display can be found under"Restarting the tire pressure loss warningsystem" (Y page 406).

Important safety notesThe tire pressure warning system does notwarn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure.Observe the notes on the recommended tirepressure (Y page 402).The tire pressure loss warning does notreplace the need to regularly check the tirepressure. An even loss of pressure on severaltires at the same time cannot be detected bythe tire pressure loss warning system.The tire pressure monitor is not able to warnyou of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if thetire is penetrated by a foreign object. In theevent of a sudden loss of pressure, bring thevehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoidabrupt steering maneuvers.The function of the tire pressure loss warningsystem is limited or delayed if:Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle's

tires.Rroad conditions are wintry.Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.

Tire pressure 405

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style(cornering at high speeds or driving withhigh rates of acceleration).Ryou are towing a very heavy or large trailer.Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the

vehicle or on the roof).

Restarting the tire pressure losswarning systemRestart the tire pressure loss warning systemif you have:Rchanged the tire pressureRchanged the wheels or tiresRmounted new wheels or tiresX Before restarting, make sure that the tire

pressures are set properly on all four tiresfor the respective operating conditions.The recommended tire pressures can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillar on the driver's sideor the tire pressure table on the fuel fillerflap.The tire pressure loss warning system canonly give reliable warnings if you have setthe correct tire pressure. If an incorrect tirepressure is set, these incorrect values willbe monitored.

X Also observe the notes in the section on tirepressures (Y page 402).

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157).

X Press the = or ; button on thesteering wheel to select the Serv. menu.

X Press the 9 or : button to selectTire Pressure.

X Press the a button.The Run Flat Indicator active Restart with OK message appears in themultifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press the a button.

The Tire Pressure Now OK? messageappears in the multifunction display.

X Press the 9 or : button to selectYes.

X Press the a button.The Run Flat Indicator Restartedmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.After a teach-in period, the tire pressureloss warning system will monitor the settire pressures of all four tires.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the % button.orX If the Tire Pressure Now OK? message

appears, use the 9 or : button toselect Cancel.

X Press the a button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Tire pressure monitor

General notesIf a tire pressure monitor is installed, thevehicle's wheels have sensors that monitorthe tire pressures in all four tires. The tirepressure monitor warns you if the pressuredrops in one or more of the tires. The tirepressure monitor only functions if the correctsensors are installed on all wheels.Information on tire pressures is displayed inthe multifunction display. After a few minutesof driving, the current tire pressure of eachtire is shown in the Serv. menu of themultifunction display. For further informationon displaying this message, refer to the"Checking the tire pressure electronically"section (Y page 408).

406 Tire pressureW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Example: current tire pressure display


G WARNINGEach tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked at least once a monthwhen cold and inflated to the pressurerecommended by the vehicle manufactureron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the driver's door B-pillar or the tirepressure label on the inside of the fuel fillerflap. If your vehicle has tires of a different sizethan the size indicated on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard or the tire pressure label,you should determine the proper tire pressurefor those tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equipped with a tire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or more of yourtires are significantly underinflated.Accordingly, when the low tire pressuretelltale illuminates, you should stop and checkyour tires as soon as possible, and inflatethem to the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly underinflated tire causes the tireto overheat and can lead to tire failure.Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiencyand tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle'shandling and stopping ability.Please note that the TPMS is not a substitutefor proper tire maintenance, and it is thedriver's responsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if underinflation has notreached the level to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale.USA only:Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if the

system is not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with thelow tire pressure telltale. When the systemdetects a malfunction, the warning lamp willflash for approximately a minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. Thissequence will be repeated every time thevehicle is started as long as the malfunctionexists.When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,the system may not be able to detect or signallow tire pressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a variety ofreasons, including the installation ofincompatible replacement or alternate tiresor wheels on the vehicle that prevent theTPMS from functioning properly. Alwayscheck the TPMS malfunction telltale afterreplacing one or more tires or wheels on yourvehicle to ensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS tocontinue to function properly.

It is the driver's responsibility to set the tirepressure to that recommended for cold tireswhich is suitable for the operating situation(Y page 402). Note that the correct tirepressure for the current operating situationmust first be taught-in to the tire pressuremonitor. If there is a substantial loss ofpressure, the warning threshold for thewarning message is aligned to the referencevalues taught-in. Restart the tire pressuremonitor after adjusting the pressure of thecold tires (Y page 409). The currentpressures are saved as new reference values.As a result, a warning message will appear ifthe tire pressure drops significantly.The tire pressure monitor does not warn youof an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observethe notes on the recommended tire pressure(Y page 402).The tire pressure monitor is not able to warnyou of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if thetire is penetrated by a foreign object. In theevent of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the

Tire pressure 407

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoidabrupt steering maneuvers.The tire pressure monitor has a yellowwarning lamp in the instrument cluster forindicating pressure loss/malfunctions (USA)or pressure loss (Canada). Whether thewarning lamp flashes or lights up indicateswhether a tire pressure is too low or the tirepressure monitor is malfunctioning:Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the

tire pressure on one or more tires issignificantly too low. The tire pressuremonitor is not malfunctioning.RUSA only: if the warning lamp flashes for

around a minute and then remains litconstantly, the tire pressure monitor ismalfunctioning.

USA only: if there is a malfunction with thetire pressure monitor it can take more thanten minutes until the malfunction is shown bythe tire pressure warning lamp flashing forapproximately one minute and then lightingup continuously. When the malfunction hasbeen rectified, the tire pressure warning lampgoes out after a few minutes of driving.The tire pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from thosemeasured at a gas station with a pressuregauge. The tire pressures shown by the on-board computer refer to those measured atsea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressurevalues indicated by a pressure gauge arehigher than those shown by the on-boardcomputer. In this case, do not reduce the tirepressures.The operation of the tire pressure monitor canbe affected by interference from radiotransmitting equipment (e.g. radioheadphones, two-way radios) that may bebeing operated in or near the vehicle.

Checking the tire pressureelectronicallyX Make sure that the SmartKey is in position

2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157).X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Servicemenu.


X Press the a button.The current tire pressure of each tire isshown in the multifunction display.

If the vehicle has been parked for longer than20 minutes, the Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes message appears.After a teach-in process, the tire pressuremonitor automatically detects new wheels ornew sensors. As long as a clear allocation ofthe tire pressure value to the individualwheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Active display message is showninstead of the tire pressure display. The tirepressures are already being monitored.

i If an emergency spare wheel is mounted,the system may continue to show the tirepressure of the wheel that has beenremoved for a few minutes. If this occurs,note that the value displayed for theposition where the spare wheel is mountedis not the same as the current tire pressureof the emergency spare wheel.

408 Tire pressureW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Tire pressure monitor warningmessagesIf the tire pressure monitor detects a pressureloss in one or more tires, a warning messageis shown in the multifunction display. Awarning tone also sounds and the tirepressure warning lamp lights up in theinstrument cluster. Each tire that is affectedby a significant loss of pressure is highlightedin the pressure display.RIf the Correct Tire Pressure message

appears in the multifunction display, thetire pressure in at least one tire is too lowand must be corrected at the nextopportunity.RIf the Check Tires message appears in the

multifunction display, the tire pressure inone or more tires has dropped significantlyand the tires must be checked.RIf the Warning Tire Malfunction

message appears in the multifunctiondisplay, the tire pressure in one or moretires has dropped suddenly and the tiresmust be checked.

i If the wheel positions on the vehicle arerotated, the tire pressures may bedisplayed for the wrong positions for ashort time. This is rectified after a fewminutes of driving, and the tire pressuresare displayed for the correct positions.

Restarting the tire pressure monitorWhen you restart the tire pressure monitor,all existing warning messages are deleted andthe warning lamps go out. The monitor usesthe currently set tire pressures as thereference values for monitoring. In mostcases, the tire pressure monitor willautomatically detect the new referencevalues after you have changed the tirepressure. However, you can also definereference values manually as described here.The tire pressure monitor then monitors thenew tire pressure values.

X Set the tire pressure to the valuerecommended for the correspondingdriving situation on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard on the B-pillar on thedriver's side (Y page 402).Additional tire pressure values for differentloads can also be found on the tire pressuretable on the inside of the fuel filler flap(Y page 174).

X Make sure that the tire pressure is correcton all four wheels.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.

X Press the = or ; button on thesteering wheel to select the Serv. menu.


X Press the a button.The multifunction display shows thecurrent tire pressure for the individual tiresor the Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes message.

X Press the : button.The Use current pressures as new reference values message appears inthe multifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press the a button.

The Tire Press. Monitor Restartedmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.After driving for a few minutes, the systemchecks whether the current tire pressuresare within the specified range. The new tirepressures are then accepted as referencevalues and monitored.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the % button.

The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Tire pressure 409

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

G WARNINGOverloaded tires can overheat, causing ablowout. Overloaded tires can also impair thesteering and driving characteristics and leadto brake failure. There is a risk of accident.Observe the load rating of the tires. The loadrating must be at least half of the GAWR ofyour vehicle. Never overload the tires byexceeding the maximum load.

Two instruction labels on your vehicle showthe maximum possible load.(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard

is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. TheTire and Loading Information placardshows the maximum permissible numberof occupants and the maximumpermissible vehicle load. It also containsdetails of the tire sizes andcorresponding pressures for tiresmounted at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is on theB-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicleidentification plate informs you of thegross vehicle weight rating. It is made upof the vehicle weight, all vehicleoccupants, the fuel and the cargo. Youcan also find information about themaximum gross axle weight rating on thefront and rear axle.The maximum gross axle weight rating isthe maximum weight that can be carriedby one axle (front or rear axle). Neverexceed the maximum load or themaximum gross axle weight rating for thefront or rear axle.

: B-pillar, driver's side

Maximum permissible gross vehicleweight rating

X Specification for maximum gross vehicleweight : is listed in the Tire and LoadingInformation placard: "The combined weightof occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,load and luggage must not exceed thespecified value.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in theillustration are examples. The maximumpermissible gross vehicle weight rating isvehicle-specific and may differ from that inthe illustration. You can find the valid

410 Loading the vehicleW

heel

s an

d tir

es

maximum permissible gross vehicle weightrating for your vehicle on the Tire andLoading Information placard.

Number of seats

Maximum number of seats : indicates themaximum number of occupants allowed totravel in the vehicle. This information can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in theillustration are examples. The number ofseats is vehicle-specific and can differ fromthe details shown. The number of seats inyour vehicle can be found on the Tire andLoading Information placard.

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructionsThe following steps have been developed asrequired of all manufacturers under Title 49,Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575pursuant to the "National Traffic and MotorVehicle Safety Act of 1966".X Step 1: Locate the statement "The

combined weight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on

your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from XXXkilograms or XXX lbs.

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the "XXX" amountequals 1,400 lbs and there will be five150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and luggage loadcapacity is 650 lbs (1,400 – 750 (5 x 150)= 650 lbs).

X Step 5: Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on thevehicle. That weight may not safely exceedthe available cargo and luggage loadcapacity calculated in step 4.

Loading the vehicle 411

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Example: steps 1 to 3The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities withvarying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples usea maximum load of 1,500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sureyou are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and LoadingInformation placard (Y page 410).The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.Additional information when towing a trailer (Y page 253).Step 1

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Combined maximum weight of occupants and cargo (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard)

1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)

Step 2


Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants)

5 3 1

Distribution of the occupants

Front: 2Rear: 3

Front: 1Rear: 2

Front: 1

Weight of the occupants

Occupant 1:150 lbs (68 kg)Occupant 2:180 lbs (82 kg)Occupant 3:160 lbs (73 kg)Occupant 4:140 lbs (63 kg)Occupant 5:120 lbs (54 kg)

Occupant 1:200 lbs (91 kg)Occupant 2:190 lbs (86 kg)Occupant 3:150 lbs (68 kg)

Occupant 1:150 lbs (68 kg)

Gross weight of all occupants

750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)

412 Loading the vehicleW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Step 3


Permissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants)

1500 lbs (680 kg)Ò750 lbs (340 kg) =750 lbs (340 kg)



Vehicle identification plateEven if you have calculated the total cargocarefully, you should still make sure that thegross vehicle weight rating and the gross axleweight rating are not exceeded. Details canbe found on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle(Y page 410).Permissible gross vehicle weight: thegross weight of the vehicle, all passengers,load and trailer load/noseweight (ifapplicable) must not exceed the permissiblegross vehicle weight.Gross axle weight rating: the maximumpermissible weight that can be carried by oneaxle (front or rear axle).To ensure that your vehicle does not exceedthe maximum permissible values (grossvehicle weight and maximum gross axleweight rating), have your loaded vehicle(including driver, occupants, cargo, and fulltrailer load if applicable) weighed on asuitable vehicle weighbridge.

Trailer load/noseweightThe trailer load/noseweight affects the grossweight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached,the trailer load/noseweight is included in theload along with occupants and luggage. Thetrailer load/noseweight is usuallyapproximately 8% of the gross weight of thetrailer and its cargo.

All about wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards

Overview of Tire Quality GradingStandards

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards areU.S. government specifications. Theirpurpose is to provide drivers with uniformreliable information on tire performance data.Tire manufacturers have to grade tires usingthree performance factors: : tread weargrade, ; traction grade and = temperaturegrade. These regulations do not apply toCanada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in NorthAmerica are provided with the correspondingquality grading markings on the sidewall ofthe tire.Where applicable, the tire gradinginformation can be found on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and maximumtire width.

All about wheels and tires 413

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Example:RTreadwear grade: 200RTraction grade: AARTemperature grade: AAll passenger car tires must conform to thestatutory safety requirements in addition tothese grades.


TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedU.S. government course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-halftimes as well on the government test track asa tire graded 100.The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm, due to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate conditions.

Traction

G WARNINGThe traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damageto the drive train.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest,are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on a wet surface asmeasured under controlled conditions onspecified government test surfaces of asphaltand concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance.

The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icyroad is always lower than on dry roadsurfaces.You should pay special attention to roadconditions when temperatures are aroundfreezing point.Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimumtread depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four wintertires. Observe the legally required minimumtire tread depth (Y page 399). Winter tires canreduce the braking distance on snow-coveredsurfaces in comparison with summer tires.The braking distance is still much further thanon surfaces that are not icy or covered withsnow. Take appropriate care when driving.Further information on winter tires (M+Stires) (Y page 400).

Temperature

G WARNINGThe temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can causeexcessive heat build-up and possible tirefailure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest),B, and C. These represent the tire'sresistance to the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead to suddentire failure. The grade C corresponds to a levelof performance which all passenger car tiresmust meet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 109. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than the minimumrequired by law.

414 All about wheels and tiresW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Tire labeling

Overview

: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard(Y page 419)

; DOT, Tire Identification Number(Y page 418)

= Maximum tire load (Y page 417)? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 404)A ManufacturerB Tire material (Y page 418)C Tire size designation, load-bearing

capacity and speed index (Y page 415)D Load index (Y page 417)E Tire name

The markings described above are on the tirein addition to the tire name (salesdesignation) and the manufacturer's name.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity and speed rating

G WARNINGExceeding the stated tire load-bearingcapacity and the approved maximum speedcould lead to tire damage or the tire bursting.There is a risk of accident.

Therefore, only use tire types and sizesapproved for your vehicle model. Observe thetire load rating and speed rating required foryour vehicle.

: Tire width; Nominal aspect ratio in %= Tire code? Rim diameterA Load bearing indexB Speed rating

General: depending on the manufacturer'sstandards, the size imprinted in the tire wallmay not contain any letters or may containone letter that precedes the size description.If there is no letter preceding the sizedescription (as shown above): these arepassenger vehicle tires according toEuropean manufacturing standards.If "P" precedes the size description: these arepassenger vehicle tires according to U.S.manufacturing standards.If "LT" precedes the size description: theseare light truck tires according to U.S.manufacturing standards.If "T" precedes the size description: these arecompact emergency spare wheels at high tirepressure, to be used only temporarily in anemergency.Tire width: tire width : shows the nominaltire width in millimeters.Height-width ratio: aspect ratio ; is thesize ratio between the tire height and tirewidth and is shown as a percentage. The


Whe

els

and

tires

Z

aspect ratio is calculated by dividing the tirewidth by the tire height.Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type."R" represents radial tires; "D" representsdiagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radialtires.Optionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" inthe size description, depending on themanufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is thediameter of the bead seat, not the diameterof the rim flange. The rim diameter isspecified in inches (in).Load-bearing index: load-bearing index Ais a numerical code that specifies themaximum load-bearing capacity of a tire.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximumpermissible load can be found on thevehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillar on the driver's side(Y page 410).Example:The load bearing index 91 indicates amaximum load of 1356 lb (615 kg) that thetires can bear. For further information on themaximum tire load in kilograms and pounds,see (Y page 417).For further information on the load bearingindex, see "Load index" (Y page 417).Speed rating: speed rating B specifies theapproved maximum speed of the tire.


Regardless of the speed rating, alwaysobserve the speed limits. Drive carefully andadapt your driving style to the trafficconditions.Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

Index Speed rating

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)

ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149 mph (240 km/h) may have a “ZR”in the size description, depending on themanufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).The service specification is made up ofload-bearing index A and speed ratingB.RIf the size description of your tire includes

"ZR" and there are no servicespecifications, ask the tire manufacturer inorder to find out the maximum speed.If a service specification is available, themaximum speed is limited according to thespeed rating in the service specification.Example: 245/40 ZR 18 97 Y. In thisexample, "97 Y" is the service specification.The letter "Y" represents the speed ratingand the maximum speed of the tire islimited to 186 mph (300km/h).REvery tire that has a maximum speed of

more than 186 mph (300 km/h) must havea "ZR" in the size description and theservice specification must be given inparentheses. Example:275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). The speed rating "(Y)"indicates that the maximum speed of thetire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask thetire manufacturer about the maximumspeed.


heel

s an

d tir

es

All-weather tires and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S2 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S2 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S2 up to 130mph (210 km/h)

V M+S2 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

i Not all tires with the M+S marking providethe driving characteristics of winter tires.In addition to the M+S marking, winter tiresalso have the i snowflake symbol onthe tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfillthe requirements of the RubberManufacturers Association (RMA) and theRubber Association of Canada (RAC)regarding the tire traction on snow. Theyhave been especially developed for drivingon snow.

An electronic speed limiter prevents yourvehicle from exceeding the following speeds:Rall vehicles (except AMG vehicles):

130 mph (210 km/h)RAMG vehicles: 155 mph (250 km/h)RAMG vehicles with increased top speed:

174 mph (280 km/h)R

The speed rating of tires mounted at thefactory may be higher than the maximumspeed that the electronic speed limiterpermits.Make sure that your tires have the requiredspeed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. Therequired speed rating for your vehicle can befound in the "Tires" section (Y page 426).Further information about reading tire datacan be obtained from any qualified specialistworkshop.

Load index

In addition to the load bearing index, loadindex : may be imprinted after the lettersthat identify the speed index B on thesidewall of the tire (Y page 415).RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the

example above), represents a standardload (SL) tireRXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced

tireRLight Load: represents a light load tireRC, D, E: represents a load range that

depends on the maximum load that the tirecan carry at a certain pressure


Maximum load rating

Maximum tire load : is the maximumpermissible weight for which the tire isapproved.

2 or M+Si for winter tires.


Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximumpermissible load can be found on thevehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillar on the driver's side(Y page 410).


DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)U.S. tire regulations prescribe that every tiremanufacturer or retreader must imprint a TINin or on the sidewall of every tire produced.

The TIN is a unique identification number. TheTIN enables the tire manufacturers orretreaders to inform purchasers of recalls andother safety-relevant matters. It makes itpossible for the purchaser to easily identifythe affected tires.The TIN is made up of manufactureridentification code ;, tire size =, tire typecode ? and manufacturing date A.DOT (Department of Transportation): tiresymbol : indicates that the tire complieswith the requirements of the U.S. Departmentof Transportation.Manufacturer identification code:manufacturer identification code ; providesdetails on the tire manufacturer. New tireshave a code with two symbols. Retreadedtires have a code with four symbols.For further information about retreaded tires,see (Y page 426).

Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.Tire type code: tire type code ? can be usedby the manufacturer as a code to describespecific characteristics of the tire.Date of manufacture: date of manufactureA provides information about the age of atire. The first and second positions representthe week of manufacture, starting with "01"for the first calendar week. Positions threeand four represent the year of manufacture.For example, a tire that is marked with"3208", was manufactured in week 32 in2008.


Tire characteristics

This information describes the type of tirecord and the number of layers insidewall : and under tire tread ;.


Definition of terms for tires and loading

Tire ply composition and material usedDescribes the number of plies or the numberof layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tiretread and sidewall. These are made of steel,nylon, polyester and other materials.

BarMetric unit for tire pressure.14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and


heel

s an

d tir

es

100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of1 bar.

DOT (Department of Transportation)DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements ofthe United States Department ofTransportation.

Normal occupant weightThe number of occupants which the vehicleis designed for, multiplied by 68 kilograms(150 lb).

Uniform Tire Quality Grading StandardsA uniform standard to grade the quality oftires with regards to tread quality, tire tractionand temperature characteristics. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers using U.S.government testing procedures. The ratingsare molded into the sidewall of the tire.

Recommended tire pressureThe recommended tire pressure applies tothe tires mounted at the factory.The Tire and Loading Information placardcontains the recommended tire pressures forcold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for themaximum permissible vehicle speed.The tire pressure table contains therecommended pressures for cold tires forvarious operating conditions, i.e. differingload and speed conditions.

Increased vehicle weight due to optionalequipmentThis is the combined weight of all standardand optional equipment available for thevehicle, regardless of whether it is actuallyinstalled on the vehicle or not.

RimThis is the part of the wheel on which the tireis mounted.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weightrating. The actual load on an axle must neverexceed the gross axle weight rating. Thegross axle weight rating can be found on the

vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar onthe driver's side.

Speed ratingThe speed rating is part of the tireidentification. It specifies the speed range forwhich the tire is approved.

GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)The GTW is the weight of a trailer includingthe weight of the load, luggage, accessoriesetc. on the trailer.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)The gross vehicle weight includes the weightof the vehicle including fuel, tools, the sparewheel, accessories installed, occupants,luggage and the drawbar noseweight, ifapplicable. The gross vehicle weight must notexceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWRas specified on the vehicle identification plateon the B-pillar on the driver's side.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)The GVWR is the maximum permissible grossweight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight ofthe vehicle including all accessories,occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbarnoseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicleweight rating is specified on the vehicleidentification plate on the B-pillar on thedriver's side.

Maximum loaded vehicle weightThe maximum weight is the sum of:Rthe curb weight of the vehicleRthe weight of the accessoriesRthe load limitRthe weight of the factory installed optional

equipment

Kilopascal (kPa)Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPacorresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tirepressure is bar. There are 100 kilopascals(kPa) to 1 bar.


Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Load indexIn addition to the load-bearing index, the loadindex may also be imprinted on the sidewallof the tire. This specifies the load-bearingcapacity more precisely.

Curb weightThe weight of a vehicle with standardequipment including the maximum capacityof fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning system and optional equipmentif these are installed in the vehicle, but doesnot include passengers or luggage.

Maximum load ratingThe maximum tire load is the maximumpermissible weight in kilograms or lbs forwhich a tire is approved.

Maximum permissible tire pressureMaximum permissible tire pressure for onetire.

Maximum load on one tireMaximum load on one tire. This is calculatedby dividing the maximum axle load of one axleby two.

PSI (pounds per square inch)A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

Aspect ratioRelationship between tire height and tirewidth in percent.

Tire pressureThis is pressure inside the tire applying anoutward force to each square inch of the tire'ssurface. The tire pressure is specified inpounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should onlybe corrected when the tires are cold.

Cold tire pressureThe tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked without

direct sunlight on the tires for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has been driven for less than

1 mile (1.6 km).

TreadThe part of the tire that comes into contactwith the road.

BeadThe tire bead ensures that the tire sitssecurely on the wheel. There are several steelwires in the bead to prevent the tire fromcoming loose from the wheel rim.

SidewallThe part of the tire between the tread and thebead.

Weight of optional extrasThe combined weight of those optional extrasthat weigh more than the replaced standardparts and more than 2.3 kilograms (5 lbs).These optional extras, such as high-performance brakes, level control, a roof rackor a high-performance battery, are notincluded in the curb weight and the weight ofthe accessories.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)This is a unique identifier which can be usedby a tire manufacturer to identify tires, forexample for a product recall, and thus identifythe purchasers. The TIN is made up of themanufacturer's identity code, tire size, tiretype code and the manufacturing date.

Load bearing indexThe load bearing index (also load index) is acode that contains the maximum load bearingcapacity of a tire.


heel

s an

d tir

es

TractionTraction is the result of friction between thetires and the road surface.

TWR (Tongue Weight Rating)The TWR specifies the maximum permissibleweight that the ball coupling of the trailer towhitch can support.

Treadwear indicatorsNarrow bars (tread wear bars) that aredistributed over the tire tread. If the tire treadis level with the bars, the wear limit of á in(1.6 mm) has been reached.

Occupant distributionThe distribution of occupants in a vehicle attheir designated seating positions.

Total load limitRated cargo and luggage load plus68 kilograms (150 lb) multiplied by thenumber of seats in the vehicle.

Changing a wheel

Flat tireYou can find information on what to do in theevent of a flat tire in the "Breakdownassistance" section (Y page 381).Information on driving with MOExtended tiresin the event of a flat tire can be found under"MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatcharacteristics" (Y page 382).The "Breakdown assistance" section(Y page 381) contains information and noteson how to deal with a flat tire. Information ondriving with MOExtended tires in the event ofa flat tire can be found under "MOExtendedtires (tires with run-flat characteristics"(Y page 382).Vehicles with an emergency spare wheel: in the event of a flat tire, mount theemergency spare wheel according to thedescription under "Mounting a wheel"(Y page 422).

Rotating the wheels

G WARNINGInterchanging the front and rear wheels mayseverely impair the driving characteristics ifthe wheels or tires have different dimensions.The wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay also be damaged. There is a risk ofaccident.Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheelsand tires are of the same dimensions.

! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressuremonitor, electronic components arelocated in the wheel.Tire-mounting tools should not be usednear the valve. This could damage theelectronic components.Only have tires changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Always observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Mounting a wheel" section(Y page 422).The wear patterns on the front and rear tiresdiffer, depending on the operating conditions.Rotate the wheels before a clear wear patternhas formed on the tires. Front tires typicallywear more on the shoulders and the rear tiresin the center.If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, youcan rotate the wheels according to theintervals in the tire manufacturer's warrantybook in your vehicle documents. If this is notavailable, the tires should then be rotatedevery 3000 to 6000 miles (5000 to10,000 km), or earlier if the tire wear requiresthis. Do not change the direction of wheelrotation.Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel andthe brake disc thoroughly every time a wheelis interchanged. Check the tire pressure and,if necessary, restart the tire pressure losswarning system or the tire pressure monitor.

Changing a wheel 421

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Direction of rotationTires with a specified direction of rotationhave additional benefits, e.g. if there is a riskof hydroplaning. You will only gain thesebenefits if the correct direction of rotation isobserved.An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicatesits correct direction of rotation.

Storing wheelsStore wheels that are not being used in a cool,dry and preferably dark place. Protect thetires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

Cleaning the wheels

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components.Components damaged in this way may failunexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replacedimmediately.

Mounting a wheel

Preparing the vehicleX Vehicle with emergency spare wheel:

when mounting the emergency sparewheel in the event of a flat tire, follow theadditional notes on vehicle preparationunder "Flat tire" (Y page 381).

X Park the vehicle on firm, non-slippery andlevel ground.

X Unload heavy luggage.X Apply the electric parking brake manually.X Bring the front wheels into the straight-

ahead position.X Shift the transmission to position P.

X Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package:make sure that highway level is selected(Y page 209).

X Switch off the engine.X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove

the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the

driver's door.The on-board electronics have status 0,which is the same as the SmartKey havingbeen removed.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove theStart/Stop button from the ignition lock(Y page 158).

X If included in the vehicle equipment, takethe tire-change tool kit out of the vehicle.

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.

i Apart from certain country-specificvariations, vehicles are not equipped witha tire-change tool kit. For information onwhich tools are required to perform a wheelchange on your vehicle, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Necessary wheel-changing tools caninclude, for example:RJackRWheel chockRLug wrench

Securing the vehicle to prevent it fromrolling away

422 Changing a wheelW

heel

s an

d tir

es

If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock,it can be found in the tire-change tool kit(Y page 380).The folding wheel chock is an additionalsecuring measure to prevent the vehicle fromrolling away, for example when changing awheel.X Fold both plates upwards :.X Fold out lower plate ;.X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into

the openings in base plate =.

Securing the vehicle on level groundX On level ground: place chocks or other

suitable items under the front and rear ofthe wheel that is diagonally opposite thewheel you wish to change.

Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradientsX On light downhill gradients: place

chocks or other suitable items in front ofthe wheels of the front and rear axle.

Raising the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you do not position the jack correctly at theappropriate jacking point of the vehicle, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.There is a risk of injury.Only position the jack at the appropriatejacking point of the vehicle. The base of thejack must be positioned vertically, directlyunder the jacking point of the vehicle.

! AMG vehicles with "Minispare" emergency spare wheel: use the"Minispare" emergency spare wheel only on the rear axle. If you mount the"Minispare" emergency spare wheel on thefront axle, this could result in damage to thebrake system.If a tire on the front axle is defective, anintact wheel from the rear axle must firstbe replaced with the "Minispare"emergency spare wheel. The defectivewheel on the front axle can then bereplaced with the intact wheel from the rearaxle.Make sure to note the placard on the"Minispare" emergency spare wheel.

! The jack is designed exclusively forjacking up the vehicle at the jacking points.Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.

The following must be observed when raisingthe vehicle:Rto raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-

specific jack that has been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. If usedincorrectly, the jack could tip over with thevehicle raised.Rthe jack is designed only to raise and hold

the vehicle for a short time while a wheelis being changed. It is not suited forperforming maintenance work under thevehicle.Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill and

downhill slopes.


Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it fromrolling away by applying the parking brakeand inserting wheel chocks. Neverdisengage the parking brake while thevehicle is raised.Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and

non-slip surface. On a loose surface, alarge, load-bearing underlay must be used.On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlaymust be used, e.g. rubber mats.Rdo not use wooden blocks or similar

objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, thejack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restrictedheight.Rthe maximum clearance between the

underside of the tire and the ground mustbe 1.2 in (3 cm).Rnever place your hands and feet under the

raised vehicle.Rnever lie under the raised vehicle.Rnever start the engine when the vehicle is

raised.Rnever open or close a door or the tailgate

when the vehicle is raised.Rmake sure that no persons are present in

the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.

X Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts onthe wheel you wish to change by about onefull turn. Do not unscrew the boltscompletely.

The jacking points are located just behind thefront wheel housings and just in front of therear wheel housings (arrows).X Take the ratchet wrench out of the vehicle

tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut ofthe jack so that the letters AUF are visible.

; Jacking points= Jack? CrankX Position jack = at jacking point ;.

The alignment bolt on the jack must beinserted into the intended jacking pointhole.

424 Changing a wheelW

heel

s an

d tir

es

ExampleX Make sure the foot of the jack is directly

beneath the jacking point.X Turn ratchet wrench ? until jack = sits

completely on jacking point ; and thebase of the jack lies evenly on the ground.

X Turn ratchet wrench ? until the tire israised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from theground.

Removing a wheel! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a

dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hubthreads could otherwise be damaged whenyou screw them in.

X Unscrew the uppermost wheel boltcompletely.

X Screw alignment bolt : into the threadinstead of the wheel bolt.

X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.X Remove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel

G WARNINGOiled or greased wheel bolts or damagedwheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheelbolts to come loose. As a result, you couldlose a wheel while driving. There is a risk ofaccident.Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the eventof damage to the threads, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop immediately. Have thedamaged wheel bolts or hub threadsreplaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

G WARNINGIf you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is raised, the jack could tipover. There is a risk of injury.Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is on the ground.

! To prevent damage to the paintwork, holdthe wheel securely against the wheel hubwhile screwing in the first wheel bolt.

Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 421).Only use wheel bolts that have been designedfor the wheel and the vehicle. For safetyreasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends thatyou only use wheel bolts which have beenapproved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and therespective wheel.

! Always use wheel bolts ; to mount the"Minispare" emergency spare wheel. Usingother wheel bolts to mount the "Minispare"emergency spare wheel could damage thebrake system.


Whe

els

and

tires

Z

: Wheel bolts for all wheels supplied by thefactory

; Wheel bolts for the "Minispare"emergency spare wheel

X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contactsurfaces.

X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto thealignment bolt and push it on.

X Tighten the wheel bolts until they arefinger-tight.

X Unscrew the alignment bolt.X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-

tight.

Lowering the vehicle

G WARNINGThe wheels could work loose if the wheel nutsand bolts are not tightened to the specifiedtightening torque. There is a risk of accident.Have the tightening torque immediatelychecked at a qualified specialist workshopafter a wheel is changed.

X Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagonnut of the jack so that the letters AB arevisible.

X Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle isonce again standing firmly on the ground.

X Place the jack to one side.X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a

crosswise pattern in the sequenceindicated (: to A). The tightening torquemust be 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).

X Turn the jack back to its initial position.X Stow the jack and the rest of the tire-

change tool kit in the stowage well underthe cargo compartment floor again.

X Check the tire pressure of the newlyinstalled wheel and adjust it if necessary.Observe the recommended tire pressure(Y page 402).

i Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: allwheels mounted must be equipped withfunctioning sensors.

Wheel and tire combinations

General notes! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz

recommends that you only use tires andwheels which have been approved byMercedes-Benz specifically for yourvehicle.

426 Wheel and tire combinationsW

heel

s an

d tir

es

These tires have been specially adapted foruse with the control systems, such as ABSor ESP®, and are marked as follows:RMO = Mercedes-Benz OriginalRMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended

(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only

certain AMG tires)Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tiresmay only be used on wheels that have beenspecifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.Only use tires, wheels or accessoriestested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.Certain characteristics, e.g. handling,vehicle noise emissions or fuelconsumption, may otherwise be adverselyaffected. In addition, when driving with aload, tire dimension variations could causethe tires to come into contact with thebodywork and axle components. This couldresult in damage to the tires or the vehicle.Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability fordamage resulting from the use of tires,wheels or accessories other than thosetested and approved.Information on tires, wheels and approvedcombinations can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop.

! Retreaded tires are neither tested norrecommended by Mercedes-Benz, sinceprevious damage cannot always bedetected on retreaded tires. As a result,Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehiclesafety if retreaded tires are mounted. Donot mount used tires if you have noinformation about their previous usage.

Overview of abbreviations used in thefollowing tire tables:RBA: both axlesRFA: front axleRRA: rear axle

The recommended pressures for variousoperating conditions can be found:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard

with the recommended tire pressures onthe B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the inside of

the fuel filler flapObserve the notes on recommended tirepressures under various operating conditions(Y page 402).Check tire pressures regularly, and only whenthe tires are cold. Comply with themaintenance recommendations of the tiremanufacturer in the vehicle document wallet.Notes on the vehicle equipment – alwaysequip the vehicle with:Rtires of the same size on a given axle (left/

right)Rthe same type of tires at a given time

(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtendedtires)

Vehicles with MOExtended tires are notequipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Itis therefore recommended that youadditionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFITkit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kitmay be obtained from a qualified specialistworkshop.

i Not all wheel and tire combinations areavailable at the factory for all countries.

i On the following pages, you can findinformation on approved wheel rims andtire sizes for equipping your vehicle withwinter tires. Winter tires are not availableat the factory as standard equipment oroptional extras.If you would like to equip your vehicle withapproved winter tires, you may also, incertain circumstances, require rims of theappropriate size. The sizes of the approvedwinter tires may deviate from that of thestandard tires. This is dependent on themodel and the equipment installed at thefactory.

Wheel and tire combinations 427

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

The tires and wheel rims, as well as furtherinformation, can be obtained at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.


heel

s an

d tir

es

Tires

ML 350 BlueEFFICIENCY

All-weather tiresR 18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 255/55 R 18 105 H M+S BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.21 in (56 mm)

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W BA: 8,5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2,44 in (62 mm)

BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W MOExtended3 BA: 8,5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2,44 in (62 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.21 in (56 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+SMOExtended3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.21 in (56 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XLM+S4 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+SMOExtended3, 4 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S4 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)


3 MOExtended tires (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an activated tire pressureloss warning system or tire pressure monitor.

4 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".


Whe

els

and

tires

Z

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels



Winter tiresR 18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 255/55 R 18 105 H M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.21 in (56 mm)

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels



BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.21 in (56 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+SiMOExtended3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.21 in (56 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+Si4 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XLM+SiMOExtended3, 4

BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm)

4 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".3 MOExtended tires (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an activated tire pressure

loss warning system or tire pressure monitor.


heel

s an

d tir

es

ML 350 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY


Tires Alloy wheels


R 19

Tires Alloy wheels









R 20

Tires Alloy wheels






Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Winter tiresR 18

Tires Alloy wheels


R 19

Tires Alloy wheels








ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC


Tires Alloy wheels





heel

s an

d tir

es

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels









R 20

Tires Alloy wheels



Winter tiresR 18

Tires Alloy wheels





Whe

els

and

tires

Z

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels










Tires Alloy wheels










heel

s an

d tir

es

Tires Alloy wheels



R 20

Tires Alloy wheels



Winter tiresR 19

Tires Alloy wheels








4 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".3 MOExtended tires (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an activated tire pressure

loss warning system or tire pressure monitor.


Whe

els

and

tires

Z

ML 63 AMG 4MATIC

Summer tiresR 20

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 265/45 ZR 20 108 Y XL4 BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)

R 21

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 295/35 ZR 21 107 Y XL4 BA: 10.0 J x 21 H2Wheel offset: 2.21 in (56 mm)

Winter tiresR 20

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 255/45 R 20 105 V XL M+Si BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)

R 21

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 295/35 R 21 107 V XL M+Si4 BA: 10.0 J x 21 H2Wheel offset: 2.21 in (56 mm)

Emergency spare wheel


G WARNINGThe wheel or tire size as well as the tire typeof the spare wheel or emergency spare wheeland the wheel to be replaced may differ.Mounting an emergency spare wheel mayseverely impair the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.

To avoid hazardous situations:Radapt your driving style accordingly and

drive carefully.Rnever mount more than one spare wheel or

emergency spare wheel that differs in size.Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency spare

wheel of a different size briefly.Rdo not switch ESP® off.Rhave a spare wheel or emergency spare

wheel of a different size replaced at thenearest qualified specialist workshop.Observe that the wheel and tire dimensionsas well as the tire type must be correct.


436 Emergency spare wheelW

heel

s an

d tir

es

! AMG vehicles with "Minispare" emergency spare wheel: use the"Minispare" emergency spare wheel only on the rear axle. If you mount the"Minispare" emergency spare wheel on thefront axle, this could result in damage to thebrake system.If a tire on the front axle is defective, anintact wheel from the rear axle must firstbe replaced with the "Minispare"emergency spare wheel. The defectivewheel on the front axle can then bereplaced with the intact wheel from the rearaxle.Make sure to note the placard on the"Minispare" emergency spare wheel.

When using an emergency spare wheel orspare wheel of a different size, you must notexceed the maximum speed of 50 mph(80 km/h).Snow chains must not be mounted onemergency spare wheels.

General notesMounting the emergency spare wheel isdescribed under "Mounting a wheel"(Y page 422).You should regularly check the pressure ofthe emergency spare wheel, particularly priorto long trips, and correct the pressure asnecessary (Y page 402). The applicable valuecan be found on the wheel or under"Technical data" (Y page 439).An emergency spare wheel may also bemounted against the direction of rotation.Observe the time restriction on use as well asthe speed limitation specified on theemergency spare wheel.Replace the tires after six years at the latest,regardless of wear. This also applies to theemergency spare wheel.

Removing the emergency spare wheel

Emergency spare wheel (example: vehicle withoutlockable cargo compartment floor): "Minispare" emergency spare wheel; Emergency spare wheel retainer

The "Minispare" emergency spare wheel canbe found in the stowage well under the cargocompartment floor.X Lift the cargo compartment floor up

(Y page 342).X Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: remove

the ball coupling stowage tray(Y page 255).

X Vehicles without a lockable cargo compartment floor: turn emergencyspare wheel retainer ; counter-clockwiseand remove it.

X Remove "Minispare" emergency sparewheel :.

Vehicles with a lockable cargo compartment floor: "Minispare" emergency spare wheel; Stowage well

Emergency spare wheel 437

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

X Vehicles with a lockable cargo compartment floor: remove the contentsof stowage tray ;.

X Turn the central retaining screw of stowagetray ; and "Minispare" emergency sparewheel : counter-clockwise and remove it.

X Remove stowage well ;.X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare

wheel :.

In vehicles with a Bang & Olufsen soundsystem, the "Minispare" emergency sparewheel is stored in a bag. The bag is securedto the cargo tie-down rings in the cargocompartment.X To remove the emergency spare

wheel: open the tailgate.X Loosen tensioning straps ; on both sides.X Unhook retaining spring hooks : and =

on tensioning straps ; from the cargo tie-down rings.

X Remove the bag with the "Minispare"emergency spare wheel.

X Open the bag and remove the "Minispare"emergency spare wheel.

X To stow the emergency spare wheel:place the "Minispare" emergency sparewheel in the bag and close the bag.

X Lay the bag with the "Minispare"emergency spare wheel in the cargocompartment, with the carrying strap to therear.

X Hook retaining spring hooks : and = ontensioning straps ; in the cargo tie-downrings.

X Tighten tensioning straps ; on both sides.

For further information on changing andmounting a wheel, see (Y page 422).

438 Emergency spare wheelW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Technical data


"Minispare" emergency spare wheel

Tires Alloy wheels

T 155/90 R18 113 MTire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi)

4.0 B x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.58 in (40 mm)



Tires Alloy wheels





Tires Alloy wheels





Tires Alloy wheels



ML 63 AMG


Tires Alloy wheels



Emergency spare wheel 439

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

440

Useful information ............................ 442Information regarding technicaldata .................................................... 442Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... 442Warranty ............................................ 442Identification plates ......................... 443Service products and filling capaci-ties ..................................................... 444Vehicle data ...................................... 452Trailer tow hitch ................................ 454

441

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Useful information



Information regarding technical data

i The data stated here specifically refers toa vehicle with standard equipment. Consultan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center forthe data for all vehicle variants and trimlevels.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

G WARNINGDriving safety may be impaired if non-approved parts, tires and wheels or safety-relevant accessories are used.This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. Thiscould cause you to lose control of your vehicleand cause an accident.For this reason, Mercedes-Benz recommendsthat you use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts orparts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheelsand accessories that have been specificallyapproved for your vehicle.

H Environmental noteDaimler AG also supplies reconditioned majorassemblies and parts which are of the samequality as new parts. They are covered by thesame Limited Warranty entitlements as newparts.

! Air bags and Emergency TensioningDevices, as well as control units andsensors for these restraint systems, may beinstalled in the following areas of yourvehicle:RdoorsRdoor pillarsRdoor sillsRseatsRcockpitRinstrument clusterRcenter consoleDo not install accessories such as audiosystems in these areas. Do not carry outrepairs or welding. You could impair theoperating efficiency of the restraintsystems.Have aftermarket accessories installed ata qualified specialist workshop.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject tostrict quality control. Each part has beenspecially developed, manufactured orselected for Mercedes-Benz vehicles andfine-tuned for them. Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should therefore be used.More than 300,000 different genuineMercedes-Benz parts are available forMercedes-Benz models.All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centersmaintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benzparts for necessary service and repair work.In addition, strategically located partsdelivery centers provide quick and reliableparts service.Always specify the vehicle identificationnumber (VIN) (Y page 443) and the enginenumber (Y page 444) when ordering genuineMercedes-Benz parts.

Warranty

Your vehicle is covered under the terms of thewarranties printed in the Service andWarranty Information booklet.

442 WarrantyTe

chni

cal d

ata

Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center willreplace and repair all factory-installed partsin accordance with the following warrantyterms and conditions:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission Systems WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,

Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,Rhode Island and Vermont EmissionControl System WarrantyRState warranty enforcement laws (Lemon

Laws)Replacement parts and accessories arecovered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts andAccessories warranties. These are availableat any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i If you lose the Service and WarrantyInformation booklet, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center to arrange areplacement. It will be mailed to you.

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate withvehicle identification number (VIN)

X Open the driver's door.You will see vehicle identification plate :.

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only); Paint code= VIN

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only); Paint code= VIN

i The data shown on the vehicleidentification plate is used only as anexample. This data is different for everyvehicle and can deviate from the datashown here. You can find the dataapplicable to your vehicle on the vehicle'sidentification plate.

Identification plates 443

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Z

VIN

X Open the front right-hand door.X Open cover : in the direction of the arrow

and remove it.You will see the VIN.

The VIN can also be found in the followinglocations:Ron the lower edge of the windshield

(Y page 444)Ron the vehicle identification plate

(Y page 443)

Engine number

: Emission control information plate,including the certification of both federaland Californian emissions standards

; Engine number (stamped into thecrankcase)

= VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)

Service products and fillingcapacities


G WARNINGService products may be poisonous andhazardous to health. There is a risk of injury.Comply with instructions on the use, storageand disposal of service products on the labelsof the respective original containers. Alwaysstore service products sealed in their originalcontainers. Always keep service products outof the reach of children.

H Environmental noteDispose of service products in anenvironmentally responsible manner.

Service products include the following:Rfuels (e.g. gasoline, diesel)Rexhaust gas aftertreatment additives, e.g.

DEFRlubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)RcoolantRbrake fluidRwindshield washer fluidRclimate control system refrigerantComply with all valid regulations with respectto handling, storing, and disposing of servicefluids.Components and service products must bematched. You should therefore only useproducts that have been tested and approvedby Mercedes-Benz.Information on tested and approved productscan be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.You can recognize service products approvedby Mercedes-Benz by the followinginscription on the containers:RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)

444 Service products and filling capacitiesTe

chni

cal d

ata

http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com

Other designations or recommendationsindicate a level of quality or a specification inaccordance with an MB Sheet number (e.g.MB 229.5). They have not necessarily beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

Fuel


G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire andexplosion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediately





Tank capacity

Model Totalcapacity

All models 24.6 US gal(93.0 l)

Model Of whichreserve

All models Approx.3.2 US gal

(12.0 l)

ML 63 AMG Approx.3.7 US gal

(14.0 l)

Gasoline

Fuel grade! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a

gasoline engine. Do not switch on theignition if you accidentally refuel with thewrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enterthe fuel system. Even small amounts of thewrong fuel could result in damage to thefuel system and the engine. The repaircosts are high. Notify a qualified specialistworkshop and have the fuel tank and fuellines drained completely.

! You should only refuel with unleadedpremium-grade gasoline as this avoidsdamaging the catalytic converter.If engine running problems are apparent,have the cause checked immediately andrepaired. Excess unburned fuel canotherwise enter the catalytic converter,leading to overheating and possiblycausing a fire.

! To ensure the longevity and fullperformance of the engine, only premium-grade unleaded gasoline may be used.

Service products and filling capacities 445

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Z

If there is no premium-grade unleadedgasoline available and regular unleadedgasoline must be used, please observe thefollowing precautions:Ronly fill the fuel tank to half full with

regular unleaded gasoline and fill the restwith premium-grade unleaded gasolineas soon as possible.Rdo not drive at the maximum speed.Ravoid sudden acceleration.Rif the vehicle is carrying a light load, e.g.

two passengers without luggage, do notallow the engine to rev above 3000 rpm.Rif the vehicle is fully loaded or is being

operated in mountainous terrain, do notdepress the accelerator pedal furtherthan Ô of the pedal travel.

Only refuel using premium-grade unleadedgasoline with a minimum octane rating of 91.Reformulated Gasoline (RFG) and/orunleaded gasoline with additives can be used.The concentration of additives in the fuel,however, must not exceed 10%, e.g.:REthanolRTAMERETBERIPARTBAFor MTBE, the concentration should notexceed 15%.The concentration of methanol in gasoline,including other additives, must not exceed3%.Using mixtures of methanol and ethanol is notpermitted. Gasohol, a mixture of 10% ethanoland 90% unleaded gasoline, may be used.All of these blends must fulfill the fuelrequirements, e.g.:Rknock resistanceRboiling pointRvapor pressureYou will usually find information about the fuelgrade on the pump. If you cannot find the

label on the pump, ask the staff forassistance.

i For further information, consult aqualified specialist workshop or on theInternet at http://www.mbusa.com (USAonly).

Information on refueling (Y page 174).

Additives! Operating the engine with fuel additives

can increase wear and tear to the fuelsystem high-pressure pump and lead tocontamination of the entire fuel system.The repair costs are high. This does notinclude additives for the removal andprevention of residue buildup. gasolinemust only be mixed with additivesrecommended by Mercedes-Benz. Moreinformation about recommended additivescan be obtained from any authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

One of the main problems of poor fuel qualityis the forming of deposits that are createdduring the gasoline combustion process.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you usebranded fuels that have additives.If you use fuels without these additives overa longer period of time, carbon deposits maybuild up. These deposits form at the inletvalves and in the combustion chamber inparticular.This could lead to engine problems, e.g.:Rlonger engine warm-up phaseRuneven idleRengine noiseRmisfiringRloss of powerCarbon deposits may form if the availabilityof gasoline with relevant additives isinsufficient (in certain regions). In this case,Mercedes-Benz recommends additivesapproved for use in Mercedes-Benz vehicles;see http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.For a list of approved products, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Comply


chni

cal d

ata



with the instructions for use on the productlabel.Do not mix other fuel additives with fuel. Thiscauses unnecessary costs and could damagethe engine.

Diesel

Fuel gradeG WARNINGIf you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flashpoint is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.When the engine is running, exhaust systemcomponents could overheat without beingnoticed. There is a risk of fire.Never refuel with gasoline. Never mix gasolinewith diesel fuel.

! Only use commercially available vehicularULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL FUEL (ULSD,15 ppm maximum sulfur content) thatmeets the ASTM D975 standard. If you donot refuel with ULSD, you may damage theBlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatmentsystem of the vehicle.

! Do not use gasoline to refuel vehicles witha diesel engine. Do not mix diesel fuel withgasoline, kerosene or paraffin. This mayotherwise result in damage to the fuelsystem and engine.

You will usually find information about the fuelgrade on the pump. If you cannot find thelabel on the pump, ask the staff forassistance.

i For further information, consult aqualified specialist workshop or on theInternet at http://www.mbusa.com (USAonly).

Information on refueling (Y page 174).

Bio-diesel - FAME (fatty acid methyl ester)Mercedes-Benz USA approves the use of bio-diesel B5 for all BlueTEC diesel engines. Theconcentration of bio-diesel in the ULSD maynot exceed 5% by volume.

Pure bio-diesel and diesel fuel with a higherpercentage of bio-diesel, such as B20, candamage the engine and the fuel system. Forthis reason, they are not approved.For more information, consult the gas stationstaff. The bio-diesel B5 label on the gasolinepump must clearly state that the standard forULSD has been fulfilled. If the label is notclear, do not refuel the vehicle.Do not refuel your vehicle with fuels unlessthey have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.Information on refueling (Y page 174).

Low outside temperaturesi Diesel fuel with improved cold flow

properties is available during the wintermonths. Further information about fuelproperties can be obtained from oilcompanies, e.g. at gas stations.

Flow improverTo improve the low-temperature resistance ofdiesel fuel, a flow improver can be attached.The effectiveness of a flow improver is notguaranteed for every fuel.Only use flow improvers tested and approvedby Mercedes-Benz. During use, pleaseobserve the information on operation.Correct dosage and sufficient mixing aredecisive in improving low-temperatureresistance with the flow improver.Overdosage can potentially even decreaselow-temperature resistance and musttherefore be avoided. Follow themanufacturer's guidelines on dosage.Mix the additive into the diesel in good time,before the flow characteristics of the dieselbecome insufficient. Otherwise, malfunctionscan arise through heating the fuel system,e.g. through parking in a heated garage.More information about recommended flowimprovers can be obtained from any qualifiedspecialist workshop.


Tech

nica

l dat

a

Z


Flexible Fuel vehicles

Important safety notesG WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire andexplosion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediately





Flexible Fuel vehicles can be refueled with thefollowing fuel types:Rpremium-grade unleaded gasolineRE85 fuelRa mixture of E85 fuel and premium-grade

unleaded gasoline

i Flexible Fuel vehicles can be recognizedby the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on theinside of the fuel filler flap.

Fuel consumptionThe energy content of E85 fuel is less thanthat of the same amount of premium-gradegasoline. The amount of fuel consumed whenoperating the vehicle with E85 fuel istherefore higher than with premium-gradegasoline.

MaintenanceInform your authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter that you are operating or haveoperated the vehicle with E85 fuel.

Low outside temperaturesIf the outside temperature is below 32 ‡(0 †) the starting procedure can takenoticeably longer when operating with E85fuel.E85 fuel is not suitable for use at outsidetemperatures under -4 ‡ (-20 †).

DEF

Important safety notesComply with the important safety notes forservice products when handling DEF(Y page 444).DEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaustgas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is:Rnot poisonousRcolorless and odorlessRnot flammableWhen you open the DEF container, smallamounts of ammonia vapor may be released.Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and areparticularly irritating to the skin, to mucousmembranes and to the eyes. You mayexperience a burning sensation in your eyes,nose and throat. Coughing and watering ofthe eyes are possible.Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEFtank only in well-ventilated areas.


chni

cal d

ata

Low outside temperaturesDEF freezes at a temperature ofapproximately 12 ‡ (-11 †). The vehicle isdelivered from the factory equipped with aDEF preheating system. Winter operation canthus be guaranteed even at temperaturesbelow 12 ‡ (-11 †).

Additives! Only use DEF in accordance with ISO

22241. Do not use additives with DEF anddo not dilute DEF with water. This maydestroy the BlueTEC exhaust gasaftertreatment system.

Purity! Impurities in DEF (e.g. due to other

service products, cleaning agents or dust)lead to:Rincreased emission valuesRdamage to the catalytic converterRengine damageRmalfunctions in the BlueTEC exhaust gas

aftertreatment systemAssuring the purity of DEF is particularlyimportant with respect to avoidingmalfunctions in the BlueTEC exhaust gasaftertreatment system.If DEF is pumped out of the DEF tank, e.g.during repair work, it must not be returned tothe tank. The purity of the fluid can no longerbe guaranteed.

Filling capacities

Model Total capacity


7.3 US gal(27.5 l)

Engine oil

General notes! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a

specification other than is necessary tofulfill the prescribed service intervals. Donot change the engine oil or oil filter inorder to achieve longer replacementintervals than those prescribed. You couldotherwise cause engine damage or damageto the exhaust gas aftertreatment.Follow the instructions in the serviceinterval display regarding the oil change.Otherwise, you may damage the engine andthe exhaust gas aftertreatment.

Comply with the important safety notes forservice products when handling engine oil(Y page 444).The engine oils are matched to theperformance of Mercedes-Benz engines andservice intervals. You should therefore onlyuse engine oils and oil filters that areapproved for vehicles with maintenancesystems.For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,consult an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter. Or visit the websitehttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.The table shows which engine oils have beenapproved for your vehicle.

Model Enginemodel

MBApproval

ML 350 BlueEFFICIENCYML 350 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY

276 229.5


278 229.5

ML 63 AMG 157 229.5


642 228.51,229.31,229.51


Tech

nica

l dat

a

Z


Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oilsfor AMG vehicles.

i MB approval is indicated on the oilcontainers.

Filling capacitiesThe following values refer to an oil changeincluding the oil filter.

Model Capacity


7.4 US qt (7.0 l)


9.0 US qt (8.5 l)

ML 63 AMG Without external oilcooler: 9.0 US qt

(8.5 l)


8.5 US qt (8.0 l)

Additives! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.

This could damage the engine.

Engine oil viscosity

Viscosity describes the flow characteristicsof a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,this means that it is thick; a low viscositymeans that it is thin.

Select an engine oil with an SAE (viscosity)classification suitable for the prevailingoutside temperatures. The table shows youwhich SAE classifications are to be used. Thelow-temperature characteristics of engineoils can deteriorate significantly, e.g. as aresult of aging, soot and fuel deposits. It istherefore strongly recommended that youcarry out regular oil changes using anapproved engine oil with the appropriate SAEclassification.

Brake fluid

G WARNINGThe brake fluid constantly absorbs moisturefrom the air. This lowers the boiling point ofthe brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brakefluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in thebrake system when the brakes are appliedhard. This would impair braking efficiency.There is a risk of an accident.You should have the brake fluid renewed atthe specified intervals.

Comply with the important safety notes forservice products when handling brake fluid(Y page 444).The brake fluid change intervals can be foundin the Maintenance Booklet.Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB Approval 331.0.Information about approved brake fluid canbe obtained at any qualified specialistworkshop or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced ata qualified specialist workshop and havethis confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.


chni

cal d

ata


Coolant


G WARNINGIf antifreeze comes into contact with hotcomponents in the engine compartment, itmay ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Let the engine cool down before you addantifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is notspilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughlyclean the antifreeze from components beforestarting the engine.

! Only add coolant that has been premixedwith the desired antifreeze protection. Youcould otherwise damage the engine.Further information on coolants can befound in the Mercedes-Benz Specificationsfor Service Products, MB Specifications forService Products 310.1, e.g. on theInternet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Orcontact a qualified specialist workshop.

! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,even in countries where high temperaturesprevail.Otherwise, the engine cooling system is notsufficiently protected from corrosion andoverheating.

Comply with the important safety precautionsfor service products when handling coolant(Y page 444).The coolant is a mixture of water andantifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performsthe following tasks:Rcorrosion protectionRantifreeze protectionRraising the boiling pointIf the coolant has antifreeze protection downto -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of thecoolant during operation is approximately266 ‡ (130 †).

The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitorconcentration in the engine cooling systemshould:Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine

cooling system against freezing down toapproximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection

down to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heatwill not be dissipated as effectively.

If the vehicle has lost coolant, add equalamounts of water and antifreeze/corrosioninhibitor.Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate inaccordance with MB Specifications forService Products 310.1.The coolant is checked with everymaintenance interval at a qualified specialistworkshop.

i When the vehicle is first delivered, it isfilled with a coolant mixture that ensuresadequate antifreeze and corrosionprotection.

Filling capacities

Model Capacity


Approx. 11.1 US qt(10.5 l)



ML 63 AMG Approx. 12.4 US qt(11.7 l)



i Use MB 325.0 or MB 326.0 corrosioninhibitor/antifreeze.


Tech

nica

l dat

a

Z


Windshield washer system andheadlamp cleaning system


G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate is highlyflammable. If it comes into contact with hotengine components or the exhaust system itcould ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washerconcentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

! Only use washer fluid that is suitable forplastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit orMB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluidcould damage the plastic lenses of theheadlamps.

! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water tothe washer fluid container. Otherwise, thelevel sensor may be damaged.

! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFitwasher fluid should be mixed together. Thespray nozzles may otherwise becomeblocked.

Comply with the important safety notes forservice products when handling washer fluid(Y page 444).At temperatures above freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture

of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.MB SummerFit.

Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.

At temperatures below freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture

of water and washer fluid, e.g. MBWinterFit.

Adapt the mixing ratio to the outsidetemperature.RDown to 14 ‡ (Ò10 †): mix 1 part MB

WinterFit to 2 parts water.RDown to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †): mix 1 part MB

WinterFit to 1 part water.RDown to Ò20.2 ‡ (Ò29 †): mix 2 parts MB

WinterFit to 1 part water.

i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MBSummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washerfluid all year round.

Filling capacities

Model Capacity

All models (except for AMG vehicles)

5.5 US qt (5.2 l)

AMG vehicles 6.3 US qt (6.0 l)

Vehicle data

General notesPlease note that for the specified vehicledata:RThe heights specified may vary as a result

of:- tires- load- condition of the suspension- optional equipment

Observe the information relating to levelcontrol:RAIRMATIC package (Y page 210)RON&OFFROAD package (Y page 204)

452 Vehicle dataTe

chni

cal d

ata

Dimensions and weights

Models with: :Openingheight

;

Max.headroom

Steel suspension

86.4 in(2195 mm)

78.2 in(1987 mm)

AIRMATIC package

84.3 in -87.2 in

(2140 mm -2215 mm)

76.0 in -79.0 in

(1931 mm -2006 mm)

ON&OFFROAD package

84.3 in -88.4 in

(2140 mm -2245 mm)

76.0 in -80.2 in

(1931 mm -2036 mm)

:Openingheight

;

Max.headroom

AMG vehicles 84.6 in -86.9 in

(2148 mm -2208 mm)

76.3 in -78.7 in

(1938 mm -1998 mm)

All models (except forAMG vehicles)

Vehicle width including exterior mirrors

84.3 in(2141 mm)

Vehicle height(steel suspension)

70.7 in(1796 mm)

All models (except forAMG vehicles)

Maximum vehicle height (AIRMATIC package)

71.6 in(1818 mm)

Maximum vehicle height (ON&OFFROAD package)

72.8 in(1848 mm)

Minimum vehicle height (highway driving level)

69.2 in(1758 mm)

Wheelbase 114.8 in(2915 mm)

Maximum ground clearance (AIRMATIC package)

10.0 in(255 mm)

Maximum ground clearance (ON&OFFROAD package)

11.2 in(285 mm)

Minimum ground clearance(AIRMATIC package)(ON&OFFROAD package)

7.1 in(180 mm)

Ground clearance(steel suspension)

8.0 in(202 mm)

Turning radius 38.7 ft(11.80 m)

Maximum roof load 220 lb(100 kg)

ML 350 BlueEFFICIENCYML 350 4MATICBlueEFFICIENCYML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC

Vehicle length 189.1 in(4804 mm)

Vehicle data 453

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Z

ML 550 4MATICBlueEFFICIENCY


ML 63 AMG


Vehicle width including exterior mirrors

84.3 in(2141 mm)

Maximum vehicle height 71.3 in(1812 mm)

Minimum vehicle height 69.0 in(1752 mm)

Wheelbase 114.8 in(2915 mm)

Maximum ground clearance

9.1 in(231 mm)

Minimum ground clearance

6.7 in(171 mm)

Turning radius 38.7 ft(11.80 m)

Maximum roof load 220 lb(100 kg)

Trailer tow hitch

Mounting dimensions! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,

changes to the cooling system and drivetrain may be necessary, depending on thevehicle type.If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,observe the anchorage points on thechassis frame.

Anchorage points for the trailer tow hitch(example): Anchorage points; Rear axle center line

454 Trailer tow hitchTe

chni

cal d

ata

Trailer loads

Trailer loads, trailer drawbar noseweights and axle loadsMissing values were not available at time of going to print.

All models (except AMG vehicles andML 350 BlueEFFICIENCY)

Permissible trailer load, unbraked

Permissible trailer load, braked (at a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 12% from a standstill)

7198 lbs (3265 kg)

Maximum drawbar noseweight (the drawbar noseweight is not included in the trailer load)

575 lbs (261 kg)

Permissible rear axle load when towing a trailer

3527 lbs (1600 kg)For model ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC:

3637 lbs (1650 kg)


Permissible trailer load, unbraked


6613 lbs (3000 kg)


529 lbs (240 kg)


3527 lbs (1600 kg)

ML 63 AMG

Permissible trailer load, unbraked 1653 lbs (750 kg)


7198 lbs (3265 kg)

Trailer tow hitch 455

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Z

ML 63 AMG


575 lbs (261 kg)


3637 lbs (1650 kg)

Ball position

Ball position of the ball coupling

When choosing a ball coupling, thedimensions stated in the illustration must notbe exceeded.

456 Trailer tow hitchTe

chni

cal d

ata

Publication detailsInternet

Further information about Mercedes-Benzvehicles and about Daimler AG can be foundon the following websiteshttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only)http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canadaonly)

Editorial office

You are welcome to forward any queries orsuggestions you may have regarding thisOperator's Manual to the technicaldocumentation team at the followingaddress:Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service,70546 Stuttgart, Germany©Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translatedor otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,without written permission of Daimler AG.

As at 10.05.2012


http://www.mercedes-benz.ca

Order no. 6515 0442 13 Part no. 166 584 86 81 Edition B 2013

É1665848681QËÍ1665848681

Nur für internen Gebrauch / For internal use only

Documents

M-Class Operator's Manual · Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz Before you first drive off, read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with your vehicle